Mo MP9000

Operating Instructions
About This Machine
Getting Started
Entering Text
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Laser Safety:
This machine is considered a class 1 laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine contains four
AlGaAs laser diodes, 10-milliwatt, 770-810 nanometer wavelength for each emitter. Direct (or indirect
reflected ) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and
interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
The following label is attached on the internal cover that is revealed when the front cover is opened.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before reading this manual. (For details, see p.8 Machine Type.)
Type 1: 90 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" 11"K)
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
For good copy quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier.
The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.
Power Source
220 - 240V, 50/60Hz, 16A
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source.
See Power Connection, Troubleshooting.
Manuals for This Machine

Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
About This Machine

Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
General Settings Guide
Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering e-mail addresses and, user codes. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect the machine.
Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, staples, and other consumables.
Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered, or
prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
Copy/ Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to
this manual for explanations on how to place originals.
Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
Other manuals
Safety Information
Quick Reference Copy Guide
Quick Reference Printer Guide
Quick Reference Scanner Guide
PostScript3 Supplement
UNIX Supplement
Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
Auto Document Link Guide
Note
Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the

manuals as PDF files.
For UNIX Supplement, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
PostScript3 Supplement and UNIX Supplement include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name
General name
DeskTopBinder Lite *1 and DeskTopBinder Professional
DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter EX Professional *1 and ScanRouter EX En- the ScanRouter delivery software

terprise *1
*1
ii
Optional
What You Can Do with This Machine

This section introduces the features of this machine.
Note
For details about options, see Options.
Reference
p.11 Options
Copier, Printer, and Scanner Functions

This machine provides copier, printer (optional), and scanner (optional) functions.
APF018S
You can make copies of originals. With a finisher (optional), you can sort and
staple copies. See Copy/Document Server Reference.
You can print documents created in applications. See Printer Reference.
You can print documents from Windows 95/98/Me (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows
2000 (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows XP/Server 2003 (TCP/IP, IPP), Windows NT
4.0 (TCP/IP, IPP), NetWare, UNIX (TCP/IP), and Macintosh (AppleTalk) environments because the machine supports all these (multi-protocol).
You can scan originals and send scan files to a computer. See Scanner Reference.
You can scan originals in full colour using the scanner function.
iii
Utilizing Stored Documents

You can store files of originals scanned by this machine, or files sent from other
computers, onto the hard disk of the machine. You can print the stored documents, as well as change print settings and print multiple documents (Document
Server).
APF019S
With DeskTopBinder, you can search, check, print and delete stored documents from your computer.
You can also retrieve stored documents scanned in scanner mode.
You can retrieve documents scanned in copier mode, if the Printer/Scanner
unit is installed.
For details, see Scanner Reference.
With File Format Converter (optional), you can even download documents
stored in copy and printer functions to your computer. See Network Guide.
For more information about the machine's settings, see Network Settings,
General Settings Guide.
For more information about Document Server in printer mode, see Saving
and Printing Using the Document Server, Printer Reference.
For more information about Document Server in scanner mode, see Storing
Files Using the Scanner Function, Scanner Reference.
For more information about Document Server, see Storing Originals in the
Document Server, Copy/Document Server Reference.
For more information about DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder manuals.
iv
Connecting Two Machines for Copying

You can connect two machines together with Copy Connector (optional). When
you set up a copy job on one machine (the main machine), data is transferred to
the other (the sub-machine) so that copies can be made on both machines simultaneously (Connect Copy).
APG005S
You can complete large volume copy runs in shorter time. See Connect
Copy, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Even if one machine runs out of paper, or stops because of a paper jam, the
other machine can still continue to finish the job. See Connect Copy,
Copy/Document Server Reference.
Using the Scanner in a Network Environment

You can use a scanner over the network.
APF021S
You can send scanned documents to other network computers using e-mail
(Sending stored scan file by e-mail). See Sending Scan Files by E-mail, Scanner Reference.
With the ScanRouter delivery software, you can store scanned documents in
specified destinations on network computers (File storage). See Scanner Reference.
You can send scanned documents to other network folders (Scan to Folder).
See Sending Scan Files to Folders, Scanner Reference.
You can use this machine as a delivery scanner for the ScanRouter delivery
application (Network delivery scanner). You can save scan files in the delivery server or send them to a folder in a computer on the same network. For
details about the machine's settings, see Network Settings, General Settings
Guide. For details about how to use the function, see When Using E-mail,
Folder Sending, Storing or Network Delivery Function, Scanner Reference.
vi
Administrating the Machine/Protecting Documents (Security

Functions)
You can prevent information leakage by managing the machine and protecting
documents.
APF015S
You can protect documents from unauthorized access and stop them from being copied without permission. See Security Reference.
You can control the use of the machine, as well as prevent machine settings
from being changed without authorization. See Security Reference.
By setting passwords, you can prevent unauthorized access via the network.
See Security Reference.
You can erase the data on the hard disk to prevent the information from leaking out. See the manual for the DataOverWriteSecurity Unit (optional) and
Security Reference.
vii
Monitoring the Machine Via Computer

You can monitor machine status and change settings using a computer.
APF017S
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, or a

Web browser, you can use a computer to view the machine's status, such as
checking on paper quantities, or misfeeds. See General Settings Guide.
You can use a Web browser to make network settings. See General Settings
Guide.
You can also use a Web browser to register and manage items such as user
codes, e-mail addresses, and folders in the Address Book.
See the Web Image Monitor's Help.
viii
Preventing an Unauthorized Copy

You can embed a pattern in the printed document to prevent it from being copied.
APG006S
Using the printer driver, you can embed a pattern in the printed document. If
the document is copied on a machine with the Copy Data Security Unit (optional), protected pages are grayed out in the copy, preventing confidential
information from being copied. In addition, the machine beeps to notify that
unauthorized copying is being attempted.
If the document is copied on a machine without the Copy Data Security Unit,
the hidden text becomes conspicuous in the copy, showing that the copy is
unauthorized.
Using the printer driver, you can embed text in the printed document for unauthorized copy prevention. If the document is copied on this or other machines, the hidden text appears in the copy, discouraging such unauthorized
copying.
See the printer driver Help, Printer Reference, and Security Reference.
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
What You Can Do with This Machine..................................................................iii
Copier, Printer, and Scanner Functions .................................................................... iii
Utilizing Stored Documents....................................................................................... iv
Connecting Two Machines for Copying ..................................................................... v
Using the Scanner in a Network Environment .......................................................... vi
Administrating the Machine/Protecting Documents (Security Functions) ................ vii
Monitoring the Machine Via Computer.....................................................................viii
Preventing an Unauthorized Copy ............................................................................ ix
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
Notice To Wireless LAN Interface (optional) Users....................................................1
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................2
Symbols .....................................................................................................................2
Safety Information .................................................................................................3
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................3
Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION labels ..............................................6
ENERGY STAR Program .......................................................................................7
Recycled Paper..........................................................................................................8
Machine Type.............................................................................................................8
1. Getting Started
Guide to Components ...........................................................................................9
Options.....................................................................................................................11
Control Panel........................................................................................................13
Display Panel........................................................................................................16
Simplified Display.....................................................................................................17
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed..................................................18
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)...............................................18
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver) ..................................................19
Login (Using the Control Panel) ...............................................................................19
Log Off (Using the Control Panel) ............................................................................20
Login (Using a Printer Driver)...................................................................................20
Login (Using Web Image Monitor) ...........................................................................21
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor) ........................................................................21
Changing Modes ..................................................................................................22
System Reset...........................................................................................................22
Turning On the Power .........................................................................................23
Turning On the Main Power .....................................................................................23
Turning On the Power ..............................................................................................24
Turning Off the Power ..............................................................................................24
Turning Off the Main Power .....................................................................................25
Saving Energy..........................................................................................................26
2. Entering Text
Entering Text ........................................................................................................27
Available Characters ................................................................................................27
Keys .........................................................................................................................28
How to Enter Text ....................................................................................................29
3. Appendix
Dos and Don'ts.....................................................................................................31
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM ...............................................32
Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM ......................................................................33
Printer Drivers for This Printer..................................................................................33
TWAIN Driver ...........................................................................................................34
DeskTopBinder Lite..................................................................................................35
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ................................................................................36
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .......................................................37
Copy Paper ...........................................................................................................38
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types...................................................................38
Unusable Paper .......................................................................................................42
Paper Storage ..........................................................................................................43
INDEX......................................................................................................... 44
xi
xii
Notice
Notice To Wireless LAN Interface (optional) Users
Notice to Users in EEA Countries

This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999
on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL:
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc/.
This product is only for use in EEA or other authorized countries. Outdoor use
of this product in Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, or the Netherlands is prohibited.
How to Read This Manual

Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the Safety Information section of this manual.
Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
Safety Information section of this manual.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machines display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machines control panel.
Safety Information
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.
Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
R WARNING:
Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly
into a wall outlet and do not use an extension cord.
Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do
not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this
manual.
Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the
plug, not the cable) if any of the following occurs:
You spill something into the machine.
You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.
The external housing of your machine has been damaged.
Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might
ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers in accordance with local regulations.
Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power
cord. Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend
it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric
shock or fire.
If the power cord is damaged (exposure of the core, disconnection,
etc.), contact your service representative to change a new one. Operating the machine with a damaged power cord may cause an
electric shock or fire.
Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer.
R WARNING:
Dispose of the used toner container in accordance with the local
regulations.
Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock might occur.
R CAUTION:
When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies
available at an authorized dealer.
Before moving the machine, be sure to disconnect all external connections, especially the power cord from the wall outlet. Damaged power
cords are a fire and electric shock hazard.
To disconnect the power code, pull it out by plug. Do not drag the code
itself. Doing so may result in damage to the code, leading to fire or electric shock.
Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and
snow.
Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an
electric shock might occur.
Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples
over, an injury might occur.
After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might move or come down to cause an injury.
Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated
and spacious. Good ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the machine, you should take care that the power
cord will not be damaged under the machine.
When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall
inside the machine.
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of the reach of
children. See a doctor immediately if you accidentally swallow toner.
If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move
into a fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large
amounts of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of
water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam
or replacing toner. If your skin comes into contact with toner, wash the
affected area thoroughly with soap and water.
If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible.
Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies
available at an authorized dealer.
If your skin comes into contact with toner or used toner, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and water.
For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take
place at an authorized dealer.
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch any parts other than specified in this document when removing misfed paper. Otherwise, it may cause burn injury.
Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to
avoid a fire or machine failure.
Open toner cartridges carefully. If you open them forcefully, toner can
spill, dirtying your clothes or hands, and possibly resulting in accidental
ingestion.
Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION

labels
This machine has labels for RWARNING and RCAUTION at the positions
shown below. For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine
as indicated.
APG007S
ENERGY STAR Program

As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined
that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for
developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall
place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
Low-Power mode
This product automatically lowers its power consumption 15 minutes after
the last copy or print job has finished. Printing is still possible in Low Power
Mode, but if you wish to make copies first press the {Energy Saver} key.
Off Mode (Copier only)
To conserve energy, this product automatically turns off 90 minutes (Type 2,
3: 120 minutes) after the last copying or printing job has been completed.
Printing is still possible in Off Mode, but if you wish to make copies first press
the operation switch.
Sleep Mode (Printer, Scanner installed)
If the printer and scanner are installed, this product automatically lowers further its power consumption 90 minutes (Type 2, 3: 120 minutes) after it has
shifted to Low Power Mode. Printing is still possible in Sleep Mode, but if you
wish to make copies first press the operation switch.
Duplex Priority
The ENERGY STAR Program recommends the duplex function. By conserving paper resources this function reduces a burden to the environment. For
applicable machines, duplex function (one-sided originalstwo-sided copies) is selected preferentially when the operation switch or the main power
switch is turned on, the {Energy Saver} key is pressed, or the machine resets
automatically.
Copier only
Type 1
Low-power Mode
Power consumption
113.3W
Default interval
Off Mode
Power consumption
Default interval
Sleep mode
Type 2
129.7W
121.1W
15 minutes
4.1W
4.0W
90 minutes
120 minutes
Power consumption
Default interval
Duplex priority
Type 3
One-sidedOne-sided
Reference
For details about how to change the default interval, see Timer Settings,
To change the settings of the Duplex Priority mode, see User Tools Menu
(Copier and Document Server Features), Copy/Document Server Reference.
Recycled Paper
In accordance with the ENERGY STAR Program, we recommend use of recycled
paper which is environmentally friendly. Please contact your sales representative for recommended paper.
Machine Type
This machine comes in three models which vary in copy speed. To ascertain
which model you have, see the inside front cover.
Copy speed
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
90 copies/minute;
180 copies/ minute
for connect copy
110 copies/minute;
220 copies/ minute
for connect copy
135 copies/minute;
270 copies/ minute
for connect copy
(A4K, 81/2" 11"K)
(A4K, 81/2" 11"K)
(A4K, 81/2" 11"K)
1. Getting Started
This section describes how to start using this machine.
Guide to Components
This section introduces the names and functions of the components.
APG008S
1. Exposure glass
6. Front cover
Place originals face down here.
Open to access the inside of the machine.
2. Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
7. Paper tray (tray 1-3)
Load a stack of originals here. They will

be fed automatically one by one.
Load paper here.
3. Control panel
If the machine does not operate after

turning on the operation switch, check if
the main power switch is turned on.
See Control Panel.
4. On indicator
8. Main power switch
This indicator lights when you press the

operation switch.
9. Toner cover
5. Operation switch
10. Suspend/Resume switch
Press this switch to turn the power on

(the On indicator lights up). To turn the
power off, press this switch again (the On
indicator goes off).
Press to momentarily stop copying. Pressing again resumes the stopped operation.
Open to change the toner container.
Getting Started
APF009S
1. Ventilation holes
Prevent overheating. Do not obstruct the
ventilation holes by placing an object
near it or leaning things against it. If the
machine overheats, a fault might occur.
Reference
p.13 Control Panel
10
Guide to Components
Options
This section introduces the names and functions of main optional parts.
External Options
This section provides explanations about external options.
APG009S
1. Finisher SR5000
5. A3/11" 17" tray unit
Sorts, stacks, staples and punches copies.

*1: Finisher upper tray
*2: Finisher shift tray
You can load A3L or 11" 17"L paper

in tray 1 using this unit.
6. Multi bypass tray (Tray 7)
2. Booklet Finisher BK5000
Use when copying or printing onto a

thick paper, OHP transparency, and custom size paper.
The saddle stitch function can staple the

copies in the centre and fold them into
booklets.
*1: Finisher booklet tray
3. Z-folding unit
Makes two parallel folds on the copied
paper, one of which faces in and the other
facing out.
7. Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide

LCT)
Holds 4,400 sheets of A3 or 11" 17" sized
paper.
8. Large Capacity Tray (LCT)

Holds 5,000 sheets of paper.
4. Interposer
Inserts cover or slip sheets into the copies.
Note
The punch function is not available for Type 3.
11
Getting Started
Internal Options
This section provides explanations about internal options.
Printer/Scanner unit
Allows you to use the printer and scanner functions.
USB Host Interface
Allows you to connect a variety of external devices.
IEEE 1284 Interface Board
Connects to an IEEE 1284 cable.
IEEE 1394 interface board
Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1394 cable.
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit
Allows you to install a wireless LAN interface.
File Format Converter
Allows you to download documents from the Document Server stored by copier
and printer functions. See Downloading Stored Documents, Copy/Document
Server Reference.
Bluetooth
Allows you to expand the interface.
Copy Data Security Unit
If a document containing embedded text for unauthorized copy guard is copied, protected pages are grayed out in the copy.
DataOverWriteSecurity Unit
Allows you to erase data on the hard disk.
Copy Connector
Allows you to connect copy function.
Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-TX)
Allows you to communicate with 1000BASE-TX.
Note
You cannot simultaneously install two or more of the options below:
IEEE 1284 Interface Board, IEEE 1394 interface board, IEEE 802.11b Interface
Unit, and Bluetooth.
Remove the machine's Ethernet and USB ports before connecting a USB Gigabit Ethernet.
12
Control Panel
Control Panel
This section introduces the names and functions of the components on the control panel.
This illustration shows the control panel of the machine with options fully installed.
APG010S
1. Status indicator
2. Operation switch
Machine status is described by this indicator. By default, this indicator is turned

off. You can select the status indicator lit
or not.
Press this switch to turn the power on

(the On indicator lights up). To turn the
power off, press this switch again (the On
indicator goes off). See Turning On the
Power.
Off: The main power switch is turned

off or ready to make copies.
Flashing green: Scanning originals.
Lit green: Copying (ready to scan originals).
Flashing red: Toner has nearly run out.
Lit red: Paper jam or other malfunction.
If the status indicator is blinking red, paper jam has occurred in the current copy
job. Bring up the current job screen.
3. {Login/Logout} key
Press to log in or log out of the system.
4. {Simplified Display} key

Press to go to the Simplified Display screen.
See Simplified Display.
5. {Language Selection} key

Press to change the language of the display.
13
Getting Started
6. {Interrupt} key
17. Data In indicator (printer mode)
Press to make interrupt copies during a

copy run. See Interrupt Copy, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Lights up when data is coming from the

printer.
7. {Energy Saver} key
Function} key
Press to shift to and from Low Power mode.

See Saving Energy.
Calls up registered functions.
8. {Clear Modes} key
These show the status of the functions.
Press to clear previously entered copy job

settings.
9. {Program} key (copier and scanner

mode)
Press to register frequently used settings,
or to recall registered settings.
10. {Stop} key

Press to stop a job in progress.
11. {Start} key

Press to start copying, or to scan or print
documents stored on the Document Server.
12. {Sample Copy} key

Press to make a single set of copies or
prints to check for print quality before
making multiple sets. See Sample copy,
Copy/ Document Server Reference.
13. {Clear} key
19. Function status indicators

Green: active.
Red: interrupted. Press the function
key to change the display, and then
follow the displayed instructions.
20. Function keys

Press to display the operation screen of
one of the following functions:
Copy
Document Server
Printer
Scanner
The indicator of the selected function
goes on. See Changing Modes.
21. {Counter} Key

Press to check or print the total number of
copies made. See Counter, General Settings Guide.
Press to delete a number entered.
22. {User Tools} key
14. {q} key (Enter key)
Press to change the default settings and

conditions to meet your requirements.
See Accessing User Tools (System Settings), General Settings Guide.
Press to enter a numerical value.
15. Number keys

Use to enter the desired number of copies, or data for a selected function.
23. {Tray Paper Settings} key
16. {New Job} key
24. Display panel
Use this key to set up the next copy job

while a copy job or storing data in the
Document Server is in progress.
14
18. {Registered Program} key/{Other
Specify the paper tray settings for delivery.

Shows the operation status, error messages,
and function menus.
Control Panel
Note
You can adjust the angle of the control panel.
APF059S
APF060S
Reference
p.26 Saving Energy
p.23 Turning On the Power

p.17 Simplified Display
p.22 Changing Modes
Interrupt Copy, Copy/Document Server Reference
Sample copy, Copy/Document Server Reference
Counter, General Settings Guide
Accessing User Tools (System Settings), General Settings Guide
15
Getting Started
Display Panel
The display panel shows machine status, error messages and function menus.
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
item by lightly pressing them.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like
. Keys appearing as
cannot be used.
Important
A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display
panel.
By default the copying screen is displayed when you turn the power on.
The following display is of a machine with the options fully installed.
16
Display Panel
Simplified Display
This section explains how to switch to the simplified display.
When you press the {Simplified Display} key, the screen changes from the initial
display to the simplified display.
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.
APG011S
Simplified Display
APG012S
1. [Key Colour]
Press to change the key colour and increase the brightness of the display panel.
Note
To return to the initial display, press the {Simplified Display} key again.
Certain keys do not appear on the simplified display.
17
Getting Started
When the Authentication Screen is

Displayed
1
When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or

Integration Server Authentication is set, the Authentication Screen appears on
the screen. Unless a valid user name and password are entered, operations are
not possible with the machine.
Important
Consult the User Administrator about your login user name and login password. For details of the various types of user authentication, consult the respective administrators.
When User Code Authentication is set, the screen for entering a user code is
displayed instead.
Note
Authentication has failed. appears if the authentication failed. Check the
login user name and login password.
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)

When User Code Authentication is set, the following screen appears:
Enter a user code (up to eight digits), and then press [OK].
Note
To log off, do one of the following:
Press the Operation switch.

Press the {User Tools} key, press [System Settings], and then press the {User
Tools} key.
Press the {Energy Saver} key after jobs are completed.
18
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver)

When User Code Authentication is set, specify the user code in the printer properties of the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
Login (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log on when Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set.
A Press [Enter] for [Login User Name].
B Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].

C Press [Enter] for [Login Password].
D Enter a login password, and then press [OK].

E Press [Login].
When the user is authenticated, the screen for the function you are using appears.
Note
Authentication has failed.appears if the authentication failed. Check the
login user name and login password.
If user code authentication is enabled, a different screen appears. See Authentication Information, General Settings Guide.
19
Getting Started
Log Off (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log off when Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set.
A Press the {Login/Logout} key.
APG012S
B Press [Yes].
Login (Using a Printer Driver)

When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or
Integration Server Authentication is set, make encryption settings in the printer
properties of the printer driver, and then specify a login user name and password. For details, see the printer driver Help.
Note
When logged on using a printer driver, you do not have to log off.
20
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed
Login (Using Web Image Monitor)

This section explains how to log onto the machine via Web Image Monitor.
A Click [Login].
B Enter a login user name and password, and then click [Login].
Note
For user code authentication, enter a user code in [User Name], and then
click [OK].
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor)
A Click [Logout] to log off.

Note
Delete the cache memory in the Web Image Monitor after logging off.
21
Getting Started
Changing Modes
Note
You cannot switch modes during interrupt copying or initial setup.
The copying screen is displayed as default after power on. You can change
this default setting. For the setting procedure, see General Features, General Settings Guide.
APG014S
System Reset
The screen specified in Function Priority appears automatically or interrupt
copying is cancelled, after a certain period of time has elapsed. This function is
called System Reset. See General Features, General Settings Guide. You can
change the System Reset time. See Timer Settings, General Settings Guide.
22
Turning On the Power

This section discusses how to turn on/off the power.
Power supply
This machine has two power switches: Operation switch and main power
switch.
Operation switch (right side of the control panel)
Press to activate the machine. When the machine has finished warming up,
you can make copies.
Main power switch (left side of the machine)
Turning off this switch will completely turn off power to the machine.
Note
This machine automatically enters Energy Saver mode or turns itself off if you
do not use it for a certain period. See Timer Settings, General Settings
Guide.
Turning On the Main Power

Turn on the main power as follows:
A Make sure the power code is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
B Open the switch cover and turn on the main power switch.
The main power indicator turns on.
APF008S
Note
Do not turn off the main power immediately after it has been turned on.
Otherwise it may result in damage to the hard disk or memory, leading to
the malfunctioning of the machine.
When the message Functional problem detected. Press [Restart]
after the current process. Repeat settings after the machine
has restarted. is displayed, follow the instructions and press [Restart]
at the bottom right-hand corner of the screen after the process is completed.
23
Getting Started

Turn on the power as follows:
A Press the Operation switch.
The On indicator lights up.
APG015S
Note
If the power is not turned on when the operation switch is pressed, check
if the main power switch is on. If not, turn it on.
Turning Off the Power

Turn off the power as follows:
A Press the Operation switch.

The On indicator goes off.
APG015S
Note
In the following cases, the indicator will not go off but will instead blink
when you press the operation switch:
During communication with external equipment.

When the hard disk is active.
24
Turning Off the Main Power

Turn off the main power as follows:
Important
Do not turn off the main power switch when the On indicator is lit or blinking. Failure to observe this may result in damage to the hard disk or memory,
leading to malfunction.
Be sure to pull out the power cord only after you have turned off the main
power switch. Not doing this may result in damage to the hard disk or memory.
A Make sure the On indicator is not lit.

B Open the switch cover, and turn off the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes off.
Note
The On indicator does not go off, but blinks in direct dialing mode even if
you press the Operation switch. When this happens, check the items below,
and turn off the main power switch.
the computer is not controlling the machine.
25
Getting Started
Saving Energy
This machine has the following two energy saving functions.
Energy Saver
If you do not use the machine for a certain period after an operation, or when
you press the {Energy Saver} key, the display disappears and the machine
goes into Energy Saver mode. When you press the {Energy Saver} key again,
the machine returns to the ready condition. The machine uses less electricity
in Energy Saver mode.
You can change the amount of time the machine waits before switching to Energy Saver mode after copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
See Timer Settings, General Settings Guide.
Auto Off
The machine automatically turns itself off when the job is finished, after a certain period of time has elapsed without any operation. This function is called
Auto Off.
You can change the Auto Off time. See Timer Settings, General Settings
Guide.
Note
The Auto Off Timer function will not operate in the following cases:
When a warning message appears

When the service call message appears
When paper is jammed
When the cover is open
When the Add Toner message appears
When toner is being replenished
When the User Tools/Counter/Enquiry screen is displayed
When fixed warm-up is in progress
When the printer or other functions are active
When operations were suspended during printing
When the Data In indicator is on or blinking
When the sample print or locked print screen is displayed
Reference
Timer Settings, General Settings Guide
26
2. Entering Text
This section describes how to enter characters.
Entering Text
When you enter a character, it is shown at the position of the cursor. If there is a
character already at the cursor position, the entered character is shown before
that character.
Available Characters
You can enter the following characters:
Alphabetic characters
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Symbols
Numerals
0123456789
27
Entering Text
Keys
You can change the entry screen using the keys below.
APG016S
Note
When entering uppercase or lowercase letters continuously, use [Shift Lock] to
lock the case.
28
Entering Text
How to Enter Text

You can enter text as described below.
A Press [Shift] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.

B Press the letters you want to enter.
Deleting Characters
A Press [Backspace] or [Delete All] to delete characters.

Entering Symbols
A Press [Symbol Entry] to enter into the Symbols mode.
B Press the symbols you want to enter.
29
Entering Text
Selecting a User Text

You can select and use a User Text that is registered in [Program / Change / Delete
User Text].
For details about registering User Texts, see General Features, General Settings Guide.
A Press [User Text].
B Select the User Text you want to use.
Reference
General Features, General Settings Guide
30
3. Appendix
This section describes Dos and Don'ts, key accessories, copy paper, and consumables.
Dos and Don'ts

The following items should be followed during use of this machine.
R WARNING:
Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols.
A fire or an electric shock might occur.
R CAUTION:
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
Do not turn off the main power switch while the On indicator is lit or blinking. This may cause damage to the hard disk or memory.
Do not touch areas on or around the fusing unit. These areas get hot.
After scanning originals continuously, the exposure glass may become
warmthis is not a malfunction.
When you use this machine for a long time in a confined space without good
ventilation, you may detect an odd smell. To keep the workplace comfortable,
we recommend that you keep it well ventilated.
The area around the ventilation hole may become warm. This is caused by exhaust air and is not a malfunction.
Do not turn off the power when the machine is in operation.
The machine might fail to produce good copy images if condensation forms
inside due to rapid temperature change.
Do not open the covers of the machine when it is in operation. If you do, misfeeds might occur.
Do not move the machine when the power is on.
If you operate the machine improperly or a failure occurs, settings might be
lost. Be sure to make a note of your machine settings.
The supplier shall not be liable for any loss or damage resulting from a failure
of the machine, loss of settings, or use of the machine.
Reference
p.24 Turning Off the Power
p.25 Turning Off the Main Power
31
Appendix
Software and Utilities Included on the CDROM

Three CD-ROMs come with this machine: Printer Drivers and Utilities, Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities, and Print version Manuals. PS Driver is
stored in Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities. In Print version Manuals, manuals are stored in PDF format.
The following are included in the three separate CD-ROMs:
Font Manager 2000

For installing new screen fonts, or organizing and managing fonts already in
the system. For details about Font Manager 2000, see the manual on the CDROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

For the system administrator to manage network printers.
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
For users to manage their network print status.
1394 Utility
For the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit. For details, see the Readme file or
the manual provided with the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit.
Acrobat Reader
This utility allows you to read PDF files (Portable Document Format).
Printer Utility for Mac
This utility allows users to download and manage a variety of fonts as well as
manage printers. For details about this utility, see PostScript Supplement.
Note
Documentation about using the machine is included on the CD-ROM in PDF
format. For details about using Acrobat Reader, see Acrobat Reader online
Help.
Reference
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help

Acrobat Reader online Help
32
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM

Follow the procedure below to view the contents of the CD-ROMs.
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.
B Click [Browse This CD-ROM].

Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.
Printer Drivers for This Printer

Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The
following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled Printer Drivers and
Utilities.
Printer Language
PCL 6
PCL 5e
RPCS
PostScript 3
Windows 95
*1
OK
OK
OK
OK *12
Windows 98
*2
OK
OK
OK
OK *12
Windows Me *3
OK
OK
OK
OK *12
Windows 2000 *4
OK
OK
OK
OK *13
Windows XP *5
OK
OK
OK
OK *13
Windows Server 2003 *6
OK
OK
OK
OK *13
Windows NT 4.0 *7
OK *11
OK *10
OK *10
OK *11
Mac OS *8
OK *12
Mac OS X *9
OK *14
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
*10
*11
*12
*12
Microsoft Windows 95 operating system

Microsoft Windows 98 operating system
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system version 4.0, Microsoft Windows NT
Workstation operating system version 4.0 in a computer using x86 processors.
Versions 8.6 to 9.2 of the Mac OS (Mac OS X Classic mode is supported.)
Mac OS X 10.1 or later (Native mode)
Requires Service Pack 4 or later.
Requires Service Pack 6 or later.
The Adobe PostScript 3 printer drivers and PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
are included on the CD-ROM labeled Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities.
33
Appendix
*13
*14
The PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files are included on the CD-ROM labeled
Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities.
The Adobe PostScript Printer Description (PPD) installer is included on the CDROM labeled Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities.
PCL printer drivers

Two kinds of PCL printer driver (PCL 5e and PCL 6) are included on the CDROM that comes with this machine. These drivers allow your computer to
communicate with this machine via a printer language.
RPCS printer driver
This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. In addition to the conventional user interface, another
preset user interface is provided.
Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files

Adobe PostScript printer drivers and the PPD files are included on the CDROM provided with this machine. Adobe PostScript printer drivers allow the
computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. PPD
files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
PPD files
PPD files are included on the CD-ROM provided with this machine. PPD files
allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
Note
Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5e printer driver. In
this case, you can install PCL 5e without having to install PCL6.
Reference
Preparing the Machine, Printer Reference
PostScript 3 Supplement
TWAIN Driver
This section describes the file path to and system requirements of the TWAIN
driver.
This driver is required to scan an original using a scanner. To use the machine
as a network TWAIN scanner, this driver must be installed.
File path
The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities provided with this machine:
\DRIVERS\TWAIN
34
System requirements
Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the following operating system
properly
Under Windows NT with RISC-based processors (MIPS R series, Alpha
AXP, or PowerPC), this driver is not supported.
Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Display resolution
800 600 pixels, 256 colours or higher
DeskTopBinder Lite
This section explains the file path and system requirements of DeskTopBinder Lite.
DeskTopBinder is to be installed on the client computers for integration and management of various kinds of files such as scan files, files created with applications, and existing scan files. This software allows you to use various functions for stored scan files such
as viewing stored files. Also, with the ScanRouter delivery software, you can view the
files stored in in-trays of the delivery server or use other functions for stored files.
For details about the software installed with DeskTopBinder Lite, see DeskTopBinder Lite, Scanner Reference.
File path
The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities provided with this machine:
\UTILITY\DESKV2
System requirements
Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the operating system properly
Operating system
When installing all functions of DeskTopBinder.
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server SP1 or
later/2000 Advanced Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
When installing only SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Microsoft Windows 95 SP1/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/
2000 Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition Microsoft
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition Microsoft
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Reference
Scanner Reference
35
Appendix
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is an application that uses TCP/IP and
IPX/SPX to monitor network printers. It can monitor multiple network printers
using IP address. We recommend that network administrators use this application.
File path
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folder in the CDROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities:
NETWORK\DEVMON\ADMIN\DISK1
Operating system
Protocol stack
Windows 95 / 98 / Me
TCP/IP provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me
NetWare Client provided with Windows 95 / 98
Novell Client provided with Windows 95 / 98
Windows 2000
TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT
Windows XP
TCP/IP provided with Windows XP

IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client provided with Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003

IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003
NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP provided with Windows NT

IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT
Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT
Available functions
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin has the following functions to check:
printer supplies such as paper or toner;
results of print jobs executed from the computer.
Reference
Network Guide
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help
36
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client allows you to manage and print
various data such as files created with an application, images scanned with a
scanner, and existing images as one document.
File path
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is stored in the following
folder on the CD-ROM labeled Scanner/PostScript Drivers and Utilities:
NETWORK\DEVMON\CLIENT\DISK1
Operating environment of the printer driver

Applicable computer
Machines which properly work with the applicable OS below. PC/AT
compatible machine.
Applicable OS
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Note
See DeskTopBinder Lite, Scanner Reference or Help of DeskTopBinderSmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
DeskTopBinder includes SmartDeviceMonitor for Client. See Help of DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
37
Appendix
Copy Paper
This section describes recommended paper sizes and types, unusable paper, and
paper storage.
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

The following table shows recommended types, sizes, and capacity of copy paper loadable in each tray.
Important
If you use damp or curled paper, a staple clogging or paper jam may occur.
Tray 1 (Tandem tray)

Paper Type and
Weight
52.3-216 g/m2
(14-57.6 lb.)
Metric Version
*1 A4K,
Inch Version
81/2" 11"K
Paper Capacity *6
1,100 sheets
2
Tray 1 (Optional A3/11" 17" Tray Unit)

Paper Type and
Weight
52.3-216 g/m2
(14- 57.6 lb.)
Metric Version
*2
Inch Version
A3L, 11" 17"L
*3 B4 JISL, A4KL, 81/
Paper Capacity *6
1,100 sheets
1
2" 14"L, 8 /2" 11"KL, 12" 18"L
Tray 2, 3
Paper Type and
Weight
Metric Version
Inch Version
52.3-216 g/m2
(14-57.6 lb.)
A3L, A4KL, A5KL, 81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L,

B4 JISL, B5 JISKL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"KL, 8" 13"L,
71/4" 101/2"KL, 8KL, 16KKL, 12" 18"L
*2
15"L, 10" 15"L, 11" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L,

10" 14"L, 8" 10"L
*3 11"
*4
38
Custom size
*4
Custom size
Vertical: 139.7-330.2 mm
Vertical: 5.5"-13.0"
Horizontal: 139.7-458 mm
Horizontal: 5.5"-18.03"
Paper Capacity *6
550 sheets
Copy Paper
Multi Bypass Tray (tray 7)

Paper Type and
Weight
52.3-216 g/m2
(14-57.6 lb.)
Metric Version
*2
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL,

B5 JIS K, A5KL, A6L,
11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"K,
51/2" 81/2"L, 12" 18"L,
8" 13"L
*3
B5 JIS L, B6 JIS L,
81/2" 11"L, 51/2" 81/2"K,
81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 13"L,
81/4" 13"L,
101/2" 71/4"KL,
11" 15"L, 10" 14"L,
81/4" 14"L, 8" 10"L,
8KL, 16KKL
*4
Inch Version
*2
Paper Capacity *6
550 sheets
A3L, B4 JISL, A4K,

B5 JISK, A5L, A6L,
11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"KL,
51/2" 81/2"KL, 8" 13"L,
12" 18"L
*3
A4L, B5 JISL, A5K,

B6 JISL, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L,
101/2" 71/4"KL,
11" 15"L, 10" 14"L,
81/4" 14"L, 8" 10"L
*4
Custom size
Custom size
Vertical: 100-330.2 mm
Vertical: 3.94"-13.0"
Translucent paper A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, B5 JISL, A4K, B5 JISK
*7
OHP transparencies *5
A4L, 81/2" 11"KL, A4K
*7
Postcards *5
100 148 mmL
*7
Label paper
(adhesive labels)
B4 JISL, A4L, A4K
Large Capacity Tray (LCT) (Optional) Tray 4, 5

Paper Type and
Weight
52 - 216 g/m2
(14 - 57.6 lb.)
Metric Version
Inch Version
Paper Capacity *6
1,100 sheets
*2
A4K, A5KL, B5 JISK, 81/2" 11"K, 51/2" 81/2"KL
Large Capacity Tray (LCT) (Optional) Tray 6

Paper Type and
Weight
52 - 163 g/m2
(14 - 43.4 lb.)
Metric Version
Inch Version
*3
Paper Capacity *6
2,800 sheets
A4K, A5KL, B5 JISK, 81/2" 11"K, 51/2" 81/2"KL
39
Appendix
Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT) (optional) Tray 4, 5, 6

Paper Type and
Weight
52 - 216 g/m2
(14 - 57.6 lb.)
Metric Version
*2
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL,

B5 JIS K, A5KL,
11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"K,
51/2" 81/2"L, 12" 18"L,
8" 13"L
*3
B5 JIS L, B6 JIS L, A6L,

81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"L,
51/2" 81/2"K, 81/2" 13"L,
81/4" 13"L,
101/2" 71/4"KL,
11" 15"L, 10" 14"L,
81/4" 14"L, 8KL, 16KKL
*4
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
Inch Version
*2
A3L, B4 JISL, A4K,

B5 JISK, A5L, 11" 17"L,
81/2" 11"KL,
51/2" 81/2"KL, 8" 13"L,
12" 18"L
Paper Capacity *6
Tray 4, 6:
1,100 sheets
Tray 5:
2,200 sheets
*3
A4L, B5 JISL, A5K,

B6 JISL, A6L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L,
101/2" 71/4"KL,
11" 15"L, 10" 14"L,
81/4" 14"L
*4
Custom size
Custom size
Vertical: 100-330.2 mm
Vertical: 3.94"-13.0"
The paper tray fence is fixed. If you wish to change the size of paper placed in this
tray, contact your service representative.
The paper size is detected automatically.
Select the paper size in System Settings. See Paper Tray Settings, General Settings
Guide.
If you want to copy onto custom size paper, select the size using the Tray Paper Setting function. See Paper Tray Settings, General Settings Guide.
If you want to copy onto OHP transparencies or thick paper, select OHP (Transparency) or Thick Paper. See Paper Tray Settings, General Settings Guide.
When loading paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the upper limit
mark of the paper tray. The amount of paper that can be set is 10 mm/100 sheets approximately. See Placing Originals, Copy/Document Server Reference.
When setting copy paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the limit mark.
The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on the paper's thickness
and condition.
Note
When loading paper in the paper trays 1-3, place the copy side face down.
When loading paper in the multi bypass tray, the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
or Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT), place the copy side face down.
When you load OHP transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets,
and place them correctly, or a misfeed might occur. Set the paper direction to
L. For details, see Copy/Document Server Reference.
When you use OHP transparencies, fan them for each use.
If multiple sheet feeding occurs, load sheets one by one.
40
Copy Paper
If you load paper of the same size in the same direction in two or more trays,
the machine automatically shifts to the other tray when the first tray in use
runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switching. (However, if
the Paper Type of one tray is recycled or special paper, the settings of the other trays must be the same for the Auto Tray Switching function to work.) This
saves interrupting a copy run to replenish paper when making a large
number of copies. See General Features and Tray Paper Settings, General
Settings Guide.
When you want to copy onto translucent paper or paper lighter than 20 lbs,
80 g/m2, set the paper as shown in the following illustration. Not doing so
might cause a paper jam, marked edges or the paper edges to be folded.
Direction of paper grain

B How to set the copy paper in the paper tray
If you want to set 20 lbs, 80g/m2 or heavier paper, set the paper as shown in
the following illustration.
Direction of paper grain

B How to set the copy paper in the paper tray
If you load recycled or special paper in the paper trays and use the Tray Paper Settings, this function is not available with these trays unless their settings are identical.
Feeding B5K, A5K, or 81/2" 51/2"K paper into the machine might cause a
marked edge or a misfeed. In this case, change the orientation or turn over the
paper stack in the paper tray.
When you use the multi bypass tray, it is recommended to set the copy paper
direction to L.
When you load label paper, set the paper direction to K.
41
Appendix
Unusable Paper
This section describes paper unusable on this machine.
R CAUTION:
Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to
avoid a fire or machine failure.
Important
Do not use any of the following kinds of paper or a fault might occur:
Paper for inkjet printers

Thermal fax paper
Art paper
Aluminum foil
Carbon paper
Conductive paper
Paper with perforated lines
Hemmed paper
Envelopes
Do not copy on the side of paper that has been already copied onto, or misfeed might occur or a fault might occur.
To prevent misfeeds, do not use the following kinds of paper:
Bent, folded, or creased paper
Perforated paper
Slippery paper
Torn paper
Rough paper
Thin paper with low stiffness
Paper with a dusty surface
If you copy onto rough grain paper, the image might be blurred.
42
Copy Paper
Paper Storage
This section describes how to store paper.
When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or less).
Store on a flat surface.
Do not store paper vertically.
In high temperature/high humidity conditions or low temperature/ low humidity conditions, store paper in a vinyl bag.
43
INDEX
A
A3/11" 17" tray unit, 11

Administrating the Machine/Protecting
Documents, vii
Auto Off, 26
B
Bluetooth, 12
Booklet Finisher BK5000, 11
File Format Converter, 12

Finisher SR5000, 11
Function keys, 13
Function status indicators, 13
G
Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-TX), 12
C
CAUTION labels, 6
CD-ROM, 32
Changing Modes, 22
Character, 27, 29
Clear key, 13
Clear Modes key, 13
Components, 9
Connect Copy, v
Control panel, 13
Copier functions, iii
Copy Connector, 12
Copy Data Security Unit, 12
Copy paper, 38, 42, 43
Counter key, 13
D
Data In indicator, 13
DataOverWriteSecurity Unit, 12
Delete, 29
DeskTopBinder Lite, 35
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client, 37
Display panel, 13, 16
Dos and Don'ts, 31
Duplex Priority, 7
44
Energy Saver, 26
Energy Saver key, 13
Energy saving, 7, 26
ENERGY STAR Program, 7
Enter, 27, 29
Entering Symbols, 29
Entering text, 27, 29
Enter key (# key), 13
Entry screen, 28
External option, 11
How to Read This Manual, 2
I
IEEE 1284 Interface Board, 12
IEEE 1394 interface board, 12
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit, 12
Internal option, 12
Interposer, 11
Interrupt key, 13
Invoke, 30
K
Key arrangement, 28
L
Language Selection key, 13
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 11
Log in, 18
Login, 19, 20, 21
Login/Logout key, 13
Log Off, 20, 21
Low-Power mode, 7
M
Machine Types, 8
Main power, 23, 25
Manuals for This Machine, i
Monitoring the Machine Via Computer, viii
Multi bypass tray (Tray 7), 11
N
Name, 11
Names of the components, 9
New Job key, 13
Notice, 1
Number keys, 13
O
Off Mode, 7
Operation switch, 13
Option, 11, 12
Other Function key, 13
P
Paper, 38
Paper size, 38
Paper type, 38
Power, 23, 24
Preventing an Unauthorized Copy, ix
Printer Drivers for This Printer, 33
Printer functions, iii
Printer/Scanner unit, 12
Program key, 13
R
Recycled Paper, 8
Registered Program key, 13
S
Safety During Operation, 3
Safety information, 3
Sample Copy key, 13
Scanner functions, iii
Security Functions, vii
Simplified Display, 17
Simplified Display key, 13
Sleep mode, 7
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 36
Software, 32
Software on CD-ROM, 32
Start key, 13
Status indicator, 13
Stop key, 13
Storage, 43
Symbol Entry, 29
Symbols, 2
System Reset, 22
T
Tray Paper Settings key, 13
Turn off, 23, 24, 25
Turn on, 23, 24
TWAIN Driver, 34
U
Unusable, 42
USB Host Interface, 12
User Code Authentication, 18, 19
User Text, 30
User Tools key, 13
Using a Printer Driver, 19, 20
Using the Control Panel, 18, 19, 20
Using the Scanner in a
Network Environment, vi
Using Web Image Monitor, 21
Utilizing Stored Documents, iv
V
Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM, 33
W
WARNING labels, 6
What You Can Do with This Machine, iii
Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT), 11
Z
Z-folding unit, 11
45
46
GB
GB
B235-7730
Declaration of Conformity
The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and its amending directives and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and its amending directives.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, PostScript, Acrobat, are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.and any use of such marks
by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
The product name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95
The product name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows:

The product names of Windows XP are as follows:

The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:

Microsoft Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
The product names of Windows NT are as follows:

Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0
Copyright 2005
Operating Instructions About This Machine
B235-7730
GB GB
Connecting the Machine
System Settings
Tray Paper Settings
Copier/Document Server Features
Printer Features
Scanner Features
Registering Addresses and Users for Scanner Functions
Other User Tools
Appendix
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
Important
Notes:
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before reading this manual. (For details, see p.253 Specifications for the Main Unit.)
Type 1: 8090/DSm790/LD190/Aficio MP9000
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

About This Machine

Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect the machine.
Troubleshooting
Security Reference
Copy / Document Server Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
Other manuals
UNIX Supplement
Note
Manuals provided are specific to machine types. For details, refer to the appendix in About This Machine.

For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
"PostScript3 Supplement" and "UNIX Supplement" include descriptions of
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Display ....................................................................................................................2
Accessing User Tools (System Settings) ............................................................3
Changing Default Settings .........................................................................................3
Quitting User Tools ....................................................................................................4
Displaying Counter.....................................................................................................5
About Menu Protect ...................................................................................................5
1. Connecting the Machine

Connecting to the Interfaces ................................................................................7
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface .........................................................................8
Connecting with the USB Interface ............................................................................9
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface....................................................................10
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface....................................................................11
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface......................................12
Network Settings..................................................................................................15
Settings Required to Use the Printer........................................................................15
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function ...............................................................18
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function ..................................................22
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner.........................................25
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner ................................................28
Settings Required to Use Document Server ............................................................31
Using Utilities to Make Settings................................................................................33
2. System Settings
General Features..................................................................................................43
Output tray settings ..................................................................................................48
Timer Settings ......................................................................................................49
Interface Settings.................................................................................................52
Network ....................................................................................................................52
Parallel Interface ......................................................................................................56
IEEE 1394 ................................................................................................................57
IEEE 802.11b ...........................................................................................................59
Print List ...................................................................................................................60
File Transfer .........................................................................................................62
Administrator Tools.............................................................................................68
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server ................................................................77
Programming the LDAP server ................................................................................78
System Settings on Main and Sub-machines ...................................................83
General Features .....................................................................................................83
Timer Settings ..........................................................................................................84
Administrator Tools ..................................................................................................86
iii
3. Tray Paper Settings

Tray Paper Settings .............................................................................................89
Changing Tray Paper Settings .................................................................................89
Quitting Tray Paper Settings ....................................................................................90
Items of Tray Paper Settings ..............................................................................91
Tray Paper Setting on Main and Sub-machines..............................................111
4. Copier/Document Server Features

General Features................................................................................................113
Reproduction Ratio............................................................................................ 120
Edit ......................................................................................................................124
Stamp .................................................................................................................. 130
Background Numbering .........................................................................................130
Preset Stamp .........................................................................................................130
User Stamp ............................................................................................................133
Date Stamp ............................................................................................................135
Page Numbering ....................................................................................................137
Stamp Text.............................................................................................................140
Input/Output ....................................................................................................... 142
Settings for the Document Server.................................................................... 145
Copier/Document Server Features on Main and Sub-machines ................... 146
General Features ...................................................................................................146
Reproduction Ratio ................................................................................................148
Edit .........................................................................................................................149
Stamp.....................................................................................................................151
Input/Output ...........................................................................................................155
5. Printer Features
List / Test Print ...................................................................................................157
Printing the configuration page ..............................................................................158
Interpreting the configuration page ........................................................................159
Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 161
System ................................................................................................................ 162
Host Interface ..................................................................................................... 167
PCL Menu ...........................................................................................................168
PS Menu.............................................................................................................. 170
PDF Menu ...........................................................................................................171
6. Scanner Features
General Settings ................................................................................................173
Scan Settings ..................................................................................................... 175
Send Settings ..................................................................................................... 177
iv
7. Registering Addresses and Users for Scanner Functions

Address Book..................................................................................................... 179
Managing names in the Address Book ..................................................................182
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial .................................................................................182
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly...................................................183
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine ...........183
Managing users and machine usage .....................................................................183
Registering Names ............................................................................................ 184
Registering Names.................................................................................................184
Changing a Registered Name................................................................................185
Deleting a Registered Name ..................................................................................186
Authentication Information ............................................................................... 187
Registering a User Code........................................................................................187
Changing a User Code...........................................................................................189
Deleting a User Code.............................................................................................190
Displaying the Counter for Each User....................................................................191
Printing the Counter for Each User ........................................................................192
Printing the Counter for All User ............................................................................193
Clearing the Number of Prints................................................................................194
E-mail Destination.............................................................................................. 196
Registering an E-mail Destination..........................................................................196
Changing an E-mail Destination.............................................................................198
Deleting an E-mail Destination...............................................................................199
Registering Folders ........................................................................................... 200
Using SMB to Connect...........................................................................................200
Using FTP to Connect............................................................................................207
Using NCP to Connect ...........................................................................................212
Registering Names to a Group ......................................................................... 218
Registering a Group ...............................................................................................218
Registering Names to a Group...............................................................................219
Adding a Groupe to Another Group .......................................................................221
Displaying Names Registered in a Group ..............................................................222
Removing a Name from a Group ...........................................................................223
Deleting a Group Within Another Group ................................................................224
Changing a Group Name .......................................................................................226
Deleting a Goup .....................................................................................................227
Registering a Protection Code ......................................................................... 228
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User.....................................................228
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User.....................................................230
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication.................................................. 231
SMTP Authentication .............................................................................................231
LDAP Authentication ..............................................................................................233
8. Other User Tools

Changing the Display Language ...................................................................... 235
Inquiry ................................................................................................................. 236
Counter ............................................................................................................... 238
Displaying the Total Counter..................................................................................238
Method of Counting................................................................................................239
9. Appendix
Adjustment Settings for Operators ..................................................................241
Changing the Adjustment Settings for Operators...................................................241
Setting Values ........................................................................................................242
Specifications for the Main Unit ....................................................................... 253
Document Server ...................................................................................................258
Auto Document Feeder ..........................................................................................259
Specifications for Options ................................................................................ 260
Finisher SR5000 ....................................................................................................260
Booklet Finisher BK5000........................................................................................261
Cover Interposer Tray CI5000................................................................................262
Punch Unit PU5000................................................................................................263
Z-folding Unit ZF4000 ............................................................................................264
LCIT RT5000..........................................................................................................264
LCIT RT5010..........................................................................................................265
Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (Tray 7) .......................................................................265
Others ....................................................................................................................266
Information about Installed Applications ........................................................267
Open SSL...............................................................................................................267
Open SSH ..............................................................................................................269
Open LDAP ............................................................................................................274
INDEX....................................................................................................... 276
vi

Symbols
notes. They can be found in the "Safety Information" section of About This Machine.
"Safety Information" section of About This Machine.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machines functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
[]
{}
Display
The display panel shows machine status, error messages, and function menus.
. Keys appearing as
cannot be used.
Important
A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display
panel.
To display the following screen, press the {User Tools} key to display the User
Tools menu, and then press [System Settings].
Using the System Settings menu screen as an example, this section explains how
to use the machines control panel.
APD018S
1. The menu tabs for various settings appear. To display the setting you want
to specify or change, press the appropriate menu tab.
2. A list of settings appears. To display the setting you want to specify or
change, select the appropriate entry in the list.
3. Press this to close the User Tools menu.
Accessing User Tools (System Settings)

This section is for Administrators in charge of this machine.
User Tools allow you to change or set defaults.
Note
Operations for system settings differ from normal operations. Always quit
User Tools when you have finished.
Any changes you make with User Tools remain in effect even if the main
power switch or operation switch is turned off, or the {Energy Saver} or {Clear
Modes} key is pressed.
Reference
p.4 Quitting User Tools
Changing Default Settings

This section describes how to change the settings of User Tools.
Important
If the Administrator Authentications specified, contact your administrator.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
APD014S
B Select the menu.

To change the System Settings, Press [System Settings].
To change the Copier/Document Server Features, Press [Copier/Document
Server Features].
To change the Printer Features, Press [Printer Features].
To change the Scanner Features, Press [Scanner Features].
To adjust color registration or gradation, press [Maintenance].
To find out who to contact for maintenance and where to order consumables,
press [Inquiry].
C Select the menu tab.

3
D Change settings by following instructions on the display, and then press

[OK].
Note
To cancel changes made to settings and return to the initial display, press
the {User Tools} key.
Reference
p.43 System Settings
p.113 Copier/Document Server Features

p.157 Printer Features
p.173 Scanner Features
p.235 Other User Tools
Quitting User Tools

This section describes how to end User Tools.
APD014S
Note
You can also quit User Tools by pressing [Exit].
Displaying Counter
This section describes how to display Counter.
A Press the {Counter} key.
APD016S
Note
You can quit displaying Counter by pressing the {Counter} key again.
About Menu Protect

Using Menu Protect, you can limit the settings available to users other than the
administrator. In the following User Tools menus, you can specify Menu Protect
for each setting.
Printer Features
Scanner Features
For details about menu protect, contact your administrator.
1. Connecting the Machine

Connect the machine to the network to configure network environment.
Connecting to the Interfaces

This section explains how to check the machines interface, connect the machine
according to the network environment, and specify the network settings.
1. IEEE 1394 ports (optional)
5. Wireless LAN port (optional)
Ports for connecting the IEEE 1394 interface cable
Port for using the wireless LAN
2. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port
Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX cable
Port for connecting the 1000BASE-T,
100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T cable when
the Gigabit Ethernet (Optional) is installed
Note
You cannnot install two or more of the
options below: IEEE 1394 interface
board, IEEE 1284 interface board,
IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN
3. USB2.0 port
Port for connecting the USB2.0 interface
cable
4. IEEE 1284 port (optional)

Port for connecting the IEEE 1284 interface cable
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface

Connect 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable to the Ethernet interface.
Important
If the main power switch is turned "On", turn it "Off".
A Make sure the main power switch on the machine is "Off".

B Connect the Ethernet interface cable to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port.
C Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a network connection device
such as a hub.
D Turn the main power switch of the machine on.
AME005S
A
B
Indicator (green)
Remains green when the machine is properly connected to the network.
Indicator (yellow)
Turns yellow when 100 BASE-TX is operating. Turns off when 10 BASE-T
is operating.
Note
For details about installing the printer driver, see "Preparing the Machine"
Printer Reference
Reference
"Turning On the Power" About This Machine
"Preparing the Machine" Printer Reference
Connecting with the USB Interface

Make the connection with the USB 2.0 interface.
A Connect the USB 2.0 interface cable to the USB2.0 port.
B Connect the other end to the USB port on the host computer.
Note
Purchase a USB cable separately according to a personal computer in use.
The USB 2.0 interface board is supported by Windows Me / 2000 / XP,

Windows Server 2003, Mac OS X v10.3.3 or higher.
For Windows Me:
Make sure to install USB Printing Support". If USB 2.0 is used with
Windows Me, only a speed equal to that of USB 1.1 is possible.
Printer Reference
Reference
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface

Connect the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 interface board (optional).
A Connect the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 port.
B For IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) connection, plug the other end of the cable into
the interface connector on the host computer.

Make sure about the shape of the connector to the computer. Fasten the connector securely to the computer.
Note
Use the interface cable supplied with the IEEE 1394 interface board (optional).
Make sure the interface cable is not looped.

Two interface ports are available for connecting the IEEE 1394 interface cable. Either is suitable.
Printer Reference
Reference
"Turning On the Power" About this machine
10
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface

Connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 interface board (optional).
A Make sure the main power switch on the machine is "Off".
If the main power switch is turned "On", turn it "Off".
B Turn off the main power switch of the host computer

C Connect the IEEE 1284 interface cable to the IEEE 1284 port.
To make the connection, use the conversion connector (1) supplied with the
optional IEEE 1284 interface board.
D Plug the other end of the cable into the interface connector on the host computer.
Make sure about the shape of the connector to the computer. Fasten the connector securely to the computer.
E Turn the main power switch of the machine "On".

F Turn on the host computer.
When using Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, a
printer driver installation screen might appear when the computer is turned
on. If this happens, click [Cancel] on the screen.
Note
Don't connect the cable in loop state.
Printer Reference
Reference
"Turning On the Power" About this machine
11
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Interface

Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface.
Note
Check the setting of IPv4 address and subnet mask of this machine.
For how to set IPv4 address and subnet mask from the control panel of the
machine, see "Interface Settings."
Reference
p.52 Network
Setup Procedure
Setup IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) according to the following flow:
AME006S
12
Note
Select [802.11 Ad-hoc] mode when connecting Windows XP as a wireless LAN
client using Windows XP standard driver or utilities, or when not using the
infrastructure mode.
For details about how to make settings of wireless LAN from the control panel on the machine, see "IEEE 802.11b".
For details about how to make settings of wireless LAN from other than the
control panel on the machine, see "Using Utilities to Make Settings".
For details about the setting items, see "IEEE 802.11b".
Reference
p.59 IEEE 802.11b
p.33 Using Utilities to Make Settings
Checking the Connection

Check the wireless LAN connection.
Make sure the LED of the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is lit.
When using in infrastructure mode
1
2
ZGDH600J
1. If [LAN Type] on the [Interface Settings] / [Network] screen is not set to [IEEE
802.11b], it does not light, even if the main power is on.
2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in infrastructure mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching for devices.
13
When using in ad-hoc mode / 802.11 ad-hoc mode
1
1
2
ZGDH600J
1. If the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is working, it is lit in orange.

2. If it is connected properly to the network, the LED is green when in ad-hoc
mode or 802.11 ad-hoc mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching
for devices. The LED will light after a few seconds.
Print the configuration page to verify settings.
Note
For more information about printing a configuration page, see "Print List".
Reference
p.158 Printing the configuration page
Checking the Signal

When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave status using the control panel.
A Press [System Settings].
B Press [Interface Settings].
C Press [IEEE 802.11b].
D Press [Wireless LAN Signal].
The machine's radio wave status appears.
E After checking radio wave status, press [Exit].
F Press the {User Tools} key to return to the User Tools menu.
Note
To check the radio wave status, press [IEEE 802.11b] under [LAN Type] on the
[Network] screen.
14
Network Settings
Network Settings
This section describes the network settings you can change with User Tools (System Settings). Make settings according to functions you want to use and the interface to be connected.
Important
These settings should be made by the systems administrator, or after consulting with the systems administrator.
Settings Required to Use the Printer

This section lists the settings required for using the printer function.
Ethernet
This section lists the settings required for using the printer function with an Ethernet connection.
For details about specifying the settings, see "Interface Settings" and "File Transfer".
Heading
Setting Item
Setting Requirements
interface settings/Network
Machine IPv4 Address
Mandatory
IPv4 Gateway Address
As required
As required
As required
IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
NCP Delivery Protocol
As required
NW Frame Type
As required
SMB Computer Name
As required
SMB Work Group
As required
Ethernet Speed
As required
LAN Type
Mandatory
Permit SNMPv3 Communication
As required
Permit SSL/TLS Communication
As required
Host Name
As required
15

Heading
Setting Item
Machine Name
As required
Note
IPv6 can be used only for the printer function.
In [Effective Protocol], check that the protocol you want to use is set to [Active].
[LAN Type] is displayed when optional wireless LAN board is installed. If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected, the selected interface has priority.
Reference
p.52 Interface Settings
p.62 File Transfer
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394)

This section describes necessary set items for using Printer with IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Heading
Setting Item
interface settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 Address
Mandatory
interface settings/IEEE 1394 DDNS Configuration
As required
interface settings/IEEE 1394 Host Name
As required
interface settings/IEEE 1394 Domain Name
As required
interface settings/IEEE 1394 WINS Configuration
As required
interface settings/IEEE 1394 IPv4 over 1394
Mandatory
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
Note
[IEEE 1394]appears when optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
As to [Effective Protocol], check if the protocol to use is set as [Active].

Reference
p.62 File Transfer
16
Network Settings
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)

This section describes necessary set items for using Printer with IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN).
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
As required
As required
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
As required
NW Frame Type
As required
SMB Computer Name
As required
SMB Work Group
As required
LAN Type
Mandatory
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Machine Name
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Mandatory
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
17
Note
[IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when optional wireless LAN interface board is installed. If both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function

This section describes necessary set items for sending e-mail.
Ethernet
This section describes necessary set items for sending e-mail with Ethernet cable.
Heading
18
Setting Item
Mandatory
Mandatory
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
Ethernet Speed
As required
LAN Type
Mandatory
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
SMTP Server
Mandatory
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
As required
File Transfer
Administrator's E-mail Address
As required
File Transfer
E-mail Communication Port
As required
File Transfer
Program/Change/
Delete E-mail Message
As required
Network Settings
Heading
Setting Item
File Transfer
Scanner Resend Interval Time
As required
File Transfer
Number of Scanner Resends
As required
Note
[LAN Type] is displayed when optional wireless LAN interface board is installed. If both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected, the
selected interface takes precedence.
When setting [POP before SMTP] to [On], also make setting for[Reception Protocol] and [POP3/IMAP4 Settings].
When setting [POP before SMTP] to [On], check [POP3] port number in [E-mail
Communication Port].
Reference
p.62 File Transfer

This section describes necessary set items for sending e-mail with IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
As required
As required
As required
Mandatory
Mandatory
DNS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
File Transfer
SMTP Server
Mandatory
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
19

Heading
Setting Item
File Transfer
Program/Change/
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Note
[IEEE 1394] is displayed when optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.

When setting [POP before SMTP] to [On], also make setting for [Reception Protocol] and [POP3/IMAP4 Settings].
Reference
p.62 File Transfer

This section describes necessary set items for sending e-mail with IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN).
Heading
20
Setting Item
Mandatory
Mandatory
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
LAN Type
Mandatory
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Mandatory
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
Network Settings
Heading
Setting Item
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
File Transfer
SMTP Server
Mandatory
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
As required
File Transfer
POP before SMTP
As required
File Transfer
Reception Protocol
As required
File Transfer
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
Program/Change/
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Note
When setting [POP before SMTP] to [On], also make setting for [Reception Protocol] and [POP3/IMAP4 Settings].
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
21
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder Function

This section describes necessary set items for sending file.
Ethernet
This section describes necessary set items for sending file with ethernet cable.
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
Mandatory
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
Ethernet Speed
As required
LAN Type
Mandatory
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Note
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
22
Network Settings

This section describes necessary set items for sending file with IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
As required
As required
As required
Mandatory
Mandatory
DNS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Note
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
23

This section describes necessary set items for sending file with IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN).
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
Mandatory
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
LAN Type
Mandatory
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Mandatory
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
interface settings
/IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Note
[IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when optional wireless LAN interface board is installed. If both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are
connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
24
Network Settings
Settings Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner

This section describes necessary set items for delivering data to network.
Ethernet
This section describes necessary set items for delivering data to network with
ethernet cable.
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
Ethernet Speed
As required
LAN Type
Mandatory
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
File Transfer
Delivery Option
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Note
[LAN Type] is displayed when optional wireless LAN interface board is installed. When both ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected,
the selected interface takes precedence.
If [Delivery Option] is set to [On], check that IPv4 Address is set.
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
25

IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
As required
As required
As required
Mandatory
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
File Transfer
Delivery Option
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Note

Reference
p.62 File Transfer
26
Network Settings

IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
LAN Type
Mandatory
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Mandatory
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
File Transfer
Delivery Option
As required
File Transfer
As required
File Transfer
As required
Note
[IEEE 802.11b] and [LAN Type] are displayed when optional wireless LAN interface board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b)
are connected, the selected interface takes precedence.
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
27
Settings Required to Use Network TWAIN Scanner

This section describes necessary set items for using TWAIN Scanner under the
network environment.
Ethernet
This section describes necessary set items for using network TWAIN Scanner
with Ethernet cable.
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
LAN Type
Mandatory
Ethernet Speed
As required
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Note
[LAN Type] is displayed when optional wireless LAN interface board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected,
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
28
Network Settings

with IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
As required
As required
As required
Mandatory
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
Note

Reference
p.62 File Transfer
29

with IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
LAN Type
Mandatory
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Mandatory
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
Note
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
30
Network Settings
Settings Required to Use Document Server

This section describes necessary set items for using Document Server function
under the network environment.
Ethernet
with Ethernet cable.
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
Ethernet Speed
As required
LAN Type
Mandatory
As required
As required
Host Name
As required
Note
[LAN Type] is displayed when optional wireless LAN interface board is installed. When both Ethernet and wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) are connected,
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
31

with IEEE 1394 interface cable.
Heading
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
As required
As required
As required
Mandatory
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
Note

Reference
p.62 File Transfer

with IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
Heading
32
Setting Item
Mandatory
As required
DNS Configuration
As required
DDNS Configuration
As required
Domain Name
As required
WINS Configuration
As required
Effective Protocol
Mandatory
LAN Type
As required/Mandatory
As required
Network Settings
Heading
Setting Item
As required
Host Name
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Communication Mode
Mandatory
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
SSID Setting
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Channel
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Security Method
As required
interface settings/
IEEE 802.11b
Transmission Speed
As required
Note
Reference
p.62 File Transfer
Using Utilities to Make Settings

The network settings can be specified not only on the machines control panel
but also using utilities such as Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, and telnet.
Note
For details about using Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image Monitor",
Network Guide.
For details about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see "Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin", Network Guide.
For Details about using telnet, see "Remote Maintenance", Network Guide.
Reference
"Using Web Image Monitor" Network Guide
"Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin" Network Guide

"Remote Maintenance by telnet" Network Guide
33
Interface Settings
Change set values of [Interface Settings] in [System Settings] of this machine by using Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, and telnet.
[Network][Machine IPv4 Address][Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]

Web Image Monitor:Can be used for specifying the setting.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin:Can be used for specifying the setting.
telnet:Can be used for specifying the setting.
[Network][Machine IPv4 Address][Specify][IPv4 Address]
[Network][Machine IPv4 Address][Specify][Sub-net Mask]
[Network][IPv4 Gateway Address]
[Network][Machine IPv6 Address][Manual Configuration Address]
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin:Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
[Network][IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration]
[Network][DNS Configuration][Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
34
Network Settings
[Network][DNS Configuration][Specify][DNS Server1-3]

[Network][DDNS Configuration]
[Network][Domain Name][Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
[Network][Domain Name][Specify] [Domain Name]
[Network][WINS Configuration][WINS Server]
[Network][WINS Configuration][Scope ID]
[Network][Effective Protocol][IPv4]
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin:You can make the TCP/IP settings if
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is communicating with the machine using
IPX/SPX.
[Network][Effective Protocol][IPv6]
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin:You can make the TCP/IP settings if
IPX/SPX.
35
[Network][Effective Protocol][NetWare]
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin:You can make the IPX/SPX settings if
TCP/IP.
[Network][Effective Protocol][Net BEUI]

[Network][Effective Protocol][AppleTalk]
[Network][NCP Delivery Protocol]
telnet:Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
[Network][NW Frame Type][Auto Select]
[Network][NW Frame Type][Ethernet II]
[Network][NW Frame Type][Ethernet 802.2]
[Network][NW Frame Type][Ethernet 802.3]
36
Network Settings
[Network][NW Frame Type][Ethernet SNAP]

[Network][SMB Computer Name]

[Network][SMB Work Group]
[Network][Ethernet Speed]
Web Image Monitor:Cannot be used for specifying the setting.
[Network][LAN Type][Ethernet]
[Network][LAN Type][IEEE 802.11b]
[Network][Permit SNMPv3 Communication]
[Network][Permit SSL/TLS Communication]
37
[Network][Host Name]
[Network][Machine Name]
[IEEE 1394][IPv4 Address][Auto-Obtain (DHCP)]
[IEEE 1394][IPv4 Address][Specify][Machine IPv4 Address]
[IEEE 1394][IPv4 Address][Specify][Sub-net Mask]
[IEEE 1394][DDNS Configuration]
[IEEE 1394][IPv4 over 1394]
[IEEE 1394][WINS Configuration][WINS Server]
38
Network Settings
[IEEE 1394][WINS Configuration][Scope ID]

[IEEE 1394][Host Name]

[IEEE 1394][Domain Name]
[IEEE 802.11b][Communication Mode]
[IEEE 802.11b][SSID Setting]
[IEEE 802.11b][Channel]
[IEEE 802.11b][Security Method]
[IEEE 802.11b][Transmission Speed]
39
[File Transfer][Delivery Option]

[File Transfer][SMTP Server][Server Name]

[File Transfer][SMTP Server][Port No.]
[File Transfer][SMTP Authentication]
[File Transfer][POP before SMTP]
[File Transfer][Reception Protocol]
[File Transfer][POP3/IMAP4 Settings][Server Name]
[File Transfer][POP3/IMAP4 Settings][Encryption]
40
Network Settings
[File Transfer][Administrator's E-mail Address]

[File Transfer][E-mail Communication Port]

[File Transfer][E-mail Reception Interval]
[File Transfer][Max. Reception E-mail Size]
[File Transfer][E-mail Storage in Server]
[File Transfer][Default User Name/Password (Send)][SMB User Name]
[File Transfer][Default User Name/Password (Send)][SMB Password]
[File Transfer][Default User Name/Password (Send)][FTP User Name]
41
[File Transfer][Default User Name/Password (Send)][FTP Password]

[File Transfer][Default User Name/Password (Send)][NCP User Name]

[File Transfer][Default User Name/Password (Send)][NCP Password]
[File Transfer][Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message][Program/Change]
[File Transfer][Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message][Delete]
[File Transfer][Scanner Resend Interval Time]
[File Transfer][Number of Scanner Resends]
42
2. System Settings
This chapter describes various items of [System Settings] available in this machine.
General Features
This section describes various items of [General Features] under [System Settings].
Default settings are shown in bold type.
For the procedure of entering the [System Settings], see "Accessing User tools
(System Settings)".
Program/Change/Delete User Text

You can register character strings you use frequently when specifying settings, such as .com" and Regards".
You can register up to 40 items.
Program/Change
B Check that [General Features] is selected.
C Press [Program/Change/Delete User Text].
D Press [Program/Change]
E Select the user text you want to change.
To program new user text, press [Not Programmed].
F Press [OK].
G Press [Exit].
Delete
B Check that [General Features] is selected.
C Press [Program/Change/Delete User Text].
D Press [Delete].
E Select the user text you want to delete.
F Press [Clear].
G Press [Exit].
Panel Key Sound
The beeper (key tone) sounds when a key is pressed.
Low
Medium
High
Off
43
System Settings
Warmup Beeper (copier/Document Server)

You can have the beeper sound when the machine becomes ready to copy after leaving Energy Saver mode, or when the power is turned on.
On
Off
Copy Count Display (copier/Document Server)
The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies made (count up) or
the number of copies yet to be made (count down).
Up
Down
Function Priority
You can specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation
switch is turned on, or when System Reset mode is turned on.
Copier
Document Server
Printer
Scanner
Print Priority
Print Priority is given to the mode selected.
Display Mode
Copier/Document Server
Printer
Interleave
Job Order
When [Interleave] is selected, the current print job will be interrupted after a
maximum of five sheets.
Function Reset Timer
You can set the length of time the machine waits before changing modes
when using the multi-access function.
This is useful if you are making many copies and have to change settings for
each copy. If you set a longer reset period, you can prevent interruption from
other functions.
The default time is three seconds.
Set Time
Immediate
When you select [Set Time], enter the time (330 seconds, in 1 second increments) using the number keys.
44
General Features
Interleave Print
You can set the timing for functions to switch when [Print Priority] has been set
to [Interleave].
Default: 10 sheets
Depending on printing time, set values may change.
The timing for functions can be set from 1 to 20 sheets.
Status Indicator
You can specify whether the status indicator shows the machine status or not.
On
Off
Screen Color Setting

You can select the screen color among from five types.
Blue Type
Blue & Gray Type
Gray Type
Green Type
Red Type
Output: Copier (copier)
You can specify a tray to which documents are delivered.
1. Finisher Shift Tray

2. Finisher Upper Tray
3. Finisher Booklet Tray
4. Interposer Lower Tray
5. Interposer Upper Tray
6. Tray 3
7. Tray 2
8. Tray 1
9. Tray 6
10. Tray 5
11. Tray 4
12. Tray 7
45
System Settings
Output: Document Server (Document Server)

Finisher AFE
Finisher Upper Tray
Finisher Shift Tray
Booklet Processor
Finisher Booklet Tray
Output: Printer (printer)

The output trays set on the printer driver have priority over the output tray
specified below.
Finisher AFE
Finisher Upper Tray
Finisher Shift Tray
Booklet Processor
Finisher Booklet Tray
Paper Tray Priority: Copier (copier)
You can specify the tray to supply paper for output.
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Tray 6
Tray 7
Paper Tray Priority: Printer (printer)
You can specify the tray to supply paper for output.
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Tray 6
Tray 7
46
General Features
System Status/Job List Display Time

You can specify how long to display the System Status and Job List display
for.
On
Off
By selecting [On], you can specify a display time between 10 and 999 seconds.
The timing is set to 15 second(s) by default.
Time Interval between Printing Jobs

You can set the length of interval between the end of a job and the start of a
new job.
If you select Set Time, enter the time, 0 - 999 seconds (in 1 second increments), using the number keys. Default value is 3 seconds.
Set Time
Do not set
ADF Original Table Elevation
You can set the timing for elevating the ADF original table.
When original is set
When [Start] is pressed
ADF Feed Speed
When you use thick paper, you can slow down the printing speed to avoid
fusing the image by selecting [slow].
Normal
Slow
Optimum for Thick Paper
You can set the optimum for thick paper to On or Off.
On
Off
Key Repeat
You can enable or disable repetition of an operation if a key on the screen or
control panel is pressed continuously.
Off
Normal
Repeat Time: Medium
Repeat Time: Long
47
System Settings
Z-fold position
Set the folding-back position in units of 1 mm when you specify Z-folding.
The machine is shipped from the factory with this value set to 2 mm (metric
version) or 0.1 inch (inch version).
The setting range of the folding position for each paper size is given below:
Metric version
A3: 2 - 25 mm
B4 JIS: 2 - 40 mm
A4: 2 - 10 mm
11 17: 2 - 20 mm
81/2 14: 2-35 mm
Inch version
A3: 0.1 - 1.0 inch
B4 JIS: 0.1 - 1.6 inch
A4: 0.1 - 0.4 inch
11 17: 0.1 - 0.8 inch
81/2 14: 0.1 - 1.4 inch
Note
If the Panel Key Sound setting is [Off], the beeper does not sound, whatever
the Warm Up Notice setting.
The Function Reset Timer setting is ignored if Interleave is set for Print Priority.
Reference
p.3 Accessing User Tools (System Settings)
"Function Compatibility", Copy/Document Server Reference
Output tray settings

Important
You cannot interrupt the current stapling job even if a stapling job is specified
by a different function.
When the 3000-sheet finisher or booklet finisher are installed and stapling or
shift sorting are specified for a job, the job will be delivered to the finisher
shift tray regardless of the output tray specified.
Paper that is fed from the bypass tray cannot be delivered to finisher trays.
48
Timer Settings
Timer Settings
This section describes various items of [Timer Settings] under [System Settings].
Auto Off Timer

After a specified period has passed, following job completion, the machine
automatically turns off, in order to conserve energy. This function is called
"Auto Off". The machine status after the Auto Off operation is referred to as
"Off mode", or "Sleep mode". For the Auto Off Timer, specify the time to
elapse before Auto Off.
The timing is set to "60 minute(s)" by default.
The time can be set from 10 seconds to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
Auto Off may not work when error messages appear.
Energy Saver Timer

Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching to lower-power
mode after copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
Panel Off Timer
Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching the panel off after
copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
The warm up time for making a copy from standby mode is 10 seconds.
Enter a time interval between 10 seconds and 240 minutes, using the number
keys.
System Auto Reset Timer
The System Reset setting automatically switches the screen to that of the function set in Function Priority when no operations are in progress, or when an
interrupted job is cleared. This setting determines the system reset interval.
On
Off
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys
The timing is set to "60 second(s)" by default.
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer (copier/Document Server)
Specifies the time to elapse before copier and Document Server modes reset.
On
Off
If [Off] is selected, the machine does not automatically switch to the user code
entry screen.
The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, using the number keys.
49
System Settings
Printer Auto Reset Timer (printer)

Specifies the time to elapse before the printer function resets.
On
Off
Scanner Auto Reset Timer (scanner)
Specifies the time to elapse before the scanner function resets.
On
Off
If [Off] is selected, the machine will not automatically switch to the user code
entry screen.
Set Date
Set the date for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.
To change between year, month, and day, press [] and [].
Set Time
Set the time for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.
Enter the time using the 24hour format (in 1 second increments).
To change between hours, minutes and seconds, press [] and [].
Auto Logout Timer
You can specify whether or not to automatically log out a user when the user
does not operate the machine for a specified period of time after logging in.
On
Off
When [On] is selected, the time can be set from 60 to 999 seconds, in one second increments, using the number keys.
Weekly Timer Code
Set an eight-digit code to turn the main power on and off at the time set in
Weekly Timer.
Off
On
If On is selected, enter the Weekly Timer Code with number keys. Not doing so may result in the machine being disabled, even if the power is turned
on.
50
Timer Settings
Weekly Timer: Monday-Sunday

Set the time to turn on/off the power for each day of the week.
Power On Time
Power Off Time
Enter the Power On Time and the Power Off Time using the 24-hour system.
Enter the "hour" and "minute" using the number keys.
51
System Settings
Interface Settings
This section describes various items of [Interface Settings] under [System Settings].
Network
This section describes various items of [Network] under [Interface Settings].

Before using this machine in the network environment, you must configure
the IP address and subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], enter the [Machine IPv4 Address] and [Sub-net Mask]
as "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" ("x" indicates a number).
If you install the optional IEEE 1394 interface board and use the IEEE 1394 interface, you must set the address of the domain, different from the [IPv4 Address] of [IEEE 1394]. If you intend to set the address for the same domain, set
a different value for the [Sub-net Mask].
When you select [Specify], be sure not to set the same [Machine IPv4 Address] as
that of another machines on the network.
The physical address (MAC address) also appears.
If you use the interface for Ethernet and IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) at the same
time, settings must be made carefully.
Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
Specify
Machine IPv4 Address: 011.022.033.044
Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000
A gateway is a connection or interchange point between two networks.
Configure the gateway address for the router or host computer used as a gateway.
IPv4 Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000
You can specify the machines IPv6 network address.
Link-local Address
The machines specified link-local address appears.
manual Configuration Address
The machines manually configuration address appears.
Stateless Address: 1-5
The specified stateless address appears.
The machines IPv6 gateway address appears.
52
Interface Settings

You can set IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration to Active or Inactive.
Active
Inactive
DNS Configuration
Make settings for the DNS server.
When you select [Specify], enter the [DNS Server] IP address as xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"(x"
indicates a number).
Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
Specify
DNS Server 1: 000.000.000.000
DNS Server 2: 000.000.000.000
DNS Server 3: 000.000.000.000
DDNS Configuration
You can specify the DDNS settings.
Active
Inactive
Domain Name
You can specify the domain name.
Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
Specify
WINS Configuration
You can specify the WINS server settings.
If [On] is selected, enter the [WINS Server] IP address as xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"(x"
indicates a number).
If DHCP is in use, specify the [Scope ID].
Enter a [Scope ID] using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
On
Primary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
Secondary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
Scope ID
Off
Effective Protocol
Select the protocol to use in the network.
IPv4: Active / Inactive
IPv6: Active / Inactive
NetWare: Active / Inactive
NetBEUI: Active / Inactive
AppleTalk: Active / Inactive
53
System Settings

Select the protocol for NCP delivery.
IPX Priority
TCP/IP Priority
IPX Only
TCP/IP Only
NW Frame Type
Select the frame type when you use NetWare.
Auto Select
Ethernet II
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet SNAP
SMB Computer Name
Specify the SMB computer name.
Enter the computer name using up to 15 alphanumerical characters.
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.
Setting a computer name starting with RNP and rnp is inhibited.
Use uppercase letters for alphabet.
SMB Work Group
Specify the SMB work group.
Enter the computer name using up to 15 alphanumerical characters.
"*+,/:;<>=?[\]|. and spaces cannot be entered.
Use uppercase letters for alphabet.
Ethernet Speed
Set the access speed for networks.
Select a speed that matches your network environment. [Auto Select] should
usually be selected.
Auto Select
10Mbps Full Duplex
10Mbps Half Duplex
100Mbps Full Duplex
100Mbps Half Duplex
54
Interface Settings
LAN Type
When you have installed the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit, select interface, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) or Ethernet.
Ethernet
IEEE 802.11b
Appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.
If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected interface takes precedence.
Ping Command
Check the network connection with ping command using given IP address.
If you fail to connect to the network, check the following, and then retry the
ping command.
Check TCP/IP of the printer is active.
Check that the machine with assigned IP address is connected to the network.
There is a possibility that same IP address is used for the specified equipment.
Set the encrypted communication of SNMPv3.
Encryption Only
Encryption/Clear Text
If you set to [Encryption Only], you need to set password for the machine.
Set the encrypted communication of SSL/TLS.
Ciphertext Only
Ciphertext Priority
Ciphertext/Clear Text
If you set to [Ciphertext Only], you need to install the server authentification for
the machine.
Host Name
Specify the host name.
Enter the host name using up to 63 alphanumerical characters.
Machine Name
Specify the machine name.
Enter the machine name using up to 31 alphanumerical characters.
55
System Settings
Parallel Interface
This section describes various items of [Parallel Interface] under [Interface Settings].
[Parallel Interface] is displayed when this machine is installed with the IEEE 1284
interface board (optional).
Parallel Timing
Sets the timing for the control signal of the parallel interface.
ACK outside
ACK inside
STB down
Parallel Communication Speed

Sets the communication speed for the parallel interface.
High Speed
Standard
Selection Signal Status
Sets the level for the select signal of the parallel interface.
High
Low
Input Prime
Sets whether to validate or invalidate the input prime signal upon receipt.
Active
Inactive
Bidirectional Communication
Sets the printer's response mode to a status acquisition request when using a
parallel interface.
On
Off
When set to [Off], bidirectional communication function will be disabled. Also, printer driver will not be installed under Windows Auto Detect function.
Signal Control
Sets procedure to error during printing.
Job Acceptance Priority
Printer Priority
56
Interface Settings
IEEE 1394
This section describes various items of [IEEE 1394] under [Interface Settings].
[IEEE 1394] is displayed when this machine is installed with the IEEE 1394 interface board (optional).
IPv4 Address
When you connect the machine to a network using the IEEE 1394 interface,
you must configure the IP address and subnet mask.
When you select [Specify], enter the [Machine IPv4 Address] and [Sub-net Mask]
as xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx(x indicates a number).
When you use the IEEE 1394 interface on a network, you cannot use the Ethernet interface in the same domain. To use both interfaces in the same domain, set different values for the [Sub-net Mask].
If you use the interface for Ethernet and IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) at the same
time, settings must be made carefully.
Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
Specify
Machine IPv4 Address: 000.000.000.000
Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000
DDNS Configuration
You can specify the DDNS settings.
Active
Inactive
Host Name
Specify the host name.
Enter the host name using up to 63 alphanumerical characters.
Domain Name
Make settings for the domain name.
Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
Specify
Enter the domain name using up to 63 alphanumerical characters.
57
System Settings
WINS Configuration
You can specify the WINS server settings.
If [On] is selected, specify the [WINS Server] IP address as xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
(xxx" indicates a number).
If DHCP is in use, specify the [Scope ID].
Enter [Scope ID] using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
On
Primary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
Secondary WINS Server: 000.000.000.000
Scope ID
Off
IPv4 over 1394

When you use the IP over 1394 function of the IEEE 1394 interface to connect
the machine to the network, or you print from computer with the IP over 1394
driver, you must specify [Active] for [IP over 1394].
Active
Inactive
Printing with IP over 1394 is possible under Windows Me/XP and Windows
Server 2003.
SCSI print (SBP-2)
When you print using the SCSI print client function supported by Windows
2000/XP, or Windows Server 2003, you must set [SCSI print (SBP-2)].
Active
Inactive
Bidirectional SCSI print
Specifies the printer's response mode etc. for status requests when using the
IEEE 1394 interface.
On
Off
If this is set to [Off] bidirectional communication will not work.
58
Interface Settings
IEEE 802.11b
This section describes various items of [IEEE 802.11b] under [Interface Settings].
[IEEE 802.11b] is displayed when this machine is installed with the wireless LAN
interface board (optional).
Implement respective settings simultaneously.
Communication Mode
Be sure to make all settings simultaneously.
802.11 Ad-hoc
Ad-hoc
Infrastructure
SSID Setting
Specifies SSID to distinguish the access point in infrastructure mode or 802.11
ad-hoc mode.
The characters that can be used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).
If blank is specified in 802.11b ad-hoc mode or ad-hoc mode, ASSID" appears.
Channel
Specifies a channel when you select 802.11b ad-hoc mode or ad-hoc mode.
The following channels are available:
Metric version: 1-14
Inch version: 1-11
Security Method
Specifies the encryption of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
If set to [WEP], always enter WEP key. If set to [WPA], set encryption method
and authentication method.
You can specify WPA, if you set [Communication Mode] to [Infrastructure].
Off
WEP
WPA
WPA Encryption Method
Select either "TKIP" or "CCMP(AES)".
WPA Authent. Method
Select either "WPA-PSK" or "WPA802.1X)". If you have selected WPAPSK, enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8- 63 characters in ASCII code.
Wireless LAN Signal
Shows the radio wave conditions of the access point connected in infrastructure mode.
Radio wave status is displayed when you press [Wireless LAN Signal].
59
System Settings
Transmission Speed
Specifies the communication speed of the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
Auto Select
11Mbps Fixed
5.5Mbps Fixed
2Mbps Fixed
1Mbps Fixed
Restore Factory Defaults

You can return the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) settings to their defaults.
No
Yes
Print List
You can check items related to the network in use.
The configuration page shows the current network settings and network information.

B Press [Interface Settings].
C Press [Print List].
60
Interface Settings
D Press the {Start} key.

The configuration page is printed.
E Press [Exit].
F Press the {User Tools} key.
Note
You can also exit by pressing [Exit] on the User Tools main menu.
61
System Settings
File Transfer
This section describes various items of [File Transfer] under [System Settings].
Delivery Option
Enables or disables sending stored or scanned documents to ScanRouter V2
delivery server.
On
Main Delivery Server IPv4 Address: 000.000.000.000
Sub Delivery Server IPv4 Address: 000.000.000.000
Off
Set this option when specifying whether or not to use ScanRouter V2. If you
do, you will have to re-register I/O devices in ScanRouter V2.
Capture Server IP Address

Specify the capture server IP address.
This setting appears when the media link board is installed, and that the capture function is being used by the ScanRouter V2.
SMTP Server
If DNS is in use, enter the host name.
If DNS is not in use, enter the SMTP server IP address.
Server Name
Port No.
Enter the [Server Name] using up to 127 alphanumeric characters. Spaces cannot be used.
Enter [Port No.] between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then press
the {#} key.
The Port No. is set to 25 by default.
62
File Transfer
SMTP Authentication
You can configure SMTP authentication (PLAIN, LOGIN, CRAMMD5, DIGEST-MD5).
When sending e-mail to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server security level by authentication that requires entering the user name and password.
If the SMTP server requires authentication, set [SMTP Authentication] to [On],
and then specify [User Name], [Password], and [Encryption].
SMTP Authentication
On
User Name
Enter [User Name] using up to 191 alphanumeric characters. Spaces cannot be used. Depending on the SMTP server type, "realm" must be specified. Add "@" after the user name, as in "user name@realm".
E-mail Address
Password
Enter [Password] using up to 63 alphanumeric characters. Spaces cannot
be used.
Encryption: Auto / On / Off
[Encryption]-[Auto]: If the authentication method is PLAIN, LOGIN,
CRAM-MD5, or DIGEST-MD5.
[Encryption]-[On]: If the authentication method is CRAMMD5 or DIGEST-MD5.
[Encryption]-[Off]: If the authentication method is PLAIN, or LOGIN.
Off
POP before SMTP
You can configure POP authentication (POP before SMTP).
When sending e-mail to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server
security level by connecting to the POP server for authentication.
To enable POP server authentication before sending e-mail via the SMTP
server, set [POP before SMTP] to [On]. E-mail is sent to the SMTP server after the
time specified for [Wait Time after Authent.] has elapsed.
If you select [On], enter [Server Name] in [POP3/IMAP4 Setting]. Also, check the
port number for [POP3] in [E-mail Communication Port].
On
Wait Time after Authent.
Using the number keys, you can set [Wait Time after Authent.] from zero to
10,000 milliseconds, in increments of one millisecond. The timing is set
to 300msec by default.
User Name
Enter [User Name] using up to 63 alphanumeric characters. Spaces cannot be used.
E-mail Address
Password
Enter [Password] using up to 63 alphanumeric characters. Spaces cannot
be used.
Off
63
System Settings
Reception Protocol
Specify Reception Protocol for the function "Auto E-mail Notification". For
details about the function "Auto E-mail Notification", see the Web ImageMonitor Help.
POP3
IMAP4
SMTP
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
Specify the POP3/IMAP4 server name for sending or receiving E-mail.The
specified POP3/IMAP4 server name is used for [POP before SMTP].
Server Name
If DNS is in use, enter the host name. If DNS is not in use, enter the
POP3/IMAP4 or server IP address. Enter POP3/IMAP4 [Server Name] using up to 127 alphanumeric characters. Spaces cannot be used.
Encryption
Auto
Password encryption is automatically set according to the POP/IMAP
server settings.
On
Encrypt password.
Off
Do not encrypt password.
On e-mailed scanned documents, if the sender is not specified this appears as
the sender's address.
If you have specified the user name and e-mail address in [SMTP Authentication], make sure to specify this setting.
Enter within up to 128 alphanumerical characters.
On e-mailed scanned documents, if [Auto Specify Sender Name] is [Off], specify
the sender.
Specify the port numbers for sending or receiving E-mail. The specified
POP3port number is used for [POP before SMTP].
POP3: 110
IMAP4: 143
SMTP: 25
Enter a port number between 1 and 65535 using the number keys, and then
press the [#] key.
64
File Transfer
E-mail Reception Interval

Specify, in minutes, the time interval for the function "Auto E-mail Notification" via POP3 or IMAP4 server. For details about the function "Auto E-mail
Notification", see the Web ImageMonitor Help.
On: 15 minute(s)
Off
If [On] is selected, the number of times can be set from 2 to 1440 in increments
of one minute, using the number keys.
Max. Reception E-mail Size

Specify the maximum reception e-mail size for the function "Auto E-mailNotification". For details about the function "Auto E-mail Notification", see the
Web ImageMonitor Help.
2MB
Using the number keys, enter a size from one to 50 MB in increments of one
megabyte.
E-mail Storage in Server
Specify whether or not to store received e-mails of the function "Auto E-mailNotification" on the POP3 or IMAP4 server.For details about the function
"Auto E-mail Notification", see the Web ImageMonitor Help.
Off
All
Errors Only
Default User Name/Password (Send)
You can specify the user name and password required when sending scan file
directly to a shared folder on a computer running Windows, to an FTP server,
or to a NetWare server.
SMB User Name
SMB Password
FTP User Name
FTP Password
NCP User Name
NCP Password
Enter in up to 128 alphanumerical characters.
65
System Settings
Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message

You can program, change, or delete the e-mail message used when sending
scan file as an attachment.
Program/Change
B Press [File Transfer].
C Press [Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message].
D Press [Program/Change].
E Press [Not Programmed].
F Press [Change].
G Enter a name, and the press [OK].
Enter the name using up to 20 alphanumerical characters.
H Press [Edit].
To start a new line, press [OK] to return to the e-mail message screen,
and then press [T] in "Select Line to Edit:".
I Enter the text, and then press [OK].
Enter up to five lines of text. Each line can consist of up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
Delete
B Press [File Transfer].
C Press [Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message].
D Press [Delete].
E Select the e-mail message to delete.
The confirmation message about deleting appears.
F Press [Yes].
Auto Specify Sender Name

Set whether or not to specify the name of the sender when sending e-mail.
On
If you select [On], the specified e-mail address will appear in the From:"
box. If you do not specify the senders address, the administrators e-mail
address will appear in the From:" box.
Off
If you select [Off], the specified e-mail address will appear in the From:" box,
but you cannot send e-mail without specifying the senders e-mail address.
66
File Transfer

Specifies the interval the machine waits before resending scan file, if they cannot be sent to the delivery server or mail server.
The interval time can be set from 60 to 900 seconds in one second increments,
using the number keys.
This setting is for the scanner function.

Sets a maximum number of times scan file is resent to the delivery server or
mail server.
On: 3 time(s)
Off
If [On] is selected, the number of times can be set from 1 to 99 using the number keys. This setting is for the scanner function.
67
System Settings
Administrator Tools
This section describes various items of [Administrator Tools] under [System Settings].
Administrator Tools are used by the administrator. To change these settings,
contact the administrator.
We recommend specifying Administrator Authentication before making Administrator Tools settings.
Address Book Management

You can add, change or delete information registered in the Address Book.
For details, see Address Book.
Program/Change
You can register and change names as well as user codes.
Names
You can register a name, key display, registration number, and title selection.
Auth. Info
You can register a user code, and specify the functions available to each
user code. You can also register user names and passwords to be used
when sending e-mail, sending files to folders, or accessing an LDAP
server.
Protection
You can register a protection code.
E-mail
You can register an e-mail address.
Folder
You can register the protocol, SMB, FTP, NCP, path.
Add to Group
You can put names registered in the Address Book into a group.
Delete
You can delete a name from the Address Book.
You can register up to 2,000 names.
You can register up to 500 user codes.
You can also register and manage names in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin provided with the printer scanner unit.
68
Administrator Tools
Address Book: Program/Change/Delete Group

Names registered in the Address Book can be added into a group.
You can then easily manage the names registered in each group.
Program/Change
You can register and change groups.
Names
You can register a name, key display, registration number, and title selection.
Programmed User/Group
You can check the names or groups registered in each group.
Protection
You can register a protection code.
Add to Group
You can put groups registered in the Address Book into a group.
Delete
You can delete a group from the Address Book.
You can register up to 100 groups.
You can also register and manage groups in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin provided with the printer scanner unit.
Address Book: Change Order

Changes the order of registered name.
You can rearrange the order of items on the same page, but you cannot move
items to another page.
For example, you cannot move an item from PLANNING ([OPQ]) to DAILY ([CD]).
B Press [Administrator Tools].
C Press [Address Book: Change Order].
69
System Settings
D
Press the name key to be move.
You can select a name using the number keys.

Press the name key in the place you want to move to.
The selected user key is moved to the selected position, and the user key
currently at the selected position is moved forward or backward.
If you move the selected user key forward, the user key currently at the selected position is moved backward.
If you move the selected user key backward, the user key currently at the
selected position is moved forward.
You can also select a name using the number keys.
70
Administrator Tools
Print Address Book: Destination List

You can print the destination list registered in the Address Book.
Print in Title 1 Order
Prints the Address Book in Title 1 order.
Print Group Dial List
Prints the group Address Book.
C Press [Print Address Book: Destination List].
D Select the print format.
E To print the list on two-sided pages, select [Print on 2 Sides].
F Press the {Start} key.
The list prints out.
Address Book: Edit Title

You can edit the title to easily find a user.
C Press [Address Book: Edit Title].
Press the title key you want to change.
71
System Settings
E
F
Enter the new name, and then press [OK].

Press [OK].
Address Book: Switch Title

Specifies the title to select a name.
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Back Up / Restore Address Book

You can back up the machines address book to external storage or restore the
backup copy from the external storage.
Back Up
You can back up the machines address book to external storage.
Restore
You can restore the backup copy of the address book from external storage.
Format
You can format the external storage.
Obtain Media Info
The free space and occupied space of the external storage are displayed.
Display / Print Counter
Allows you to view and print the number of prints.
Display/Print Counter
Displays the number of prints for each function (Total, and Copier, Printer,
A3/DLT, Duplex, Send/TX Total Color, Send/TX Total Black & White,
Scanner Send Color, Scanner Send Black & White, GPC, GPC Printer).
Print Counter List
Prints out a list of the number of prints made under each function.
Display / Clear / Print Counter per User
Allows you to view and print the numbers of prints accessed with user codes,
and to set those values to 0.
Press [UPrevious] and [TNext] to show all the numbers of prints.
The number of prints may differ from the counter value shown in Display /
Print Counter.
Print Counter
Print Counter List for All Users
Prints the counter values for all the users.
Clear Counter for All Users
Sets the counter value for all the users.
Print Counter List per User
Prints the counter values for each user.
Clear Counter per User
Sets the counter value for each user.
72
Administrator Tools
Scanner Counter
Print Counter List for All Users
Prints the counter values for all the users.
Clear Counter for All Users
Sets the counter value for all the users.
Print Counter List per User
Prints the counter values for each user.
Clear Counter per User
Sets the counter value for each user.
User Authentication Management

User Code Auth.
Using User Code Authentication, you can limit the available functions and
supervise their use.
When using User Code Authentication, register the user code.
Using the Printer PC Control function, you can obtain a log of prints corresponding to the codes entered using the printer driver.
If User Code Authentication has been specified, Auto color Selection cannot be used.
For details about Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP
Authentication, and Integration Server Authentication, consult your administrator.
Functions to Restrict
Copier
Printer
Document Server
Printer: PC Control
Scanner
Printer Job Authentication
Entire
Simple (Limitation)
Simple (All)
Basic Auth.
Windows Auth.
LDAP Auth.
Integration Svr. Auth.
Off
Enhanced Authentication Management
For details about this function, consult your administrator.
Administrator Authentication Management
73
System Settings
Program/Change Administrator
Key Counter Management
You can specify that functions that you want to manage with the key counter.
Copier
Document Server
Printer
Scanner
Extended Security
You can specify whether or not to use the extended security functions. For details about the extended security functions, consult your administrator.
Auto Delete File in Document Server
You can specify whether documents stored in the Document Server will or
will not be deleted after a specified period of time.
On: 3 day(s)
Off
If you select [On], documents stored subsequently are deleted after the specified period.
If you select [Off], documents are not automatically deleted.
If you select [On], enter a number of days from 1 to 180 (in 1 day increments).
The default is 3 days, this means documents are deleted 3 days (72 hours) after they are stored.
Delete All Files in Document Server
You can delete files stored in the Document Server, including files stored for
Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print under the printer
function.
No
Yes
Even if a password is always set, all documents are deleted.
A confirmation message appears. To delete all documents, select [Yes].
74
Administrator Tools
Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server

Program the LDAP server to find up e-mail destinations in the LDAP server
Address Book directly. This function is possible when sending scan files by email using the scanner.
Name
Server Name
Search Base
Port Number
Use Secure Connection (SSL)
Authentication
Search Conditions
Search Options
To start an LDAP search, make sure that the items listed below are set. For
other items, check your environment and make any necessary changes.
Server Name
Search Base
Port Number
Search Conditions
Authentication method selection
To use the LDAP server in Administrator Tools, select [On] under LDAP server.
This function supports LDAP Version 2.0 and 3.0. Ver 2.0 does not support
High Security authentication.
Program/Change
B Press [Administrator Tools], and then press [TNext] twice.
C Press [Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server].
D Select the LDAP server you want to program or change.
When programming the server, select [Not Programmed].
E
F
G
H
Set each item as necessary.

Press [OK] after setting each item.
Press [Exit] twice.
Press the {User Tools} key.
75
System Settings
Delete
C Press [Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server].
D Press [Delete].
E Select the LDAP server you want to delete.
F Press [Yes].
G Press [Exit].
H Press the {User Tools} key.
LDAP Search
You can specify whether or not to use the LDAP server for searching.
Off
On
If you select [Off], [Search LDAP] will not appear on the searching display.
AOF (Always On)
Specify whether or not to use Auto Off.
On
Off
Firmware Version
You can check the version of the software installed in this machine.
Network Security Level
Transfer Log Setting
Reference
p.179 Address Book
p.192 Printing the Counter for Each User

p.238 Counter
76
Administrator Tools

This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.
To program / change the LDAP server

C Press [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server].
D Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
E Select the LDAP server you want to program or change.
When programming the server, select [Not Programmed].
F Set each item as necessary.

G Press [OK] after setting each item.
For details about LDAP server, see "Programming the LDAP server".
H Press [Exit].
I Press the {User Tools} key.
Reference
p.78 Programming the LDAP server
To delete the programmed LDAP server

C Press [Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server].
D Press [Delete] is selected.
E Select the LDAP server you want to delete.
F Press [Yes].
G Press [Exit].
77
System Settings
Programming the LDAP server

This section explains how to specify the LDAP server settings.
To enter an identification name
A Press [Change] under Name.
Register a name for the LDAP server that will appear on the server selection
screen of the LDAP search operation.
B Enter the servers identification name.

C Press [OK].
To enter a server name
A Press [Change] under Server Name.

Register the LDAP servers host name or IPv4 address.
B Enter the LDAP server name.

C Press [OK].
To enter the search base
A Press [Change] under Search Base.

Select a route folder to start the search from e-mail addresses registered in the
selected folder are search targets.
B Enter the search base.

For example, if the search target is the sales department of ABC company, enter dc=sales department, o=ABC. (In this example, the description is for an
active directory. dc is for the organization unit, and o is for the company.)
Search base registration may be required depending on your server environment. When registration is required, unspecified searches will result in error.
Check you server environment and enter any required specifications.
C Press [OK].
78
Administrator Tools
To enter a port number
A Press [Change] under Port No..

Specify the port number for communicating with the LDAP server. Specify a
port that is compliant with your environment.
B Enter the port number using the number keys, and then press the {#} key.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to 636.
To start SSL communication
A Press [On].
Use SSL to communicate with the LDAP server.
To use SSL, the LDAP server must support SSL.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to "689".
SSL setting must be enabled on this machine. For details, consult your network administrator.
B Enter the port number using the number keys, and then press the {#} key.
When SSL is set to [On], the port number automatically changes to 636.
To set authentication
A Press [TNext].
B Press [On] or [High Security] under Authentication.
To make a search request to the LDAP server, use the administrator account
for authentication.
Authentication settings must comply with your servers authentication settings. Check your server settings before setting this machine.
[High Security] is available only with LDAP Version 3.0.
When [High Security] is selected, the administrator password is encrypted before it is sent to the network. When [On] is selected, the password is sent without encryption.
79
System Settings
To enter the user name and password
A Press [Change] under Name.

When [On] or [High Security] is selected for the authentication setting, use the
administrator account name and password. Do not enter the administrator
account name and password when using authentication for each individual
or each search.
B Enter the user name, and then press [OK].

Procedures for the user name setting differ depending on server environment. Check your server environment before making the setting.
Example: Domain Name\User Name, User Name@Domain Name,
CN=Name, OU=Department Name, DC=Server Name
C Press [Change] under Password.

D Enter the password, and then press [OK].
The user name and password are required for administrator authentication to
access the LDAP server.
You can set the user name and password in this machine's Address Book to
allow individual authentication access to the LDAP server. Use Administrator Tools to select the user name and password you want to use.
To test the connection
A Press [Connection Test].
Access the LDAP server to check the proper connection is established. Check
authentication works according to the authentication settings.
A connection test is carried out.
B Press [OK].
If the connection test fails, check your settings and try again.
This function does not check search conditions or the search base.
80
Administrator Tools
To set search conditions
A Press [TNext] twice.

B Press [Change] for items you want to use as search conditions from the following: [Name], [E-mail Address], [Company Name], and [Department Name].
You can enter an attribute as a typical search keyword. Using the entered attribute, the function searches the LDAP servers Address Book.
C Enter the attribute you want to use when searching for e-mail addresses,
and then press [OK].
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check
the attribute value complies with your server environment before setting it.
You can leave items blank, but you cannot leave attributes blank when
searching for e-mail addresses from the LDAP server Address Book.
To set search options
A Press [TNext] three times.

B Press [Change] under "Attribute".
C Enter the attribute you want to use when searching for e-mail addresses,
and then press [OK].

To search the LDAP server data using a keyword other than prepared keywords such as Name, E-mail Address, Company Name, and Department
Name, specify the attribute for the keyword registered in your LDAP server,
and the name to be displayed on the control panel during the search. For example, to search e-mail addresses by employee number, enter employeeNo. in the Attribute field, and Employee No. in the key display field.
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment. Check
the attribute complies with your server environment before setting it.
D Press [Change] under "Key Display".
81
System Settings
E Enter the key display, and then press [OK].

The registered key display appears as a keyword for searching LDAP.
Without key display registration
With key display registration
The key does not appear on the search screen unless both Attribute and
Key Display are registered. Make sure you register both to use the optional
search.
Reference
p.233 LDAP Authentication
82
System Settings on Main and Sub-machines

This section explains the System Settings on the two machines during Connect
Copy.
While combined copying is under way, the {User Tools} keys of the sub-machines remain disabled. If it is desired to change the defaults, press [Combined
Copying] that appears in reverse video on the control screen of the main machine,
and then, clear the combined copying before making changes.
General Features
How the defaults in the General Features of copying of the main and sub-machines are used in combined copying will be explained.
Program/Change/Delete User Text

The main and sub-machines follow their respective set values.
Panel Key Sound
Warm Up Notice (copier/Document Server)
Copy Count Display (copier/Document Server)
The set values of the main and sub-machines do not affect the combined
copying.
The copy counter is always displayed as Up (count up).
Function Priority
copying.
When the Auto Reset time of the main machine has lapsed, Connect Copy
will be cancelled. After that, the machine switches back to the mode selected in Function Priority upon reaching the System Reset time.
Print Priority
copying.
When the Auto Reset time of the main machine has lapsed, Connect Copy
will be cancelled. After that, the machine switches back to the mode selected in Function Priority upon reaching the System Reset time.
copying.
83
System Settings
Interleave Print
copying.
Output: Copier
Output: Document Server
Output: Printer
ADF Original Table Elevation
The main machine follows the values that are set in it. The set values of the
sub-machines do not affect the combined copying.
System Status/Job List Display Time
Key Repeat
Z-fold Position
Make the same settings on both machines.
Timer Settings
How the defaults in the Timer Settings of copying of the main and sub-machines
are used in combined copying will be explained.
Auto Off Timer

Energy Saver Timer
copying.
In Connect Copy mode, neither machine will enter Energy Saver modes
(Low Power mode, or Energy Saver mode).
84
Power Off Timer

copying.
In Connect Copy mode, neither machine will enter Energy Saver modes
(Low Power mode, or Energy Saver mode). When the preset time elapses
after the combined copying is cleared, the machines will transit to the power-saving status.

The set values of the main machine do not affect the combined copying.
The sub-machines can be used with the interruption copying function
only.
When the sub-machines is copying by interruption, the interruption copying is cleared as the time period set on the sub-machines elapses.
Copy/Document Server Auto Reset Timer
copying.
Printer Auto Reset Timer
copying.
Scanner Auto Reset Timer
copying.
Set Date
Set Time
Auto Logout Timer
copying.
Weekly Timer Code
copying.
Weekly Timer: Monday-Sunday
copying.
In Connect Copy mode, Weekly timer settings on the sub-machine will be
disabled.
85
System Settings
Administrator Tools
How the defaults in the Administrator Tools of copying of the main and sub-machines are used in combined copying will be explained.

copying.
Address Book: Program/Change/Delete Group

copying.
copying.
copying.
copying.
Address Book: Select Title
copying.
Back Up / Restore Address Book
copying.
Display/Print Counter
copying.
Display/Clear/Print Counter per User
copying.
86
Enhanced Authentication Management

The main machine follows the values that are set in it. The sub-machines
follows the settings made on the main machine, regardless of the settings
made in it.
made in it.
In combined copying, management performed using the coin rack or a preset keycard can only be done by using the adding method.
Extended Security
copying.
Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server
copying.
LDAP Search
copying.
AOF (Always On)
copying.
During combined copying, neither the main machine nor the sub-machines is automatically switched off. Once the combined copying is
cleared, the power is cut off as the time period set in "Auto-Off Time Setting" elapses in accordance with the setting of AOF.
87
System Settings
Firmware Version
copying.
copying.
Auto Erase Memory Setting

copying.
Erase All Memory
copying.
Delete All Logs
Data Security for Copying
Back Up Printing: Delete All Documents
copying.
Back Up Printing: Settings for Compressing
copying.
Settings for Back Up Printing: Initial Values for Types
copying.
Settings for Back Up Printing: Initial Values for Resolution
copying.
88
3. Tray Paper Settings

This section describes various items of {Tray Paper Settings} available in this machine. If the specified paper size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded
in the paper tray, a misfeed might occur because the correct paper size was not
detected.
Tray Paper Settings

Changing Tray Paper Settings
This section describes how to change the settings of Tray Paper Settings.
A Press the {Tray Paper Settings} key.
APD017S
B Select the tray that you want to change the settings.
89
Tray Paper Settings
C Change settings, and then press [OK].
3
Quitting Tray Paper Settings
This section describes how to change the settings of Tray Paper Settings.
A Press the {Tray Paper Settings} key.
APD017S
Note
You can also quit Tray Paper Settings by pressing [Exit].
90
Items of Tray Paper Settings

Tray 1
You can set the display to show the type of paper loaded the tray 1 (LCT).
This information is used by the print function to automatically select the paper tray.
The paper types
Do not Display
Recycled Paper
Special Paper
Letterhead
Color Paper 1
Color Paper 2
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Ivory
Orange
Pink
Red
Gray
Preprinted Paper
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Prepunched Paper
The paper sizes (without the LCT, A3 / 1117 Tray Unit TK5000)
"1181/2K", "A4K"
Note
The paper size is fixed for a paper size. It is not available to change the size.
The paper sizes (utilizing the LCT, A3 / 1117 Tray Unit TK5000)
"1117L", "81/214L", "81/211L", "1181/2K", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L",
"B4 JISL"
Custom Size: 210.0 - 305.0 mm (vertically) and 210 - 439.0 mm (horizontally).
Note
The paper guide of the optional LCT is fixed for a paper size. Contact
your service representative if you need to change the paper size.
91
Tray Paper Settings
Copying Method in Duplex

2 Sided Copy
1 Sided Copy
Apply Auto Paper Select
Yes
No
Thick Paper Setting
If the LCT (A3 / 1117 Tray Unit TK5000) is utilized, this function is not
available.
On
Off
Designation Sheet 1 - 9
You can specify and display the paper tray to set designation sheets. You can
also specify the display time and copying method for two sided copying.
Display Time
You can select [At Mode Selected] or [Full Time].
You can select [2 Sided Copy] or [1 Sided Copy].
Copy Method in Duplex is enabled only when you select [At Mode Selected] in Display Time.
Front Cover
You can specify and display the paper tray to set front cover sheets. You can
Display Time
Back Cover
You can specify and display the paper tray to set back cover sheets. You can
Display Time
92
Slip Sheets
You can specify and display the paper tray in which to set slip sheets. You
can also specify the display time.
Display Time
Separation Sheets
Display Time
Tray 2 - 3
You can set the display to show the type of paper loaded in each of the trays
The paper types
Do not Display
Recycled Paper
Special Paper
Letterhead
Color Paper 1
Color Paper 2
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Ivory
Orange
Pink
Red
Gray
OHP (Transparency)
Translucent Paper
Preprinted Paper
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Prepunched Paper
93
Tray Paper Settings
The paper sizes

"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "1115L", "1114L", "1015L",
"1014L", "81/214L", "81/213L", "81/211L", "11"81/2K", "81/414L",
"8 1 / 4 13L", "813L", "810L", "71 / 4 10 1 / 2 L", "10 1 / 2 7 1 / 4 L",
"51/281/2L", "81/251/2K", "A3L", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L",
"B4 JISL", "B5 JISK", "B5 JISL", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Custom Size:
Metric version: Max. 330.2 mm (vertically) and 458.0 mm (horizontally).
Inch version: Max. 13.00 inch (vertically) and 18.03 inch (horizontally).
2 Sided Copy
1 Sided Copy

Yes
No
Thick Paper Setting
On
Off
Display Time
Front Cover
Display Time
94
Back Cover
Display Time
Slip Sheets
Display Time
Separation Sheets
Display Time
Tray 4
You can set the display to show the type of paper loaded in the tray 4.
The paper types utilizing LCIT RT5000 (A4 LCT)
If the LCIT RT5000 is utilized, the paper types are available as follows:
Do not Display
Recycled Paper
Special Paper
Letterhead
Color Paper 1
Color Paper 2
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Ivory
Orange
Pink
Red
Gray
95
Tray Paper Settings
OHP (Transparency)
Translucent Paper
Preprinted Paper
Prepunched Paper
Index Paper
The Index Paper is available using the Index Fence.
Tab Stock
Tab Position Shift
Number of Tabs

Do not Display
Recycled Paper
Special Paper
Letterhead
Color Paper 1
Color Paper 2
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Ivory
Orange
Pink
Red
Gray
OHP (Transparency)
Translucent Paper
Preprinted Paper
Prepunched Paper
Index Paper
Tab Stock
Tab Position Shift
Number of Tabs
96
The paper sizes utilizing LCIT RT5000 (A4 LCT)

If the LCIT RT5000 is utilized, the paper sizes are available as follows:
"Auto Detect", "1181/2K", "81/251/2K", "51/281/2L", "A4K", "A5K",
"A5L", "B5 JISK"
Custom Size: 139.0 - 230.0 mm (vertically) and 210.0 - 305.0 mm (horizontally)
Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "118 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81/211L", "51/281/2L", "81/251/2K, "81/213L", "81/413L",
"813L", "101 /2 71 /4 K", "71 /4 101 /2 L", "1115L", "1014L",
"81/414L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L",
"B5 JISK", "B5 JISL", "B6 JISL", "A6L", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Note
The paper width between 100 and 139.7 mm are available only when
the special side fence is utilized.
"Auto Detect" is available for "1218L" and "1117L", "1181/2K",

"51/281/2L", "813L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L", "B5 JISK",
"A5K", "A5L".
Inch version:
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "118 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81/211L", "51/281/2L", "81/251/2K, "81/213L", "81/413L",
"813L", "101 /2 71 /4 K", "71 /4 101 /2 L", "1115L", "1014L",
"B5 JISK", "B5 JISL", "B6 JISL", "A6L"
Custom Size: 3.93 - 13.00 inch (vertically) and 5.50 - 18.03 inch (horizontally)
Note
The paper width between 3.93 and 5.50 inch are available only when

"81/211L", "81/251/2K", "51/281/2L", "813L", "A3L",
"B4 JISL", "A4K", "B5 JISK", "A5L".

2 Sided Copy
1 Sided Copy
Yes
No
97
Tray Paper Settings
Thick Paper Setting

On
Off
Display Time
Front Cover
Display Time
Back Cover
Display Time
Slip Sheets
Display Time
Separation Sheets
Display Time
98
Tray 5
You can sets the display to show the type of paper loaded in each of the tray 5
Do not Display
Recycled Paper
Special Paper
Letterhead
Color Paper 1
Color Paper 2
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Ivory
Orange
Pink
Red
Gray
OHP (Transparency)
Translucent Paper
Label Paper
Preprinted Paper
Prepunched Paper
Index Paper
Tab Stock
Tab Position Shift
Number of Tabs
99
Tray Paper Settings

Do not Display
Recycled Paper
Special Paper
Letterhead
Color Paper 1
Color Paper 2
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Ivory
Orange
Pink
Red
Gray
OHP (Transparency)
Translucent Paper
Label Paper
Preprinted Paper
Prepunched Paper
Index Paper
Tab Stock
Tab Position Shift
Number of Tabs

"Auto Detect", "1181/2L", "81/251/2L", "51/281/2K", "A4K", "A5K",
"A5L", "B5 JISK"
100

Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "118 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81/211L", "51/281/2L", "81/251/2K", "81/213L", "81/413L",
"813L", "101 /2 71 /4 K", "71 /4 101 /2 L", "1115K", "1014L",
Note

"51/281/2L", "813L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L",
"B5 JISK", "A5K", "A5L".
Inch version:
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "118 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81/211L", "51/281/2L", "81/251/2K, "81/213L", "81/413L",
"813L", "101 /2 71 /4 K", "71 /4 101 /2 L", "1115K", "1014L",
Note

"81/211L", "81/251/2K", "51/281/2L", "813L", "A3L",

2 Sided Copy
1 Sided Copy
Yes
No
Thick Paper Setting
On
Off
101
Tray Paper Settings
Display Time
Front Cover
Display Time
Back Cover
Display Time
Slip Sheets
Display Time
Separation Sheets
Display Time
Tray 6
You can set the display to show the type of paper loaded the tray 6
102

Do not Display
Recycled Paper
Special Paper
Letterhead
Color Paper 1
Color Paper 2
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Ivory
Orange
Pink
Red
Gray
OHP (Transparency)
Translucent Paper
Preprinted Paper
Prepunched Paper
Do not Display
Recycled Paper
Special Paper
Letterhead
Color Paper 1
Color Paper 2
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Ivory
Orange
Pink
Red
Gray
103
Tray Paper Settings
OHP (Transparency)
Translucent Paper
Preprinted Paper
Prepunched Paper
Index Paper
Tab Stock
Tab Position Shift
Number of Tabs

"1181/2K", "81/251/2K", "51/281/2L", "A4K", "A5K", "A5L", "B5 JISK"
Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "118 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81/211L", "51/281/2L", "81/251/2K, "81/213L", "81/413L",
"813L", "101 /2 71 /4 K", "71 /4 101 /2 L", "1115K", "1014L",
Note

"51/281/2L", "813L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L",
"B5 JISK", "A5K", "A5L".
Inch version:
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "118 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81/211L", "51/281/2L", "81/251/2K", "81/213L", "81/413L",
"813L", "101 /2 71 /4 K", "71 /4 101 /2 L", "1115K", "1014L",
Note

"81/211L", 81/251/2K", 51/281/2L", "813L", "A3L",
104

2 Sided Copy
1 Sided Copy
Yes
No
Display Time
Front Cover
Display Time
Back Cover
Display Time
Slip Sheets
Display Time
105
Tray Paper Settings
Separation Sheets
Display Time
Tray 7
You can sets the display to show the type of paper loaded the tray 7
The paper types

Do not Display
Recycled Paper
Special Paper
Letterhead
Color Paper 1
Color Paper 2
Yellow
Green
Blue
Purple
Ivory
Orange
Pink
Red
Gray
OHP (Transparency)
Translucent Paper
Preprinted Paper
Prepunched Paper
Index Paper
Tab Stock
Tab Position Shift
Number of Tabs
106
The paper sizes

Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "118 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81/211L", "51/281/2L", "81/251/2K, "81/213L", "81/413L",
"813L", "101 /2 71 /4 K", "71 /4 101 /2 L", "1115K", "1014L",
"81/414L", "810L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L", "A5K", "A5L",
Custom Size (when LCIT RT5000 is installed): 100.0 - 305.0 mm (vertically) and 139.7 - 458.0 mm (horizontally)
Custom Size (when LCIT RT5010 is installed): 100.0 - 330.2 mm (vertically) and 139.7 - 458.0 mm (horizontally)
Note

"51/281/2L", "813L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L",
"B5 JISK", "A5K", "A5L".
Inch version:
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "118 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81/211L", "51/281/2L", "81/251/2K, "81/213L", "81/413L",
"813L", "101 /2 71 /4 K", "71 /4 101 /2 L", "1115K", "1014L",
Custom Size (when LCIT RT5000 is installed): 3.93 - 12.00 inch (vertically) and 5.50 - 18.03 inch (horizontally)
Custom Size (when LCIT RT5010 is installed): 3.93 - 13.00 inch (vertically) and 5.50 - 18.03 inch (horizontally)
Note

"81/211L", "81/251/2K", "51/281/2L", "813L", "A3L",

2 Sided Copy
1 Sided Copy
Yes
No
Thick Paper Setting
On
Off
107
Tray Paper Settings
Display Time
Front Cover
Display Time
Back Cover
Display Time
Slip Sheets
Display Time
Separation Sheets
Display Time
Interposer Upper - Lower
You can sets the display to show the type of paper loaded in each of the trays.
108
The paper sizes

Metric version:
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "118 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81/211L", "51/281/2L", "81/251/2K, "81/213L", "81/413K",
"813K", "101 /2 71 /4 K", "71 /4 101 /2 L", "1115K", "1014L",
"B5 JISK", "B5 JISL", "8KL", "16KK", "16KL"
Note
"51/281/2L", "813L", "A3L", "B4 JISL", "A4K", "A4L",
"B5 JISK", "A5K", "A5L".
Inch version:
"Auto Detect", "1218L", "1117L", "118 1 / 2 K", "8 1 / 2 14L",
"81/211L", "51/281/2L", "81/251/2K, "81/213L", "81/413K",
"813K", "101 /2 71 /4 K", "71 /4 101 /2 L", "1115K", "1014L",
"B5 JISK", "B5 JISL"
Note
"81/211L", "81/251/2K", 51/281/2L", "813L", A3L",
You can specify the paper trays to set designation sheets.
Front Cover
Display Time
109
Tray Paper Settings
Back Cover
Display Time
Note
When paper of the same type and size is loaded in two different paper trays
and you want to specify tray for 2 Sided Copy. If one of the trays is specified
as the default in Paper Tray Priority, assign 2 Sided Copy to that tray.
A mark appears next to the paper tray if [No] is selected in [Apply Auto Paper
Select].
[Apply Auto Paper Select] is effective for the copier function only if [Do not Display] or [Recycled Paper] are selected. If [No] is selected, Auto Paper Select is not
valid for the tray.
110
Tray Paper Setting on Main and Sub-machines
Tray Paper Setting on Main and Sub-machines

This section explains the Tray Paper Setting on the two machines during Connect Copy.
How the defaults in the Tray Paper Settings of copying of the main and sub-machines are used in combined copying will be explained.
Paper Tray Priority: Copier (Copier/Document Server)

Paper Tray Priority: Printer (Printer)
Paper Type: Tray 1 (LCT)
In combined copying, only the paper tray corresponding to the paper size,
orientation, and type that are set in common on the main and sub-machines can be used. To make the most of the combined copying function, it
is advisable that you make the same paper settings on both the main and
sub-machines.
Paper Type: Tray 2 - 3
sub-machines.
Paper Type: Tray 4
sub-machines.
111
Tray Paper Settings
Paper Type: Tray 5

sub-machines.
Paper Type: Tray 6
sub-machines.
Paper Type: Tray 7

The Tray 7 on both of the main and sub-machines utilizes only for the cover sheet and the designation sheet.
Paper Type: Interposer Upper - Lower
sub-machines.
112
4. Copier/Document Server
Features
This chapter describes various items of [Copier/Document Server Features] available in this machine.
General Features
This section describes various items of [General Features] under [Copier/Document
Server Features].
For the procedure for accessing the [Copier/Document Server Features], see "Accessing User Tools (System Settings)".
Auto Image Density Priority

You can set whether Auto Image Density is On or Off when the machine
is turned on, reset, or modes are cleared.
Text
On
Off
Text/Photo
On
Off
Photo
On
Off
Pale
On
Off
General Copy
On
Off
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode
You can set the original orientation when making two-sided copies.
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode
You can set the copy orientation when making two-sided copies.
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
113
Reserve Job Mode

You can set whether to reset the mode to the initial state or return to the mode
in use before the reserved operation was started when you return to the initial
screen after reserved copying finishes.
Reset
Previous job
Reservation Screen Auto-off Timer
You can set the time required until the display is switched to the reserved first
job display after reservation is set.
If you select Switch, use the numbers keys to enter the time (10-99 seconds).
The default setting is 15 seconds.
Yes
No
Max. Copy Quantity

The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 9999.
The default setting is 9999 sheets.
Original counter reset key
You can set whether to enable the document counter reset key.
On
Off
Auto Tray Switching
When the paper runs out during copying, it can be automatically fed from a substitute paper feed tray, irrespective of the orientation of paper in that tray provided it is the same size as that set in the other paper feed tray during automatic
paper selection. This function is called Auto Tray Switching. You can set
whether to perform the Auto Tray Switching.
With Image Rotation
You can copy using the Auto Tray Switching function. Depending on the
function being performed rotation may not be possible.
Without Image Rotation
You can make continuous copies provided paper of the same size and orientation is loaded. The Supply paper message appears when paper of
the same size and orientation runs out. Copying is interrupted when this
happens.
Off
The Supply paper message appears when paper runs out. Copying is interrupted when this happens.
114
General Features
Text
You can adjust the edges of finished image.
The outline of a character becomes soft when you select "Soft". The outline of
a character can be sharply copied when you select "Sharp".
Copy Quality
Soft
Normal
Sharp
Custom Setting
Image Density
Light
Normal
Dark
Text/photo
You can select which has priority, photographs or characters, when an original contains both.
If you select Normal, character and photo quality is balanced in the copy.
Copy Quality
Photo priority
Normal
Text Priority
Custom Setting
Image Density
Light
Normal
Dark
115
Photo
You can adjust the quality of finished images according to the type of photo original.
Printed photo is set for magazine and catalog photo originals. You can
smooth photos by selecting Printed photo.
"Glossy Photo" is set for the silver-salt photos printed from photo film.
If you select Normal, you can finish characters that exist together in a photo
block.
Copy Quality
Printed photo
Normal
Glossy Photo
Custom Setting
Image Density
Light
Normal
Dark
Pale
You can adjust the image quality of a pale original so the copy is at normal density.
Copy Quality
Soft
Normal
Sharp
Custom Setting
Image Density
Light
Normal
Dark
Generation Copy
You can adjust the image quality to prevent characters in the copy becoming too
thick.
Copy Quality
Soft
Normal
Sharp
Custom Setting
Image Density
Light
Normal
Dark
116
General Features
Dark Background
You can set whether "Deep document" can be selected as an original type.
On
Off
Panel Features Default
You can set which items will appear as the function buttons on the basic display.
Off
Reduce/Enlarge
Dup./Combine/Series
Edit Image
Cover/Slip Sheet
Stamp
Output/Customize Function/Finisher
Image Adjustment Priority

You can set the items, to be preferentially displayed, to the function buttons
on the basic display.
Off
Erase Inside
Edit Image
Paper Display
You can choose to have the available paper trays and sizes shown on the initial display.
Hide
Display
Original Type Display
You can have the original types shown on the initial display.
Hide
Display
Special Original Display
You can set whether to show the original types on the initial display.
On
Off
117
Special Original Display Defaults

You can set up to three items for displaying on the initial display from five
items below.
Mixed Sizes
Batch
SADF
Thin Paper
Original Size
Tone: Original Remains
You can set whether to use a buzzer to alert you when you forget to remove
an original.
On
Off
If the Panel key sound during system settings is set to Off, this function
is invalidated even if it is set to On.
Job End Call

You can set whether to generate a buzzer sound (pi) when a copy is completed.
If Panel key sound when performing system settings is set to On, the
buzzer sounds four times if copying is interrupted because the paper has run
out or become jammed. This notifies you that the copy job could not be completed.
On
Off
Connect Copy Key Display
You can set whether to display the [Connect Copy]. If you select "Off", the key
does not appear and a master unit cannot be obtained.
On
Off
Switch Original Counter Display
You can set whether to count the two-sided documents by number of sheets
or pages.
Original Sheet Counter
Original Page Counter
118
General Features
Customize Function: Copier

A maximum of four often-used functions can be registered to the function
keys.
Off
Mixed Sizes
Batch
SADF
Thin Paper
Customize Function: Document Server Storage

A maximum of four often-used functions can be registered to the function
keys. Registered functions can also be changed.
Off
Mixed Sizes
Batch
SADF
Thin Paper
Reference
p.43 Panel Key Sound
"Selecting the Original Type Setting", Copy/ Document Server Reference

"Adjusting Copy Image Density", Copy/ Document Server Reference
"Selecting Copy Paper", Copy/ Document Server Reference
119
Reproduction Ratio
This section describes various items of [Reproduction Ratio] under [Copier/Document Server Features].
Shortcut R/E
You can register up to two frequently used Reduce/Enlarge ratios other than
the fixed Reduce/Enlarge ratio and have them shown on the initial display.
You can also change registered Reduce/ Enlarge ratios.
Metric version
25%
50% (A3A5, FA5)
65% (A3F)
71% (A3A4, A4A5)
75% (B4F4)
82% (FA4, B4A4)
93%
115% (B4A3)
122% (FA3, A4B4)
141% (A4A3, A5A4)
200% (A5A3)
400%
User R/E Ratio (25-400%)
Off
Default:
F1: 71%
F2: 141%
120
Reproduction Ratio
Inch version
25%
50% (111751/281/2)
65% (111781/211)
73% (111581/211)
78% (81/21481/211)
85% (F81/211)
93%
121% (81/2141117)
129 (%81/2111117)
155% (81/281/281/214)
200% (51/2"81/2"11"17")
400%
Off
Default:
F1: 73%
F2: 155%
R/E Ratio
You can specify the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear if [Reduce/Enlarge] is pressed on the copier screen.
121
Metric version
25%
50% (A3A5, FA5)
65% (A3F)
71% (A3A4, A4A5)
75% (B4F4)
82% (FA4, B4A4)
93%
115% (B4A3)
122% (FA3, A4B4)
141% (A4A3, A5A4)
200% (A5A3)
400%
Inch version
25%
50% (111751/281/2)
65% (111781/211)
73% (111581/211)
78% (81/21481/211)
85% (F81/211)
93%
121% (81/2141117)
129% (81/2111117)
155% (81/281/281/214)
200% (51/2"81/2"11"17")
400%
122
Reproduction Ratio
R/E Ratio Priority

You can set the ratio with priority when [Reduce / Enlarge] is pressed.
Metric version
400%
200%
141%
122%
115%
93%
82%
75%
71%
65%
50%
25%
Inch version
400%
200%
155%
129%
121%
93%
85%
78%
73%
65%
50%
25%
Ratio for Create Margin

You can set a Reduce/Enlarge ratio when registering Create Margin in a
shortcut key.
Enter a ratio using number keys (in the range of 90 to 99%).
The ratio is set to 93% by default.
Note
For the procedure of entering the [Copier/Document Server Features], see p.3
Reference
123
Edit
This section describes various items of [Edit] under [Copier/Document Server Features].
Enter the width of the binding margin with the number keys as follows:
Metric version: 030 mm (in increments of 1 mm)
Inch version: 0"-1.2" (in increments of 0.1 inch)
Enter the width of the erased margin with the number keys as follows:
Metric version: 299 mm (in increments of 1 mm)
Inch version: 0.1"-3.9" (in increments of 0.1 inch)
An image of approximately 1.5 mm (0.06) will not be displayed as the width of
the separation line, when specifying solid or broken lines.
Front Margin: Left/Right

You can specify left and right margins on the front side of copies in Margin
Adjustment mode.
Left
Right
Default:
Metric version: Left 5 mm
Inch version: Left 0.2"
Back Margin: Left/Right
You can specify left and right margins on the back side of copies in Margin
Adjustment mode.
Left
Right
Default:
Metric version: Right 5 mm
Inch version: Right 0.2"
Front Margin: Top/Bottom
You can specify top and bottom margins on the front side of copies in Margin
Adjustment mode.
Top
Bottom
Default:
Metric version: Top/Bottom 0 mm
Inch version: Top/Bottom 0.0"
124
Edit
Back Margin: Top / Bottom

You can specify top and bottom margins on the back side of copies in Margin
Adjustment mode.
Top
Bottom
Default:
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT
In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back
side.
The margin is set to the same value of Back Margin: Left/Right".
Left
Right
Default:
Metric version: Right 5 mm
Inch version: Right 0.2"
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoB

In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on the back
side.
The value set for "Back Margin: Top/Bottom" is used.
Top
Bottom
Default:
Creep Setting for Magazine
You can specify the creep binding margin width.
Range:
Metric version: 0 to 99 mm (in increments of 1 mm)
Inch version: 0 to 3.9 inch (in increments of 0.1 inch)
Default:
Metric version: 5 mm
Inch version: 0.2"
Erase Border Width
You can specify the width for erasing border in the range of "2 to 99 mm" (in
units of 1 mm).
Default:
Inch version: 0.4"
125
Erase Original Shadow in Combine

In Combine mode, you can specify whether to erase a 3 mm, 0.1" boundary
margin around all four edges of each original.
On
Off
Erase Center Width
You can specify the width of the erased center margins with this function.
Default:
Inch version: 0.4"
Front Cover Copy in Combine
You can make a combined copy on the front cover sheet when you select
Front Cover mode.
GCST019E
Combine
Do not Combine
Copy Order in Combine

You can set the copy order in Combine mode.
126
From Left to Right

From Right to Left
Top to Bottom from Left
Top to Bttm from Right
Edit
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine

You can select the orientation of copies to open when using Booklet or Magazine mode.
Open to Left
Open to Right
Copy on Designating Page in Combine
You can specify whether to make a combined copy on the inserted slip sheets
in Desig./Chapter mode.
Combine
Don not Combine
Image Repeat Separation Line
You can select a separation line from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or
Crop Marks.
None
Solid
Broken A
Broken B
Crop Marks
127
Double Copies Separation Line

You can select a separation line using the Double Copies function from: None,
Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
None
Solid
Broken A
4
Broken B
Crop Marks
Separation Line in Combine

You can select a separation line using the Combine function from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
None
Solid
Broken A
Broken B
128
Edit
Crop Marks
Copy Back Cover

When copying the back cover, you can specify whether to have the back cover
outside (outside page) or inside (inside page).
Outside
Inside
Double Copies Position
You can select the copy position of bottom or left page according to top or
right page as the original image position.
Same Position as Original Image Position
Symmetrical to Original Image Position
Note
Reference
"Booklet/Magazine", Copy/ Document Server Reference
129
Stamp
This section describes various items of [Stamp] under [Copier/Document Server Features].
Background Numbering
This section describes various items of [Background Numbering] under [Stamp].
Size
You can set the size of the numbers.
Small
Normal
Large
Density
You can set the density of the numbers.
Light
Normal
Dark
Very Dark
Preset Stamp
This section describes various items of [Preset Stamp] under [Stamp].
Stamp Language
You can select the language of the message printed in Stamp mode.
English
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
Portuguese
Polish
Czech
Swedish
Finnish
Hungarian
130
Stamp
Norwegian
Danish
Russian
Japanese
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Hangul
Stamp Priority
You can select the stamp type given priority when [Preset Stamp] is pressed.
COPY
URGENT
PRIORITY
For Your Info.
PRELIMINARY
For Internal Use Only
CONFIDENTIAL
DRAFT
Stamp Format
You can specify how each of stamp is printed.
Stamp Position
You can specify where to print the stamp.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Center Left
Center
Center Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Center
Bottom Right
131
Stamp Position
You can adjust the print position of the stamp within the available range
as shown below.
Metric version:
"Top Left"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Top Center"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Top Right"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Center Left"T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Center"T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Center Right"T/B: 72-72mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Left"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
"Bottom Center"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 72-72mm
"Bottom Right"T/B: 4-144mm, L/R: 4-144mm
Inch version:
"Top Left"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Top Center"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Top Right"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Center Left"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Center"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Center Right"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Bottom Left"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Bottom Center"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Bottom Right"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
Size
You can set the size of the stamp.
1X
2X
4X
Density
You can set the pattern used to print the stamp.
Normal
The stamp is printed on the image. You cannot check which parts will
overlap.
Lighter
The image can be seen through the stamp.
Lightest
The image appears even clearer than in the Lighter setting.
132
Stamp
Page to Stamp
You can specify whether to print the stamp on all pages or only the first
page.
All Pages
1st Page Only
Dup. Back Pg. Stamp Pos.
You can adjust the stamp position for back side in duplex mode, within the
available range as shown below.
Metric version:
Left-Right: Left 432 mm Right 432 mm
Top-Bottom: Top 432 mm Bottom 432 mm
Inch version:
Left-Right: Left 17.0 Right 17.0
Top-Bottom: Top 17.0 Bottom 17.0
Reference
"Preset Stamp", Copy/ Document Server Reference
User Stamp
This section describes various items of [User Stamp] under [Stamp].
Program/Delete Stamp
You can register, change, or delete these designs as user stamps.
You can register up to five custom stamps with your favorite designs.
Stamp Format:1-5
You can specify how each of registered User Stamps 1 to 5 is printed.
Stamp Position
You can specify where to print the User Stamp.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Center Left
Center
Center Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Center
Bottom Right
133
Stamp Position
You can adjust the print position of the User Stamp within the available
range as shown below.
Metric version:
Inch version:
"Top Left"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Top Center"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Top Right"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Center Left"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Center"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Bottom Left"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
Page to Stamp
page.
All Pages
1st Page Only
Metric version:
Inch version:
Reference
Copy/ Document Server Reference"User Stamp"
134
Stamp
Date Stamp
This section describes various items of [Date Stamp] under [Stamp].
Format
You can select the date format for Date Stamp mode.
MM/DD/YYYY
MM.DD.YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
DD.MM.YYYY
YYYY.MM.DD
Default:
Metric version: DD/MM/YYYY
Inch version: MM/DD/YYYY
Font
You can select the Date Stamp font.
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Size
You can set the Date Stamp size.
Auto
Large
Middle
Small
Superimpose
You can have the Date Stamp printed in white when it overlaps black parts of
the image.
On
Off
135
Stamp Setting
You can specify how Date Stamp is printed.
Stamp Position
You can specify where to print the Date Stamp.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Center
Bottom Right
Stamp Position
You can adjust the print position of the Date Stamp within the available
Metric version:
Inch version:
"Top Left"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Top Center"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Top Right"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Center Left"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Center"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Bottom Left"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
Page to Stamp
page.
All Pages
1st Page Only
136
Stamp

Metric version:
Inch version:
Page Numbering
This section describes various items of [Page Numbering] under [Stamp].
Stamp Format
You can select the page number format given priority when [Page Numbering]
is pressed.
P1,P2
1/5,2/5
-1-,-2-
P.1,P.2
1,2
1-1,1-2
Font
You can select the font in Page Numbering mode.
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Size
You can set the size of the stamp printed in Page Numbering mode.
Auto
Large
Middle
Small
Duplex Back Page Stamping Position
You can set the position of the duplex back page number printed in Duplex
mode.
Opposite Position
Same Position
137
Page Numbering in Combine

You can set page numbering when using the Combine function and the Page
Numbering function together.
Per Original
Per Copy
Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet
You can select to print the page number onto slip sheets when using the Designate function set to [Copy] and the Page Numbering function together.
On
Off
Stamp Position
Stamp Position
You can specify where to print the stamp.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Center
Bottom Right
For the patterns of "P1, P2, ---", "1/5, 2/5, ---", "P.1, P.2, ---", "1, 2, --", and "Page
1, Page 2, ---", the machine is shipped from the factory with this position set
to "Top Right".
For the patterns of "-1-, -2-, ---" and "1-1, 1-2, --- ", the machine has this position
set to "Bottom Center".
The setting range is as follows:
Stamp Position
You can adjust the print position of the stamp within the available range
as shown below.
Metric version:
138
Stamp
Inch version:
"Top Left"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Top Center"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Top Right"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Center Left"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Center"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Bottom Left"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
Metric version:
Inch version:
Superimpose
You can have page numbers printed in white when they overlap black parts
of the image.
On
Off
Page Numbering Initial Letter
Switch the page print language.
P1, P2, ... / P.1, P.2 ...
S1, S2, ... / S.1, S.2 ...
139
Stamp Text
This section describes various items of [Stamp Text] under [Stamp].
Font
You can select the font in Stamp Text mode.
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Size
You can set the size of the stamp printed in Stamp Text mode.
Auto
Large
Middle
Small
Superimpose
You can have the Stamp Text printed in white when it overlaps black parts of
the image.
On
Off
Stamp Setting
You can specify how Stamp Text is printed.
Stamp Position
You can specify where to print the Stamp Text.
Top Left
Top Center
Top Right
Bottom Left
Center Right
140
Stamp
Stamp Position
You can adjust the print position of the Stamp Text within the available
Metric version:
Inch version:
"Top Left"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Top Center"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Top Right"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Center Left"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 0.1-5.7
"Center"T/B: 2.8-2.8, L/R: 2.8-2.8
"Bottom Left"T/B: 0.1-5.7, L/R: 0.1-5.7
Page to Stamp
page.
All Pages
1st Page Only
Metric version:
Inch version:
Note
141
Input/Output
This section describes various items of [Input/Output] under [Copier/Document Server Features].
SADF Auto Reset

In SADF mode, an original must be set within a specified time after the previous original has been fed.
You can adjust this time from 3 to 99 seconds in increments of 1 second.
Copy Eject Face Method in Glass Mode
You can specify the way in which copies are delivered when copying an original placed on the exposure glass.
Face Up
Face Down
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart

When memory becomes full while scanning originals, the machine can make
copies of scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed scanning remaining originals.
On
You can leave the machine unattended to make copies, but sorted pages
will not be sequential.
Off
When memory becomes full, the machine stops operation allowing you to
remove the copy pages delivered on the output tray.
Sort/Stack Shift setting
You can specify whethere to shift the Shift Tray in sort mode or stack mode.
On
Off
Insert Separation Sheet
You can specify the number of copy pages for inserting the Separation Sheet
from 1 to 999 pages in increments of 1 page.
142
Input/Output
Staple Position
Specify which Top 2 staples or Bottom shown on the initial display with priority.
The optional Finisher AFE, or the Booklet Processor is required to use this
function.
Top 1
Slant
Left 2
Top 2
Bottom 1
Top Right 1
Right 2
Off
Punch Type
Specify which punch type (2 holes or 3 holes) has priority to be shown on the
initial display.
The optional Finisher AFE and Multi-hole Punch Unit is required to use this
function.
Left 2
Top 2
Right 2
Left 3
Top 3
Right 3
Off
Finisher: Staple Position
Specify the stapling position.
The optional Finisher AFE, or the Booklet Processor is required to use this
function.
Top 1
Slant
Left 2
Top 2
Bottom 1
Center
Top Right 1
Right 2
Off
143
Finisher: Punch Type

Specify the punch type.
The optional Finisher AFE and Multi-hole Punch Unit are required to use this
function.
Left 2
Top 2
Right 2
Left 3
Top 3
Right 3
Off
Simplified Screen: Finishing Types
You can select which key is displayed with higher priority for Finishing
Types on the Simplified Screen.
Stack
Slant
Top 1
Bottom 1
Left 2
2 Holes Left
3 Holes Left
Do not Display
Reference
"Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper", Troubleshooting
"Batch mode", Copy/ Document Server Reference

"Sort", Copy/ Document Server Reference
144
Settings for the Document Server
Settings for the Document Server

For details, see "System Settings", and "Copier/Document Server Features".

Heading
items
Default
General Features
Document Server Storage key
2 Sided original:
Top to Top
General Features
1 Sided 1 Sided
Combine: 2 originals
General Features
1 Sided 1 Sided
General Features
1 Sided 1 Sided
General Features
Create Margin
General Features
Original Orientation
Heading
Item
Default
General Features
Warm Up Notice
On
General Features
Copy Count Display
Up
General Features
Finisher Upper
Tray
General Features
Paper Tray Priority: Copier
Tray 1
System Settings
Tray Paper Settings Cover Sheet Tray
Off
Tray Paper Settings Slip Sheet Tray
Off
Timer Settings
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer
60 second(s)
Administrator
Tools
3 day(s)
Administrator
Tools
Reference
p.113 Copier/Document Server Features
145
Copier/Document Server Features on

Main and Sub-machines
This section explains the Copier/Document Server Features on the two machines during Connect Copy.
General Features
How the defaults in the General Features of copying of the main and sub-machines are used in combined copying will be explained.
Auto Image Density Priority

The paper size, orientation, and paper type currently set in common on the
main and sub-machines are selected automatically.
Reserve Job Mode
Reservation Screen Auto-off Timer
Max. Copy Quantity
Original Counter Reset Key
146
Copier/Document Server Features on Main and Sub-machines
Auto Tray Switching

Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Pale
Generation Copy
Dark Background
Paper Display
147
Special Original Display Default

Job End Call
When [On] is selected, only the main machine beeper sounds.
Switch Original Counter Display
Customize Function: Copier

Reproduction Ratio
How the defaults in the Reproduction Ratio of copying of the main and sub-machines are used in combined copying will be explained.
Shortcut R/E
R/E Ratio
R/E Ratio Priority
148
Edit
How the defaults in the Edit of copying of the main and sub-machines are used
in combined copying will be explained.
Front Margin: Left/Right

made in it.
The operation takes place using the set values of the main machine.
made in it.

made in it.
Back Margin: Top/Bottom
made in it.
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoT
made in it.
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto Margin: TtoB
made in it.
149
Erase Border Width

made in it.
made in it.
Erase Center Width
made in it.
Front Cover Copy in Combine

made in it.
made in it.
made in it.
made in it.
made in it.
made in it.
150

made in it.
Copy Back Cover
made in it.
Stamp
How the defaults in the Stamp of copying of the main and sub-machines are
used in combined copying will be explained.
Size
made in it.
Density
made in it.
Preset Stamp
Stamp Language
made in it.
Stamp Priority
made in it.
151
Stamp Format
made in it.
Dup. Back Pg. Stanp Pos.
made in it.
User Stamp
Program/Delete Stamp
made in it.
Stamp Format:1-5
made in it.
Dup. Back Pg. Stanp Pos.
made in it.
Date Stamp
Format
made in it.
Font
made in it.
Size
made in it.
152
Superimpose
made in it.
Stamp Setting
made in it.
made in it.
Page Numbering
Stamp Format
made in it.
Font
made in it.
Size
made in it.
made in it.
made in it.
made in it.
153
Stamp Position
made in it.
Superimpose
made in it.
made in it.
Stamp Text
Font
made in it.
Size
made in it.
Superimpose
made in it.
Stamp Setting
made in it.
Page to Stamp
made in it.
Stamp Position
made in it.
154

made in it.
Input/Output
How the defaults in the Stamp of copying of the main and sub-machines are
used in combined copying will be explained.
SADF Auto Reset


copying.
made in it.
Main machine settings have priority.
Sort/Stack Shift setting
made in it.
Stapling Position
made in it.
Select Punch Type
made in it.
made in it.
155

made in it.
copying.
When the main machine is set to the simplified screen, you can not utilize
the combined copying.
156
5. Printer Features
This chapter explains various items of [Printer Features] available in this machine.
List / Test Print

This section describes various items of [List / Test Print] under [Printer Features].
For the procedure for accessing the [Printer Features], see "Accessing User Tools
(System Settings)".
Multiple Lists
You can print the configuration page and error log.
Configuration Page
You can print the machine's current configuration values.
Error Log
You can print error logs listing all errors that occurred during printing. The
most recent 50 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added when
there are 50 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the
oldest error belongs to one of the following print jobs, it is not deleted. The
error is stored separately until the number of those errors reaches 30. You can
check any of these print jobs for error log information.
Sample Print
Locked Print
Hold Print
Stored Print
The records of Auto Job Cancel and jobs canceled manually from the control
panel can be printed.
Menu List
You can print a Menu List showing the machine's function menus.
PCL Configuration/Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PCL font list.
PS Configuration/Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PostScript font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
157
Printer Features
PDF Configuration/Font Page

You can print the current configuration and installed PDF font list.
This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
Hex Dump
You can print in the Hex Dump mode.
Printing the configuration page
A Press [Printer Features].

B Press [Configuration Page]] on the [List / Test Print].
The configuration page is printed.
C Press the {User Tools} key.
158
List / Test Print
Interpreting the configuration page

System Reference
Unit Number
Displays the serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer.
Total Memory
Displays the total amount of memory (SDRAM) installed on the printer.
Firmware Version
Printer
Displays the version number of the printer firmware.
System
Displays the version number of the system firmware.
Engine
Displays the version number of the printer engine.
LCDC
Displays the version number of the panel display.
NIB
Displays the version number of the Network interface.
Device Connection
This item(s) appears when the device option(s) is installed.
HDD: Font / Macro Download
Displays the capacity of the hard disk drive.
Printer Language
Displays the version number of the printer driver language.
Connection Equipment
Displays the installed optional equipments.
Paper Input
Displays settings made under Tray Paper Settings menu.
System
Displays settings made under the System menu.
PCL Menu
Displays settings made under PCL Menu.
PS Menu
Displays settings made under PS Menu.
PDF Menu
Displays settings made under PDF Menu.
159
Printer Features
Host Interface
Displays settings made under the Host Interface menu.
When DHCP is active on the network, the actual IP address, subnet mask and
gateway address appear in parentheses on the configuration page.
Interface Information
Displays the interface information.
160
Maintenance
Maintenance
This section describes various items of [Maintenance] under [Printer Features]
List / Test Print Lock

You can Lock the [List/Test Print] menu.
On
Off
Delete All Temporary Print Jobs
You can delete all print jobs temporarily stored in the machine.
Delete All Stored Print Jobs
You can delete all print jobs stored in the machine.
Reference
161
Printer Features
System
This section describes various items of [System] under [Printer Features].
Print Error Report

Select this to have an error report printed when a printer or memory error occurs.
On
Off
Auto Continue
You can select this to enable Auto Continue. When it is On, printing continues
after a system error occurs.
Off
Immediate
1 minute
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
Memory Overflow
Select this to have a memory overflow error report printed.
Do not Print
Error Information
Job Separation
You can enable Job Separation.
This menu can be selected only when a finisher (optional) is installed.
On
Off
Auto Delete Temporary Print Jobs
You can select to automatically delete print jobs temporarily stored in the machine.
On
Off: 8 hours
If you select [on], you can set up to 200 hours for auto file deleting.
Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs
You can select to automatically delete print jobs stored in the machine.
On: 3 days
If you select [on], you can set up to 180 days for auto file deleting.
Off
162
System
Initial Print Job List

You can set the desired type of print job list that appears on the screen when
you press [Print Jobs].
Complete List
Displays the list of print jobs stored in the machine.
List Per User ID
Displays the list of the User ID who stored a file in the machine.
Memory Usage
You can select the amount of memory used in Font Priority or Frame Priority,
according to paper size or resolution.
Font Priority
This setting uses memory for registering fonts.
Frame Priority
This setting uses frame memory for high speed printing.
Duplex
You can select to have print on both sides of each pages.
Off
Long Edge Bind
Short Edge Bind
Copies
You can specify the number of print sets. This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print has been specified with the printer driver or another
command.
19999
Default: 1
Blank Page Print
You can select whether or not to print blank pages.
On
Off
Pages that match one of the following conditions are identified as blank.
There are no images.
There are images but they are outside of the printable area.
There are only blank characters.
Toner Saving
Select either to apply or not to apply Toner Saving.
On
Off
163
Printer Features
Spool Image
You can select to print spool images. The print job transmitted from the computer is temporarily stored on the machine's hard disk as bit map images that
can be printed when transmission is complete. If more than one print job is
transmitted, a spool image is printed for each.
Off
On
Reserved Job Waiting Time
You can specify how long the machine waits to receive a print job before allowing other functions such as the copier and scanner functions to interrupt
it.
Long Wait
Medium Wait
Short Wait
In Reserved Job Order
Printer Language
You can specify the printer language.
Auto
PCL
PS
PDF
This menu appears only when the PostScript 3 unit (optional) is installed.
Sub Paper Size
You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper Size (A4.LT) feature.
Auto
Off
164
Page Size
You can select the default paper size.
1218
1117
81/214
81/211
51/281/2
71/4101/2
813
81/213
81/413
A3
B4 JIS
System
A4
B5 JIS
A5
B6 JIS
A6
8K
16K
Custom Size
Default:
Metric version: A4
Inch version: 81/211
Letterhead Setting
You can rotate original images when printing.
When printing, original images are always rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore,
output might not be as expected when printing onto letterhead or preprinted
paper requiring orientation. Using this function, you can specify image rotation.
Off
When set to Off, original images are rotated by 180 degrees.
Auto Detect
When set to Auto Detect, the machine detects a letterhead or preprinted
paper automatically, and does not rotate them.
On (Always)
When set to On (Always), the machine does not rotate the original images.
This function reduces printing speed.
Bypass Tray Setting Priority

You can specify which of the two options, (Printer) Driver / Command or
Machine Settings, has priority for determining the paper size for the bypass
tray.
Driver / Command
Machine Settings
Edge to Edge Print
You can select whether or not to print on the entire sheet.
On
Off
The 5 mm margin along the edges may not be printed properly.
165
Printer Features
Default Printer Language

You can set the default printer language if the machine cannot find the printer
language automatically.
PCL
PS
PDF
This menu appears only when the PostScript 3 unit (optional) is installed.
Tray Switching
You can set to switch the paper tray.
Off
On
Reference
"Loading paper", Troubleshooting
166
Host Interface
Host Interface
This section describes various items of [Host Interface] under [Printer Features].
I/O Buffer
You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change
this setting.
128KB
256KB
I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the machine should wait before ending a print
job. If data from another port usually arrives in the middle of a print job, you
should increase this timeout period.
10 seconds
15 seconds
20 seconds
25 seconds
60 seconds
167
Printer Features
PCL Menu
This section describes various items of [PCL Menu] under [Printer Features].
Orientation
You can set the page orientation.
Portrait
Landscape
Form Lines
You can set the number of lines per page.
5 to 128 by 1
Default:
Metric version: 64
Inch version: 60
Font Source
You can set the storage location of the default font.
Resident
RAM
HDD
SD
RAM, HDD and SD can be selected only when fonts have been downloaded
to the machine.
Font Number
You can set the ID of the default font you want to use.
0 to 63 by 1
The ID is set to "0" by default.
Point Size
You can set the point size you want to use for the selected font.
4.00 to 999.75 by 0.25
This setting is effective only with variable-space fonts.
The size is set to "12.00" by default.
Font Pitch
You can set the number of characters per inch for the selected font.
0.44 to 99.99 by 0.01
This setting is effective only with fixed-space fonts.
The font pitch is set to "10.00" by default.
168
PCL Menu
Symbol Set
You can specify the set of print characters for the selected font. The available
options are as follows:
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-TK,
Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math-8,
PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21,
ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0
Courier Font
You can select a courier font type.
Regular
Dark
Extend A4 Width
You can extend the printing area width (when printing on A4 sheet with
PCL).
Off
On
When the setting is On, the width will be 81/2 inches.
Append CR to LF
When set to On, a carriage return will follow each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CRLF,
FF=CRFF.
Off
On
Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
300 dpi
600 dpi
169
Printer Features
PS Menu
This section describes various items of [PS Menu] under [Printer Features].
This menu appears only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
Data Format
You can select a data format.
Binary Data
TBCP
This setting is not effective when operating the machine with a parallel or
EtherTalk connection.
When operating the machine with a parallel connection, and also if the binary
data is sent from the printer driver, the print job is canceled.
When operating the machine with an Ethernet connection, the print job is canceled under the following conditions;
The printer driver data format is TBCP, and the data format selected on the
display panel is Binary Data.
The printer driver data format is binary, and the data format selected on
the display panel is TBCP.
Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
170
PDF Menu
PDF Menu
This section describes various items of [PDF Menu] under [Printer Features].
Change PDF Password

Set the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
Current Password
New Password
Confirm New Password
A password can be set using on the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the
password information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set
the password using this menu from the Control Panel.
PDF Group Password
Set the group password already specified with DeskTopBinder Lite.
Current Password
New Password
Confirm New Password
A password can be set using on the Web Image Monitor, but in this case the
password information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set
the password using this menu from the Control Panel.
Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
171
Printer Features
172
6. Scanner Features
This chapter describes various items of [Scanner Features] available in this machine.
General Settings
Following describes various items of [General Settings] under [Scanner Features].
For the procedure for accessing the [Scanner Features], see "Accessing User Tools
(System Settings)".
Switch Title
Sets index to use when the list of receivers from the machine is displayed.
Update Delivery Server Destination List
Press [Update Delivery Server Destination List] to update the receivers from the
delivery server. To use this function, it is necessary to set [Delivery Option] to
[On].
Search Destination
Select an object receiver to search in the default state from the address book
of this machine of from LDAP server.
To search from LDAP server, it is necessary to register the LDAP server in
[System Settings] and set [LDAP Search] to [On].
TWAIN Standby Time
When the machine is being used to send e-mail or a file, or functioning as
Document Server or a network delivery scanner, a scanning request to the
machine as a TWAIN scanner will switch the machine to the network TWAIN
scanner function. This setting determines the delay until the machine switches to the network TWAIN scanner function.
Immediate
When [Immediate] is selected, the machine will switch to the network
TWAIN scanner function at once.
Set Time: 10 second(s)
When [Set Time] is selected, you can enter the delay time with the number
keys (3-30 seconds). The machine will switch to the network TWAIN scanner function when the time set here passes after the last key operation.
Destination List Display Priority 1
Select a destination list to be displayed when the machine is in the initial state.
You can select either [E-mail / Folder] or [Delivery Server].
E-mail / Folder
Delivery Server
173
Scanner Features

In the machines address book, select which address book appears by default.
You can select either [E-mail Address] or [Folder].
E-mail Address
Folder
Print & Delete Scanner Journal
Up to 100 transmission/delivery results can be checked on this machine. If
the stored transmission/delivery results reach 100, select whether to print the
delivery journal.
On
The transmission/delivery journal is printed automatically. The printed
journal is deleted.
Off
Transmission/delivery results are deleted one by one as new results are
stored.
Do not Print: Disable Send
Transmission/delivery cannot be performed when the journal is full.
When printed, all records are deleted after printing. When not printed,
records over the limit are automatically deleted in succession from the oldest
record.
While the journal is being printed, files with the status waiting cannot be sent.
Print Scanner Journal

The scanner journal is printed and deleted.
Delete Scanner Journal
The scanner journal is deleted without being printed.
174
Scan Settings
Scan Settings
Following describes various items of [Scan Settings] under [Scanner Features].
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level

Sets the sensitivity level for judging color/black and white for scanning originals when [Scan Type] is set to [Auto Color Selection].
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass
When dividing originals and scanning them individually with the exposure
glass to form a single file, select [Continuous Wait], [Off], or [Set Wait Time] for the
waiting status.
Continuous Wait
Off
Set Wait Time: 60 second(s)
If you select [SADF] in [Original Feed Type] on the Scan to Folder screen, the [Wait
Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] setting becomes invalid.
If you select [Batch] in [Original Feed Type] on the Scan to Folder screen, the
[Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass] setting becomes invalid, and the machine waits for an additional original to be put in place.
If [Set Wait Time] is selected, enter the wait time in seconds (3-999) for placing
additional originals with the number keys. Scanning will start if additional
originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed within this time. You can
end scanning and begin transmission by pressing the {#} key within this time.
Once the specified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.
If [Continuous Wait] is selected, the machine will wait for additional originals
until the {#} key is pressed. Scanning will start when additional originals are
placed and the {Start} key is pressed. You can end scanning and begin sending by pressing the {#} key.
If originals are placed in the auto document feeder (ADF), transmission will
start without waiting for additional originals after all originals in the ADF
have been scanned, regardless of the specified settings.
If a paper misfeed occurs or any of the following operations is performed
while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops
and does not start again until the {#} key is pressed.
Changing the settings such as the scan settings
Opening the upper cover of the ADF
Pressing the {Interrupt} key to activate the copy mode
175
Scanner Features
Wait Time for Next Original(s): SADF

When dividing originals and scanning them separately with the ADF to form
a single file, select [Set Wait Time] or [Continuous Wait] for the waiting status.
Continuous Wait
Set Wait Time: 60 second(s)
This setting is valid if [SADF] is specified for [Original Feed Type] when scanning.
If [Set Wait Time] is selected, enter the wait time in seconds (3-999) for placing
additional originals with the number keys. Scanning will start automatically
if additional originals are placed within this time. You can end scanning and
begin transmission by pressing the {#} key within this time. Once the specified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.
If [Continuous Wait] is selected, the machine will wait for the additional originals until the {#} key is pressed. Scanning will start when additional originals
are placed and the {Start} key is pressed. You can end scanning and begin
sending by pressing the {#} key.
Even if originals are placed on the exposure glass, the machine will operate
according to the specified settings. However, every time originals are placed
on the exposure glass, you must press the {Start} key to start scanning. Scanning will start if additional originals are placed and the {Start} key is pressed
within this time. You can end scanning and begin transmission by pressing
the {#} key within this time. Once the specified time has elapsed, transmission starts automatically.
If originals are placed in the auto document feeder (ADF), transmission will
start without waiting for additional originals after all originals in the ADF
have been scanned, regardless of the specified settings.
If a paper misfeed occurs or any of the following operations is performed
while the machine is waiting for additional originals, the countdown stops
and does not start again until the {#} key is pressed.
Changing the settings such as the scan settings
Opening the upper cover of the ADF
Pressing the {Interrupt} key to activate the copy mode
Background Density of ADS (Full Color)

Characteristics due to the type of paper such as non-whiteness like newspaper
or transparent originals can be reduced by correcting the scanning density.
Reference
"Batch, SADF", Scanner Reference
"Items for Specifying Scan Settings", Scanner Reference

"Setting Items for Original Feed Type", Scanner Reference
"Scanning Multiple Pages of Originals as One File", Scanner Reference
176
Send Settings
Send Settings
This section describes various items of [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features].
Compression (Black & White)

Select whether or not to compress black and white scan files.
On
Off
Compression reduces the time required for transferring the scan file.
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size
and network load.
Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)
Specify whether or not to compress multi level (gray scale) scan files.
On: Compression Level 3
Off
If you select [On], you can specify the compression level between one and five.
The image quality is better for lower compression, but the time required for
file transfer increases accordingly.
The actual time required for file transfer will vary depending on the file size
and network load.
High Compression PDF Level

Select compression level when creating high compression PDF files.
Higher
Standard
Max. E-mail Size
Select whether or not to limit the size of an e-mail to which an image is attached.
On: 2048KB
Off
When [On] is selected, enter the size limit (128-102400 KB) with the number
keys.
When the SMTP limits the size, match that setting.
177
Scanner Features
Divide & Send E-mail

This function is effective only when [On] is selected for [Max. E-mail Size].
Select whether or not an image exceeding the size specified in [Max. E-mail Size]
should be divided and sent using more than one e-mail.
Yes (per Max. Size): 5
Yes (per Page)
No
When [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, enter the Max. Number of Divisions (2500) with the number keys.
When [Multi-page: TIFF] or [Multipage: PDF] is selected for [File Type Priority], the
image will not be divided even if [Yes (per Page)] is selected.
When [Yes (per Max. Size)] is selected, some received files may not be able to be
restored, depending on the type of e-mail software.
When [No] is selected, the e-mail is not sent if its size exceeds the limit, and an
error message appears. The scan file is discarded.
Set the maximum e-mail size within the capacity of the SMTP server.
E-mail Information Language
Select the language in which e-mail information such as title, document
name, and sender's name is sent.
Select one of the following 20 languages:
British English, American English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,
Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Swedish, Finnish, Hungarian, Norwegian, Danish, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Russian, and Hangul.
Default:
Metric version: British English
Inch version: American English
The e-mail text which is a template cannot be changed.
No. of Digits for Single Page Files

Sets digit number for serial number to attach to Single Page file name.
4 Digits
8 Digits
Stored File E-mail Method
Specify the e-mail setting for sending stored files. You can select [Send File] or
[Send URL Link]. This setting can be used for the following:
Send File
Send URL Link
If you select [Send File], actual files are attached to e-mails.
If you select [Send URL Link], URL Links to file locations are attached to e-mails.
178
7. Registering Addresses and

Users for Scanner Functions
Following describes the procedure for registering the destination and the user.
Address Book
Registering information such as the names of users and their e-mail addresses in
the Address Book allows you to manage them easily.
Important
Address Book data is stored on the hard disk. It can be lost if there is some
kind of hard disk failure. The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any
damages resulting data loss.
You can register and manage the following items in the Address Book:
Names
You can register the name of the user and the key display. This is the basic information required for managing user of the machine.
To register a e-mail address in the address book, you must register information such as the user name and destination name in advance.
Auth. Info
You can register user codes in order to restrict particular functions to certain
users, and to check their use of each function. You can also register login user
names and login passwords to be used when sending e-mail, sending to folders, or accessing an LDAP server.
179
Protection
You can set protection codes to stop sender's name from being used or folders
from being accessed without authorization.
E-mail
You can register e-mail destinations in the Address Book.
180
Address Book
Folder
You can register the protocol, path name and server name.
SMB
FTP
7
NCP
181
Add to Group
You can put registered e-mail and folder destinations into a group for easier
management.
Note
You can also use a Web Image Monitor to register names in the Address Book.
With the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can register multiple names at
the same time.
Using [Address Management Tool] in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can
backup Address Book data. We recommend backing up data when using the
Address Book.
For details about using Web Image Monitor, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
For operating instructions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Managing names in the Address Book

By registering a name and key display beforehand, you can specify e-mail and
folder destinations simply by selecting the name key.
Reference
p.184 Registering Names
Sending e-mail by Quick Dial

You can also specify an e-mail address by selecting the destination shown on the
initial scanner display when sending a document using the scanner function. A
registered e-mail address can be used as the sender's address, and the sender's
address are automatically entered in the From" field of an mail header.
Reference
p.196 E-mail Destination
182
Address Book
Sending scanned files to a shared folder directly

After registering the path name, user name and password, you can connect to a
shared folder simply by selecting the destination shown on the initial scanner
display whenever sending files using the scanner function to a shared folder.
To share the folder using Windows, select the SMB protocol.
To register the folder to the FTP server, select the FTP protocol.
To register the folder to the NetWare server, select the NCP protocol.
Reference
p.200 Registering Folders
Preventing unauthorized user access to shared folders from the machine

After registering a protection code, you can specify the object of protection to
prevent an e-mail destination from being used without permission.
You can prevent unauthorized access to registered folders.
Reference
p.228 Registering a Protection Code
Managing users and machine usage

Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use
of each function:
Copier
Document Server
Scanner
Printer
Reference
p.187 Authentication Information
183
Registering Names
Register user information including their names.
The user name is useful for selecting a destination when sending e-mail. You can
also use it as a folder destination.
You can register up to 2000 names.
Registering Names
Following describes the procedure for registering names.

C Press [Address Book Management].
D Check that [Program/Change] is selected.
E Press [New Program].
F Press [Change] on the right of the Name.
The name entry display appears.
G Enter the name, and then press [OK].

H Press the key for the classification you want to use under Select Title.
184
Registering Names
I Press [OK] twice.

J Press the {User Tools} key.
Note
The name can be used for documents in the Document Server. For details
about the Document Server.
The keys you can select are as follows:

[Freq.]: Added to the page that is displayed first.
[AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]:
Added to the list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Freq.] and one more page for each title.
Reference
"Entering Text", About This Machine
"Document Server", Copy/ Document Server Reference
Changing a Registered Name

This section describes the procedure for changing a name.

E Select the registered name you want to change.
Press the name key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
F To change the name or key display, press [Change] on the right of the name
or key display.
G Enter the name or key display, and then press [OK].

185
H To change the title, press the key for the classification you want to use from
Select Title.
Note
You can search by the registered name, user code, folder name, or e-mail
address.
Reference
To change a registration number
A Press [Change] to the right of Registration No.

B Enter a new registration number using the number keys, and then press the
{#} key.
Deleting a Registered Name

Following describes the procedure for deleting a user.

D Press [Delete].
E Select the name you want to delete.
F Press [Yes].
G Press [Exit].
186
Authentication Information
Following describes the procedure for authenticating a user code.
Important
The functions associated with each user code are the same. If you change or
delete user codes, management data and limits associated with that code become invalid.
Register user codes to limit users to the following functions and check their use
of each function:
Copier
Document Server
Scanner
Printer
Note
You can register up to 500 user codes.
The number of copies scanned using the scanner function is counted for each
user code. This allows you to check each user's usage.
To automatically register the printer driver user code, select [Printer: PC Control] for the printer in User Code Authentication. To use the user code set in
User Tools, set the user codes registered in User Tools for the printer driver.
For details about setting user codes for the printer driver, see Printer Driver Help.
Reference
p.73 User Authentication Management
Registering a User Code

Following describes the procedure for registering a user code.

187

E Press the name whose code is to be registered, or enter the registered num-
ber using the number key.

You can search by the registered name, user code, folder name, or e-mail address.
F Press [Auth. Info].

G Enter the user code using the number keys, and then press {#} key.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key.
H Press [TNext] twice.

I Select the functions to be used with the user code from Available Functions.
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
L Press the {User Tools} key.
Note
User codes can contain up to eight digits.
To register the name, see Registering Names.

Reference
188
Changing a User Code

Following describes the procedure for changing a registered user code.
Important
Even if you change a user code, the counter value will not be cleared.

E Select the user whose user code you want to change.

G Press [Change], and then enter the new user code using the number keys
H Press {#} key.

I To change the available functions, press [Auth. Info] and then press [TNext]
twice.
189
J Press the key to select the functions to enable them.

Press the key to highlight it, and then the function is enabled. To cancel a selection, press the highlighted key.
K Press [OK].
L Press [Exit].
M Press the {User Tools} key.
Note
To change the name, key display and title, see Changing a Registered Name.
Reference
p.185 Changing a Registered Name
Deleting a User Code

Following describes the procedure for deleting a user code
Important
After clearing the user code, the counter is automatically cleared.

D Press [Program/Change].
E Select the name whose code is to be deleted.

190
G Press [Change] to delete the user code, and then press {#} key.
H Press [OK].
I Press [Exit].
Note
To delete a name from the Address Book entirely, see Deleting a Registered Name.
Reference
p.186 Deleting a Registered Name
7
Displaying the Counter for Each User
Following describes the procedure for displaying the counter on individual user
basis.

C Press [Display/Clear/Print Counter per User].
D Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter] or [Scanner Counter].
Counters for individual function usage under each user code appear.
191
Printing the Counter for Each User

Following describes the procedure for printing the counter that counts on individual user basis.

D Select a user code from the left side of the display.
Press [Select All on the Page] to select all user codes on the page.
E Press [Print Counter List] under Per User.
Enter the user code, and then press {#} if the user code is registered.
192
F Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
G Press [Print].
Printing the Counter for All User
Following describes the procedure for printing the counter for all users.

D Press [Print Counter List] under All Users.
Enter the user code, and then press {#} if the user code is registered.
E Select the function usage you want to print from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], [Scanner Counter] and [All Counters].
F Press [Print].
193
Clearing the Number of Prints

Following describes the procedure for clearing the counter.

D Select the user code to clear.
E To clear the number of prints made under a user code, Select the user code
from the left side of the display.
Press [Select All on the Page] to select all user codes on the page.
F Press [Clear] under Per User Codes.
194
G Select the function usage you want to clear from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], [Scanner Counter] and [All Counters].
H Press [OK].
I To clear the number of prints for all user codes, press [Clear] under All Users.
J Select the function usage you want to clear from [Copier Counter], [Print
Counter], and [Scanner Counter].
K Press [OK].
195
E-mail Destination
Register e-mail destinations so you do not need to enter an e-mail address every
time, and can send scan files from scanner function by e-mail.
It is easy to select the e-mail destination if you register Name" and Key Display" as the e-mail destination.
You can register e-mail destinations as a group.
You can use the e-mail address as the sender's address when sending scan
files in scanner mode. If you want to do this, set a protection code on the sender address to prevent unauthorized access.
Note
You can select an e-mail address from an LDAP server, and then register it in
the Address Book. See Sending Scan File by E-mail", Scanner Reference.
Reference
Registering an E-mail Destination

E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to register. Press the name
key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
F Press [E-mail].
196
E-mail Destination
G Press [Change].
H Enter the e-mail address.
I Press [OK].
J Select [E-mail].
K Press [OK].
Note
You can enter up to 128 characters for the e-mail address.

Reference
p.187 Registering a User Code

p.219 Registering Names to a Group
197
Changing an E-mail Destination

E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to change.
F Press [E-mail].
G Press [Change] under E-mail Address.
H Enter the e-mail address, and then press [OK].

I Press [OK].
Note
Reference
198
E-mail Destination
Using the e-mail address as the sender
A Press [Protection].
B Press [Sender ] under [Use Name as].
Deleting an E-mail Destination

E Select the name whose e-mail address you want to delete.
F Press [E-mail].
G Press [Change] under E-mail Address.
H Press [Delete All].
I Press [OK] twice.
Note
To delete the name, key display, and title, see Deleting a Registered Name.
Reference
199
Registering Folders
By registering a shared folder, you can send scan files to it directly.
There are three types of protocol you can use:
SMB
For sending files to shared Windows folders.
FTP
Use when sending files to an FTP server.
NCP
Use when sending files to an Net- Ware server.
Note
For details about protocols, server names, and folder levels, consult your network administrator.
You can prevent unauthorized users from accessing folders from the machine. See "Registering a Protection Code".
You can only select either SMB, FTP, or NCP. If you change protocol after finishing your settings, all previous entries are cleared.
You can register folder destinations in a group.
Using SMB to Connect
Note
To register a folder in an FTP server, see Using FTP to Connect.
To register a folder in an NetWare server, see Using NCP to Connect.

Reference
p.207 Using FTP to Connect
p.212 Using NCP to Connect
Registering a Folder
200
Registering Folders

E Select the name whose folder you want to register. Press the name key, or
enter the registered number using the number keys.
F Press [Auth. Info], and then press [Next].
G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of Folder Authentication.
H Press [Change] under Login User Name.
I Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].
J Press [Change] under Login Password.
K Enter the password, and then press [OK].
L Enter the password again to confirm, and then press [OK].
M Press [Folder].
N Press [SMB].
O Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.

P Press [Exit].
Q Press [OK].
201
R Press [Exit].
Note
You can enter a path using up to 128 characters.

To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the
folder by browsing the network.
If the connection test fails, check the settings, and then try again.
When Do not Specify is selected, the SMB User Name and SMB Password
that you have specified in Default User Name / Password (Send) of File
Transfer settings applies.
If User Authentication is specified, contact your administrator.
Reference
p.202 To locate the folder manually

p.203 Using Browse Network to locate the folder
To locate the folder manually
A Press [Change] under Path.

B Enter the path where the folder is located.
C Press [OK].
If the format of the entered path is not correct, a message appears. Press [Exit],
and then enter the path again.
Note
Enter the path using the format as follows : \\ServerName\ShareName\PathName
You can also enter an IPv4 address.
202
Registering Folders
Using Browse Network to locate the folder
A Press [Browse Network].

Work groups on the same network are displayed.
Network display only lists client computers you are authorized to access.
B Select the work group.

Computers in the selected work group are displayed.
C Select a client computer.

Shared folders under it appear.
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.
D Select the folder you want to register.

E [OK].
If a Login Screen Appears
This section explains how to log on to the machine if the login screen appears
when you try to access a folder by browsing the network.
If you have not specified folder authentication, or if an incorrect user name or
password has been entered for folder authentication, the login screen appears.
A Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].

Enter the login user name specified for folder authentication.
B Enter the password, and then press [OK].

The path to the selected folder appears.
If a message appears, press [Exit], and then enter the login user name and
password again.
203
Changing a Folder

E Select the name whose folder you want to change.
F Press [Folder].
G Select the items you want to change.
When specifying a folder, enter the path directly or select it by referencing the
network. For more information, see "To locate the folder manually" and "Using Browse Network to locate the folder".
H Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.

I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
Note
Reference
204
Registering Folders
To change the protocol
A Press [FTP] or [NCP].
B A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].

Changing the protocol will clear all settings made under the previous protocol.
C Enter each items again.

Reference
p.207 Registering a Folder
Changing SMB settings
To change SMB settings:
A Press [Change] of path name.

B Enter the name of the path on which the folder is located, and then press
[OK].
Note
The folder destination can be selected using Network Reference.
Reference
205
Deleting a registered folder
A [System Settings].

D Press [Delete].
E Select the name whose folder you want to delete.
F Press [ Folder].
G Press the protocol which is not currently selected.
A confirmation message appears.
H Press [Yes].
I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
Note
To delete the name, key display, and title, see Deleting a Registered Name.
Reference
206
Registering Folders
Using FTP to Connect

Note
To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see Using SMB to Connect.
To register a folder in an NetWare server, see Using NCP to Connect.

Reference
p.200 Using SMB to Connect
p.212 Using NCP to Connect
7
E Select the name whose folder you want to register.

M Press [Folder].
207
N Press [FTP].
O A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].

P Press [Change] under Server Name.
Q Enter the server name, and then press [OK].
R Press [Change] under Path.
S Enter the path.
T Press [OK].
U Press [Change] under Port Number.
V Enter Port Number.
W Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
X Press [Exit].
Y Press [OK].
208
Registering Folders
Z Press [Exit].
Note
You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.

You can enter up to 128 characters for the password.
You can enter a server name using up to 64 characters.
You can enter an absolute path, using this format: /user/ home/username"; or a relative path, using this format: directory/sub-directory".
If you leave the path blank, the login directory is assumed to be the current
working directory.
You can also enter an IPv4 address.
To change the port number, press [Change] under Port No.. Enter the port
number using the number keys, and then press {#}.
Specify the port number within the range of 1 to 65535.
When [Do not Specify] is selected, the FTP User Name and FTP Password
Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
Reference

Changing a Folder

209

E Select the name whose folder you want to change, and then press [Folder].
F Press [Folder].
G Select the items you want to change.
H Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
Note
Reference
A Press [SMB], or [NCP].
B A confirmation message appears.Press [Yes].

C Enter each items again.

Reference
210
Registering Folders
Changing items under FTP
A Press [Change] under Port Number.

B Enter the new port number, and then press {#}.
C Press [Change] under Server Name.
D Enter the new server name, and then press [OK].
E Press [Change] under Path.
F Enter the new path, and then press [OK].
Deleting a Folder
7
E Select the name whose folder you want to delete.
F Press [Folder].
H Press [Yes].
I Press [OK].
211
J Press [Exit].
Note
To delete a name entirely, see Deleting a Registered Name.
Reference
Using NCP to Connect

Note
To register a shared folder configured in Windows, see Using SMB to Connect
To register a folder in an FTP server, see Using FTP to Connect
Reference
p.200 Using SMB to Connect
p.207 Using FTP to Connect

E Press the name you want to register or enter the registered number using
the number keys.

212

Registering Folders

M Press [Folder].
N Press [NCP].
O A confirmation message appeares. Press [Yes].
P Select "Connection Type".
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to specify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].
Q Specify the folder.

R Press [OK].
S Press [Exit].
Note

If you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], enter the user name followed
by the name of the context where the user object is located. If the user name
is user" and the context name is context", enter user.context"
To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the
folder by browsing the network.
When [Do not Specify] is selected, the NCP User Name and NCP Password
Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
Reference

213
To locate the folder manually
A Press [Change] under Path.

B Enter the path where the folder is located.
C [OK].
D Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.
E Press [Exit].
Note
If you set "Connection Type" to [NDS], and if the NDS tree name is "tree",
the name of the context including the volume is "context", the volume
name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder", then the path will be
"\\tree\volume. context\folder".
If you set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], and if the Net-Ware server name
is "server", the volume name is "volume" and the folder name is "folder",
then the path will be "\\server\volume\folder".
Using Browse Network to locate the folder
A Press [Browse Network].

B If you have set "Connection Type" to [NDS], a list of items in the NDS tree
appears. If you have set "Connection Type" to [Bindery], a list of items on the
NetWare server appears.
C Search for the destination folder in the NDS tree or NetWare server.
You can press [Up One Level] to switch between levels.
D Select the folder you want to register.

E [OK].
Note
Only the folders you are allowed to access appear in [Browse Network].
If the languages used on the machine and the destination you want to view
differ, the items in the list may not appear correctly.
Up to 100 items can be displayed in the list.
214
Registering Folders
Changing a registered folder

E Select the user of the registered folder you want to change.
F Press [Folder].
G Select "Connection Type".
If you want to specify a folder in an NDS tree, press [NDS]. If you want to specify a folder on a NetWare server, press [Bindery].
H Specify the folder.

To specify a folder, you can either enter the path manually or locate the folder
by browsing the network.
I Press [Connection Test] to check the path is set correctly.

J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
Note
Reference
215
Changing NCP settings

To change NCP settings:
A Select the type of connection.

B Press [Change] of path name.
C Enter the name of the path on which the folder is located, and then press
[OK].
D Press [Connection Test] to make sure the path is correctly set up.
E When you have made the necessary changes to the information, press [Set].
F Press [Close].
Note
To specify a folder, enter its path directly or select it using Browser Network.
Reference
A Press [SMB], or [FTP].

B A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes].
C Enter each item again.

Reference
216
Registering Folders
Deleting a Folder

D Check that [Proglam/Change] is selected.
E Select a user of the folder you want to delete.
F Press [Folder].
H Press [Yes].
I Press [OK].
J [Exit].
Note
To delete a name entirely, see Deleting a Registered Name.
Reference
217
Registering Names to a Group

You can register names to a group to enable easy management of e-mail addresses and folders for each group.
To add names to a group, the groups must be registered beforehand.
Important
When using Scan to Folder function, you cannot send scan files to a group
with over 50 folders registered.
The maximum number of destinations registerable to a group is 500.

Note
You can set a protection code to prevent unauthorized access to the folders
registered in a group. For details, see Registering a Protection Code".
Reference
Registering a Group

C Press [Address Book: Program/Change/Delete Group].
E Press [New Program].
218
F Press [Change] under Group Name.
G Enter the group name, and then press [OK].

The Key Display name is set automatically.
H Press the title key under Select Title, if necessary.

I When you want to change the key display, press [Change] under Key Display. Enter the key display, and then press [OK].
J Press [OK].
Note
The keys you can select are as follows:
[Freq.]: Added to the page that is displayed first.

[AB], [CD], [EF], [GH], [IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], [RST], [UVW], [XYZ], [1] to [10]
Added to the list of items in the selected title.
You can select [Freq.] and one more page for each title.
Reference

You can put names that have been registered in the Address Book into a group.
When registering new names, you can also register groups at the same time.
219

E Select the name to register in a group.
F Press [Add to Group].

G Select a group to which you want to add the name to.
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the name is
added to it.
H Press [OK].
220
Adding a Groupe to Another Group

You can add a group to another group.

C Press [Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group].
E Select the group that you want to put into another group.
Press the group key, or enter the registered number using the number keys.
221
G Select the group which you want to add to.
The group key that you have selected becomes highlighted, and the group is
added to it.
H Press [OK].
Displaying Names Registered in a Group
You can check the names or groups registered in each group.

222
E Select the group where the members you want to check is egistered.
F Press [Programmed User/Group].

All the names registered will be displayed.
G Press [OK].
Removing a Name from a Group

E Select the name to remove from a group.
223
G Select the group from which you want to remove the name.
The group key is deselected, and the name is removed from the group.
H Press [OK].
Deleting a Group Within Another Group

D Check that [Program / Change] is seleced.
224
E Select the group that you want to delete from.

Press the group key, or enter the registered number during the number keys.

The keys of groups in which the group is registered appear highlighted.
G Select the group that you want to delete from.
The group key is deselected and the group is deleted from it.
H Press [OK].
225
Changing a Group Name

E Press the group key you want to change.
F To change the group name and key display, press [Change] under Group
Name or Key Display.
G Enter the new group name or key display, and then press [OK].
H To change the title, press the title key under Select Title.
I To change the registration number, press [Change] under Registration No..
J Enter the new registration number using the number keys.
K Press the {#} key.
L Press [OK].
226
Deleting a Goup

D Press [Delete].
E Press [Yes].
F Press a group key you want to delete.
G Press [Yes].
227
Registering a Protection Code

You can stop sender's names or folders being accessed by setting a protection code.
You can use this function to protect the following:
Folders
You can prevent unauthorized access to folders.
Sender's names
You can prevent misuse of sender's names.
Reference
p.187 Registering a User Code
Registering a Protection Code to a Single User
7
E Select the name whose protection code you want to register.
228
Registering a Protection Code
F Press [Protection].
G Press [Destination] or [Sender] under Use Name as.
Both [Destination] and [Sender] can be selected at the same time.
H Press [Change] under Protection Code.

I Enter a protection code using the number keys, and then press {#}.
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
Note
You can specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify
Protection without specifying a protection code.
229
Registering a Protection Code to a Group User

E Press the group key you want to register or enter the registered number using the number keys.
G Press [Folder Destination] under Protection Object.
H Press [Change] under Protection Code.
I Enter a protection code using the number keys, and then press the {#} key.
J Press [OK].
K Press [Exit].
Note
You can specify a protection code of up to eight digits. You can also specify
Protection without specifying a protection code.
230
Registering SMTP and LDAP Authentication

SMTP Authentication
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name
and login password to be used when accessing an SMTP server.
To use an SMTP server, you need to program it beforehand.
Important
When [Do not Specify] is selected for SMTP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in SMTP Authentication of File Transfer settings applies. For details, see "File Transfer".
7
the number keys


G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of SMTP Authentication.
231

M [OK].
Note

When using POP before SMTP Authentication, you can enter up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
To change the SMTP Authentication settings, repeat stepB to M.
Reference
p.15 Network Settings

232
LDAP Authentication
For each user registered in the Address Book, you can register a login user name
and login password to be used when accessing an LDAP server.
To use an LDAP server, you need to program it beforehand. For details, see
LDAP Server Settings", Network Guide.
Important
When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in Program/Change LDAP Server of
Administrator Tools settings applies. For details, see "LDAP Server Settings".
If there is user authentication in place, check with the administrator.
7
the number keys.

G Press [Specify Other Auth. Info] on the right side of LDAP Authentication.
233

M Press [OK].
Note
When [Do not Specify] is selected for LDAP Authentication, the User Name
and Password that you have specified in Program/Change LDAP Server
of Administrator Tools settings applies.
To change the LDAP Authentication settings, repeat stepB to M.
Reference
234
8. Other User Tools

Initial settings allow you switch the language as well as checking the number of
printed papers by displaying the counter.
Changing the Display Language

You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.
A Press the {Language Selection} key.
APD015S
Note
If you want to return the display language to English, repeat the step
above.
235
Other User Tools
Inquiry
The Inquiry function lets you check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs,
or ordering consumables such as toner. Be sure to contact your service engineer
to verify the following:
Consumables
Telephone No. to order
Toner
Staple
Staple (Center)
Machine Maintenance/Repair
Telephone No.
Serial No. of Machine
Sales Representative
Telephone No.
A Press [Inquiry].
Inquiry information appears.
B Press [Print Inquiry List].
236
Inquiry
C Press the {Start} key.

The inquiry information list is printed out.
D Press [Exit] twice.
237
Other User Tools
Counter
Displaying the Total Counter
You can display the total counter value used for all functions.
You can also print out a counter data list.
A Press {Counter} key.
APD016S
B To print a counter list, press [Print Counter List].

A counter list prints out.
D Press [Exit] twice.
238
Counter
Method of Counting
The counter increments 1 for each original sheets. In duplex mode, it counts
2 for front and back of original sheet.
The counter increments at the functions below:

Copying
Printing
Scanning
Test Print (Multiple Lists, Configuration Page, Error Log, Menu List, PCL
Configuration/Font Page, PS Configuration/Font Page, PDF Configuration/Font Page, Hex Dump)
Printing Destination List of Address Book
The counter does not count at the functions below:
Printing Counter List
Printing Error Report
Printing in SP Mode
Printing Inquiry List
Printing Interface Settings Configuration List
Cover sheet and Designation sheet, Slip sheet, Separation sheet, without
printing
239
Other User Tools
240
9. Appendix
Adjustment Settings for Operators
Changing the Adjustment Settings for Operators
APD014S
B Press [Adjustment Settings for Operators].
C Select the item that you want to change the value.

D Specify the setting value.
To select the setting value, press the value on the display.
To input the value, use the number keys.
E Press {enter}.
F Press [Exit] twice.
241
Appendix
Setting Values
Feed
Shift Image With Feed
1-710-001 : Front Side
Max.: 2 mm
Min.: -2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0
1-710-002 : Back Side
Max.: 2 mm
Min.: -2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0
1-710-003 : Front Side (Low Speed Mode)
Max.: 2 mm
Min.: -2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0
1-710-004 : Back Side (Low Speed Mode)
Max.: 2 mm
Min.: -2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0
Shift Image Across Feed

1-720-001 : Tray 1
Max: 2 mm
Min:-2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0
242
1-720-002 : Tray 2
Max: 2 mm
Min:-2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0
1-720-003 : Tray 3
Max: 2 mm
Min:-2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0
1-720-004 : Tray 4 LCT
Max: 2 mm
Min:-2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0
1-720-005 : Tray 5 LCT
Max: 2 mm
Min:-2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0
1-720-006 : Tray 6 LCT
Max: 2 mm
Min:-2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0
1-720-007 : Tray 7 Bypass

Max: 2 mm
Min:-2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial: value 0
1-720-008 : Duplex
Max: 2 mm
Min:-2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial: value 0
243
Appendix
Set Fusing Temparature

1740001 : Set Fusing Temparature
1: Raise temperature to improve fusing
2: Lower temperature to reduce curl
Double-Feed Detection
1-908-001 : Tray 1
0: Off
1: On
1-908-002 : Tray 2
0: Off
1: On
1-908-003 : Tray 3
0: Off
1: On
1-908-004 : Tray 4 (LCT Tray 1)
0: Off
1: On
1-908-005 : Tray 5 (LCT Tray 2)
0: Off
1: On
1-908-006 : Tray 6 (LCT Tray 3)
0: Off
1: On
1-908-007 : Tray 7 (Bypass Tray)

0: Off
1: On
1-908-008 : After Double-Feed Detection
244
CIS Img Pos Adj: Feed Setting

1-911-001 : Tray 1
0: Off
1: On
1-911-002 : Tray 2
0: Off
1: On
1-911-003 : Tray 3
0: Off
1: On
1-911-004 : Tray 4 (LCT Tray 1)
0: Off
1: On
1-911-005 : Tray 5 (LCT Tray 2)
0: Off
1: On
1-911-006 : Tray 6 (LCT Tray 3)
0: Off
1: On
1-911-007 : Tray 7 (Bypass Tray)
0: Off
1: On
1-911-008 : Duplex Tray

0: Off
1: On
Drum
Magnification Adjustment Across Feed
2-750-001 : Copy Image: Front Side
Max: 0.3 %
Min: -0.3 %
Step: 0.1 %
Initial value: 0 %
245
Appendix
2-750-002 : Copy Image: Back Side

Max: 0.3 %
Min: -0.3 %
Step: 0.1 %
Initial value: 0 %
2-750-003 : Print Image: Front Side
Max: 0.3 %
Min: -0.3 %
Step: 0.1 %
Initial value: 0 %
2-750-004 : Print Image: Back Side
Max: 0.3 %
Min: -0.3 %
Step: 0.1 %
Initial value: 0 %
Magnification Adjustment With Feed
2760001 : Magnification Adjustment With Feed
Max: 0.3 %
Min: -0.3 %
Step: 0.1 %
Initial value: 0 %
Temp / Humidity Display
2-770-001 : Internal Temperature

Max: 60 C
Min: -20 C
Step: 1 C
Initial value:
2-770-002 : Internal Humidity
Max: 100 %
Min: 0 %
Step: 1 %
Initial value:
246
Process
Select Test Pattern
3740001 : Select Test Pattern
Trim Pattern
Reset to Defaults
3740002 : Reset to Defaults
Peripherals
Staple Position Adjustment
6-700-001 : A3-Lengthwise
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-700-002 : B4 SEF
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-700-003 : A4 SEF
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-700-004 : A4 LEF
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
247
Appendix
6-700-005 : B5 SEF
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-700-006 : B5 LEF
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.1 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-700-007 : DLT SEF
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-700-008 : LG SEF
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-700-009 : LT SEF
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-700-010 : LT LEF
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-700-011 : Other
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
248
Adjust Punch Hole : With Feed

6-705-001 : 2-Hole: JPN
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-705-002 : 3-Hole: NA
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-705-003 : 4-Hole: Europe
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-705-004 : 4-Hole: NA
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-705-005 : 2-Hole: NA
Max: 2 mm
Min: -2 mm
Step: 0.5 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
Adjust Booklet Stapling Position

6-730-001 : A3 SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
249
Appendix
6-730-002 : B4 SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-730-003 : A4 SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-730-004 : B5 SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-730-005 : 12 x 18 SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-730-006 : DLT SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-730-007 : LG SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-730-008 : LT SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
250
6-730-009 : Custom Size

Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
Adjust Booklet Fold Position
6-735-001 : A3 SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-735-002 : B4 SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-735-003 : A4 SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-735-004 : B5 SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-735-005 : 12 x 18 SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
251
Appendix
6-735-006 : DLT
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-735-007 : LG
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-735-008 : LT SEF
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
6-735-009 : Custom Size
Max: 3.0 mm
Min: -3.0 mm
Step: 0.2 mm
Initial value: 0 mm
252
Specifications for the Main Unit

Configuration:
Console
Photosensitivity type:
OPC drum (100)
Original scanning:
One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD
Copy process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
Development:
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system
Fusing:
Heating roll pressure system
Resolution:
1200 dpi
Exposure glass:
Stationary original exposure type
Original reference position:
Rear left corner
Warm-up time:
Less than 300 seconds (23C)
Originals:
Sheet/Book/Objects
Original size:
A3L - A5KL, 11" 17"L - 51/2" 81/2" KL
Copy paper size:
12" 18" Postcard (depending on the paper trays)
253
Appendix
Copy paper weight:

Tray 1 - Tray 3 : 52 - 216 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover
Tray 4, Tray 5 (LCIT RT5000), Tray 4 - Tray 6 (LCIT RT5010) : 52 - 216 g/m2,
16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover, 110 lb. Index
Tray 6 (LCIT RT5000): 52 - 163 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond - 60 lb. Cover
Tray 7 (Multi Bypass Tray BY5000): 52 - 216 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover,
110 lb. Index
Reference
p.264 LCIT RT5000
p.265 LCIT RT5010
Non-reproduction area:
Leading edge: More than 4 2 mm
Trailing edge: More than 2 + 2/1.7 mm
Left edge: More than 2 1.5 mm
Right edge: More than 2 1.5 mm
First copy time:
Type 1
3.5 seconds (for Face Up)
5 seconds (for Face Down)
Type 2
3.2 seconds (for Face Up)
4.5 seconds (for Face Down)
Type 3
3 seconds (for Face Up)
4 seconds (for Face Down)
Copying speed:
Type 1
90 copies/minute (A4 K, 81/2" 11"K)
Type 2
Type 3
254
Reproduction ratio:
Preset reproduction ratios:
Enlargement
Metric version: 400 %, 200 %, 141 %, 122 %, 115 %
Inch version: 400 %, 200 %, 155 %, 129 %, 121 %
Full Size
Metric version: 100 %
Inch version: 100 %
Reduction
Metric version: 93 %, 82 %, 75 %, 71 %, 65 %, 50 %, 25 %
Inch version: 93 %, 85 %, 78 %, 73 %, 65 %, 50 %, 25 %
Zoom
From 25 % to 400 % in 1 % steps
Maximum number of continuous copy sets
1 9999 copies
Copy paper capacity:
Tray 1 (Tandem tray) : 2,000 sheets (1,000 sheets 2) (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
Tray 2 (550-sheet tray) : 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
Tray 3 (550-sheet tray) : 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
Tray 4 (LCIT RT5000): 1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
Tray 7: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
Power consumption (Type 1: 90 copies/minute model):

Main machine only
Full system *1
Warm-up
2210W
2290W
Stand-by
370W
420W
Copying
1680W
1830W
Maximum
2940W
3060W
*1
Main machine with the finisher, Booklet FInisher, A3 LCIT, Multi bypass tray
(Tray 7), ADF, interposer and Z-folding Unit.
255
Appendix

Main machine only
Full system *1
Warm-up
2190W
2250W
Stand-by
400W
460W
Copying
1890W
2110W
Maximum
2960W
3080W
*1

Main machine only
Full system *1
Warm-up
2240W
2310W
Stand-by
430W
480W
Copying
2160W
2340W
Maximum
3730W
3850W
*1
Dimensions (W D H up to exposure glass):

870 858.5 1,000 mm, 34.23" 33.78" 39.34"
Space for main machine (W D):
1,202 858.5 mm, 47.3" 33.78" (ADF external extender is not used, optional output tray is installed.)
2,218 858.5 mm, 87.3" 33.78" (ADF external extender is used for larger
size originals, optional finisher proof tray is installed.)
Noise emission *1 (Type 1):

Sound power level
Main machine only
Complete system *3
Copying
less than 74 dB (A)
less than 78 dB (A)
Stand-by
less than 60 dB (A)
less than 64 dB (A)
Main machine only
Complete system *3
Copying
less than 68 dB (A)
Stand-by
less than 54 dB (A)
Sound pressure level *2
*1
*2
*3
256
The above measurements are ISO 7779 actual values.

Measured at the position of the bystander/operator. During printing.
Main machine with full options.

Sound power level
Main machine only
Complete system *3
Copying
less than 76 dB (A)
less than 80 dB (A)
Stand-by
less than 66 dB (A)
less than 70 dB (A)
Main machine only
Complete system *3
Copying
less than 70 dB (A)
Stand-by
less than 60 dB (A)
*1
*2
*3


Sound power level
Main machine only
Complete system *3
Copying
less than 79 dB (A)
less than 83 dB (A)
Stand-by
less than 74 dB (A)
less than 78 dB (A)
Main machine only
Complete system *3
Copying
less than 73 dB (A)
Stand-by
less than 68 dB (A)
*1
*2
*3

Weight:
Approx. 270 kg, 594 lb (main machine with the ADF)
257
Appendix
Document Server
HDD:
160 GB 2
HDD (Document Server):
45 GB
Capacity:
Copy: Approx. 3,000 sheets (ITUT-No.4 chart)
Batch mode: Approx. 3,000 sheets (ITUT-No.4 chart)
Printer: Approx. 15,000 sheets (600 dpi)
Scanner: Approx. 3,000 sheets (200 dpi/Text) (ITUT-No.4 chart) *1
Note
If you need to change the capacity of the document server, contact your
service representative.
Maximum number of stored documents:

3,000
Maximum pages of stored documents:
15,000 sheets
Maximum number of pages per document:
2,000
Capacity (Memory Sorting):
6.75 GB (A4/81/2" 11" : Approx. 333 sheets-3000 sheets at maximum) *2
Capacity (Others):
10.0 GB
*1
*2
258
Scanning Condition: ITUT-No.4 chart/200 dpi/Text/A4/MMR

The capacity will change when the multiple functions are used.
Auto Document Feeder

Mode:
ADF mode, Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Sizes mode, Thin mode
Original size:
A3LA5KL
11" 17"L 81/2" 51/2"KL
Original weight:
1-sided originals: 52 - 157 g/m2 (14 - 42 lb. Bond)
2-sided originals: 52 - 128 g/m2 (14 - 34 lb. Bond) (Duplex)
Thin paper mode: 40 - 156 g/m2 (11 -42 lb. Bond)
Number of originals that can be set:
100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) of less than 12 mm, 0.5"
Copying speed:
80 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" 11"K, 1 to 1 copying)
Power Source:
Supplied from the main machine.
Note
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
259
Appendix
Specifications for Options

Finisher SR5000
Finisher Upper Tray:
Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"KL, 12" 18"L
Paper weight:
52 216 g/m2, 14 58 lb. Bond
Stack capacity:
500 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"KL)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
250 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 12" 18"L)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Finisher Shift Tray:
Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"KL, 12" 18"L
Paper weight:
52 300 g/m2, 14 80 lb. Bond
Stack capacity:
3,000 sheets (A4K, B5K, 81/2" 11"K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
1,500 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"L, 12" 18"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
500 sheets (A5K, 51/2" 81/2"K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
100 sheets (A5L, 51/2" 81/2"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Staple paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" 17"L,81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
Staple paper weight:
64 80 g/m2, 17 20 lb. Bond
Staple capacity:
100 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" 11"KL) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
50 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
260
Stack capacity after stapling

20030 sets (10100 sheets) (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" 11"KL)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
150 sets (29 sheets) (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" 11"KL)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
15030 sets (1050 sheets) (A3L, B4L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
150 sets (29 sheets) (A3L, B4L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Staple position:
4 position (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)
Power consumption:
Approx. 120 W (supplied from the main machine)
Dimensions (W D H):
800 730 980 mm, 31.5" 28.7" 38.6"
Weight:
Approx. 75 kg, 163.3 lb.
Note
Booklet Finisher BK5000

To use the Booklet Finisher BK5000, the Finisher SR5000 is required.
Saddle stitch paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4L, B5L, 12" 18"L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"L
Saddle stitch paper weight:

64 90 g/m2, 17 28 lb. Bond
Saddle stitch capacity:
Max. 15 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Stack capacity after Saddle stitching
30 sets (25 sheets) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Saddle stitch position:
center 2 position
Power consumption:
Approx. 100 W (power is supplied from the mainframe)
261
Appendix
Dimensions (W D H):
600 730 980 mm, 23.6 28.7 38.6 inch
Weight:
Approx. 70 kg, 152.4lb
Note
Cover Interposer Tray CI5000

To use the Cover Interposer Tray CI5000, the Finisher SR5000 or the Booklet Finisher BK5000 are required.
Paper size:
Widrh: 13 A5K / 51/2" 81/2"K
Length: A5L / 51/2" 81/2"L 19
Paper weight:
64 216 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond 80 lb. Cover
Paper capacity:
200 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) 2
Power consumption (Max):
Approx. 95 W (supplied from the main machine)
Dimensions (W D H):
543 730 1270 mm, 21.3 28.7 50
Weight:
Approx. 45 kg, 98.0 lb
Note
262
Punch Unit PU5000

To use the Punch Unit PU5000, the Finisher SR5000 or the Booklet Finisher
BK5000 are required.
Paper size:
2 holes
L: A3 - A6, 11" 17" - 51/2" 81/2"
K: A4 - A5, 81/2" 11", 51/2" 81/2"
3 holes
L: A3, B4, 11" 17"
K: A4, B5, 81/2" 11"
4 holes (Europe)
L: A3, B4, 11" 17"
K: A4, B5, 81/2" 11"
4 holes (North Europe)
L: A3 - B6, 11" 17" - 51/2" 81/2"
K: A4 - A5, 81/2" 11", 51/2" 81/2"
Paper weight:
52 163 g/m2, 14 lb. 43 lb. Bond
2 holes
52 163 g/m2, 14 lb. 43 lb. Bond
3 holes
52 163 g/m2, 14 lb. 43 lb. Bond
4 holes (Europe)
52 128 g/m2, 14 lb. 34 lb. Bond
4 holes (North Europe)
52 128 g/m2, 14 lb. 34 lb. Bond
Note
263
Appendix
Z-folding Unit ZF4000

To use the Z-folding Unit ZF4000, the Booklet Finisher BK5000 is required.
Paper size:
A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
Paper weight:
64 80 g/m2, 17 20 lb. Bond
Power consumption
Maximum. 100 W (a separate power source is required)
Dimensions (W D H):
177 620 960 mm, 6.9" 24.4" 37.8"
Weight:
Approx. 55 kg, 121.3 lb
Note
LCIT RT5000
A4 Large Capacity Tray
Paper size:
A4L, B5L, A5KL, 17" 11"L, 81/2" 51/2"KL
Paper weight:
Tray 4, 5: 52 216 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond 80 lb. Cover, 110 lb Index
Tray 6: 52 163 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond 60 lb. Cover
Paper capacity:
Tray 4, 5: 1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Tray 6: 2,550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Total 4,550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Power consumption
Maximum. 135 W (supplied from the main machine)
Dimensions (W D H, option unit):
540 730 980 mm, 21.3" 28.8" 38.6"
Weight:
Approx. 87 kg (192 lb) or less
Note
264
LCIT RT5010
A3 Large Capacity Tray
Paper size:
Length: A5K / 81/2" 51/2"K 19
Width: A5L / 81/2" 51/2"L 13, 100 mm width with the special side fence
Paper weight:
Tray 4 Tray 6: 52 216 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond 80 lb. Cover, 110 lb. Index
Paper capacity:
Tray 4, 6: 1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Tray 5: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Total 4,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Power consumption
Dimensions (W D H, option unit):
880 730 980 mm, 21.3" 28.8" 38.6"
Weight:
Approx. 163 kg, 359.5lb
Note
Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (Tray 7)
Paper size:
Width: 100 mm 13
Length: A5L / 81/2" 51/2"L 19
Paper weight:
52 - 216 g /m2, 16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover
Paper capacity:
500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Power consumption:
Dimensions (W D H):
702 556 202 mm, 27.6 21.9 8.0
265
Appendix
Weight:
Approx. 18 kg (39.7 lb) or less
Note
Others
A3 / 11" 17" Tray Unit TK5000
You can load A3L or 11" 17"L paper in tray 1 using this unit.
Copy Connector Type 3260
You can utilize the connect copy function bridging two machines with the
Copy Connector Type 3260.
Copy Data Security Unit Type E
The Copy Data Security Unit Type E deletes images and prints the gray
ground color of the paper, when the documents marked unauthorized are
copied.
Data Overwrite Security Unit E
The Data Over Write Security Unit E overwrites the data that remains on the
hard disk, automatically.
266
Information about Installed Applications

Open SSL
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may
"OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
267
Appendix
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT `ÀS IS'' AND

ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found
in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL
code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code
are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the
form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
268

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic
software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic'
can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the
apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e this code cannot simply be copied and
put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Open SSH
The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows. First,
we will summarize and say that all components are under a BSD licence, or a licence more free than that.
OpenSSH contains no GPL code.
1)
Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo@cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland All rights reserved
As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software can be used
freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this software must be clearly
marked as such, and if the derived work is incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file, it must be called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure
Shell".
269
Appendix
[Tatu continues]
However, I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or copyrights
held by third parties, and the software includes parts that are not under my direct control. As far as I know, all included source code is used in accordance with
the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose (the
GNU license being the most restrictive); see below for details.
[However, none of that term is relevant at this point in time. All of these restrictively licenced software components which he talks about have been removed
from OpenSSH, i.e.,
- RSA is no longer included, found in the OpenSSL library
- IDEA is no longer included, its use is deprecated
- DES is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- GMP is no longer used, and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL
- Zlib is now external, in a library
- The make-ssh-known-hosts script is no longer included
- TSS has been removed
- MD5 is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL
- Blowfish is now external, in the OpenSSL library
[The licence continues]
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software
are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific library, and patent office worldwide. More information can be found e.g. at "http://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions
and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility. You will be responsible for
any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any claims whether possessing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any responsibility on your behalf.
NO WARRANTY
270
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO

WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE
OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO
IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY
WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2)
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by
CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code
Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that this copyright notice is retained.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Ariel Futoransky <futo@core-sdi.com>
<http://www.core-sdi.com>
3)
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by the
University of California, since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley code.
271
Appendix
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995

The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
`ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
4)
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term
BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:
Markus Friedl
Theo de Raadt
Niels Provos
Dug Song
Kevin Steves
Daniel Kouril
Wesley Griffin
Per Allansson
Jason Downs
Solar Designer
Todd C. Miller
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica272 tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
5)
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses:
c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the
openbsd-compat/ subdirectory are licensed as follows:
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright
holders:
Todd C. Miller
Theo de Raadt
Damien Miller
Eric P. Allman
The Regents of the University of California
273
Appendix
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
`ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
Open LDAP
The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.

The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under
terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of
the license.
274
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND

ITS CONTRIBUTORS `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP
FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S)
OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without
specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all
times remain with copyright holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California,
USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of
this document is granted.
275
INDEX
A
About Address Book, 179
Accessing User Tools (System Settings), 3
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level, 175
Address Book
Change Order, 68
Edit Title, 68
Program/Change/Delete Group, 68
Select Title, 68
Address Book Management, 68
ADF Original Table Elevation, 43
Adjustment Settings for Operators, 241
Administrator Authentication
Management, 68
Administrator's E-mail Address, 62
Administrator Tools / System Settings, 68
AOF (Always On), 68
Append CR to LF, 168
Authentication Information, 187, 231
Auto Continue, 162
Auto Delete File in Document Server, 68
Auto Delete Stored Print Jobs, 162
Auto Delete Temporary Print, 162
Auto Image Density Priority, 113
Auto Logout Timer, 49
Auto Off Timer, 49
Auto Specify Sender Name, 62
Auto Tray Switching, 113
B
Background Density of ADS (Full Color), 175
Background Numbering, 130
Back Margin
Left/Right, 124
Top / Bottom, 124
Back Up / Restore Address Book, 68
Bidirectional Communication, 56
Bidirectional SCSI print, 57
Blank Page Print, 162
Booklet Finisher BK5000, 261
Bypass Tray Setting Priority, 162
276
C
Capture Server IP Address, 62
Change Original Counter Display, 113
Change PDF Password, 171
Changing a FTP Folder Destination, 209
Changing a Group Name, 226
Changing an E-mail Destination, 198
Changing a Registered Name, 185
Changing a User Code, 189
Changing the Display Language, 235
Changing the registered SMB Folder
Destination, 204
Changing Tray Paper Settings, 89
Channel, 59
Checking the Connection, 13
Clearing the Counter, 194
Clearing the Number of Prints, 194
Communication Mode, 59
Compression, 177
Configuration Page, 157
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface, 8
Connecting to the IEEE 1284 Interface, 11
Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface, 10
Connecting to the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless
LAN) Interface, 12
Connecting to the Interface, 7
Connecting with the USB Interface, 9
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset
Timer, 49
Copier/Document Server Features / Edit, 124
Copier/Document Server Features /
General Features, 113
Input/Output, 142
Copier/Document Server Features on
Main and Sub-machines, 146
Reproduction Ratio, 120
Stamp, 130
Copies, 162
Copy Back Cover, 124
Copy Count Display, 43
Copy Eject Face Method in Glass Mode, 142
Copy on Designating Page in Combine, 124
Copy Order in Combine, 124
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode, 113
Counter, 238
Courier Font, 168
Cover Interposer Tray CI5000, 262

Creep Setting for Magazine, 124
Customized Function
Document Server Storage, 113
Customize Function
Copier, 113
D
Dark Background, 113
Data Format, 170
Date Stamp, 135
DDNS Configuration, 52
DDNS Configuration (IEEE 1394), 57
Default Printer Language, 162
Default User Name/Password (Send), 62
Delete All Files in Document Server, 68
Delete All Stored Print Jobs, 161
Delete All Temporary Print Jobs, 161
Delete Scanner Journal, 173
Deleting a FTP Folder Destination, 211
Deleting a Goup, 227
Deleting a Group Within Another Group, 224
Deleting a NCP Folder Destination, 217
Deleting an E-mail Destination, 199
Deleting a Registered Name, 186
Deleting a User Code, 190
Delivery Option, 62
Density (Background Numbering), 130
Destination List Display Priority 1, 173
Destination List Display Priority 2, 173
Display, 2
Display / Clear / Print Counter per User, 68
Displaying Names Registered in a Group, 222
Displaying the Counter for Each User, 191
Display of concatenated copy key, 113
Display / Print Counter, 68
Divide. Send E-mail, 177
DNS Configuration, 52
Document Server, 145
Domain Name, 52
Domain Name (IEEE 1394), 57
Double Copies Position, 124
Double Copies Separation Line, 124
Duplex, 162
(Page Numbering), 137
E
Edge to Edge Print, 162
Edit / Copier/Document Server Features, 124
Effective Protocol, 52
E-mail Communication Port, 62
E-mail Destination, 196
E-mail Information Language, 177
E-mail Reception Interval, 62
E-mail Storage in Server, 62
Energy Saver Timer, 49
Enhanced Authentication Management, 68
Erase Border Width, 124
Erase Center Width, 124
Erase Original Shadow in Combine, 124
Error Log, 157
Ethernet Speed, 52
Extend A4 Width, 168
Extended Security, 68
F
File Transfer / System Settingse, 62
Finisher
Punch Type, 142
Stapling Position, 142
Finisher SR5000, 260
Firmware Version, 68
Folder Destination, 200
Font (Date Stamp), 135
Font Number, 168
Font (Page Numbering), 137
Font Pitch, 168
Font Source, 168
Font (Stamp Text), 140
Format (Date Stamp), 135
Form Lines, 168
Front Cover Copy in Combine, 124
Front Margin
Left/Right, 124
Top/Bottom, 124
Function Priority, 43
Function Reset Timer, 43
G
General Features / Copier/Document
Server Features, 113
General Settings / Scanner Features, 173
General Settings / System Settings, 43
Generation Copy, 113
277
H
Hex Dump, 157
High Compression PDF Level, 177
Host Interface / Printer Features, 167
Host Name, 52
Host Name (IEEE 1394), 57
I
IEEE 1394, 57
IEEE 802.11b, 14, 59
Image Adjustment Priority, 113
Image Repeat Separation Line, 124
Input/Output / Copier/Document
Input Prime, 56
Inquiry, 236
Insert Separation Sheet, 142
Interface Settings / System Settings, 52
Interleave Print, 43
Interpreting the configuration page, 159
I/O Buffer, 167
I/O Timeout, 167
IPv4 Address (IEEE 1394), 57
IPv4 Gateway Address, 52
IPv4 over 1394, 57
IPv6 Gateway Address, 52
IPv6 Stateless Address
Autoconfiguration, 52
Items of Tray Paper Settings, 91
J
Job End Call, 113
Job Separation, 162
K
Key Counter Management, 68
Key Repeat, 43
L
LAN Type, 52
LCIT RT5000, 264
LCIT RT5010, 265
LDAP Authentication, 233
LDAP Search, 68
Letterhead Setting, 162
List / Test Print Lock, 161
278
M
Machine IPv4 Address, 52
Machine IPv6 Address, 52
Machine Name, 52
Maintenance / Printer Features, 161
Max. Copy Quantity, 113
Max. E-mail Size, 177
Max. Reception E-mail Size, 62
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 142
Memory Overflow, 162
Memory Usage, 162
Menu List, 157
Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (Tray 7), 265
Multiple Lists, 157
N
Network, 52
Network Security Level, 68
Network Settings, 15
No. of Digits for Single Page Files, 177
Number of Scanner Resends, 62
NW Frame Type, 52
O
Orientation, 168
Booklet, Magazine, 124
Original counter reset key, 113
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode, 113
Original Type Display, 113
Output
Copier, 43
Document Server, 43
Printer, 43
Output tray settings, 48
P
Page Numbering, 137
Page Size, 162
Pale, 113
Panel Features Default, 113
Panel Key Sound, 43
Panel Off Timer, 49
Paper Display, 113
Paper Tray Priority
Copier, 43
Printer, 43
Parallel Communication Speed, 56

Parallel Interface, 56
Parallel Timing, 56
PCL Configuration/Font Page, 157
PCL Menu / Printer Features, 168
PDF Configuration/Font Page, 157
PDF Group Password, 171
PDF Menu / Printer Features, 171
Permit SNMPv3 Communication, 52
Permit SSL/TLS Communication, 52
Photo, 113
Ping Command, 52
Point Size, 168
POP3/IMAP4 Settings, 62
POP before SMTP, 62
Preset Stamp, 130
Print Address Book
Destination List, 68
Print & Delete Scanner Journal, 173
Printer Auto Reset Timer, 49
Printer Features / Host Interface, 167
Printer Features / Maintenance, 161
Printer Features / PCL Menu, 168
Printer Features / PDF Menu, 171
Printer Features / PS Menu, 170
Printer Features / System, 162
Printer Features / Test Print, 157
Printer Language, 162
Print Error Report, 162
Printing the configuration page, 158
Printing the Counter for All User, 193
Printing the Counter for Each User, 192
Print List, 60
Print Priority, 43
Print Scanner Journal, 173
Program/Change Administrator, 68
Program/Change/Delete E-mail
Message, 62
Program / Change / Delete LDAP
Server, 68, 77
Program/Change/Delete User Text, 43
Program/Delete Stamp (User Stamp), 133
Programming the LDAP server, 78
PS Configuration/Font Page, 157
PS Menu / Printer Features, 170
Punch Unit PU5000, 263
Q
Quitting Tray Paper Settings, 90
R
Ratio for Create Margin, 120
Reception Protocol, 62
Registering a FTP Folder Destination, 207
Registering a Group, 218
Registering a NCP Folder Destination, 212
Registering an E-mail Destination, 196
Registering an SMB Folder Destination, 200
Registering a Protection Code to a Group
User, 230
Registering a Protection Code to a Single
User, 228
Registering a User Code, 187
Registering Folders, 200
Registering LDAP Authentication, 231, 233
Registering Names, 184
Registering Names to a Group, 219
Registering SMTP Authentication, 231
Registering user names and destination
names, 184
Removing a Name from a Group, 223
Reproduction Ratio / Copier/Document
R/E Ratio, 120
R/E Ratio Priority, 120
Reservation Screen Auto-off Timer, 113
Reserved Job Waiting Time, 162
Reserve Job Mode, 113
Resolution, 168, 170, 171
Restore Factory Defaults, 59
S
SADF Auto Reset, 142
Scanner Auto Reset Timer, 49
Scanner Features / General Settings, 173
Scanner Features / Scan Settings, 175
Scanner Features / Send Settings, 177
Scanner Resend Interval Time, 62
Scan Settings / Scanner Features, 175
Screen Color Setting, 43
SCSI print (SBP-2), 57
Search Destination, 173
Security Method, 59
Selection Signal Status, 56
Select Punch Type, 142
Send Settings / Scanner Features, 177
Separation Line in Combine, 124
Set Date, 49
Set Time, 49
Settings for the Document Server, 145
279
Settings Required to Use Document

Server, 31
Server / Ethernet, 31
Server / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 32
Settings Required to Use Document Server /
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), 32
Settings Required to Use E-mail Function /
Ethernet, 18
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 19
Settings Required to Use Network
TWAIN Scanner, 28
TWAIN Scanner / Ethernet, 28
TWAIN Scanner / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over
1394), 29
TWAIN Scanner / IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN), 30
Settings Required to Use Scan to Folder
Function, 22
Function / Ethernet, 22
Function / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 23
Function / IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), 24
Settings Required to Use the Network
Delivery Scanner, 25
Delivery Scanner / Ethernet, 25
Delivery Scanner / IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over
1394), 26
Delivery Scanner / IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN), 27
Settings Required to Use the Printer, 15
Settings Required to Use the Printer/
Ethernet, 15
IEEE 1394 (IPv4 over 1394), 16
Setup IEEE 802.11b, 12
Setup Wireless LAN, 12
Shortcut R/E, 120
Signal Control, 56
280
Simplified Screen
Finishing Types, 142
Size (Background Numbering), 130
Size (Date Stamp), 135
Size (Page Numbering), 137
Size (Stamp Text), 140
SMB Computer Name, 52
SMB Work Group, 52
SMTP Authentication, 62, 231
SMTP Server, 62
Sort/Stack Shift setting, 142
Special Original Display, 113
Special Original Display Defaults, 113
Specifications, 253
Specifications for the Main Unit, 253
SSID Setting, 59
Stamp / Copier/Document Server
Features, 130
Stamp Format
1-5 (User Stamp), 133
Stamp Format (Page Numbering), 137
Stamp Format (Preset Stamp), 130
Stamp Language (Preset Stamp), 130
Stamp Position (Page Numbering), 137
Stamp Setting (Date Stamp), 135
Stamp Setting (Stamp Text), 140
Stamp Text, 140
Stapling Position, 142
Status Indicator, 43
Stored File E-mail Method, 177
Sub Paper Size, 162
Superimpose (Date Stamp), 135
Superimpose (Page Numbering), 137
Superimpose (Stamp Text), 140
Switch Title of Quick Dial Table, 173
Symbol Set, 168
System Auto Reset Timer, 49
System / Printer Features, 162
System Settings / Administrator Tools, 68
System Settings / File Transfer, 62
System Settings / General Features, 43
System Settings on Main and Submachines, 83
System Settings / Timer Settings, 49
System Status/Job List Display Time, 43
T
Test Print / Printer Features, 157
Text, 113
Text/photo, 113
Time Interval between Printing Jobs, 43
Timer Settings / System Settings, 49
Tone
Original Remains, 113
Toner Saving, 162
Transfer Log Setting, 68
Transmission Speed, 59
Tray 1, 91
Tray 2 - 3, 91
Tray 4, 91
Tray 5, 91
Tray 6, 91
Tray 7, 91
Tray Paper Setting on Main and Submachines, 111
Tray Paper Settings, 89
Tray Switching, 162
TWAIN Standby Time, 173
W
Wait Time for Next Orig.
Exposure Glass, 175
Wait Time for Next Original(s)
SADF, 175
Warm Up Beeper, 43
Weekly Timer
Monday-Sunday, 49
Weekly Timer Code, 49
WINS Configuration, 52
WINS Configuration (IEEE 1394), 57
Wireless LAN Signal, 59
Z
Z-folding Unit ZF4000, 264
Z-fold position, 43
U
Update Delivery Server Destination List, 173
User Authentication Management, 68
User Code, 187
User Stamp, 133
Using SMB to Connect, 200
Using Utilities to Make Settings, 33
281
EN
USA
B235-7807
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
The product name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
The product names of Windows NT are as follows:
Copyright 2006
Operating Instructions General Settings Guide
Type for 8090/DSm790/LD190/Aficio MP9000

EN USA B235-7807
Troubleshooting
When the Machine Does Not Operate As wanted
Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function
Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function
Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function
Adding paper, Toner and Staples
Clearing Misfeeds
Remarks
Introduction
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
Important
Notes:
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
Caution:
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
Power Source
220-240 V, 50/60 Hz, 16 A or more.
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as shown above. For details about power
source, see p.112 Power Connection.
Trademarks
TrueType is registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
PostScript and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Bluetooth is a Trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. (Special Interest Group) and licensed to Ricoh
Company Limited.
The product name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95.
The product name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98.
The product name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
The product names of Windows NT 4.0 are as follows:

About This Machine

Trouble Shooting
Security Reference
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
Other manuals
Safety Information
Quick Reference Copy Guide
Quick Reference Printer Guide
Quick Reference Scanner Guide
UNIX Supplement
Note

dealer.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Names of Major Options ............................................................................................2
1. When the Machine Does Not Operate As wanted

Indicators................................................................................................................3
Panel Tone..............................................................................................................4
Checking Machine Status and Settings...............................................................5
When an Indicator to the Right of a Function Key is Lit ....................................8
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine.............................................9
When a Job is Not Performed.............................................................................14
2. Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function

When a Message Appears...................................................................................19
Display During Connect Copy ............................................................................25
If Connect Copy is Cancelled .............................................................................26
If You Cannot Exit from Connect Copy..............................................................27
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies ...............................................................28
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted .....................................................30
When Memory is Full ...............................................................................................34
3. Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function

When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver................35
Windows 95/98/Me...................................................................................................35
Windows 2000..........................................................................................................36
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003........................................................................36
Windows NT 4.0.......................................................................................................37
If USB Connection Fails ......................................................................................38
When a Message Appears...................................................................................39
Status Messages...................................................................................................... 39
Alert Messages ........................................................................................................40
Checking the Error Log ............................................................................................41
When You Cannot Print.......................................................................................42
Other Printing Problems .....................................................................................45
4. Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function

When Scanning is Not Done as Expected .........................................................51
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files .............................................................52
When Stored Files Cannot be Accessed .................................................................52
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan file ................................... 52
When the TWAIN Driver Cannot be Started ............................................................ 52
When Stored Files Cannot be Edited.......................................................................53
When the Network Delivery Function Cannot be Used............................................53
Operations are not possible when messages appear .............................................. 53
iii
When a Message is Displayed ............................................................................54

When a Message is Displayed on the Control Panel ...............................................54
When a Message is Displayed on the Client Computer...........................................61
5. Adding paper, Toner and Staples

Loading paper ...................................................................................................... 65
Loading paper into Tray 1 (Tandem Tray) ............................................................... 65
Loading Paper into the A3/11 17 Tray Unit.........................................................67
Loading Paper into Tray 2 and 3..............................................................................68
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray (LCT) ................................................. 69
Loading Paper into the Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT) ...............................70
Loading Paper into the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7)..................................................71
Loading Paper in the Interposer...............................................................................72
Changing the Paper Size.....................................................................................75
Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2 and 3 ................................................................76
Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray (Tray 4 and 5) ......................78
Changing the Paper Size in the Wide Large Capacity Tray.....................................81
Changing to a Size that is Not Automatically Detected............................................84
Pausing Copy When Using Finisher ..................................................................86
Adding Toner........................................................................................................87
Inserting Toner ......................................................................................................... 89
Used Toner ..............................................................................................................89
Adding Staples.....................................................................................................90
Finisher .................................................................................................................... 90
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch)...............................................................................91
6. Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Jammed Paper ...................................................................................93
Locating Jammed Paper ..........................................................................................94
Removing Jammed Paper........................................................................................ 96
When Z-folded paper is not properly aligned .........................................................105
Removing Jammed Staples .............................................................................. 106
Finisher .................................................................................................................. 106
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch).............................................................................107
Removing Punch and Staple Waste.................................................................108
Finisher .................................................................................................................. 108
7. Remarks
Where to Put Your Machine .............................................................................. 109
Machine Environment ............................................................................................109
Moving....................................................................................................................111
Power Connection..................................................................................................112
Access to the Machine ...........................................................................................113
Maintaining Your Machine ................................................................................114
Cleaning the Exposure Glass.................................................................................114
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder.....................................................................114
INDEX....................................................................................................... 115
iv

Symbols

notes. They can be found in the Safety Information section of About This Machine.

Safety Information section of About This Machine.
[]
{}
Names of Major Options

Major options of this machine are referred to as follows in this manual:
Auto Document Feeder ADF
Finisher SR5000 Finisher
Booklet Finisher BK5000 Booklet Finisher
1. When the Machine Does

Not Operate As wanted
This chapter explains basic troubleshooting procedures that are applicable to all
functions of this machine.
Indicators
This section explains Indicators displayed when the machine requires the user
to remove misfed paper, add paper, or other perform other procedures.
x: Misfeed indicator
Appears when a misfeed occurs.

See p.93 Removing Jammed Paper.
B: Add Paper indicator
Appears when paper-out condition occurs.

See p.65 Loading paper.
D: Add Toner indicator
Appears when toner runs out.

See p.87 Adding Toner.
d: Add Staple indicator
Appears when staples run out.

See p.106 Removing Jammed Staples.
y: Empty Hole Punch Receptacle

indicator
Appears when the hole punch receptacle is full.
F: Empty Waste Staple Receptacle

indicator
Appears when the waste staple receptacle is full.
See p.108 Removing Punch and Staple Waste

See p.108 Removing Punch and Staple Waste
Panel Tone
The following table explains the meaning of the various beep patterns that the machine produces to alert users about left originals and other machine conditions.
Beep pattern
Meaning
Cause
Two long beeps.
Machine has warmed up. After cooling or being switched on, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.
Single short beep.
Panel/screen input accepted.
A control panel or screen key was

pressed. Single short beeps are produced only when valid keys are
pressed.
Single long beep.
Job completed.
A Copier/Document Server Features

job has finished.
Four long beeps.
Soft alert.
The screen is changing back to the initial screen after the machine came out
of energy-saving mode or was reset.
Four long beeps repeated

five times.
Soft alert.
An original has been left on the exposure glass.
Five short beeps repeated

five time.
Strong alert.
Machine requires user attention. Paper

might have jammed or toner might
need replenishing.
Note
Users cannot mute the machine's beep alerts. When the machine beeps to alert
users of a paper jam or toner request, if the machine's covers are opened and
closed repeatedly within a short space of time, the beep alert might continue,
even after normal status has resumed.
Reference
For details about enabling or disabling beep alerts, see The System Settings,
Checking Machine Status and Settings

You can check the machine's system status.
Maintenance Info
You can check the following items under [Maintenance Info]:
[Remaining Toner]
Displays the amount of remaining toner.
[No Staples]
Displays the amount of remaining staples.
[Punch Receptacle Full]
Displays whether the hole punch receptacle is full.
[Waste Staple Receptcl Full]
Displays whether the waste staple receptacle is full.
[Paper Tray]
Displays the paper type and size loaded in the paper tray.
[Output Tray Full]
Displays whether the output tray is overloaded.
[Original Misfeed]
Displays state of and solutions for original misfeeds.
[Paper Misfeed]
Displays state of and solutions for paper jams.
[Cover Open]
Indicates whether front cover, duplex unit, etc, is open.
Data Storage
You can check the following items under [Data Storage]:
[HDD Remaining Memory]
Displays the amount of available hard disk drive memory.
[HDD File(s)]
Displays the total number of jobs stored in the hard disk drive.
[Print Job(s)]
Displays the number of jobs for Hold print/Saved print/Locked
print/Sample print.
[Memory Erase Status]
Displays the state of the memory data.
Machine Address Info

You can check the following items under [Machine Address Info]:
[Machine IPv4 Address]
Displays the machine's IPv4 address.
[Machine IPv6 Address]
Displays the machine's IPv6 address.
Enquiry
You can check the following items under [Enquiry]:
[Machine Repairs]
Displays the machine number and contact number that are required for
service.
[Sales Representative]
Displays the sales representative's telephone number.
[Supply Order]
Displays the contact number for placing supply orders.
[Supply Details]
Displays the name of toner, staples, etc, used on the machine.
A On the control panel, press [System Status] on the control panel.
B Press each tab and check the contents.
C After checking the information, press [Exit]. The previous screen returns.
Note
[Output Tray Full], [Original Misfeed], [Paper Misfeed], and [Cover Open] appear
only when these errors occur.
For details about how to locate and remove misfeeds, see Checking
Jammed Paper or Removing Jammed Paper.
Reference
p.94 Locating Jammed Paper.
p.93 Removing Jammed Paper.
When an Indicator to the Right of a

Function Key is Lit
1
When an indicator to the right of a function key lights up, press the corresponding function key. Then, follow the instructions displayed on the control panel.
Problem
Cause
Solution
Documents and reports

do not print out.
The paper output tray is

full.
Remove the paper from the tray.
Documents and reports

do not print out.
There is no copy paper

left.
Add more paper. See p.65 Loading paper.
An error has occurred.
The function whose indicator is lit is defective.
Record the code number shown in the

display and contact your service representative. See When a Message displayed of each chapter.
You can use other functions normally.
The machine is unable to

connect to the network.
A network error has occurred.
Check the displayed message and

take an appropriate action. See
When a Message displayed of
each chapter.
Check that the machine is correctly
connected to the network, and that
the machine is correctly set. See
Network Settings, General Settings Guide.
Contact the administrator.
When the function key is still lit,
even if you take the measures
above, contact your service representative.
Note
If an error occurs in the function you are using, check the message that appears on the control panel, and then refer to When a Message is Displayed
for the relevant function.
Reference
p.19 Troubleshooting When Using the Copy Function.
p.35 Troubleshooting When Using the Printer Function.

p.51 Troubleshooting When Using the Scanner Function.
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
When You Have Problems Operating the

Machine
1
The following chart gives explanations of common problems and messages.

If other messages appear, follow the instructions displayed.
Important
Check the contact address and Serial No. of Machine shown in the call service
message, and then contact your service representative.
Problem
Please wait.
appears.
Please wait.
appears.
Cause
Solution
This message appears

Wait for the machine to get ready.
when you turn on the operation switch.
This message appears
Wait for the machine to get ready.
when you change the toner bottle.
Although the copier screen Functions other than the

appears when the machine copier function are not
is turned on using the
yet ready.
main power switch, it cannot be switched to another
screen by pressing the
{Printer} or {Scanner} key.
Wait a little longer.
The machine has just

been turned on and the
User Tools screen is displayed, but the User
Tools menu has items
missing.
Functions other than the

copier function are not
yet ready. Time required
varies by function. Functions appear in the User
Tools menu when they
become ready for use.
Wait a little longer.
The display is off.
The machine is in Energy

Saver mode.
Press the {Energy Saver} key to cancel

Energy Saver Mode. mode.
The display is off.
The operation switch is

turned off.
Turn on the operation switch.
Nothing happens when

the operation switch is
turned on.
The main power switch is

turned off.
Turn on the main power switch.
Memory is full.
Do you want to
store scanned
file? appears.
The scanned originals ex- Press [Store File] to store pages that
ceed the number of
have been scanned. Delete unnecessheets/pages that can be
sary files with [Delete File].
stored in the hard disk.
Press [No] if you are not storing pages that have been scanned. Delete
unnecessary files with [Delete File].

Problem
The main power indicator continues blinking
and does not turn off
when pressed.
Cause
Solution
This occurs in the follow- Close ADF, and check if the machine is
ing cases:
communicating with a computer.
ADF is open.
The machine is communicating with external equipment.
The hard disk is active.
Self checking... The machine is perform- The machine may perform periodic
ing image adjustment op- maintenance during operations. The
appears.
erations.
frequency and duration of maintenance
depends on the humidity, temperature,
and printing factors such as number of
prints, paper size, and paper type. Wait
for the machine to get ready.
Original images are
printed on the reverse
side of the paper.
You may have loaded the

paper incorrectly.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The tray's side fences

may not be locked.
Load paper correctly. Place paper in the

paper tray with the print side up. Load
paper into the bypass tray with the
print side down. See p.74 OrientationFixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper.
Remove the paper. See p.93 Removing Jammed Paper.
Check the side fences are locked.
See p.75 Changing the Paper Size.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The tray's end fence may

not be set properly.

Check the end fence is set properly.
Misfeeds occur frequently. Paper of undetectable

size has been loaded.

When loading the paper of undetectable size, specify the paper size in
Tray Paper Size. See Paper Size:
Tray 1-7, General Settings Guide
and Copy Paper, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. There is a foreign object

on the finisher tray.

Do not place anything on the finisher tray. It may cause a paper jam.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The staple cartridge is not

set correctly.
10
The Booklet Finisher requires the saddle stitch stapler cartridge also. See p.90
Adding Staples.

Problem
Cause
Solution
An error message remains, even if misfed paper is removed.
When a misfeed message appears, it remains until you open

and close the cover as
required.
Clear misfed paper, and then open and

close the front cover. see p.93 Clearing
Misfeeds.
Paper is still jammed

in the tray.
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
[1 Sided Copy] is selected

for Paper Type: Tray 1-7.
Select [2 Sided Copy] for Paper Type:

Tray 1-7 See Paper Size: Tray 1-7,

mode.
You cannot select duplex

printing if the paper type
is set to [OHP], [Tab Stock],
[Translucent] or [Label Paper].
Select a paper type that allows duplex

printing. See Paper Size: Tray 1-7,
The user code entry

screen is displayed.
Users are restricted by

user management.
Enter the user code (up to eight digits),

and then press {q}.
The Authentication
screen appears.
Basic Authentication,
Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication or Integration Server
Authentication is set.
Enter your login user name and user

password. See When the Authentication Screen is Displayed, About This
Machine.
You do not have
The use of the function is
restricted to authenticatthe privileges to

use this function. ed users only.
is displayed.
This user code is not allowed to use the function
selected.
Press the {Energy Saver} key. Confirm

that the display goes off, and then press
the {Energy Saver} key again. The display
will return to the user code entry display. When printing under the copier or
printer function, press the {Energy Saver}
key only after printing has finished.
Authentication failed.
The entered login user

name or login password
is not correct.
Inquire the user administrator for the

correct login user name and login password.
Authentication failed.
The machine cannot perform authentication.
The selected file(s) contained file(s) without access privileges. Only

file(s) with access privileges will be deleted.
You have tried to delete

files without the authority to do so.
Files can be deleted by the person who

created the file. To delete a file which
you are not authorized to delete, contact the person who created the file.
You do not have
the privileges to
use this function.
continues to be displayed
even though you have
entered a valid user code.
11
Document Server
Problem
Cause
Solution
The number of scanned

pages exceeds the capacity per file of the Document Server.
To store scanned pages as a file, press

[Store File]. Scanned data is stored as a
file in the Document Server. If you do
not want to store scanned pages, press
[No]. Scanned data is deleted.
You forgot your password.
You cannot access a protected file without entering the password.
You cannot find out what

is stored in a file.
You may not be able to

ascertain the contents of a
file simply from the file
name.
You can switch the Select File screen between [List] and [Thumbnail] display to
check the contents of the file. In list display, the file name, date and time of
storage, and user name are shown. In
thumbnail display, an image of the
stored file appears. You can enlarge the
image by pressing [Preview]. Use the Select File screen to check information
other than the file name. See Checking
the Details of a Stored Document,
Memory frequently becomes full.
The document server

memory is full.
Delete unnecessary files. On the file selection display, select unnecessary files,
and then press [Delete File]. If this does
not increase available memory, do the
following.
Exceeded max.
number of pages
per file. Do you
want to store the
scanned pages as
1 file? appears.
To delete the files stored in the document server, select [Delete All Files in Document Server]. As this will permanently
delete every single file, make sure the
document server does not contain any
files you want to keep. See Delete All
Files in Document Server, General Settings Guide.
Switch to the scanner screen, and

then delete unnecessary files stored
under the scanner function.
Switch to the printer screen, and
then delete unnecessary files stored
under Sample Print, Locked Print,
Hold Print, or Stored Print.
12

Problem
Cause
Solution
You want to check print

quality before making a
large print run.
You can print a single

copy without specifying
the setting again.
Check print quality by printing out

only the first set using the {Sample
Copy} key.
Original is being
Copier or Scanner function is in use.
To cancel a job in progress, first press

[Exit], and then press the {Copy} key or
{Scanner} key. Next, press the {Stop}
key. When the message The Stop
scanned by another
function. Please
wait. appears.
key was pressed. Stop copying? press [Stop].

Cannot display
preview of this
page. appears, and
The image data may have

been corrupted.
Pressing [Exit] displays the preview

screen without a thumbnail.
you can not check the

thumb nail image.
Note
If you cannot make copies as you want because of paper type, paper size, or
paper capacity problems, use recommended paper. See Copy Paper, About
This Machine.
Using curled paper often causes misfeeds, soiled paper edges, or slipped positions while performing staple or stack printing. When using curled paper,
take the stiffness out of the paper with your hands to straighten out the curl,
or load the paper up side down. Also, to prevent paper from curling, lay paper on a flat surface, and do not lean it against the wall.
13
When a Job is Not Performed

If you cannot execute a function, it may be that the machine is being held up by
another function.
If you cannot execute a function, terminate any other functions currently active,
and then try executing the function again. In certain cases, you can carry out another job (copier, document server, printer, scanner) without canceling the current job being performed. Performing multiple functions simultaneously like
this is called Multi-accessing.
Combination Chart
Function Compatibility
The chart shows Function Compatibility when print priority is set to Interleave. See Print Priority, General Settings Guide.
: Simultaneous operations are possible.
: Operation is enabled when the relevant function key is pressed and remote switching (of the scanner/external extension) is done.
: Operation is enabled when the {Interrupt} key is pressed to interrupt the
preceding operation.
: Operation is performed automatically once the preceding operation ends.
: The operation must be started once the preceding operation ends. (Simultaneous operations are not possible.)
14
Print
Stapling
Sort
Copy
Printer
Scanner
TWAIN
Stapling
*1
Sort
*1
Interrupt
Copying
Stapling
Scanning
*1
*1
*2
*1
Operations
for Copying
Copying
Data Reception
Printing
Operations
for scanning
Scanning
*4
*1
*2
*2
*2
Document Server
Operations for Document Server
*4
*3
Web Document Server
Printing
*3
DeskTopBinder
*2
Printing from Document Server
TWAIN
Scanner
Print
Scanning
Scanning
Operations for Scanning
Stapling
Printing
Data Reception
Copying
Printer
Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server
Operations
for Copying
Interrupt Copying
Mode after you select Copy
Operations for Copying
Mode before you select

*3
*3
*2
*3
*2
15
Printing
from Document Server
DeskTopBinder
Printing
from Document Server
Web Document Server
Printing
*2
*3
*4
*5
16
Web Document Server
Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server
Printing
Document Server
Operations for Document Server
DeskTopBinder
TWAIN
Scanning
Scanner
Operations for Scanning
Stapling
Print
Printing
Data Reception
Copying
Sort
Stapling
Operations
for Document Server
Scanning a
Document to
Store in Document Server
*1
Scanning
Document
Server
Mode before you select
Printer
Interrupt Copying
Mode after you select Copy
*2
*5
*5
*5
Simultaneous operations are only possible after the preceding job documents are all
scanned and [New Job] key appears.
You can scan a document after the preceding job documents are all scanned.
During stapling, printing automatically starts after the current job.
Stapling is not available.
Simultaneous operation become possible after you press [New Job] key.
Note
Stapling cannot be used at the same time for multiple functions.
If the machine is capable of executing multiple functions simultaneously,

specify which function should have priority in Print Priority. This setting is
factory-preset to Display Mode. For setting of Printing Priority Function,
see Print Priority, General Settings Guide.
When Finisher or Booklet Finisher is installed on the machine, you can specify
the output tray where documents are delivered. See Output tray settings,
Operation speed might be reduced if you scan originals while a print job is in
progress.
17
18
2. Troubleshooting When
Using the Copy Function
This chapter explains likely causes of and possible solutions for copier function
problems.
When a Message Appears

This section explains the machine's main messages. If other messages appear,
follow the instructions they contain.
Important
For messages that are not listed here, see p.9 When You Have Problems Operating the Machine.
Message
Cause
Solution
Cannot detect
original size.
Improper original is
placed.
Select paper manually, not in Auto Paper Select mode, and do not use Auto
Reduce/Enlarge function. See Sizes
difficult to detect, Copy/Document
Server Reference.
Cannot detect
original size.
Improper original is
placed.
Place the original on the exposure glass.

See Placing Originals on the Exposure
Glass and Sizes difficult to detect,
Cannot detect
original size.
Original is not placed.
Place your originals.
Check original
orientation.
Original is not placed in a

proper orientation.
Change the orientation of the original.
Check paper size. Improper paper size is

set.
If you press the {Start} key, copy will

start onto the selected paper.
Rotate Sort is
not available
with this paper
size.
A size of paper for which

Rotate Sort is not available is selected.
Select the proper paper size. See Sort,

Rotate Sort is
not available
with this paper
size.
A size of paper for which

Rotate Sort is not available is selected.
Select the proper paper size. See Sort,

19

Message
Cause
Solution
Cannot punch this

paper size.
The Punch function cannot be used with paper

size selected.
The following paper sizes are available

for Punch mode:
2 holes:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL,
A5KL, B6L, A6L, 1218L,
1117L, Legal(81/214)L, Letter(81/211)KL, Half Letter
(51/281/2)KL, Executive
(71/4101/2)KL, F/GL
(813)L, Foolscap (81/213)L,
Folio (81/413)L, 1115L,
1114L, 1015L, 1014L,
81/414L, 810L, 8KL,
16KKL. Select one of these sizes.
3 holes:
A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 1218L,
1117L, Letter(81/211)K, Executive (71/4101/2)K,
1115L, 1114L, 8KL,
16KK. Select one of these sizes.
4 holes:
Metric version:
A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 1218L,
1117L, Letter(81/211)K, Executive (71/4101/2)K, 1115L,
1114L, 1015L, 1014L,
8KL, 16KK. Select one of these sizes.
Narrow 2 2 version:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL,
A5KL, B6L, 1218L,
1117L, Legal(81/214)L, Letter(81/211)KL, Half Letter
(51/281/2)KL, Executive
(71/4101/2)KL, F/GL
(813)L, Foolscap (81/213)L,
Folio (81/413)L, 1115L,
1114L, 1015L, 1014L,
8KL, 16KKL. Select one of these
sizes.
Stapling capacity
exceeded.
The number of sheets per

set is over the staple capacity.
Cannot staple pa- The Staple function canper of this size. not be used with paper
size selected.
20
Check the stapler capacity. See Supplementary Informations, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Select a paper size that can be used in
Staple mode. See Supplementary Informations, Copy/Document Server
Reference.

Message
Duplex is not
available with
this paper size.
Maximum number of
sets is nn.
(A figure is placed at n.)
Cause
Solution
A paper size not available

in Duplex mode has been
selected.
The following paper sizes are available

for Duplex mode: A3L, B4L, A4KL,
B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L,
1218L, 1117L, Legal
(81/211)L, Letter (81/211)KL,
Half Letter (51/281/2)KL, Executive (71/4101/2)KL, F/GL
(813)L, Foolscap (813)L, Folio
(81/413)L, 1115L, 1114L,
1014L, 81/414L, 810L,
8KL, 16KKL. Select one of these sizes.
The number of copies ex- You can change the maximum copy
ceeds the maximum copy quantity. See Max. Number of Sets,
quantity.
File being stored

exceeded max.
number of pages
per file. Copying
will be stopped.
The scanned originals

have too many pages to
store as one document.
Magazine or Booklet mode is not

available due to
mixed image mode.
You selected the MagaMake sure originals for the Magazine

zine or Booklet function
or Booklet function are scanned using
for originals scanned us- the same function.
ing different functions,
such as copy and printer.
Document Server or
Orig. is being
scanned by anoth- Scanner function is in
use.
er function.
Please wait.
Press [Exit], and then store again with

an appropriate number of pages.
To cancel the job in process, press [Exit],

and then press the {Document Server} or
{Scanner} key. Next, press the {Stop}
key. When the message The Clear
/ Stop key was pressed. Are

you sure you want to stop
scanning? appears, press [Cancel].
You do not have
the privileges to
use this function.

selected.
You do not have

the privileges to
use this function.

selected.
If the message continues to be displayed and you cannot switch the

screen, press the {Energy Saver} key.
Confirm that the display goes off, and
then press the {Energy Saver} key again.
The display will return to the user code
entry display. When printing under the
copier or printer function, press {Energy
Saver} only after printing has finished.
21

Message
Cause
Solution
Authentication
has failed.

is not correct.
Inquire the user administrator for the

correct login user name and login password.
Authentication
has failed.
The machine cannot perform authentication.

The selected
file(s) contained files without the authority to do so.
file(s) without
access privileges. Only file(s)
with access privileges will be
deleted.
Please wait.
Files can be deleted by the person who

created the file. To delete a file which
you are not authorized to delete, contact the person who created the file.
The destination list is being Wait until the message disappears. Do

updated from the network not switch off the power while this
using SmartDeviceMonimessage is displayed.
tor for Admin. Depending
on the number of destinations to be updated, there
may be some delay before
you can resume operation.
Operations are not possible while this message is
displayed.
It will be neces- A misfeed occurred when

unneeded tab stock was
sary to start
ejected.
over and reload
the tab stock to
the trays.
Remove the jammed sheet.

If cycle printing is specified for tab
stock sheets, both needed and unneeded tab stock is ejected when copying restarts. Reload the tab stock trays before
the new print cycle begins.
After resetting the tab stock pages,
press [Exit]. To resume printing, press
the {Start} key.
22
Connect Copy
Message
Cause
Solution
Cannot connect to
the sub-machine.
Check the status of
the sub-machine.
The L indicator is lit.
Press [Exit] on the main machine and

follow the instructions on the display.
Cannot print from

the sub-machine.
Check the status of
the sub-machine.
A paper misfeed has occurred on the sub-machine, or toner or other

supplies need to be replenished.
Follow the instructions displayed. For

details, see p.87 Adding Toner, p.93
Removing Jammed Paper, p.106 Removing Jammed Staples.
Cannot print from

the sub-machine.
Check the status of
the sub-machine.
The sub-machine's User

Tools menu is open.
Press the {User Tools} key to close the

User Tools menu.
Sub-machine is in
Interrupt mode.
The sub-machine is in In- Press the {Interrupt} key on the sub-materrupt mode.
chine to cancel Interrupt mode.
The hard disk of the

sub-machine is malfunctioning.
Sub-machine does Paper type or tray setnot have the same tings on the two mapaper setting(s). chines do not match.
The Cover Sheet
setting(s) of the
sub-machine is
different from
the main machine.
Cover settings on the two

machines do not match.
If the sub-machine's display indicates

that a cover is open, follow the instructions displayed.

Slip Sheet settings on the Make the same settings on both maThe Slip Sheet
chines.
setting(s) of the two machines do not
match.
sub-machine is
different from
the main machine.
The Designation
Sheet setting(s)
of sub-machine is
different from
main machine.
Designation Sheet settings on the two machines do not match.
Sub-machine paper
settings must be
the same to use
this tray.
Paper tray settings on the

two machines do not
match.
No stamp data in
the sub-machine.
Stamp data on the sub-ma- Reprogram the stamp on the sub-machine has been deleted.
chine.
23

Message
Cannot print from

the sub-machine.
Sub-machine will
be disconnected.
Cause
Solution
The sub-machine has

Continue copying using the main mastopped due to power fail- chine.
ure or communication error.
Z-fold is availa- Sort has not been selected Select the Sort function.
with Z-fold.
ble only when
Sort mode is selected in Connect
Copy.
Reference
p.9 When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
24
Display During Connect Copy
Display During Connect Copy

This section explains about the display during Connect Copy.
Problem
Cause
Solution
[Connect Copy] is not displayed.
The sub-machine's main

power is off.
Turn on the sub-machine's main power.
Functions that cannot be Cancel the functions selected on the

used with Connect Copy main machine.
are selected on the main
machine (such as storing
or copying the first page
of a document in the Document Server).
The main machine is in

Interrupt mode.
The [Connect Copy Key Dis- Select [Display] for the [Connect Copy Key
play] setting is off.
Display] setting.
The cable connecting the

two machines is damaged.
Contact your service representative.
The L is lit.
Follow the instructions displayed.
[Connect Copy] appears

faded.
Functions that cannot be

used with Connect Copy
have been set.
Press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the

settings.
Press the {Interrupt} key on the sub-machine to cancel Interrupt mode.
25
If Connect Copy is Cancelled

This section explains about causes and remedies when Connect Copy is cancelled.
Problem
26
Cause
Solution
The machine cancels

Connect Copy.
The main machine's

main power is off, or the
operation switch has
been pressed.
Turn on the sub-machine's main power

or operation switch, and then press
[Connect Copy].
The machine cancels

Connect Copy.
The sub-machine's main

power is off.
A message instructing you to check the

sub-machine appears on the display of
the main machine. Press [Cancel] to clear
Connect Copy. Turn on the sub-machine's main power, press [Connect
Copy] and then make your settings
again.
The machine cancels

Connect Copy.
The Weekly Timer setting is coming into effect

on the main machine.
Turn on the main machine's operation

switch , and then press [Connect Copy].
An error message indicates the main machine

has broken down.
The L is lit.
Copying is not possible. Follow the instructions displayed.
If You Cannot Exit from Connect Copy
If You Cannot Exit from Connect Copy

This section explains about causes and remedies if you cannot exit from Connect Copy.
Problem
Cause
Solution
There is no response when Scanning is in progress.

you press [Connect Copy].
Press the {Stop} key on the main machine, and then press [Stop].
There is no response when Copying is in progress.

you press [Connect Copy].
Press the {Stop} key on the main machine, and then press [Stop].
There is no response when A paper misfeed has ocyou press [Connect Copy]. curred on either the main
machine or sub-machine.
For details, see p.93 Removing

Jammed Paper and p.106 Removing
Jammed Staples.
If the sub-machine's display indicates
that a cover is open, follow the instructions displayed.
There is no response when A paper misfeed has ocyou press [Connect Copy]. curred on either the main
or sub-machine.
To cancel Connect Copy, Press the

{Stop} key on the main machine, and
then press [Stop].
There is no response when A paper misfeed has ocyou press [Connect Copy]. curred on one of the machine, or toner or other
supplies need to be replaced.
There is no response when A paper misfeed has ocyou press [Connect Copy]. curred on one of the machine, or toner or other
supplies need to be replaced.
To cancel Connect Copy, press the

then press [Stop].
There is no response when A paper misfeed has ocyou press [Connect Copy]. curred during stapling.
Removed the jammed paper.
For details, see p.65 Loading paper,

p.87 Adding Toner, and p.93 Removing Jammed Paper.
For details, see p.106 Removing

Jammed Staples.
To cancel Connect Copy, press the
then press [Stop].
27
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for unclear copies.
Problem
Cause
Solution
Copies appear dirty.
Image density is too high. Adjust the image density. See Adjusting Copy Image Density, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Copies appear dirty.
Auto Image Density is

not selected.
The reverse side of an

original image is copied.
The reverse side of an

original image is copied.
Auto Image Density is

not selected.
A shadow appears on
copies if you use pasted
originals.
Adjust the auto density. See Adjusting

Copy Image Density, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Adjust the auto density. See Adjusting

Copy Image Density, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Change the orientation of the original.

Put mending tape on the pasted part.
The same copy area is
dirty whenever making
copies.
The exposure glass or

ADF is dirty.
Clean them. See p.114 Maintaining

Your Machine.
The same copy area is

dirty whenever making
copies.
[Original Type Select] is set

to [Text / Photo], and an
original with text and
photographs that can
hardly be distinguished
from each other is loaded.
Press [Others], select [Generation Copy],

and then begin copying. See Generation Copy, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
Copies are too light.
Image density is too light. Adjust the image density. See Adjusting Copy Image Density, Copy/Document Server Reference.
A light copy may result

when you use damp or
rough grain paper.
Use the recommended paper. See

Copy Paper, About This Machine.
Toner bottle is almost

empty.
Add toner. See p.87 Adding Toner.
28
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies

Problem
Cause
Solution
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the

recommended temperature and humidity condition. See Copy Paper,
About This Machine.
Parts of images are not

copied.
The original is not set cor- Set originals correctly. See Placing
rectly.
Originals, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
Parts of images are not

copied.
The correct paper size is

not selected.
Select the proper paper size.
Images appear only partially.
The paper is damp.

About This Machine.
Black lines appear.
The exposure glass is

dirty.

Your Machine.
White lines appear.
The exposure glass is

dirty.

Your Machine.
White lines appear.
When D is blinking, ton- Add toner. See p.87 Adding Toner.

er is beginning to run out.
Copies are blank.
The original is not set cor- When using the exposure glass, face the
rectly.
originals down. When using the ADF,
face them up.
A moir pattern is produced on copies.
Your original has a dot

pattern image or many
lines.
Black spots appear on the

copy of a photographic
print.
Because of high humidi- Place the print on the exposure glass in

ty, the photographic print either of the following ways:
has stuck to the exposure Place an OHP transparency on the
glass.
exposure glass, and then place the
print on top of the OHP transparency.
Place the original on the exposure glass

at a slight angle.
Place the print on the exposure

glass, and then place two or three
sheets of white paper on top of it.
Leave the auto-document feeder
(ADF) open when copying.
29
When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for unclear copies.
Basic
Problem
Cause
Solution
Misfeeds occur frequently. The number of sheets

Load paper only as high as the upper
loaded exceeds the capac- limit markings on the side fence of the
ity of the machine.
paper tray or bypass tray. See Copy
Paper, About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is damp.

About This Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. The paper is too thick or

too thin.
Use recommended paper. See Copy

Misfeeds occur frequently. The copy paper is

wrinkled or has been
folded/creased.
Use recommended paper. Use paper

that has been stored in the recommended temperature and humidity condition. See Copy Paper, About This
Machine.
Misfeeds occur frequently. Printed paper is being

used.
Use recommended paper. Do not use

paper that has been already copied or
printed onto. See Copy Paper, About
This Machine.
Copy paper becomes

creased.
The paper is damp.

About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes

creased.
The paper is too thin.
Use recommended paper. See Copy

Copies are not stapled.
There are jammed staples

in the stapler.
Remove jammed staples. See p.106 Removing Jammed Staples.
The number of copies ex- Check the stapler capacity. See Supceeds the capacity of the plementary Informations, Copy/Docstapler.
ument Server Reference.
Copy paper is curled.
Staples are wrongly posi- Originals are not set cortioned.

rectly.
30
Turn the copy paper over in the tray.

Check the correct position to place the
originals. See Staple, Copy/Document Server Reference.

Problem
Cause
Solution
You cannot combine sev- Selected functions cannot

eral functions.
be used together.
Check the combination of functions

and make the settings again. See Function Compatibility, Copy/Document
Server Reference.
When sorting, the pages

are divided into two
blocks.
The memory became full

in the middle of sorting
and the pages were delivered in two blocks.
You can interrupt copying when the

memory becomes full. See Memory
Full Auto Scan Restart, General Settings Guide.
Paper does not output

during printing with stapling.
When you stop printing

while using the staple
function, paper not stapled during printing may
be left in the staple unit.
Press the {Clear Modes} key and cancel

copy settings, including stapling.
The copy is grayed out or

a text pattern appears in
the background of the
copy.
You have copied a copy- Check the document. See Using [Data
guarded document proSecurity for Copying], Printer Reference.
tected from unauthorized
copying.
Images are skewed.
The side fences in the pa- Make sure the paper guide is locked.
per feed tray is not
locked.
Images are skewed.
The paper is feeding in at

a slant.
Load the paper correctly. See p.65

Loading paper.
Edit
Problem
In Double Copies mode,
parts of the original image are not copied.
Cause
Solution
Combination of original Select A3L for A4K originals and A4

and copy paper is not cor- for A5 originals.
rect.
In Border, Centre, or Cen- You set a wide erased

tre/ Border mode, parts
margin.
of the original image are
not copied.
Make the margin width narrower. You

can adjust it between 2 - 99 mm (0.1 3.9). See Erase Border Width and
Erase Centre Width, General Settings
Guide.
In Border, Centre, or Cen- Originals are not scanned

tre/ Border mode, parts
correctly.
of the original image are
not copied.
Place the originals correctly.
In Margin Adjustment
You set a wide erased
mode, parts of the origi- margin.
nal image are not copied.
Set a narrower margin with User Tools.

You can set the width between 0 - 30
mm (0 - 1.2).
See Front Margin: Left/Right, Back
Margin: Left/Right, Front Margin:
Top/Bottom and Back Margin:
Top/Bottom, General Settings Guide.
31

Problem
Cause
In Margin Adjustment
There is a lack of margin
mode, parts of the origi- space on the opposite
nal image are not copied. side of the binding position.
In Image Repeat mode,

the original image is not
copied repeatedly.
Solution
Set a narrower margin with User Tools.
You can set the width between 0 - 30
mm (0 - 1.2).
See Front Margin: Left/Right, Back
Margin: Left/Right, Front Margin:
Top/Bottom and Back Margin:
Top/Bottom, General Settings Guide.
You selected copy paper Select copy paper larger than the origithe same size as the originals or select the proper reproduction
nals, or you did not select ratio.
the proper reproduction
ratio.
Stamp
Problem
Cause
Solution
The stamp position is

wrong.
The paper orientation is

wrong.
Check the paper orientation and stamp

position.
The stamp is not printed

on the back side of sheets
when duplex copying.
The back side stamp posi- Reset the back side stamp position. See
tion is incorrect for the
Back Side Stamp Position in Duplex,
paper size.
Combine
Problem
Cause
Solution
You cannot make a book

from Booklet or Magazine mode by folding
copies.
You selected a setting

(Open to leftor Open
to right) that does not
match the orientation of
originals.
Change the setting. See Orientation:

Booklet, Magazine, General Settings
Guide.
When using Combine,

parts of the image are not
copied.
You specified a reproduction ratio that does not

match the sizes of your
originals and copy paper.
When you specify a reproduction ratio

using Manual Paper Select mode, make
sure that the ratio matches your originals and the copy paper. Select the correct reproduction ratio before using
Combine mode.
Copies are not in correct

order.
You placed the originals

in the incorrect order.
When placing a stack of originals in the

ADF, the last page should be on the bottom.
If you place an original on the exposure
glass, start with the first page to be copied.
32
Duplex
Problem
Cause
Solution

mode.
You have selected a tray

which is set to [1 Sided
Copy] in [Tray Paper Settings] in [System Settings].
Set the tray to [2 Sided Copy] in [Tray Paper Settings] in [System Settings]. See
System Settings, General Settings
Guide.
Copies are not in correct

order.

in the incorrect order.
When placing a stack of originals in the

ADF, the last page should be on the bottom.
If you place an original on the exposure

glass, start with the first page to be copied.
When using Duplex,
copy is made Top to Bottom even though [Top to
Top] is selected.

in the wrong orientation.
Place the original in the correct orientation. See Original Orientation,

Cause
Solution
Connect Copy
Problem
You cannot staple,
punch, or Z-fold.
The main and sub-machines do not have the

same option installed.
You get different copy re- The Copy Quality setting

sults from the main and
differs on the two masub-machines.
chines.
Press [Connect Copy] to cancel Connect

Copy.
Make the same Copy Quality setting
one the two machines.
33
When Memory is Full

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for problems related
to full memory.
Message
Cause
Solution
Memory is full.
nn originals have
been scanned.
Press [Print] to
copy scanned
originals. Do not
remove remaining
originals.
The scanned originals exceeds the number of pages that can be stored in
memory.
Press [Print] to copy scanned originals

and cancel the scanning data. Press
[Stop] to cancel the scanning data and
not copy.
The machine checked if

the remaining originals
should be copied, after
the scanned originals was
printed.
To continue copying, remove all copies,

and then press [Resume Printing]. To
stop copying, press [Stop].
Cause
Solution
n in the message represents a changeable

number.
Press [Continue]
to scan and copy
remaining originals.
Connect Copy
Message
Sub-machine memo- The quantity of data exry is full. Sub- ceeds the capacity of the
sub-machine.
machine will be
disconnected.
Continue printing on the main machine.
Note
If you set [Memory Full Auto Scan Restart] in User Tools to [On], even if the memory becomes full, the memory overflow message will not be displayed. The
machine will make copies of the scanned originals first, then automatically
proceed scanning and copying the remaining originals. In this case, the resulting sorted pages will not be sequential. See Input / Output, General Settings Guide.
34
Using the Printer Function
This chapter explains likely causes of and possible solutions for printer function
problems.
When a Message Appears during

Installation of the Printer Driver
This section explains what to do if a message appears when installing the printer
driver.
The following describes operations when a message appears during installation
of the printer driver. Message number 58 or 34 indicates that the printer driver
cannot be installed using Auto Run. Install the printer driver using [Add Printer]
or [Install Printer].
Windows 95/98/Me
This section explains the procedure under Windows 95/98/Me.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

B Double-click the Add Printer icon.
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in
the following location:
RPCS (Printers Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
PCL 5e (Printers Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
PCL 6 (Printers Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
PostScript 3 (Scanner Driver and Utilities CD-ROM)
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
35
Windows 2000
This section explains the procedure under Windows 2000.

D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003

This section explains the procedure under Windows XP or Windows Server
2003.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

B Click [Add a printer].
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
36
When a Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver
Windows NT 4.0
This section explains the procedure under Windows NT 4.0.

D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
D:\DRIVERS\PS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
37
If USB Connection Fails

This section explains how to troubleshoot a problem related to USB connection.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The machine is not automatically recognized.
The USB cable is not con- Turn off the power of the machine, renected properly.
connect the USB cable, and then turn it
on again.
Windows has already

configured the USB settings.
Check whether the computer has identified the

machine as an unsupported device.
Open Windows' Device Manager, and

then, under [Universal Serial Bus controllers], remove any conflicting devices.
Conflicting devices have a [!] or [?] icon
by them. Take care not to accidentally
remove required devices. For details,
see Windows Help.
When using Windows 2000 / XP or
Windows Server 2003, an erroneous device is displayed under [USB Controller]
in the [Device Manager] dialog box.
Windows Me and the ma- You need to download

chine cannot be connect- USB Printing Support for
ed.
Windows Me.
38
Download USB Printing Support from

the supplier's website.
Search the model name you use on the
supplier's website, and download USB
Printing Support.

This section describes the principal messages that appear on the panel display.
If a message not described here appears, act according to the message.
Reference
Before turning the main power off, see Turning On/Off the Power, About
This Machine.
Status Messages
This section describes the machine status messages.

Message
Problem
Ready
This is the default ready message. The machine is ready

for use. No action is required.
Printing...
The machine is printing. Wait a while.
Waiting...
The machine is waiting for the next data to print.

Wait a while.
Offline
The machine is offline. To start printing, switch the machine online by pressing {Online} key.
Please wait.
The machine is preparing the development unit.

Wait a while.
Resetting job...
The machine is resetting the print job. Wait until

Ready appears on the display panel.
Setting change...
The machine is setting changing. Wait a while.
Hex Dump Mode
In the Hex Dump mode, the machine receives data in

hexadecimal format. Turn off the machine after printing, and then turn back on.
39
Alert Messages
This section describes the machine Alert messages.
Message
Cause
Solution
Cannot connect with

the wireless card.
Turn the main power
switch off, then
check the card.
/ Problems with the
wireless card.
/ Problems with the
wireless board.
IEEE 802.11b interface

unit was not inserted
when the machine was
turned on, or it was
pulled out after the
machine turned on.
Turn off the machine and check the

IEEE 802.11b interface unit is inserted
correctly. Then, turn the machine on
again. If the message appears again, call
your service representative.
Problems with
IEEE 1394 Board.
An error may have occurred in the IEEE 1394

board.
Turn off the main power switch, and back

on again. If the message appears again,
contact your service representative.
Problem with Hard

Disk.
An error has occurred in

the hard disk drive.

The entered password is incorrect.
The password of the encrypted PDF file has been

entered incorrectly.
Enter the correct password.
The settings are not

updated although the
unit is detected, or errors are found while
accessing the unit.
USB has a problem. An error has occurred in

the USB interface.
Hardware Problem:
Ethernet

the Ethernet board.

Use of this function is re- Contact the administrator.

You do not have
the privileges to stricted.
use this function.
Authentication
has failed.
The login user name

or password entered
is incorrect.
Check your login user name and

password.
The machine currently cannot perform authentication.
40
Parallel I/F board

has a problem.

the parallel interface
board.

Printer font error.

the font settings.

Message
Memory Overflow
Cause
Solution
Maximum capacity of
PCL 5e/6 or PostScript
3 list display has been
exceeded.
Reduce the value of [Resolution] in the

printer driver. Alternatively, select
[Frame Priority] from [Memory Usage] in
[System]. If this message continues to
appear after taking these steps, decrease the number of files sent to the
machine.
Checking the Error Log
If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors
by checking the error log on the control panel.
A Press the {Printer} key to display the printer screen.
ANR101S
B Press [Error Log].
An error log list appears.

Note
The most recent 50 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added
when there are 50 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the earliest error is a Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, or
Stored print error, it is not deleted. The error is stored separately until the
number of errors reaches 30.
If the main power switch is turned off, the log is deleted.
41
When You Cannot Print

Use the following procedures if printing does not start even after performing [Print].
Problem
Cause
Solution
Printing does not start.
The power is off.
Check the cable is securely plugged

into the power outlet and the machine.
Turn on the main power switch.
The machine is set to Of- Press the {Online} key.

fline.
The cause is displayed on

the display of the control
panel.
Check the error message or warning

status on the display panel and take the
required action.
The interface cable is not

connected correctly.
Connect the interface cable securely. If

it has a fastener, fasten that securely as
well. See Connecting to the Interfaces, General Settings Guide.
The correct interface cable is not being used.
The type of interface cable you should

use depends on the computer. Be sure
to use the correct one. If the cable is
damaged or worn, replace it. See Connecting to the Interfaces, General Settings Guide.
The interface cable was

connected after the machine was switched on.
Connect the interface cable before turning on the machine.
If the machine is operating in an extended wireless LAN, failure to print

might result from a weak
wireless signal.
To check signal status, press the {User

Tools} key, and then press [System Settings] on the display panel. On the [Interface Settings] tab, select [IEEE 802.11b],
and then press [Wireless LAN Signal]. If
signal quality is poor, move the machine to a location where radio waves
can pass or remove objects that might
cause interference.
(You can check signal status only when
using wireless LAN in the infrastructure mode.)
42
If the machine is operating in an extended wireless LAN, SSID settings

are incorrect.
Check using the machine's display panel that the SSID is correctly set. See
Network Settings, General Settings
Guide.
When You Cannot Print

Problem
Cause
Solution
If the machine is operating in an extended wireless LAN, the receiver's

MAC address may be
preventing communication with the access point.
Check access point settings when in the

infrastructure mode. Depending on the
access point, client access may be limited by MAC address. Also, check there
are no problems in transmission between access point and wired clients,
and between access point and wireless
clients.
The extended wireless

LAN has not started.
Confirm the orange LED is lit, and the

green LED is lit or blinks during transmission.
The login user name,

Check the login user name, login passlogin password, or driver word, or driver encryption key.
encryption key is invalid.
Advanced encryption has Check the settings of the Extended Sebeen set using the Excurity function with the administrator.
tended Security function.
Data-in lamp does not

blink or light up.
If the data-in lamp is unlit

or not flashing even after
performing [Print], the
machine has not received
the data.
When the machine is connected to a

computer via a cable, check the
computer print port settings are correct. See Confirming the Connection Method, Printer Reference.
When it is networked with a computer, Contact the administrator.
The status indicator of

the printer is lit.
The cause is displayed on

the display of the control
panel.
Check the error message on the display

panel and take required action. See p.39
When a Message Appears.
Updating the destination list...

Please wait. Specified destination(s)
or sender's name
has been cleared.
The destination list is being updated from the

network using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Wait until the message disappears. Do

not switch off the power while this message is displayed. Depending on the
number of destinations to be updated,
there may be some delay before you can
resume operation. Operations are not
possible while this message is displayed.
[List / Test Print] is disabled.
A mechanical error might

have occurred.

See List/Test Print, General Settings
Guide.
Printing does not start

when using the extended
wireless LAN in Ad-hoc
mode.
The correct Communication mode is not set.
Turn the main power off and back on.

See Turning On/Off the Power,
About This Machine.
appears.
Or, change the settings for [System Settings], [Interface Settings], and [Network].
See Network Settings, General Settings Guide.
If the printing does not start, consult your service representative.
43
When the machine is connected to the computer using the interface cable
The following shows how to check the print port when the data-in lamp does
not light up or blink.
Check if the print port setting is correct. When it is connected using a parallel
interface, connect it to LPT1 or LPT2.
For Windows 95/98/Me
A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port:] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
For Windows 2000 or Windows NT 4.0

A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
C Click the [Ports] tab.
D In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
Windows XP
A Click the [Start] button, and then click [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Server 2003
A Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers and Faxes].
44
Other Printing Problems

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for problems that
can occur when printing from a computer.
Problem
Print is smudges.
Cause
Settings for thick paper have not been
made when printing
on thick paper in the
bypass tray.
Solution
PCL 5e/6 and PostScript 3
Select [Thick] in the [Type:] list on the [Paper]
tab.
RPCS
Select [Thick] in the [Paper type:] list on the
[Print Settings] tab.
The print on the entire

page is faded.
When D is blinking,
toner is beginning to
run out.

page is faded.
The paper is damp.
Use paper that has been stored in the recommended temperature and humidity condition.
See Copy Paper, About This Machine.

page is faded.
The paper is unsuitable.
Use the recommended paper. (Printing on

coarse or treated paper might result in faint
print image.) See Copy Paper, About This
Machine.

page is faded.
If the [Toner saving]

check box is selected
in the printer driver
settings, the entire
page will be faded
when printed.
For the RPCS printer driver, [Toner saving] is located on the [Print Quality] tab. For the PostScript 3 printer driver, see PostScript 3
Supplement. See the printer driver Help.
Image bleeds when

rubbed.
If you are using thick

paper, [Paper type:]
might not be set to
[Thick].
On the printer driver's [Setup] tab, set [Paper

type:] to [Thick]. See the printer driver Help.
Paper is not fed from

the selected tray.
When you are using a

Windows operating
system, printer driver
settings override
those set using the
display panel.
Set the desired input tray using the printer

driver. See the printer driver Help.
The printed image is

different from the image on the computer's
display.
With certain funcIn the application, change the layout, character

tions, such as enlarge- size, and character settings.
ment and reduction,
image layout might
be different to that on
the computer display.
The printed image is

different from the image on the computer's
display.
You might have selected to replace True

Type fonts with machine fonts in the
printing process.
To print an image similar to that of the computer display, make settings to print True Type
fonts as an image. See the printer driver Help.
45
46
Problem
Cause
Solution
Images are printed at

slant.
The tray's side fences

might not be locked.
Check the side fences are locked. See p.75

Changing the Paper Size.
Print is slanted.
The paper is feeding

in at a slant.
Load the paper correctly. See p.65 Loading

paper.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The number of sheets Load paper only as high as the upper limit markloaded exceeds the ca- ings on the side fences of the paper tray or bypass
pacity of the machine. tray. See Copy Paper, About This Machine.
The paper is damp.
The paper is too thick

or too thin.
Use recommended paper. See Copy Paper,

About This Machine.
The copy paper is

wrinkled or has been
folded/creased.
Use recommended paper. Use paper that has

been stored in the recommended temperature
and humidity condition. See Copy Paper,
About This Machine.
Printed paper is being

used.

About This Machine.
Copy paper becomes

creased.
The paper is damp.
Copy paper becomes

creased.
The paper is too thin.

About This Machine.
White lines appear.
When D is blinking,
toner is beginning to
run out.
When printing graph- If the printer driver is

ics, the output and the configured to use the
screen are different.
graphics command,
the graphics command from the machine is used to print.
If you want to print accurately, set the printer

driver to print without using the graphics
command. See the printer driver Help.
Garbled characters
are printed.
The correct printer

language might have
not been selected.
Set the correct printer language.
Images are printed in

the wrong orientation.
The feed orientation

Set the machine's feed orientation and the
you selected and the
printer driver's feed orientation accordingly.
feed orientation select- See the printer driver Help.
ed in the printer driver's option setup might
not be the same.
There is considerable
delay between the
print start instruction
and actual printing.
Off mode / Sleep

mode might be set.
The machine requires time to warm up if it has

been in Off mode/Sleep mode. Specify Off
mode/Sleep mode in [System Settings], [Auto
Off Timer].

Problem
Cause
delay between the
Processing time depends on data volume. High volume

data, such as graphics-heavy documents,
take longer to process.
Solution
If the data-in lamp is blinking, data has been
received by the printer. Wait for a moment.
Making the following setting on the printer
driver may reduce the computer's workload.
PCL 5e/6
Select the lower value for [Resolution] on
the [Print Quality] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
PostScript 3
Select the lower value in [Resolution]. The

location of this setting is given below. If
your operating system is Windows, select
[PostScript (optimize for speed)] in [PostScript
Output Option]. [PostScript Output Option] is
located as follows:
[Print Quality] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows 2003
Server
[PostScript Output Option] in [PostScript
Options] on [Advanced...] on [Layout] tab
in the printing preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[File] on [Advanced...] on [Document Defaults] tab in the printing preferences dialog box.
Mac OS 9.x
[Printer Specifications] in the print dialog
box.
Mac OS X
[Set 3] tab in [Printer Features] in the print
dialog box.
If you use Windows, select [PostScript (optimize for speed)].
[PostScript output format:] on the [PostScript] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server
2003
[PostScript Output Option] in [PostScript
Options] on [Advanced...] on [Layout] tab
in the printing preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[File] on [Document Defaults] on [Advanced...] tab in the printing preferences
dialog box.
47

Problem
Cause
delay between the
Processing time depends on data volume. High volume

data, such as graphics-heavy documents,
take longer to process.
Solution
RPCS
Select the lower value for [Resolution:] on
the [Print Quality] tab in the printer driver's
dialog box.
Select [Fast] for the [Document type] list on
the [Print Quality] tab in the printer driver's
dialog box.
To enable [Change User Settings...], select the
[User settings] check box.
See the printer driver Help.
48
Paper is discharged
when printing is only
half complete, or a
single page is printed
over two pages.
The time specified in Under [Printer Features], set [Feed Timeout] to

[Feed Timeout] under
[Off], or increase the specified time. See Sys[Printer Features] might tem, General Settings Guide.
be too short.
Images are cut off, or

excess is printed.
You may be using paper smaller than the

size selected in the application.
Use the same size paper as that selected in the

application. If you cannot load paper of the
correct size, use the reduction function to reduce the image, and then print. See the printer
driver Help.
Page layout is not as

expected.
Print areas differ depending on machine

used. Information that
fits on a single page on
one machine may not
fit on a single page of
another machine.
Adjust the [Printable area:] setting in the [Printer

Configuration...] dialog box on the [Print Settings]
tab in the RPCS printer driver. See the printer
driver Help.
Photo images are

coarse.
Some applications
print at lower resolution.
Use the application's settings to specify a higher resolution.
Solid lines are printed

as broken lines.
Dither patterns do not

match.
Make the following settings with the printer

driver: Change the [Dithering:] setting on the
[Image Adjustments] tab in the [Change User Settings...] dialog box, on the [Print Quality] tab in
the RPCS printer driver. See the printer driver
Help.
Optional components
connected to the machine are not recognized when using
Windows 95 / 98 /
Me, Windows 2000 /
XP, Windows Server
2003, and Windows
NT 4.0.
Bidirectional communication is not working.
Set up optional devices on the Properties of the

printer.

Problem
Cause
Solution
The printer language Under [Printer Features], Specify a longer time for [I/O Timeout], or set
changes during print- when [Emulation SW] is [Emulation SW] to Off. See System and Inset to On and the
ing.
terface Setting, General Settings Guide.
time specified for [I/O
Timeout] is too short,
the printer language
can change mid-print.
Duplex printing is
malfunctioning.
Duplex printing cannot be done with paper

set in the bypass tray.
When using duplex printing, make settings to

use paper from a tray other than the bypass
tray.
Duplex printing is
malfunctioning.
The upper tray cannot

be used as an output
destination in duplex
mode.
Specify a another output tray.
Duplex printing is
malfunctioning.
Duplex printing cannot be done with a tray

for which [1 Sided Copy]
has been specified as
Paper Type on the System Settings menu.
Change the Paper Type setting for the tray to

[2 Sided Copy] on the System Settings menu.
See System Settings, General Settings
Guide.
When using Windows

95 / 98 / Me / 2000 /
XP, Windows Server
2003, or Windows NT
4.0, combined printing
or booklet printing
does not come out as
expected.
The correct applicaMake sure the application's paper size and orition or printer driver entation settings match those of the printer
settings are not made. driver. If a different paper size and orientation
are set, select the same size and orientation.
A print instruction
was issued from the
computer, but printing did not start.
User Authentication
may have been set.
Contact the administrators.
No transmission
when using 1394 interface connection.
Interface connection has not been

made.
Check using the following procedure:
The correct computer settings are

not made.
B Restart the computer. If the error occurs
A Confirm the IEEE 1394 interface cable is
connected securely.
even after executing the above operation,
proceed to the following steps.
C Unplug the IEEE 1394 interface cable con-
nected to the computer.

D Run the utility tool for the IEEE 1394 interface
board, which is stored in the following path on

the CD-ROM Printer Drivers and Utilities:
\UTILITY\1394\
(For more information about using the utility tool for IEEE 1394, see the README file
in the same directory on the CD-ROM.)
E Restart the computer.
49

Problem
PDF files do not print
out/cannot perform
[PDF Direct Print].
Cause
PDF files are password-protected.
Solution
To print password-protected PDF files, enter
the password in the [PDF Menu] or on Web Image Monitor.
For details about [PDF Menu], see PDF
Menu, General Settings Guide.
For details about Web Image Monitor, see
the Web Image Monitor Help.

out/cannot perform
[PDF Direct Print].
PDF files cannot be

printed if they are
print-disabled via
PDF File Security.
Change the PDF File Security setting.

out/cannot perform
[PDF Direct Print].
High compression
PDF files created using the machine's
scanner function cannot print directly.
Open the application used to create the PDF,

and then print the file using the application's
driver.
Re-save the file in normal (non-compressed)
PDF format.
Some types of High Compression PDF files are
not supported. Consult your sales representative about the supported file types.
[PDF Direct Print] produces strange or malformed characters.
Fonts were not embedded.
Embed fonts in the PDF file you want to print

and then print.
Printing by Bluetooth
is slow.
The number of jobs

exceeds the capacity
of the machine.
Reduce the number of jobs.
Printing by Bluetooth
is slow.
A communication
error might have
occurred.
Remove the machine from close proximity

with IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN devices.
Interference from
IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN)
devices can reduce
communication
speed.
If there are active IEEE 802.11b wireless

LAN devices or other Bluetooth devices
nearby, relocate the machine or disable
those devices.
Bluetooth transmission speeds are

not high.
If the problem cannot be solved, contact your service representative.
50
Using the Scanner Function
This chapter explains likely causes of and possible solutions for scanner function
problems.
When Scanning is Not Done as Expected

This section explains causes and remedies when scan results are not as expected.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The scanned image is

dirty.
The exposure glass or auto docu- Clean these parts. See p.114
ment feeder (ADF) is dirty.
Maintaining Your Machine.
The image is distorted

or out of position.
The original was moved during

scanning.
Do not move the original during

scanning.
The image is distorted

or out of position.
The original was not pressed flat

against the exposure glass.
Make sure that the original is

pressed flat against the exposure
glass.
The scanned image is

upside down.
The original was placed upside

down.
Place the original in the correct

orientation. See Placing Originals, Copy/Document Server
Reference.
No image results from

scanning.
The original was placed with the

front and back reversed.
When the original is placed directly on the exposure glass, the side
to be scanned must face down.
When the original is fed via the
ADF, the side to be scanned must
face up. See Placing Originals,
Images are scanned in

rotated.
If you set the original with its up- When placing a stack of originals
per edge backward and save full in the ADF, place their upper
colour/grey scale images as a
edges first.
TIFF or JPEG file, they are
scanned in rotated.
The scanned image

contains white spaces.
If you scan originals using

functions other than the network TWAIN scanner function, certain paper size and
resolution settings may produce scanned images that are
larger than the specified size
because of margins being
added to the sides.
Scanning at a higher resolution

may reduce the margins.
If the File Format Converter

(optional ) is installed, the
margins may become wider.
51
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files

The following sections explain likely causes of and solutions for Network Delivery and E-mail Sending-related problems.
When Stored Files Cannot be Accessed

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for job access-related problems.
Problem
The stored file is locked
and is not accessible.
Cause
Solution
The file, which is password pro- Contact the administrator.

tected, is locked because the password was incorrectly entered ten
times.
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan file

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the Browser Network failing to operate when files are sent.
Problem
Cause
The network cannot be The following machine settings

browsed when specify- may not be correct:
ing the destination fold- IPv4 address
er.
Subnet Mask
Solution
Check the settings. See Network
Settings , General Settings
Guide.
When the TWAIN Driver Cannot be Started

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the TWAIN driver failing to operate.
52
Problem
Cause
Solution
The Scanner Properties

dialog box cannot be
displayed.
Advanced encryption has been

specified in the extended security
setting.
For details about the extended security setting, contact an administrator.
When You Cannot Send Scanned Files
When Stored Files Cannot be Edited

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the TWAIN driver failing to operate.
Problem
Cause
Stored files cannot be

deleted. File names and
passwords cannot be
changed. Files cannot
be redelivered.
Limits have been imposed using

the available extended security
function.
Solution
When the Network Delivery Function Cannot be Used
This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the Network Delivery function failing to operate.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The network delivery

function cannot be
used.
The delivery software may be an

old version or a security setting
may be specified.
The network delivery

function cannot be
used.
The network delivery function

setting is not correct.
Specify it correctly. See Settings

Required to Use the Network Delivery Scanner, General Settings
Guide.
Operations are not possible when messages appear

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for messages that
appear and when the machine fails to operate.
Message
Cause
Solution
Destination list /
machine settings
are updated. Selected destinations or function
settings have been
cleared. Please
re-select the settings.
The destination list is being updated from the network using

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Depending on the number of destinations to be updated, there
may be some delay before you
can resume operation. Operations are not possible while this
message is displayed.
Wait until the message disappears. Do not switch off the power while this message is
displayed.
53
When a Message is Displayed

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for error messages
that may appear on the machine's control panel.
When a Message is Displayed on the Control Panel

This section explains causes and remedies if an error message appears on the
display of the control panel.
Important
If a message not described here appears, act according to the message. For information about how to turn off the main power switch, see About This Machine.
54
Message
Cause
Solution
Connection with
LDAP server has
failed. Check the
server status.
A network error has occurred and connection

has failed. Try the operation once more.
Try the operation once more. If the message is still shown, the network may be
crowded. Check the information of System Settings. See System Settings,
LDAP server authentication has

failed. Check the
settings.
The user name and pass- Make settings correctly for the user
word differ from those
name and the password for LDAP servset for LDAP Authentica- er authentication.
tion.
The destination
list has been updated. Specified
destination(s) or
sender's name has
been cleared.
A specified destination or Specify the destination or sender's

sender's name was
name again.
cleared when the destination list in the delivery
server was updated.
Updating the des- A network error has octination list has curred.
failed. Try again?
Check whether the server is connected.
A network error has ocThe destination

list has been up- curred.
dated. Specified
destination(s) or
sender's name has
been cleared.
If a destination or sender's name was already selected, re-select it after this

message disappears.

Message
Cause
Solution
Exceeded max.
number of files
which can be sent
at the same time.
Reduce the number
of the selected
files.
The number of files exceeded the maximum

number possible.
Reduce the number of files and send

them again.
Cannot detect
original size.
Place original
again, then press
the Start key.
You have loaded paper of

a size not shown on the
paper size selector.
Place the original correctly.
Exceeded max. No.

of results to
display. Max.:
Search results have exceeded the max. displayable number.
Specify the scan size.

When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/
lowering action of the ADF triggers
the automatic original size detection
process. Lift the ADF by more than
30 degrees. See Placing Originals,
Search again after changing the search

conditions.
The machine has not been Contact the administrator.

You do not have
the privileges to set to allow you to use the
use this function. function.
Exceeded max.
number of standby
files.Try again
after the current
file is sent.
The maximum number of There are 100 files waiting in the sendstandby files was exceeding queue for e-mail, Scan to Folder, or
ed.
delivery functions. Wait until files have
been sent.
Exceeded time
limit for LDAP
server search.
Check the server
status.
A network error has occurred and connection

has failed.
crowded. Check the information of System Settings. See System Settings,
The specified group

contains some destination(s) that do
not have access
privileges. Do you
want to select only
the privileged destination(s)?
The specified group contains some destinations

for sending by e-mail
and some destinations
for sending by Scan to
Folder.
To select destinations for sending by email, press [Select] for the message displayed on the e-mail screen. To select
destination for sending by Scan to Folder, press [Select] for the message displayed on the Scan to Folder screen.
55

Message
56
Cause
Solution
Cannot find the

specified path.
Please check the
settings.
The destination computer name or folder name

is invalid.
Check whether the computer name and

the folder name for the destination are
correct.
Exceeded max.
number of alphanumeric characters for the path.
The maximum number of

specifiable alphanumeric
characters in a path has
been exceeded.
The maximum number of characters

which can be entered for the path is 128.
Check the number of character you entered, and then enter the path again.
See Transmission function, Scanner
Reference.

The selected
file(s) contained files without the authority to do so.
file(s) without
access privileges. Only file(s)
with access privileges will be
deleted.
The files can be deleted by the file administrator. To delete a file which you
are not authorized to delete, contact the
administrator.
Some of selected
files are currently in use.
They could not be
deleted.
You cannot delete a file

which is waiting to be
transmitted (Waiting...
status displayed) or
whose information is being changed with DeskTopBinder.
Cancel transmission (Waiting...status

cleared) or the DeskTopBinder setting,
and then delete the file.
Selected file is
currently in use.
Cannot change
file name.
You cannot change the

name of a file whose status is Waiting... or that
is being edited with
DeskTopBinder.
Change the file name after canceling

delivery or completing editing.
Selected file is
currently in use.
Cannot change
password.

name of a file whose status is Waiting... or that
is being edited with
DeskTopBinder.
Delete the password after canceling delivery or completing editing.
Selected file is
currently in use.
Cannot change
user name.

password of a file whose
status is Waiting... or
that is being edited with
DeskTopBinder.
A sender's name should be specified

before sending e-mail. Send e-mail after
specifying the sender's name.

Message
Cause
Connection with
the destination
has failed. Check
the status and
connection. To
check the current
status, press
[Scanned Files
Status].
The correct Network settings are not made.
Solution
Check the network settings of the
client computer.
Check that components such as the
LAN cable are connected properly.
Check that the server settings are
correct and the server is working
properly.
The entered user name or Check that the user name and passAuthentication
word are correct.
with the destina- password was invalid.
tion has failed.
Check that the ID and password for
the destination folder are correct.
Check settings.
To check the cur A password of 128 or more characrent status,
ters may not be recognized.
press [Scanned
Files Status].
Sender has not

been specified.
The sender's name was

not specified.
Exceeded max. Email size. Sending

E-mail has been
cancelled. Check
[Max. E-mail Size]
in Scanner Features.
The maximum e-mail size Increase the size of [Max. E-mail Size].
has been exceeded.
Set [Divide & Send E-mail] to [Yes (per
Page)] or [Yes (per Max. Size)].
Sending the data

has failed. The
data will be resent later.
A network error has occurred and a file was not

sent correctly.
Wait until sending is retried automatically after the preset interval. If sending
fails again, contact the administrator.
Transmission has
failed. To check
the current status, press
[Scanned Files
Status].
While a file was being

sent, a network error occurred and the file could
not be sent correctly.
crowded. Contact the administrator. If
multiple files were sent, use the
Scanned Files Status screen to check for
which file the problem occurred.
A sender's name should be specified

before sending e-mail. Send e-mail after
specifying the sender's name.
See Send Settings, General Settings

Guide.
57

Message
58
Cause
Solution
Transmission has
failed. Insufficient memory in
the destination
hard disk. To
check the current
status, press
[Scanned Files
Status].
Transmission has failed. Allocate sufficient space.

There was not enough
free space on the hard
disk of the SMTP server,
FTP server, or client computer at the destination.
Output buffer is
full. Sending the
data has been
cancelled. Please
try again later.
The file being stored has

exceeded the max.
number of pages for one
file.
Specify whether to use the data or not.

Scan the pages that were not scanned
and store them as a new file. See Storing
Files Using the Scanner Function Scanner Reference.
Exceeded maximum
number of file to
store. Delete all
unnecessary
files.
Too many files are waiting to be delivered.
Please try again after they have been

delivered.
Exceeded max.
number of stored
files. Cannot send
the scanned data
as capturing files
is unavailable.
Too many files are waiting to be delivered.
Please try again after they have been

delivered.
Exceeded max.
number of files
which can be used
in Document Server
at the same time.

files that can be stored in
the document server has
been exceeded.
Check the files stored by the other functions, and then delete unneeded files.
See Document Server, Copy/Document Server Reference.
Entered protection code for

destination is
incorrect. Please
re-enter.
The correct protect destination code was not entered.
Make sure the protection code is correct, and then enter it again. See Registering a Protection Code, General
Settings Guide.
Entered user code

is not correct.
The entered password is

incorrect.
Check the authentication setting, and

then specify a correct password.

Message
Cause
Solution
Exceeded max.
number of alphanumeric characters.
The maximum enterable

number of alphanumeric
characters has been exceeded.
Make sure the maximum number of

characters which can be entered, and
then enter it again. See Values of various set items for transmission/storage/delivery function, Scanner
Reference.
Authentication
has failed.

is incorrect.
Check the login user name and login

password. The machine is unable to authenticate. Contact an administrator.
The entered path

is not correct.
Please re-enter.
The entered path format

is incorrect.
Confirm the destination computer and

the path, and then enter it again.
Captured file exceeded max. number

of pages per file.
Cannot send the
scanned data.

pages per file has been
exceeded.
Reduce the number of pages in the

transmitted file, and then resend the
file. See Storage function, Scanner
Reference.
Original is being The machine is using an- Retry scanning after the operation with
the other function is completed.
scanned by anoth- other function such as
copying.
er function.
Please wait.
E-mail address
entered is not
correct. Please
re-enter.
The entered e-mail address is incorrect.
Make sure the e-mail address is correct,

and then enter it again.
Memory is full.
Scanning has been
cancelled. Press
[Send] to send
the scanned data,
or press [Cancel]
to delete.
Because there is not

enough free hard disk
space in the machine for
delivering or sending
by e-mail while storing
in the Document Server,
only some of the pages
could be scanned.
Memory is full.
Cannot scan. The
scanned data will
be deleted.
Because of insufficient
hard disk space, the first
page could not be
scanned.
Try one of the following measures:

Wait for a while, and then retry the
scan operation.
Reduce the scan area or scanning
resolution. See Setting items for
Scan Settings, Scanner Reference.
Delete unneeded stored files. See
Deleting a Stored File, Scanner
Reference.
59

Message
Memory is full.
Do you want to
store scanned
file?
60
Cause
Solution
Because there is not

enough free hard disk
space in the machine for
storing in the Document
Server, only some of the
pages could be scanned.
No paper is set in the

No paper. Load
specified paper tray.
paper of one of
the following
sizes, then press
[Start Printing].
Load paper of the sizes listed in the

message.
Exceeded max. data The scanned original exceeded maximum data

capacity.Check
the scanning reso- capacity.
lution, then reset
original(s).
Specify the scan size and resolution

again. Note that it may not be possible
to scan very large originals at a high
resolution. See Relationship between
Resolution and File Size, Scanner Reference.
Exceeded max. data

capacity.Check
scanning resolution, then press
Start key again.
The scanned data exceed- Specify the scan size and resolution
ed maximum data capac- again. Note that it may not be possible
ity.
to scan very large originals at a high
resolution. See Relationship between
Resolution and File Size, Scanner Reference.
Exceeded max.
page capacity per
file. Press
[Send] to send
the scanned data,
or press [Cancel]
to delete.
The number of scanned

pages exceeded maximum page capacity.
Select whether to send the data so far.
When a Message is Displayed on the Client Computer

This section explains likely causes of and possible solutions for the main error
messages displayed on the client computer when using the TWAIN driver.
Important
If a message not described here appears, act according to the message. For information about how to turn off the main power switch, see About This Machine.
Message
Clear Misfeed(s)
in ADF.
Cause
A paper misfeed has occurred inside the ADF.
Solution
Remove jammed originals, and place
them again.
Check whether the originals are suitable to be scanned by the machine.
Invalid Winsock
version. Please
use version 1.1
or higher.
You are using an invalid

version of Winsock.
Install the operating system of the computer or copy Winsock from the operating system CD-ROM.
The name is already in use.

Check the registered names.
You tried to register a

name that is already in
use.
Use another name.
Cannot detect the

paper size of the
original. Specify
the scanning
size.
The set original was misaligned.
Place the original correctly.
Cannot add any

more scanning
mode.

registerable scan modes
has been exceeded.
The maximum number of modes that

can be stored is 100. Delete unneeded
modes.
Cannot specify
any more scanning
area.

registerable scan areas
has been exceeded.
The maximum number of scanning areas that can be stored is 100. Delete unneeded scanning area.
Call Service
Please call your
An unrecoverable error
has occurred in the machine.
Call your service representative.
Specify the scan size.

When placing an original directly
on the exposure glass, the lifting/lowering action of the ADF
triggers the automatic original size
detection process. Lift the ADF by
more than 30 degrees.
The TWAIN scanner

Scanner is not
available on the function cannot be used
specified device. on this machine.
61

Message
Scanner is not
available. Check
the scanner connection status.
Cause
The machine's main
power switch is off.
The machine is not
connected to the network correctly.
Solution
Set the main power switch to On.
Check whether the machine is connected to the network correctly.
Deselect the personal firewall function of the client computer.
Use an application such as telnet to
make sure SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 is
set as the machines protocol. See
Network Settings, General Settings Guide and Using telnet,
Network Guide.
No response from
the scanner.
The machine is not connected to the network

correctly.
Check whether the machine is connected to the network correctly.
No response from
the scanner.
The network is crowded.
Wait for a while, and then try to reconnect.
Error has occurred

in the scanner.
The application-specified scan conditions have

exceeded the setting
range of the machine.
Check whether the scanning settings

made with the application exceed the
setting range of the machine.
Fatal error has

occurred in the
scanner.
An unrecoverable error
has occurred on the machine.
An unrecoverable error has occurred in

the machine. Call your service representative.
Cannot connect to
the scanner. Check
the network Access
Mask settings in
User Tools.
An access mask is set.
Contact the network or scanner administrator.
Scanner is not
ready. Check the
scanner and the
options.
The ADF cover is open.
Check whether the ADF cover is closed.
Insufficient mem- Scanner memory is insuf- Reset the scan size.

ficient.
ory. Reduce the
Lower the resolution.
scanning area.
Set with no compression. See
TWAIN Driver help.
The problem may be due to the following cause:
The Relationship between the Resolution and the Scanning Area
chart in Help for halftone scanning
might not always apply. Scanning
cannot be performed if large values
are set for brightness when using
halftone or high resolution.
62

Message
Cause
Solution
After the misfed paper has been reInsufficient mem- When a paper misfeed
occurs in the machine
moved, proceed with scanning.
ory. Reduce the
during
printing,
scanning
scanning area.
cannot be performed.
Cannot find "XXX"

scanner used for
the previous
scan. "YYY" will
be used instead.
(XXX and YYY indicate scanner names.)
The main power

switch of the previously used scanner is
not set to On.
The machine is not
connected to the network correctly.
Check whether the main power

switch of the scanner used for the
previous scan is turned off.
Check the previously used scanner
is connected to the network correctly.
Cancel the Personal Firewall of the
client computer.
Use an application such as telnet to
make sure SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 is
set as the machines protocol. See
Network Settings, General Settings Guide and Using telnet,
Network Guide.
Select the scanner used for the previous scan.
Error has occurred in the

scanner driver.

the driver.
Check whether the network cable is

connected correctly to the client
computer.
Check whether the Ethernet board
of the client computer is recognized
correctly by Windows.
Check whether the client computer
can use the TCP/IP protocol.
Communication er- A communication error

ror has occurred has occurred on the network.
on the network.
Check whether the client computer can

use the TCP/IP protocol.
Scanner is in use A function of the machine Wait for a while and reconnect.
other than the scanner
for other function. Please wait. function is being used
such as the copier function.
Insufficient
memory. Close all
other applications, then restart scanning.
Memory is insufficient.
No User Code is
registered. Consult your system
administrator.
Access is restricted with

user codes.
Close all the unnecessary applications running on the client computer.

Uninstall the TWAIN driver, and
then reinstall it after restarting the
computer.
Contact the administrator of the machine.
63

Message
Any of Login User

Name, Login Password or Driver
Encryption Key is
incorrect.
64
Cause
Solution

Check the login user name, login
name, password, or drivpassword, and driver encryption
er encryption key was
key.
invalid.
Permission to use this function has
not been granted. Contact the administrator.
5. Adding paper, Toner and

Staples
This chapter explains troubleshooting procedures that are applicable to all the
machine's functions.
Loading paper
This section explains what to do when paper runs out and needs reloading.
R CAUTION:
When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
Note
Fan the paper before loading.
Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.

When paper in trays that are set to automatically eject unnecessary tab stock
sheets runs out, reload the tab stock from the beginning of the cycle (the first
sheet).
For paper types and sizes, see Recommended Paper Sizes and Types,
About This Machine.
To load paper in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7), see Using the Multi Bypass
Tray (Tray 7), Copy/Document Server Reference.
Loading paper into Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)

The following procedure explains how to load paper into Tray 1.
Important
When paper loaded in the right side of Tray 1 runs out, paper on the left is
automatically shifted to the right. While the paper is moving, a message instructing you to wait appears. Do not pull out the tray at this time.
For the right stack, align the right edge of the copy paper with the right edge
of the tray. For the left stack, align the left edge of the copy paper to the left
edge of the tray.
Tray 1 uses only A4 K paper. If you want to load 8 1/2 11 K, contact your
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
65
A Carefully pull out the paper tray until it stops.
ANQ001S
B Square the paper and place it print side down.

Whole tray pulled out
ANQ002S
Left half of the tray pulled out
ANQ003S
C Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

Note
You can load paper even while making copies from Tray 1. You can pull
out the left half of the tray while copying is in.
66
Loading paper
Loading Paper into the A3/11 17 Tray Unit

The following procedure explains how to load paper into the A3/11 17 tray
unit. To use the A3/11 17 tray unit, you must replace Tray 1.
Important
Make sure that the paper stack is flush to the right side fence.
5
ANQ008S
B Place the paper in the tray along the edge on the left.
ANQ009S

Note
The tray can hold up to 550 sheets.
67
Loading Paper into Tray 2 and 3

The following procedure explains how to load paper into Tray 2 and 3.
Important
Various sizes of paper can be loaded in Tray 2 and 3 by adjusting the positions
of side fence and end fence.
Check the paper edges are aligned at the right side.

5
ANQ004S
B Square the paper and load it print side down.
ANQ005S

Note
If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically, you will need to
specify the paper size with the control panel. Following paper sizes that
are not selected automatically.

Reference
p.75 Changing the Paper Size
p.84 Changing to a Size that is Not Automatically Detected
68
Loading paper
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)

The following procedure explains loading paper into the large capacity tray
(LCT). The LCT is identified as Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6.
Important
Various sizes of paper can be loaded in Tray 4 and Tray 5 by adjusting the positions of side fence and end fence.
If you want to change the paper size of Tray 6, contact your service representative.
Check the paper's edges are aligned at the left side.
ANQ006S
B Load paper into the paper tray by pushing it against to the left side of the
paper tray.
Load the paper print side up.
ANQ007S

Note
The tray can hold up to 1100 sheets in Tray 4 and 5, and 2800 sheets in Tray 6.
Reference
69
Loading Paper into the Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT)
The following procedure explains loading paper into the wide large capacity
tray (Wide LCT). The Wide LCT is identified as Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6.
Important
Various sizes of paper can be loaded in the Wide LCT by adjusting the positions of side fence and end fence.
Check that the paper edges are aligned at the left side.
Do not load paper above the upper mark in the paper tray
ANQ060S
B Load paper into the paper tray by pushing the paper to the left side of the
paper tray.
Place paper with printing side up.
ANQ065S

Note
The tray can hold up to 1100 sheets in Tray 4 and 6, and 2200 sheets in Tray 5.
If you load paper that cannot be automatically detected, specify its size using the control panel.
Reference
70
Loading paper
Loading Paper into the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7)

The following procedure explains loading paper into the multi bypass tray (Tray 7).
Important
The maximum number of sheets you can load into the multi bypass tray (Tray 7)
depend on paper type. The number should not exceed the upper limit.
A Set the side fence to the paper size.
5
APF028S
B Place paper in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7).

C Set the end fence.
ANQ068S
To remove the end fence, slide it to the right.
ANQ069S
71
D Press the elevator switch on the multi bypass tray (Tray 7).
APF030S
The green lamp of the elevator switch is blinking while the tray is going up
and down, and keeps lit when it stops.
Press the elevator switch to move down original table if you want to either
add paper or remove jammed ones.
Note
For details about using the multi bypass tray (Tray 7), see Using the Multi
Bypass Tray (Tray 7), Copy/Document Server Reference.
Reference
Loading Paper in the Interposer

The following procedure explains loading paper into the interposer.
Important
Load paper on the side already printed (the front side). If you are using the
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch), load sheets print side down.
Load paper in the interposer in the same orientation as paper in the paper
tray.
The staple or punching location will be on the left side of the paper, when you
are facing the machine.
Do not place anything on top of or leave documents on the sensor. This may
lead to the paper size not being correctly scanned or paper jams.
When using the Z-fold function, the paper in the interposer must be of the
same size as the prints after they have been Z-folded. If the paper in the interposer is larger than the Z-folded sheets, a misfeed might occur.
72
Loading paper
A While pressing the release lever, align the side fence with the paper size to
be loaded.
ANQ010S
B Load paper orderly. Tightly fit the side fence to the loaded paper.
ANQ012S
C When loading paper larger than A4, draw out the paper extender.
Note
To set the paper in the interposer, align the orientation of originals in the
ADF as shown below.
ANR026S
When paper is loaded which cannot be detected automatically, the user

must set the paper size on the control panel.
Reference
73
Orientation-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Paper

The following describes paper with its orientation and printing surface specified
(letterhead paper).
Orientation-fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhead
paper, punched paper, or copied paper) might not print correctly, depending on
how the originals and paper are placed. Select [On] in [Letterhead Setting] under
[Copier / Document Server Features], and then place the original and paper as
shown below. See Letterhead Setting, General Settings Guide. When printing
with the printer function, placement orientation is the same.
For printing using the printer function, load paper in the same orientation.
Paper orientation
Note
Press the {Tray Paper Setting} key, specify Letterhead as Paper Type for the
paper tray you want to use. See Tray Paper Settings, General Settings
Guide.
74
Changing the Paper Size

This section explains how to change a paper size.
Procedures for changing the paper size differ depending on the tray (tray 1 or
other optional paper tray units). Make sure you are following the appropriate
procedure before you begin.
Note
Be sure to select the paper size with User Tools. If you do not, misfeeds might
occur.
Fan the paper before loading.

Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
For details about paper sizes and types, see Copy Paper, About This Machine.
75
Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2 and 3

The following procedure explains how to change a paper size in Tray 2 and 3.
Important
If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side fence may slip out of place.
Check that the paper edges are aligned at the right side.
A Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used for copying, and then
pull the tray carefully out until it stops.
ANQ014S
B Remove paper if loaded.

C Release the lock on the side fence.
ANQ015S
76
D While pressing down the release lever, slide the side fences until they are
aligned the paper size you want to load.
ANQ016S
E Slide the end fence until it is aligned with the size of paper to you want to
load.
ANQ017S
F Square the paper and load it print side up.

Re-lock the side fences again.
ANQ018S
G Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

H Check the size on the display.
Note
If there is space between the side fence and paper, bring the side fence
flush against the edge of the paper.
77
Changing the Paper Size in the Large Capacity Tray (Tray 4 and 5)
The following procedure explains how to change a paper size in the LCT (Tray 4
and 5).
Important
As for changing paper sizes of Tray 6, contact your service representative.
5
ANQ006S
B Pull out the screws fixing the side fence.
ANQ020S
C Set the side fences to the size you want.
ANQ021S
78
D Fasten the side fence with the screws.
ANQ022S
E Set the end fence along the paper size.
ANQ023S
F Square the paper and set it in the tray.
ANQ024S
G Set the paper size selector in the innermost part of the tray to the new paper size.
ANQ025S
79
H Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

I Check the size on the display.
Load A4K, 81/2 11K into the Large Capacity Tray (Tray 4 and 5)
Follow the procedure below to set the end fence for A4K, 81/2 11K.
A Set the end fence according to the paper size.
5
ANQ076S
A
B
A4K
81/2 11K
B Fasten the end fence using the screw provided.
ANQ077S
Note
When loading index tabs, shift the end fence for A4K, 81/2 11Kto position before setting the end fence for index tabs.
80
Changing the Paper Size in the Wide Large Capacity Tray

The following procedure explains how to change a paper size in the wide large
capacity tray (Wide LCT).
Important
5
ANQ060S
B Pull out the screws fixing the side fence.
ANQ061S
C Take the grip of the side fence with your fingers, and adjust the side fence
to the paper size.
ANQ062S
81
D Fasten the side fence with the screws.
ANQ063S
E Release the lock on the back fence.
ANQ064S
F Square the paper and set it in the tray.
ANQ066S
82
G Tightly fit the back fence to the loaded paper and then re-lock the back
fence again.
ANQ067S
H Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.

I Check the size on the display.
83
Changing to a Size that is Not Automatically Detected

If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically, you need to specify the
paper size with the control panel. This section explains how to load these paper
taking 11 15L as an example.
Important
Following paper sizes that are not selected automatically.
Tray 2, Tray 3:
11 15L, 11 14L, 10 15L, 10 14L, 81/4 14L, 8 10L
Tray 4, Tray 5, Tray 6 (Wide LCT):
B5L, B6L, A6L, 81/2 14L, 81/2 11L, 81/2 51/2K, 81/2
13L, 81/4 13L, 101/2 71/4KL, 11 15L, 10 14L, 81/4
14L, 8KL, 16KKL
Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7), Interposer:
B5L, B6L, 81/2 14L, 81/2 11L, 81/2 51/2K, 81/2 13L,
81/4 13L, 101/2 71/4KL, 11 15L, 10 14L, 81/4 14L,
8 10L, 8KL, 16KKL
A Press the {Tray Paper Setting} key.
ANR100S
The Tray Paper Settings screen appears.
B Select the tray number on the screen.
84
C Press [Paper Size] tab.
D Select a combination of the specified paper size and orientation, and then
press [OK].
The paper size and orientation appear.
E Press the {Tray Paper Setting} key.

The initial display is shown.
Note
If you want to print on paper that is selected automatically after printing
on a paper size that is not selected automatically, you must return the setting to Auto Detect. Reload the paper, select Auto Detect in step D. The
setting is returned to Auto Detect.
85
Pausing Copy When Using Finisher

You can pause a large volume of copies when using Finisher.
A Press the {Suspend/Resume} key.

The key lights up.
ANQ082S
B Remove the stack of paper from the finisher shift tray.
ANQ083S
C Press the {Suspend/Resume} key.

The key turns off, and then copying restarts.
Note
You can suspend copy only when the output tray is specified as the finisher shift tray.
86
Adding Toner
Adding Toner
This section explains adding and storing toner.
R WARNING:
Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers
in accordance with local regulations.
R CAUTION:
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.
See a doctor immediately if you accidentally swallow toner.
R CAUTION:
If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a
fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large
amounts of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam or
replacing toner. If your skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected
area thoroughly with soap and water.
If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible.
R CAUTION:
Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies available at an authorized dealer.
R CAUTION:
Open toner cartridges carefully. If you open them forcefully, toner can spill,
dirtying your clothes or hands, and possibly resulting in accidental ingestion.
87
Important
Faults may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
When adding toner, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, settings
will be lost.
Always add toner when the machine instructs you.
Do not use recycled toner. This will damage the machine.
During toner adding, the toner bottle is rotating. Do not touch the toner bottle.
If toner remains in the bottle, you cannot remove the bottle. Do not remove
the bottle forcibly.
Be sure to set the new toner bottle in the lower hole first.
Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.
Store toner on a flat surface.
Note
If both toner bottles are empty, D will appear.
You can still make about 200 copies after D appears, but replace the toner early to copy degradation.
If one of the toner bottle is empty, you can keep copying by using the other
bottle.
You can change the toner bottle during copying.
If toner remains in the bottle, you cannot pull it out.
When you change one toner bottle, do not touch the other one.
Press [System Status] to check contact number for consumables' order. For system status, see p.5 Checking Machine Status and Settings.
88
Adding Toner
Inserting Toner
The following describes how to replace toner.
Important
Do not shake the toner bottle with its mouth down after removing it. Residual
toner may scatter.
ANR001S
Used Toner
Toner cannot be re-used.
Bring the stored used container to your sales representative or service representative for recycling through our recycling system. If you discard it on your own,
treat it as general plastic waste material.
89
Adding Staples
This section explains what to do when staples need replacing.
Important
Stapling failures or jams may occur if you use a staple cartridge other than
that recommended.
Refill the stapler according to the finisher type. (Check the type if you are unsure.) For details about type of finisher, see Options, About This Machine.
Finisher
The following procedure explains how to add staples to the Finisher.
ANR002S
90
Adding Staples
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch)

The following procedure explains how to add staples to the Booklet Finisher.
ANR003S
91
92
6. Clearing Misfeeds
This chapter explains what to do when paper or originals misfeed (become
jammed inside the machine).
Removing Jammed Paper

R CAUTION:
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch any parts other
than specified in this document when removing misfed paper. Otherwise, it
may cause burn injury.
R CAUTION:
The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be taken when removing misfed paper.
R CAUTION:
Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and
spacious. Good ventilation is especially important when the machine is used
heavily.
Important
When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your
copy settings will be lost.
To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the machine.
Remove the fusing unit only when necessary.
Contact your service representative if misfeeds occur frequently.
Note
For details about how to locate and remove misfeeds, see Checking Jammed
Paper or Removing Jammed Paper.
Reference
p.94 Locating Jammed Paper.
p.96 Removing Jammed Paper.
93
Clearing Misfeeds
Locating Jammed Paper

If a misfeed happens, remove the misfed paper or original following the procedures stated on the sticker on the rear of main unit front cover.
A misfeed has occurred in the place corresponding to the letter displayed on the
control panel.
ANQ030S
A Press the key of the section from where you want to remove the jammed paper.
94
B After each step is complete, press [Next]. To go back to the previous step,
press [Previous].
C Press [Entire View], the entire machine is displayed.
D When all jammed paper are removed, restore the machine to the original
state.
Note
More than one misfeed may be indicated. When this happens, check all the
areas indicated.
95
Clearing Misfeeds

The following procedure explains how to remove jammed paper.
Important
The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be taken
when removing misfed paper.
When removing jammed sheets, take care to touch only those areas explicitly
indicated in the manual.
Do not remove the fusing unit. Doing so will result in loss of print quality.
When A is lit
6
ANR004S
When B1 is lit
ANR005S
When B4 is lit
ANR006S
96
When C is lit
ANR007S
When D is lit
ANR008S
97
Clearing Misfeeds
When M is lit (when Booklet Finisher is installed)
ANR018S
98
ANR019S
When N1 is lit (when Z-Folding Unit is installed)
ANS008S
99
Clearing Misfeeds
When N2 or N3 is lit (when Z-Folding Unit is installed)
ANS009S
When P1 is lit (when ADF is installed)
ANR011S
When P2 is lit (when ADF is installed)
ANR027S
100
When Q1 or Q2 is lit (when Interposer is installed)
ANR016S
When Q3 or Q4 is lit (when Interposer is installed)
ANR017S
101
Clearing Misfeeds
When R is lit (when Finisher is installed)
ANR021S
102
When U is lit (when Large Capacity Tray is installed)
ANR012S
When U is lit (when Wide Large Capacity Tray is installed)
ANR013S
103
Clearing Misfeeds
When V is lit (when Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7) is installed)
ANR020S
When Z1 is lit
ANR009S
When Z4 is lit
ANR010S
104
Note
Inside the finisher, or inside the front cover, there is a sticker explaining how
to remove misfed paper.
If a detailed removal instruction appears on the right of the screen, follow it.
You can also use the procedure indicated in [System Status] to remove jammed
paper.
When Z-folded paper is not properly aligned

The following procedure explains when Z-folded copies are not properly
aligned.
A Press the {Suspend/Resume} key.

The key lights up.
ANQ082S
B Remove the copies.

C Set the auxiliary tray for the finisher shift tray.
ANQ075S
105
Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Jammed Staples

This section explains how to remove jammed staples.
Important
Curled paper may cause staples to jam. To avoid this, turn copy paper over
in the tray.
When the finisher is installed, after removing jammed staples, staples will not
be ejected the first few times you try to use the stapler.
Remove the jammed staples according to the finisher type. (Check the type if
you are unsure.) For details about type of finisher, see Options, About This
Machine.
Finisher
The following procedure explains how to remove jammed staples from the
Finisher.
ANR022S
106
Removing Jammed Staples
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch)

The following procedure explains how to remove jammed staples from the
Booklet Finisher.
ANR023S
107
Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Punch and Staple Waste

This section explains how to remove punch and staple waste.
Note
While Hole Punch Receptacle is full. or Waste Staple Receptacle is full. is displayed, you cannot use the Punch function or the Staple
function.
Finisher
The following procedure explains how to remove punch and staple wastes from
the Finisher.
Remove punch wastes
6
ANR025S
Remove staple wastes
ANR024S
Note
If the message is still displayed, reinstall the waste box.
108
7. Remarks
This chapter describes how to maintain and operate the machine.
Where to Put Your Machine

This section provides precautions for installation, movement and disposal.
Machine Environment
Choose your machine's location carefully.
Environmental conditions greatly affect its performance.
Optimum environmental conditions

The following describes precautions when moving the machine.
R CAUTION:
Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might occur.
Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over,

an injury might occur.
R CAUTION:
After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might move or come down to cause an injury.
R CAUTION:
If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a continuous
air turnover.
Temperature: 10-32 C (50-89.6 F) (humidity to be 54% at 32 C, 89.6 F)

Humidity: 15-80% (temperature to be 27 C, 80.6 F at 80%)
A strong and level base.
The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2 inches: both front to rear and left
to right.
To avoid possible buildup of ozone, make sure to locate this machine in a
large well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30
m3/hr/person.
109
Remarks
Environments to avoid
Locations exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of strong light (more
than 1,500 lux).
Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air
from a heater. (Sudden temperature changes can cause condensation to form
inside the machine.)
Locations close to machines generating ammonia, such as a diazo copy machine.
Places where the machine will be subject to frequent strong vibration.
Dusty areas.
Areas with corrosive gases.
110
Moving
The following describes precautions when moving the machine.
R CAUTION:
Before moving the machine, be sure to disconnect all external connections,
especially the power cord from the wall outlet. Damaged power cords are a
fire and electric shock hazard.
R CAUTION:
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
Important
Be careful when moving the machine. Take the following precautions:
Turn off the main power.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. When you pull out the plug
from the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord, thereby reducing the risk of fire or electric shock.
Close all covers and trays, including the front cover and bypass tray.
Keep the machine level and carry it carefully, taking care not to jolt or tip it.
Rough handling may cause a malfunction or damage the hard disk or memory, resulting in loss of stored files.
Do not take off the holding stand.
Protect the machine from strong shocks. Impact can damage the hard disk
and cause stored files to be lost. As a precautionary measure, files should be
copied to another computer.
111
Remarks
Power Connection
The following explains power supply.
R WARNING:
Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside
front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into a wall
outlet and do not use an extension cord.
Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.

Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
R WARNING:
If the power cord is damaged (exposure of the core, disconnection,
etc.), contact your service representative to change a new one. Operating the machine with a damaged power cord may cause an electric
shock or fire.
R CAUTION:
When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
R CAUTION:
To disconnect the power code, pull it out by plug. Do not drag the code itself.
Doing so may result in damage to the code, leading to fire or electric shock.
Make sure the plug is inserted firmly in the wall outlet.

Voltage must not fluctuate by more than 10%.
The wall outlet shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily accessible.
112
Access to the Machine

Place the machine near the power source, providing the clearance areas shown.
1. Rear: more than 20 cm (7.8)

2. Right: more than 3 cm (1.1)
3. Front: more than 55.5 cm (21.6)
4. Left: more than 40 cm (15.7)
Note
For the required space when options are installed, contact your service representative.
113
Remarks
Maintaining Your Machine

If the exposure glass or ADF belt is dirty, copy clarity may be reduced. Clean
these parts if they are dirty.
Important
Do not use chemical cleaners or organic solvents, such as thinner or benzene.
If such substances get inside the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure might
occur.
Do not clean parts other than those explicitly specified in this manual. Other
parts should only be cleaned by your service representative.
How to maintain
Cleaning the machine Wipe the machine with a soft, damp cloth, and then
wipe it with a dry cloth to remove the water.
Cleaning the Exposure Glass

The following procedure explains how to clean the exposure glass.
ANQ080S
Wipe the surface of the exposure glass.
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder

The following procedure explains how to clean the ADF.
ANQ081S
114
Wipe the surface of the belt, moving it.
INDEX
A
Access to the Machine, 113
Adding
Paper, 65
Staples, 90
Toner, 87
Adding Staples
Booklet Finisher, 91
Finisher, 90
Alert Messages, 40
Auto Document Feeder (ADF), 114
E
Edit, 30
Enquiry, 5
Environment, 109
Environments to avoid, 110
Error Log, 41
Exposure Glass, 114
F
Finisher, 86, 90, 106, 108
H
Booklet Finisher, 91, 107
C
Cannot Browse
the Network to Send a Scan File, 52
Cannot Exit from Connect Copy, 27
Cannot Make Clear Copies, 28
Cannot Make Copies As Wanted, 30
Cannot Print, 42
Cannot Send Scanned Files, 52
Changing the Paper Size, 75
LCT (Tray 4 and 5), 78
Tray 2 and 3, 76
Wide LCT, 81
Changing to a Size that is Not
Automatically Detected, 84
Checking Machine Status and Settings, 5
Checking the Error Log, 41
Cleaning
Auto Document Feeder, 114
Exposure Glass, 114
Clearing Misfeeds, 93
Combine, 30
Connect Copy, 25, 26, 27, 34
Connect Copy is Cancelled, 26
Copy Function, 19
D
Data Storage, 5
Display During Connect Copy, 25
Document Server, 9
Duplex, 30
I
If USB Connection Fails, 38
Indicators, 3
Inserting Toner, 89
Interposer, 72
J
Job is Not Performed, 14
L
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 69, 78
Letterhead, 74
Loading Paper, 65
Interposer, 72
LCT, 69
Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7), 71
Tray 2 and 3, 68
Wide LCT, 70
Locating Jammed Paper, 94
M
Machine Address Info, 5
Machine environment, 109
Maintaining Your Machine, 114
Maintenance Info, 5
Memory is Full, 34
Moving, 111
Multi-accessing, 14
Multi Bypass Tray (Tray 7), 71
115
N
Names of Major Options, 2
Network Delivery Function
Cannot be Used, 53
O
Operations are Not Possible
When Messages Appear, 53
Optimum environmental conditions, 109
Other Printing Problems, 45
P
Panel Tone, 4
Pausing Copy When Using Finisher, 86
Power connection, 112
Printer Function, 35
Printing surface, 74
Problems Operating the Machine, 9
Punch Waste, 108
R
Removing Jammed Paper, 93, 96
Removing Jammed Staples, 106
Booklet Finisher, 107
Finisher, 106
Removing Punch and Staple Waste, 108
U
Used Toner, 89
W
Copy Function, 19
Scanner Function, 54
Scanner Function (Client Computer), 61
When a Message Appears during
Installation of the Printer Driver, 35
When an Indicator
to the Right of a Function Key is Lit, 8
When the Machine
Does Not Operate As wanted, 3
When Z-folded paper is not
properly aligned, 105
Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT), 70, 81
Windows 2000, 36
Windows 95/98/Me, 35
Windows NT 4.0, 37
Windows Server 2003, 36
Windows XP, 36
S
Scanning is Not Done as Expected, 51
Stamp, 30
Staple Waste, 108
Status Messages, 39
Stored Files Cannot Be Accessed, 52
Stored Files Cannot be Edited, 53
T
Toner, 87
Tray 1 (Tandem Tray), 65
Troubleshooting
Copy Function, 19
TWAIN, 52, 61
TWAIN Driver Cannot be Started, 52
116
GB
GB
B235-7700
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Copyright 2005
Operating Instructions Troubleshooting
B235-7700
GB GB
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 m // Pages in book=228 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book Paper thickness / 2 = 11.400001 mm
Operating Instructions Security Reference
Operating Instructions Security Reference
Printed in the Netherlands

GB GB B235-7900
Security Reference
Getting Started
Authentication and its Application
Preventing Information Leaks
Managing Access to the Machine
Enhanced Network Security
Specifying the Extended Security Functions
Troubleshooting
Appendix
B2357900
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page i Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM

About This Machine

Troubleshooting
Security Reference(This manual)
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page ii Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
Other manuals
UNIX Supplement
Note
Product name
DeskTopBinder Lite
Professional
*1
and DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter EX Professional
er EX Enterprise *1
*1
ii
Optional
General name
*1
DeskTopBinder
and ScanRout- The ScanRouter delivery software
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page iii Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ...................................................................................... i
How to Read This Manual ..................................................................................... 1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
1. Getting Started
Enhanced Security................................................................................................. 3
Glossary .....................................................................................................................4
Setting Up the Machine..............................................................................................5
Security Measures Provided by this Machine..................................................... 7
Using Authentication and Managing Users ................................................................7
Preventing Information Leaks ....................................................................................7
Limiting and Controlling Access .................................................................................9
Enhanced Network Security.....................................................................................10
2. Authentication and its Application

Administrators and Users ................................................................................... 11
Administrators ..........................................................................................................11
User..........................................................................................................................12
The Management Function .................................................................................13
About Administrator Authentication..........................................................................14
About User Authentication .......................................................................................15
Enabling Authentication......................................................................................16
Authentication Setting Procedure.............................................................................16
Administrator Authentication .............................................................................17
Specifying Administrator Privileges..........................................................................17
Registering the Administrator...................................................................................20
Logging on Using Administrator Authentication .......................................................24
Logging off Using Administrator Authentication .......................................................26
Changing the Administrator......................................................................................27
User Authentication.............................................................................................29
User Code Authentication ........................................................................................29
Basic Authentication.................................................................................................33
Windows Authentication...........................................................................................42
LDAP Authentication ................................................................................................50
Integration Server Authentication.............................................................................56
If User Authentication is Specified..................................................................... 65
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)...............................................65
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver) ..................................................65
Login (Using the Control Panel) ...............................................................................66
Log Off (Using the Control Panel) ............................................................................67
Login (Using a Printer Driver)...................................................................................68
Login (Using Web Image Monitor) ...........................................................................68
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor) ........................................................................68
Auto Logout..............................................................................................................69
Authentication using an external device...................................................................70
iii
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page iv Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
3. Preventing Information Leaks

Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying ......................................................... 71
Unauthorized Copy Prevention ................................................................................72
Data Security for Copying ........................................................................................73
Printing Limitations...................................................................................................74
Notice .......................................................................................................................75
Printing with Unauthorized Copy Prevention and Data Security for Copying...........75
Printing a Confidential Document ...................................................................... 78
Choosing a Locked Print file ....................................................................................78
Printing a Locked Print File ......................................................................................79
Deleting Locked Print Files ......................................................................................80
Changing Passwords of Locked Print Files..............................................................82
Unlocking Locked Print Files....................................................................................84
Specifying Access Permission for Stored Files ...............................................85
Assigning Users and Access Permission for Stored Files .......................................86
Specifying Access Privileges for Files Stored using the Scanner Function .............89
Assigning the User and the Access Permission for the Users Stored Files ............92
Specifying Passwords for the Stored Files...............................................................95
Unlocking Files.........................................................................................................97
Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission............................ 99
Restrictions on Destinations.....................................................................................99
Protecting the Address Book ...........................................................................102
Address Book Access Permission .........................................................................102
Encrypting the Data in the Address Book .............................................................. 105
Deleting Data on the Hard Disk ........................................................................ 108
Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk................................................................... 108
4. Managing Access to the Machine

Preventing Modification of Machine Settings .................................................117
Menu Protect ...................................................................................................... 118
Menu Protect..........................................................................................................118
Limiting Available Functions ............................................................................ 121
Specifying Which Functions are Available .............................................................121
Managing Log Files ...........................................................................................123
Specifying Delete All Logs .....................................................................................123
Transfer Log Setting...............................................................................................124
iv
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page v Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
5. Enhanced Network Security

Preventing Unauthorized Access.....................................................................127
Enabling/Disabling Protocols .................................................................................127
Access Control .......................................................................................................129
Specifying Network Security Level.........................................................................130
Encrypting Transmitted Passwords.................................................................134
Driver Encryption Key ............................................................................................ 134
Group Password for PDF files................................................................................136
IPP Authentication Password.................................................................................138
Protection Using Encryption ............................................................................ 139
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption................................................................ 140
User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) ...................................................... 144
Setting the SSL / TLS Encryption Mode.................................................................145
SNMPv3 Encryption ...............................................................................................147
6. Specifying the Extended Security Functions

Changing the Extended Security Functions ................................................... 149
Changing the Extended Security Functions ........................................................... 149
Settings .................................................................................................................. 151
Other Security Functions ..................................................................................155
Scanner Function ................................................................................................... 155
Weekly Timer Code................................................................................................155
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers Only ............................................159
Settings .................................................................................................................. 159
7. Troubleshooting
Authentication Does Not Work Properly .........................................................163
A Message Appears...............................................................................................163
Machine Cannot Be Operated................................................................................165
8. Appendix
Operations by the Supervisor...........................................................................167
Logging on as the Supervisor ................................................................................167
Logging off as the Supervisor ................................................................................168
Changing the Supervisor........................................................................................169
Resetting an Administrators Password .................................................................170
Machine Administrator Settings.......................................................................172
System Settings .....................................................................................................172
Copier / Document Server Features ......................................................................174
Printer Features .....................................................................................................174
Scanner Features................................................................................................... 175
Settings via Web Image Monitor ............................................................................176
Settings via SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin........................................................... 178
Tray Paper Settings ...............................................................................................178
Network Administrator Settings .......................................................................180
System Settings .....................................................................................................180
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page vi Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM
File Administrator Settings ...............................................................................184

System Settings .....................................................................................................184
Printer Features .....................................................................................................184
User Administrator Settings ............................................................................. 186
System Settings .....................................................................................................186
Document Server File Permissions..................................................................188
The Privilege for User Account Settings in the Address Book ..................... 189
User Settings...................................................................................................... 192
Copier / Document Server Features ......................................................................192
Printer Functions ....................................................................................................196
System Settings .....................................................................................................200
Web Image Monitor Setting.................................................................................... 206
Functions That Require Options ......................................................................219
INDEX....................................................................................................... 220
vi
BelliniC3-EN_Sec_F_FM_forPaper.book Page 1 Friday, December 16, 2005 9:16 AM

Symbols
notes. They can be found in the Safety Information section of About This Machine.
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the &l
[]
{}
1. Getting Started
Enhanced Security
This machine's security function can be enhanced through the management of
the machine and its users using the improved authentication functions.
By specifying access limits on the machines functions and the documents and
data stored in the machine, you can prevent information leaks and unauthorized
access.
Data encryption can prevent unauthorized data access and tampering via the
network.
Authentication and Access Limits

Using authentication, administrators manage the machine and its users. To
enable authentication, information about both administrators and users must
be registered in order to authenticate users via their login user names and
passwords.
Four types of administrator manage specific areas of machine usage, such as
settings and user registration.
Access limits for each user are specified by the administrator responsible for
user access to machine functions and documents and data stored in the machine.
Reference
For details, see p.11 Administrators.
Encryption Technology
This machine can establish secure communication paths by encrypting transmitted data and passwords.
Getting Started
Glossary
Administrator
There are four types of administrator according to the administered function:
machine administrator, network administrator, file administrator, and user
administrator. We recommend only one person take each administrator role.
You can spread the workload and limit unauthorized operation by a single
administrator.
Basically, administrators make machine settings and manage the machine;
they cannot perform normal operations, such as copying and printing.
User
A user performs normal operations on the machine, such as copying and printing.
File Creator (Owner)
This is a user who can store files in the machine and authorize other users to
view, edit, or delete those files.
Registered User
This is a user whose personal information is registered in the address book.
The registered user is the user who knows the login user name and password.
Administrators are authenticated by means of the login user name and login
password supplied by the administrator when specifying the machines settings or accessing the machine over the network.
User Authentication
Users are authenticated by means of the login user name and login password
supplied by the user when specifying the machines settings or accessing the
machine over the network.
The users login user name and password, as well such personal information
items as telephone number and e-mail address, are stored in the machines
address book. The personal information can be obtained from the Windows
domain controller (Windows authentication), LDAP Server (LDAP authentication), or Integration Server (Integration Server Authentication) connected
to the machine via the network.
Login
This action is required for administrator authentication and user authentication. Enter your login user name and login password on the machines control
panel.
A login user name and login password may also be supplied when accessing
the machine over the network or using such utilities as Web Image Monitor
and SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Logout
This action is required with administrator and user authentication. This action
is required when you have finished using the machine or changing the settings.
Enhanced Security
Setting Up the Machine

If you want higher security, make the following setting before using the machine:
A Turn the machine on.

B Press the {User Tools} key.
C Press [System Settings].
D Press {Interface Settings}.
E Specify IP Address.
For details, see the General Settings Guide.
F Connect the machine to the network.

G Start the Web Image Monitor, and then log on to the machine as the administrator.
For details, see p.68 Login (Using Web Image Monitor).
H Install the server certificate.

For details, see p.139 Protection Using Encryption.
I Enable secure sockets layer (SSL).

5
Getting Started
J Enter the administrators user name and password.

During steps F to I, the administrators default account (user name: admin,
password: blank) in unencrypted form will be vulnerable to network interception, and this account may be used for breaking into the machine over the
network.
If you consider this risky, we recommend that you specify a temporary administrator password between steps A and F.
Reference
p.20 Registering the Administrator
Security Measures Provided by this Machine
Security Measures Provided by this

Machine
1
Using Authentication and Managing Users

Enabling Authentication
To control administrators and users access to the machine, perform administrator authentication and user authentication using login user names and
login passwords. To perform authentication, the authentication function
must be enabled.
Reference
For details, see p.16 Enabling Authentication.
Specifying Authentication Information to Log on

Users are managed using the personal information managed in the machines
address book.
By enabling user authentication, you can allow only people registered in the
address book to use the machine. Users can be managed in the address book
by the user administrator.
Reference
For details, see p.39 Specifying Authentication Information to Log on.
Specifying Which Functions are Available

This can be specified by the user administrator. Specify the functions available to registered users. By making this setting, you can limit the functions
available to users.
Reference
For details, see p.121 Specifying Which Functions are Available.

Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying (Unauthorized Copy Prevention)
Using the printer driver, you can embed mask and pattern in the printed document.
Reference
For details, see p.71 Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying.
Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying (Data Security for Copying)

Using the printer driver to enable data security for the copying function, you
can print a document with an embedded pattern of hidden text.
To gray out the copy or stored file of a copy-guarded document when the
document is copied or stored , the optional security module is required.
7
Getting Started
Reference
For details, see p.71 Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying.
Printing confidential files

Using the printers Locked Print, you can store files in the machine as confidential files and then print them. You can print a file using the machines control panel and collect it on the spot to prevent others from seeing it.
Reference
For details, see p.78 Printing a Confidential Document.
Protecting Stored Files from Unauthorized Access

You can specify who is allowed to use and access scanned files and the files
in Document Server. You can prevent activities such as the printing of stored
files by unauthorized users.
Reference
For details, see p.85 Specifying Access Permission for Stored Files.
Protecting Stored Files from Theft

You can specify who is allowed to use and access scanned files and the files
in Document Server. You can prevent such activities as the sending and
downloading of stored files by unauthorized users.
Reference
Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission

You can specify in the address book which users are allowed to send files using the Scanner.
You can also limit the direct entry of destinations to prevent files from being
sent to destinations not registered in the address book.
Reference
For details, see p.99 Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission.
Protecting Registered Information in the Address Book

You can specify who is allowed to access the data in the address book. You
can prevent the data in the address book being used by unregistered users.
To protect the data from unauthorized reading, you can also encrypt the data
in the address book.
To protect the data from unauthorized reading, you can also encrypt the data
Reference
For details, see p.102 Protecting the Address Book.
Security Measures Provided by this Machine
Managing Log Files

You can improve data security by deleting log files stored in the machine. By
transferring the log files, you can check the history data and identify unauthorized access.
To transfer the log data, the log collection server is required.
Reference
For details, see p.123 Managing Log Files.
Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk

Before disposing of the machine, make sure all data on the hard disk is deleted. Prevent data leakage by automatically deleting transmitted printer jobs
from memory.
To overwrite the hard disk data, the optional DataOverwriteSecurity unit is
required.
Reference
For details, see p.108 Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk.
Limiting and Controlling Access

Preventing Modification or Deletion of Stored Data
You can specify who is allowed to access stored scan files and files stored in
Document Server.
You can permit selected users who are allowed to access stored files to modify
or delete the files.
Reference
Preventing Modification of Machine Settings

The machine settings that can be modified depend on the type of administrator account.
Register the administrators so that users cannot change the administrator settings.
Reference
For details, see p.117 Preventing Modification of Machine Settings.
Limiting Available Functions

To prevent unauthorized operation, you can specify who is allowed to access
each of the machines functions.
Reference
For details, see p.121 Limiting Available Functions.
Getting Started

Preventing Unauthorized Access
You can limit IP addresses or disable ports to prevent unauthorized access
over the network and protect the address book, stored files, and default settings.
Reference
For details, see p.127 Preventing Unauthorized Access.
Encrypting Transmitted Passwords

Prevent login passwords, group passwords for PDF files, and IPP authentication passwords being revealed by encrypting them for transmission.
Also, encrypt the login password for administrator authentication and user
authentication.
Reference
For details, see p.134 Encrypting Transmitted Passwords.
Safer Communication Using SSL

When you access the machine using a Web Image Monitor or IPP, you can establish encrypted communication using SSL. When you access the machine
using an application such as SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can establish encrypted communication using SNMPv3 or SSL.
To protect data from interception, analysis, and tampering, you can install a
server certificate in the machine, negotiate a secure connection, and encrypt
transmitted data.
Note
To establish encrypted communication using SSL, the machine must have
the printer and scanner functions.
Reference
For details, see p.139 Protection Using Encryption.
10
2. Authentication and its

Application
Administrators and Users
When controlling access using the authentication specified by an administrator,
select the machines administrator, enable the authentication function, and then
use the machine.
The administrators manage access to the allocated functions, and users can use
only the functions they are permitted to access. To enable the authentication
function, the login user name and login password are required in order to use
the machine.
Specify administrator authentication, and then specifying user authentication.
Important
If user authentication is not possible because of a problem with the hard disk
or network, you can use the machine by accessing it using administrator authentication and disabling user authentication. Do this if, for instance, you
need to use the machine urgently.
Reference
For details, see p.37 Specifying Login User Name and Login Password.
Administrators
machine administrator, network administrator, file administrator, and user administrator.
By sharing the administrative work among different administrators, you can
spread the workload and limit unauthorized operation by a single administrator. You can also specify a supervisor who can change each administrators password. Administrators are limited to managing the machines settings and
controlling user access. so they cannot use functions such as copying and printing. To use such functions, you need to register a user in the address book and
then be authenticated as the user.
Reference
For details, see p.20 Registering the Administrator.
For details, See p.167 Operations by the Supervisor.
11
User Administrator
This is the administrator who manages personal information in the address
book.
A user administrator can register/delete users in the address book or change
users personal information.
Users registered in the address book can also change and delete their own information. If any of the users forget their password, the user administrator can
delete it and create a new one, allowing the user to access the machine again.
Machine Administrator
This is the administrator who mainly manages the machines default settings.
You can set the machine so that the default for each function can only be specified by the machine administrator. By making this setting, you can prevent
unauthorized people from changing the settings and allow the machine to be
used securely by its many users.
Network Administrator
This is the administrator who manages the network settings. You can set the
machine so that network settings such as the IP address and settings for sending and receiving e-mail can only be specified by the network administrator.
By making this setting, you can prevent unauthorized users from changing
the settings and disabling the machine, and thus ensure correct network operation.
File Administrator
This is the administrator who manages permission to access stored files. You
can specify passwords to allow only registered and permitted users to view
and edit files stored in Document Server. By making this setting, you can prevent data leaks and tampering due to unauthorized users viewing and using
the registered data.
Supervisor
The supervisor can delete an administrators password and specify a new
one. The supervisor cannot specify defaults or use normal functions. However, if any of the administrators forget their password and cannot access the
machine, the supervisor can provide support.
User
Users are managed using the personal information managed in the machines
address book.
By enabling user authentication, you can allow only people registered in the address book to use the machine. Users can be managed in the address book by the
user administrator.
12
Reference
For details about registering users in the address book, see General Settings
Guide, the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help, or the Web Image Monitor
Help.
The Management Function

The machine has an authentication function requiring a login user name and
login password. By using the authentication function, you can specify access
limits for individual users and groups of users. Using access limits, you can not
only limit the machines available functions but also protect the machine settings
and files and data stored in the machine.
Important
If you have enabled [Administrator Authentication Management], make sure not to
forget the administrator login user name and login password. If an administrator login user name or login password is forgotten, a new password must
be specified using the supervisors authority.
Be sure not to forget the supervisor login user name and login password. If
you do forget them, a service representative will to have to return the machine to its default state. This will result in all data in the machine being lost
and the service call may not be free of charge.
Reference
For details, see p.167 Operations by the Supervisor.
13
About Administrator Authentication

user administrator, machine administrator, network administrator, and file administrator.
AYJ002S
1. User Administrator
4. File Administrator
This administrator manages personal information in the address book. You can
register/delete users in the address book
or change users personal information.
This administrator manages permission

to access stored files. You can specify
passwords for the files stored in the Document Server so only authorized users
can view and change them.
2. Machine Administrator
This administrator manages the machines default settings. You can set the
machine so that the default such as data
security for copying function and delete
all logs can only be specified by the machine administrator.
3. Network Administrator
This administrator manages the network
settings. You can set the machine so that
network settings such as the IP address
and settings for sending and receiving email can only be specified by the network
administrator only.
14
5. Authentication
Administrators must enter their login
user name and password to be authenticated.
6. This machine
7. Administrators manage the machines settings and access limits.
For details about each administrator,
see p.11 Administrators.
About User Authentication

This machine has an authentication function to prevent unauthorized access.
By using login user name and login password, you can specify access limits for
individual users and groups of users.
AYJ001S
1. User
4. Authentication
A user performs normal operations on

the machine, such as copying and printing.
Using a login user name and password,

user authentication is performed.
2. Group
A group performs normal operations on
the machine, such as copying and printing.
3. Unauthorized User
5. This Machine
6. Access Limit
Using authentication, unauthorized users are prevented from accessing the machine.
7. Authorized users and groups can

use only those functions permitted
by the administrator.
15
Enabling Authentication
To control administrators and users access to the machine, perform administrator or user authentication using login user names and passwords. To perform
authentication, the authentication function must be enabled. To specify authentication, you need to register administrators.
Reference
For details, see p.20 Registering the Administrator.
Authentication Setting Procedure

Specify administrator authentication and user authentication according to the
following chart:
Note
To specify Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication, you must first specify administrator authentication.
You can specify User Code Authentication without specifying administrator
authentication.
Specifying Administrator Privileges
See p.17 Specifying Administra- See p.17 Specifying Administrator Privileges.

tor Privileges.
Registering the Administrator
See p.20 Registering the Administrator.
User Authentication
Specifying User Authentication
See p.16 Enabling Authentication.
A Authentication that requires only the machine:
User Code Authentication

See p.29 User Code Authentication.
Basic Authentication
See p.33 Basic Authentication.
B Authentication that requires external devices:
Windows Authentication
See p.42 Windows Authentication.
LDAP Authentication
See p.50 LDAP Authentication.
Integration Server Authentication
See p.56 Integration Server Authentication.
16
Administrators are handled differently from the users registered in the address
book. When registering an administrator, you cannot use a login user name already registered in the address book. Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication and Integration Server Authentication are not performed for an
administrator, so an administrator can log on even if the server is unreachable
because of a network problem.
Each administrator is identified by a login user name. One person can act as
more than one type of administrator if multiple administrator authority is granted to a single login user name.
You can specify the login user name, login password, and encryption password
for each administrator.
The encryption password is a password for performing encryption when specifying settings using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
The password registered in the machine must be entered when using applications such as SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Administrators are limited to managing the machines settings and controlling
user access. so they cannot use functions such as copying and printing. To use
such functions, you need to register a user in the address book and then be authenticated as the user.
Note
Administrator authentication can also be specified via Web Image Monitor.
For details see the Web Image Monitor Help.
Specifying Administrator Privileges

To specify administrator authentication, set Administrator Authentication Management to [On]. You can also specify whether or not to manage the items in System Settings as an administrator.
To log on as an administrator, use the default login user name and login password.
The defaults are admin for the login name and blank for the password.
Important
If you have enabled [Administrator Authentication Management], make sure not to
forget the administrator login user name and login password. If an administrator login user name or login password is forgotten, a new password must
be specified using the supervisors authority.
Reference
For details, see p.167 Operations by the Supervisor.
17
Note
For details about logging on and logging off with administrator authentication, see p.24 Logging on Using Administrator Authentication, p.26 Logging off Using Administrator Authentication.

B Press [System Settings].
C Press [Administrator Tools].
D Press [Administrator Authentication Management].
18
E Press the [User Management], [Machine Management], [Network Management], or

[File Management] key to select which settings to manage.
F Set Admin. Authentication to [On].
[Available Settings] appears.
G Select the settings to manage from Available Settings.
The selected settings will be unavailable to users.

[Available Settings] varies depending on the administrator.
For details about Available Settings, see p.117 Managing Access to the Machine
Note
To specify administrator authentication for more than one category, repeat
steps E to G.
H Press [OK].
19
Registering the Administrator

If administrator authentication has been specified, it is recommended to assign
each administrator role to a different person.
By sharing the administrative work among different administrators, you can
spread the workload and limit unauthorized operation by a single administrator.You can register up to four login user names (Administrators 1 to 4) to which
you can grant administrator privileges.
Administrator authentication can also be specified via Web Image Monitor. For
details see the Web Image Monitor Help.
Preparation
Log on using a registered administrator name and password. The administrator defaults are admin for the login name and blank for the password. For
details about logging on and logging off with administrator authentication,
see p.24 Logging on Using Administrator Authentication, p.26 Logging
off Using Administrator Authentication.
Note
You can use up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols when registering
login user names and login passwords. Keep in mind that passwords are
case-sensitive.
You cannot include spaces, semicolons (;), or quotes () in the user name nor
can you leave the user name blank.
Do not use Japanese, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, or Hangul
double-byte characters when entering the login user name or password.If you
use multi-byte characters when entering the login user name or password,
you cannot authenticate using Web Image Monitor.

20
2
D Press [Program / Change Administrator].
21
E In the line for the administrator whose authority you want to specify, press
[Administrator 1], [Administrator 2], [Administrator 3] or [Administrator 4], and then
press [Change].
If you allocate each administrators authority to a different person, the screen

appears as follows:
F Press [Change] for the login user name.
G Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].
22
H Press [Change] for the login password.
2
I Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
Follow the password policy to make the login password more secure.
For details about the password policy, see p.154 Password Policy.
J If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
K Press [Change] for the encryption password.
L Enter the encryption password, and then press [OK].
M If a password reentry screen appears, enter the encryption password, and

then press [OK].
23
N Press [OK] twice.

You will be automatically logged off.
O Press the {User Tools} key.

Logging on Using Administrator Authentication
If administrator authentication has been specified, log on using an administrators user name and password.This section describes how to log on.
Note
To log on as an administrator, enter the administrators login user name and
login password.
If you log on that a user name that has the privileges of multiple administrators, only one of those administrators' names is displayed.
If you try to log on from an operating screen, Selected function cannot
be used. appears. Press the {User Tools} key to change the default.
APG012S
B Press [Enter] next to Login User Name.
24
C Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].
2
Note
When you log on to the machine for the first time as the administrator, enter admin.
D Press [Enter] next to Login Password.
Note
If assigning the administrator for the first time, proceed to step F without
pressing [Enter].
E Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
25
F Enter [Login].
2
Authenticating... Please wait. appears, followed by the screen for
specifying the default.
Logging off Using Administrator Authentication

If administrator authentication has been specified, be sure to log off after completing settings. This section explains how to log off after completing settings.
A Press the {Login/Logout}key.
APG012S
B Press [Yes].
26
Changing the Administrator

Change the administrators login user name and login password. You can also
assign each administrators authority to the login user names Administrator 1
to Administrator 4 To combine the authorities of multiple administrators, assign multiple administrators to a single administrator.
For example, to assign machine administrator authority and user administrator
authority to [Administrator 1], press [Administrator 1] in the lines for the machine
administrator and the user administrator.
Preparation

27
2
E In the line for the administrator you want to change, press [Administrator 1],
[Administrator 2], [Administrator 3] or [Administrator 4], and then press [Change].
F Press [Change] for the setting you want to change, and re-enter the setting.
G Press [OK].
H Press [OK] twice.
You are logged off automatically.
28
User Authentication
User Authentication
There are five types of user authentication method: user code authentication, basic authentication, Windows authentication, Integration Server Authentication,
and LDAP authentication. To use user authentication, select an authentication
method on the control panel, and then make the required settings for the authentication. The settings depend on the authentication method.
Note
Under user code authentication, authentication is based on the user code. In
contrast, under basic authentication, Windows authentication, and LDAP authentication, authentication is carried out for individual users.
User authentication can also be specified via Web Image Monitor. For details
see the Web Image Monitor Help.
User Code Authentication

This is an authentication method for limiting access to functions according to the
user code. The same user code can be used by more than one user. For details
about specifying user codes, see General Settings Guide.
Limitation
To control the use of DeskTopBinder for the delivery of files stored in the machine, select Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication.
Reference
For details about specifying the user code for the printer driver, see Printer
Reference or the printer driver Help.
For details about specifying the TWAIN driver user code, see the TWAIN
driver Help.
29
Specifying User Code Authentication

This can be specified by the machine administrator.

D Press [User Authentication Management].
30
User Authentication
E Select [User Code Auth.].
2
Note
If you do not want to use user authentication management, select [Off].
F Select which of the machines functions you want to limit.
The selected settings will be unavailable to users.

For details about Limiting Available Functions see p.121 Limiting Available
Functions.
31
G Select the Printer Job Authentication level.

Note
If you select [Entire], you cannot print using a printer driver or a device that
does not support authentication. To print under an environment that does
not support authentication, select [Simple (All)].
If you select [Simple (Limitation)], you can specify clients for which printer
job authentication is not required. Specify [Parallel Interface: Simple], [USB:
Simple] and the clients IPv4 address range in which printer job authentication is not required. Specify this setting if you want to print using unauthenticated printer drivers or without any printer driver. Authentication is
required for printing with non-specified devices.
If you select [Simple (All)] or [Simple (Limitation)], you can print even with unauthenticated printer drivers or devices. Specify this setting if you want to
print with a printer driver or device that cannot be identified by the machine or if you do not require authentication for printing.However, note
that, because the machine does not require authentication in this case, it
may be used by unauthorized users.
If you select [Entire], proceed to step L.
If you select [Simple (All)] or [Simple (Limitation)], proceed to step H.
Reference
For details, see p.63 Printer Job Authentication Levels and Printer Job
Types.
H Press [Simple (Limitation)]
I Press [Change].
32
User Authentication
J Specify the range in which [Simple (Limitation)] is applied to Printer Job Authentication.
You can specify the IPv4 address range to which this setting is applied, and
whether or not to apply the setting to the parallel and USB interfaces.
K Press [Exit].
L Press [OK].
M Press [Exit].
N Press the {User Tools} key.
Basic Authentication
Specify this authentication when using the machines address book to authenticate for each user. Using basic authentication, you can not only manage the machines available functions but also limit access to stored files and to the personal
data in the address book. Under basic authentication, the administrator must
specify the functions available to each user registered in the address book.
Specifying Basic Authentication


33
2
E Select [Basic Auth.].
Note
34
User Authentication
F Select which of the machines functions you want to permit.
2
The selected settings will be available to users.
For details about Limiting Available Functions see p.121 Limiting Available
Functions.

Note
Reference
Types.
35
2
I Press [Change].
K Press [Exit].
L Press [OK].
M Press [Exit].
36
User Authentication
Authentication Information Stored in the Address Book

This can be specified by the user administrator.
If you have specified [User Authentication], you can specify access limits for individual users and groups of users. Specify the setting in the address book for each
user.
User authentication can also be specified via SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or
Web Image Monitor.
Preparation
You need to register a user in the address book. For details about the address
book, see General Settings Guide.
See p.121 Limiting Available Functions.
Specifying Login User Name and Login Password

In [User Authentication Management], specify the login user name and password.

D Press [Address Book Management].
37
E Select the user or group.
2
G Press [Change] for [Login User Name].
H Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].

I Press [Change] for [Login Password].
38
User Authentication
J Enter a login password, and then press [OK].

K If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
L Press [OK].
M Press [Exit] twice.
Specifying Authentication Information to Log on

The login user name and password specified in [User Authentication Management]
can be used as the login information for SMTP Authentication, Folder Authentication, and LDAP Authentication.
For details about specifying login user name and login password, see p.37 Specifying Login User Name and Login Password.
If you do not want to use the login user name and password specified in [User
Authentication Management] for SMTP Authentication, Folder Authentication,
or LDAP Authentication, see General Settings Guide.

39
2
If the setting to be specified does not appear, press [TNext] to scroll down to
other settings.
G Specify the login user name and password.
40
User Authentication
H Select [Use Auth. Info at Login] in SMTP Authentication.
2
other settings.
Limitation
When using [Use Auth. Info at Login] for SMTP Authentication, Folder
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication, a user name other than other , admin , supervisor or HIDE*** must be specified. The symbol
*** represents any character.
To use [Use Auth. Info at Login] for SMTP authentication, a login password
up to 128 characters in length must be specified.
Note
For folder authentication, select [Use Auth. Info at Login] in Folder Authentication.
For LDAP authentication, select [Use Auth. Info at Login] in LDAP Authentication.
I Press [OK].
J Press [Exit].
K Press the {User Tools} key.
41
Windows Authentication
Specify this authentication when using the Windows domain controller to authenticate users who have their accounts on the directory server. Users cannot
be authenticated if they do not have their accounts in the directory server. Under
Windows authentication, you can specify the access limit for each group registered in the directory server. The address book stored in the directory server can
be registered to the machine, enabling user authentication without first using the
machine to register individual settings in the address book. If you can obtain
user information, the senders address (From:) is fixed to prevent unauthorized
access when sending e-mails under the scanner function.
Important
During Windows Authentication, data registered in the directory server, such
as the users e-mail address, is automatically registered in the machine. If user
information on the server is changed, information registered in the machine
may be overwritten when authentication is performed.
Operational Requirements for Windows Authentication

To specify Windows authentication, the following requirements must be
met:
The Printer/Scanner unit must be installed.
A domain controller has been set up in a designated domain.
This function is supported by the operating systems listed below. NTLM
authentication is used for Windows authentication. To obtain user information when running Active Directory, use LDAP. If SSL is being used,
this requires a version of Windows that supports TLS v1, SSL v2, or SSL v3.
Windows NT 4.0 Server
Windows 2000 Server
Windows Server 2003
Limitation
Users managed in other domains are subject to user authentication, but they
cannot obtain items such as e-mail addresses.
If you have created a new user in the domain controller and selected [User
must change password at next logon], log on to the machine from the computer
to change the password before logging on from the machines control panel.
42
Note
The first time you access the machine, you can use the functions available to
your group. If you are not registered in a group, you can use the functions
available under [*Default Group]. To limit which functions are available to
which users, first make settings in advance in the address book.
When accessing the machine subsequently, you can use all the functions
available to your group and to you as an individual user.
Enter the login password correctly, keeping in mind that it is case-sensitive.
User Authentication
Users who are registered in multiple groups can use all the functions available to those groups.
If you specify in the address book which functions are available to global
group members, those settings have priority.
A user registered in two or more global groups can use all the functions available to members of those groups.
If the Guest account on the Windows server is enabled, even users not registered in the domain controller can be authenticated. When this account is
enabled, users are registered in the address book and can use the functions
available under [*Default Group].
Specifying Windows Authentication

Note
Under Windows Authentication, you can select whether or not to use secure
sockets layer (SSL) authentication.
To automatically register user information such as e-mail addresses under
Windows authentication, it is recommended that communication between
the machine and domain controller be encrypted using SSL.
Under Windows Authentication, you do not have to create a server certificate
unless you want to automatically register user information such as e-mail addresses using SSL.

43
2
E Select [Windows Auth.].
Note
44
User Authentication
F Press [Change] for Domain Name, enter the name of the domain controller
to be authenticated, and then press [OK].
Note
Reference
Types.
45
2
I Press [Change].
K Press [Exit].
46
User Authentication
L Press [On] for SSL.
2
If you do not use secure sockets layer (SSL) for authentication, press [Off].
If global groups have been registered under Windows server, you can limit
the use of functions for each global group.
You need to create global groups in the Windows server in advance and register in each group the users to be authenticated.
You also need to register in the machine the functions available to the global
group members.
Create global groups in the machine by entering the names of the global
groups registered in the Windows Server. (Keep in mind that group names
are case sensitive.) Then specify the machine functions available to each
group.
If global groups are not specified, users can use the available functions specified in [*Default Group]. If global groups are specified, users not registered in
global groups can use the available functions specified in [*Default Group]. By
default, all functions are available to [*Default Group] members. Specify the
limitation on available functions according to user needs.
M Under Group, press [Program / Change], and then press [*Not Programmed].
other settings.
47
N Under Group Name, press [Change], and then enter the group name.
2
O Press [OK].
P Select which of the machines functions you want to permit.
For details about limiting available functions, see p.121 Limiting Available
Functions.
Q Press [OK] twice.

R Press the {User Tools} key.
48
User Authentication
-Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) and Certificate services

Specify this setting if you want the machine to automatically obtain e-mail addresses registered in Active Directory.
We recommended you install Internet Information Services (IIS) and Certificate
services as the Windows components.
Install the components, and then create the server certificate.
If they are not installed, install them as follows:
A Select [Add/Remove Programs] on the [Control Panel].
B Select [Add/Remove Windows Components].
C Select the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] check box.
D Select the [Certificate Services] check box, and then click [Next].
E Installation of the selected Windows components starts, and a warning message appears.
F Click [Yes].
G Click [Next].
H Select the Certificate Authority, and then click [Next].
On the displayed screen, [Enterprise root CA] is selected.
I Enter the Certificate Authority name (optional) in [CA Identifying Information],
and then click [Next].
J Leave [Data Storage Location] at its default, and then click [Next].
-Creating the Server Certificate

After installing Internet Information Services (IIS) and Certificate services Windows components, create the Server Certificate as follows:
A Start [Internet Services Manager].
B Right-click [Default Web Site], and then click [Properties].
C On the [Directory Security] tab, click [Server Certificate].
Web Server Certificate Wizard starts.
D Click [Next].
E Select [Create a new certificate], and then click [Next].
F Select [Prepare the request now, but send it later], and then click [Next].
G Enter the required information according to the instructions given by Web
Server Certificate Wizard.
H Check the specified data, which appears as Request File Summary, and then
click [Next].
The server certificate is created.
49
LDAP Authentication
Specify this authentication when using the LDAP server to authenticate users
who have their accounts on the LDAP server. Users cannot be authenticated if
they do not have their accounts on the LDAP server. The address book stored in
the LDAP server can be registered to the machine, enabling user authentication
without first using the machine to register individual settings in the address
book.When using LDAP Authentication, to prevent the password information
being sent over the network unencrypted, it is recommended that communication between the machine and LDAP server be encrypted using SSL. You can
specify on the LDAP server whether or not to enable SSL. To enable this, you
must create a server certificate for the LDAP server.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can specify whether or not to check the reliability of the SSL server being connected to.
Important
During LDAP Authentication, the data registered in the LDAP server, such as
the users e-mail address, is automatically registered in the machine. If user
information on the server is changed, information registered in the machine
may be overwritten when authentication is performed.
Operational Requirements for LDAP Authentication

To specify LDAP authentication, the following requirements must be met:
The Printer/Scanner unit must be installed.
The network configuration must allow the machine to detect the presence
of the LDAP server.
When SSL is being used, TLSv1, SSLv2, or SSLv3 can function on the LDAP
server.
The LDAP server must be registered in the machine.
For details about registration, see Network Guide.
Limitation
Under LDAP authentication, you cannot specify access limits for groups registered in the LDAP Server.
When using LDAP Authentication, you cannot use reference functions in
LDAP Search for servers using SSL.
Enter the users login user name using up to 32 characters and login password
using up to 128 characters.
Do not use double-byte Japanese, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, or
Hangul characters when entering the login user name or password. If you use
double-byte characters , you cannot authenticate using Web Image Monitor.
50
User Authentication
Note
Under LDAP Authentication, if Anonymous Authentication in the LDAP
servers settings is not set to Prohibit, users who do not have an LDAP server account might still be able to gain access.
If the LDAP server is configured using Windows Active Directory, Anonymous Authentication might be available. If Windows Authentication is available, we recommend you use it.
The first time an unregistered user accesses the machine after LDAP authentication has been specified, the user is registered in the machine and can use
the functions available under [Available Functions] during LDAP Authentication.
To limit the available functions for each user, register each user and corresponding [Available Functions] setting in the address book, or specify [Available
Functions] for each registered user. The [Available Functions] setting becomes effective when the user accesses the machine subsequently.
Specifying LDAP Authentication


51
2
E Select [LDAP Auth.].
Note
F Select the LDAP server to be used for LDAP authentication.
52
User Authentication

Note
Reference
Types.
53
I Press [Change].
2
K Press [Exit].
L Select which of the machines functions you want to permit.

For details about limiting available functions, see p.121 Limiting Available
Functions.
54
User Authentication
M Press [Change] for Login Name Attribute.
2
N Enter the login name attribute , and then press [OK].
Note
You can use the Login Name Attribute as a search criterion to obtain information about an authenticated user. You can create a search filter based on
the Login Name Attribute, select a user, and then retrieve the user information from the LDAP server so it is transferred to the machines address
book. The method for selecting the user name depends on the server environment. Check the server environment and enter the user name accordingly.
O Press [Change] for Unique attribute.
55
P Enter the unique attribute and then press [OK].
2
Note
Specify Unique Attribute on the machine to match the user information in
the LDAP server with that in the machine. By doing this, if the Unique Attribute of a user registered in the LDAP server matches that of a user registered in the machine, the two instances are treated as referring to the
same user.You can enter an attribute such as serialNumber or uid. Additionally, you can enter cn or employeeNumber, provided it is
unique. If you do not specify the Unique Attribute, an account with the
same user information but with a different login user name will be created
in the machine.
Q Press [OK].
R Press the {User Tools} key.
Integration Server Authentication
To use Integration Server Authentication, you need a server on which ScanRouter software that supports authentication is installed.
For external authentication, the Integration Server Authentication collectively
authenticates users accessing the server over the network, providing a server-independent centralized user authentication system that is safe and convenient.
For example, if the delivery server and the machine share the same Integration
Server Authentication, single sign-on is possible using DeskTopBinder.
To use [Integration Server Authentication], the machine must have access to a server
on which Ridoc Document System software and [Authentication Manager] are installed.
For details about the software, contact your local dealer.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can specify whether or not to check the reliability of the SSL server being connected to.
56
User Authentication
Important
During Integration Server Authentication, the data registered in the server,
such as the users e-mail address, is automatically registered in the machine.
If user information on the server is changed, information registered in the machine may be overwritten when authentication is performed.
Note
The built-in default administrator name is Admin on the Server and admin on the machine.
Specifying Integration Server Authentication

This section explains how to specify the machine settings.
For details, see the Authentication Manager manual.

57
2
E Select [Integration Server Authentication].
Note
If you do not wish to use User Authentication Management, select [Off].
F Press [Change] for Server Name.
Specify the name of the server for external authentication.
58
User Authentication
G Enter the server name, and then press [OK].
2
Enter the IPv4 address or host name.
H In Authentication Type, select the authentication system for external authentication.
Select an available authentication system.
I Press [Change] for Domain Name.
J Enter the domain name, and then press [OK].

Note
You cannot specify a domain name under an authentication system that
does not support domain login.
59
K Press [Obtain URL].
2
The machine obtains the URL of the server specified in [Server Name].
other settings.
If [Server Name] or the setting for enabling SSL is changed after obtaining the
URL, the URL is Not Obtained.
L Press [OK]
If you set Authentication Type to Windows, you can use the global
group. If you set Authentication Type to Notes, you can use the Notes
group. If you set Authentication Type to Basic (Integration Server), you
can use the groups created using the Authentication Manager.
M Select the Printer Job Authentication level.
60
User Authentication
Note
If you select [Entire], proceed to step R.
If you select [Simple (All)] or [Simple (Limitation)], proceed to step N.
Reference
Types.
N Press [Simple (Limitation)]
O Press [Change].
61
P Specify the range in which [Simple (Limitation)] is applied to Printer Job Authentication.
Q Press [Exit].
R Press [On] for SSL and then press [OK].
To not use secure sockets layer (SSL) for authentication, press [Off].
S Press the {User Tools} key.
62
User Authentication
Printer Job Authentication Levels and Printer Job Types

This section explains the relationship between printer job authentication levels and printer job types.
Depending on the combination of printer job authentication level and printer
job type, the machine may not print properly. Set an appropriate combination
according to the operating environment.
User authentication is supported by the RPCS and PCL printer drivers.
Machine Settings (displayed on the control panel)
[User Authentication
Management]
[Printer Job Authentication]
[Restrict Use of
A
Simple Encryption]
[Off]
[User Code Auth.],[Basic Auth.], [Windows

Auth.],[LDAP Auth.],
[Integration Server Authentication]
[Simple (All)]
[Off]
[Entire]
[Off]
[On]
[On]
Printer Job Types
: Printing is possible regardless of user authentication.

: Printing is possible if user authentication is successful. If user authentication fails, the print job is reset.
$: Printing is possible if user authentication is successful and [Driver Encryption Key] for the printer driver and machine match.
: Printing is not possible regardless of user authentication, and the print job
is reset.
Reference
For details about [Restrict Use of Simple Encryption], see p.149 Changing the
Extended Security Functions.
[Printer Job Authentication]

[Entire]
The machine authenticates all printer jobs and remote settings, and cancels
jobs and settings that fail authentication.
Printer Jobs: Job Reset
Settings: Disabled
[Simple (All)]
The machine authenticates printer jobs and remote settings that have authentication information, and cancels the jobs and settings that fail authentication.
Printer jobs and settings without authentication information are performed without being authenticated.
[Simple (Limitation)].
You can specify the range to apply [Simple (Limitation)] to by specifying [Parallel Interface: Simple], [USB: Simple], and the clients IPv4 address.
63
Printer Job Types

A In the RPCS printer driver dialog box, the [Confirm authentication information
when printing] and [Encrypt] check boxes are selected.
In the PCL printer driver dialog box, the [User Authentication] and [With Encryption] check boxes are selected.
Personal authentication information is added to the printer job.
The printer driver applies advanced encryption to the login passwords.
The printer driver encryption key, enables the driver encryption to prevent
the login password being stolen.
B In the RPCS printer driver dialog box, the [Confirm authentication information
when printing] check box is selected.
In the PCL printer driver dialog box, the [User Authentication] and [With Encryption] check boxes are selected.
Personal authentication information is added to the printer job.
The printer driver applies simple encryption to login passwords.
C In the RPCS printer driver dialog box, the [Confirm authentication information
when printing] check box is not selected.
In the PCL printer driver dialog box, the [User Authentication] check box is
not selected.
Personal authentication information is added to the printer job and is disabled.
D When using the PostScript 3 printer driver, the printer job contains user
code information.
Personal authentication information is not added to the printer job but the
user code information is.
64
Note
This type also applies to recovery/parallel printing using an RPCS/PCL
printer driver that does not support authentication.
When using the PostScript 3 printer driver, the printer job does not contain
user code information.
Neither personal authentication information nor user code information is
added to the printer job.
Note
Type 5 also applies to recovery/parallel printing using an RPCS/PCL
printer driver that does not support authentication.
A printer job or PDF file is sent from a host computer without a printer
driver and is printed via LPR.
Personal authentication information is not added to the printer job.
A PDF file is printed via ftp.
Personal authentication is performed using the user ID and password used
for logging on via ftp. However, the user ID and password are not encrypted.
If User Authentication is Specified

When user authentication (User Code Authentication, Basic Authentication,
Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication) is set, the authentication screen is displayed. Unless a valid user name
and password are entered, operations are not possible with the machine. Log on
to operate the machine, and log off when you are finished operations. Be sure to
log off to prevent unauthorized users from using the machine.When auto logout
timer is specified, the machine automatically logs you off if you do not use the
control panel within a given time. Additionally, you can authenticate using an
external device. For details, see p.70 Authentication using an external device.
Note
Consult the User Administrator about your login user name, password, and
user code.
For user code authentication, enter a number registered in the address book
as [User Code].
User Code Authentication (Using the Control Panel)

When user authentication is set, the following screen appears.
Enter a user code (up to eight digits), and then press the [OK] key.
Note
To log off, do one of the following:
Press the Operation switch.
Press the {User Tools} key, press [System Settings], and then press the {User
Tools} key again.
Press the {Energy Saver} key after jobs are completed.
User Code Authentication (Using a Printer Driver)

When user authentication is set, specify the user code in the printer properties
of a printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
65
Login (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log on when Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set.
A Press [Enter] for [Login User Name].
B Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].
C Press [Enter] for [Login Password].
66
D Enter a login password, and then press [OK].
2
E Press [Login].
When the user is authenticated, the screen for the function you are using appears.
Log Off (Using the Control Panel)

Follow the procedure below to log off when Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
APG012S
B Press [Yes].
67
Login (Using a Printer Driver)

When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication
is set, make encryption settings in the printer properties of a printer driver, and
then specify a login user name and password. For details, see the printer driver
Help.
Note
When logged on using a printer driver, logging off is not required.
Login (Using Web Image Monitor)

This section explains how to log onto the machine via Web Image Monitor.
A Click [Login].
B Enter a login user name and password, and then click [Login].
Note
For user code authentication, enter a user code in [User Name], and then
click [OK].
The procedure may differ depending on the Web Image Monitor used.
Log Off (Using Web Image Monitor)
A Click [Logout] to log off.

Note
Delete the cache memory in the Web Image Monitor after logging off.
68
Auto Logout
When using user authentication management, the machine automatically logs
you off if you do not use the control panel within a given time. This feature is
called Auto Logout. Specify how long the machine is to wait before performing Auto Logout.

C Press [Timer Settings].
D Press [Auto Logout Timer].
other settings.
69
E Select [On].
2
Note
If you do not want to specify [Auto Logout Timer], select [Off].
F Enter 60 to 999 (seconds) using the number keys, and then press [q].
G Press the {User Tools} key.

Authentication using an external device
If you authenticate using an external device, see the Kit manual.
For details, contact your local dealer.
70
3. Preventing Information Leaks

Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying
Using the printer driver, you can embed a pattern in the printed copy to discourage or prevent unauthorized copying.
If you enable data security for copying on the machine, printed copies of a document with data security for copying are grayed out to prevent unauthorized
copying.
Make the setting as follows:
Unauthorized Copy Prevention

A Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for unauthorized copy
prevention.
See p.75 Specifying Printer Settings for Unauthorized Copy Prevention
(Printer Driver Setting).
A Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for data security for
copying.
See p.76 Specifying Printer Settings for Data security for copying (Printer
Driver Setting).
B Specifying data security for copying on the machine. Printed copies of a
document with data security for copying are grayed out.
See p.76 Specifying Data Security for Copying (Machine Setting).
71
Unauthorized Copy Prevention

Using the printer driver, you can embed mask and pattern (for instance, a warning such as No Copying) in the printed document.
If the document is copied, scanned, or stored in a Document Server by a copier
or multifunction printer, the embedded pattern appears clearly on the copy, discouraging unauthorized copying.
AKB001S
1. Printed Documents
Using the printer driver, you can embed
background images and pattern in a
printed document for Unauthorized
Copy Prevention.
2. The document is copied, scanned,

or stored in the Document Server.
3. Printed Copies
Embedded pattern (for instance, a warning such as No Copying) in a printed
document appears conspicuously in
printed copies.
Important
Unauthorized copy prevention discourages unauthorized copying, and will
not necessarily stop information leaks.
The embedded pattern is not assured to be copied, scanned, or stored properly in the Document Server.
Limitation
Depending on the machine and scanner settings, the embedded pattern may
not be copied ,scanned, or stored in the Document Server.
Note
To make the embedded pattern clear, set the character size to at least 50 pt
(preferably 70 to 80 pt) and character angle to between 30 and 40 degrees.
Reference
To use the printer function under the User Authentication, you must enter the
login user name and password for the printer driver.
For details see the printer driver Help.
72

Using the printer driver to enable data security for the copying function, you can
print a document with an embedded pattern of hidden text. Such a document is
called a data security for copying document.
If a data security for copying document is copied or stored in the Document
Server using a copier or multi-function printer with the Copy Data Security Unit,
protected pages are grayed out in the copy, preventing confidential information
being copied. Also if a document with embedded pattern is detected, the machine beeps. The unauthorized copy log is also stored. To gray out copies of data
security for copying documents when they are copied or stored in the Document
Server, the optional Copy Data Security Unit must be installed in the machine.
AKB002S
1. Documents with data security for

copying
2. The document is copied or stored
3. Printed Copies
Text and images in the document are
grayed out in printed copies.
in the Document Server.

Limitation
If the Copy Data Security Unit is installed in the machine, you cannot use the
scanner.
If the Copy Data Security Unit is installed, you cannot specify a scaling factor
less than 50% using the Control Panel under the Copier and Document Server
functions.
If a document with embedded pattern for data security for copying is copied,
or stored in the Document Server by a copier or multi-function printer without
Copy Data Security Unit, the embedded pattern appears conspicuously in the
copy. However, how conspicuously the text appears depends on the model of
the copier or multi-function printer being used and its scanning setting.
73
Note
You can also embed pattern in a document protected by data security for copying. However, if such a document is copied or stored in the Document Server using a copier or multi-function printer with the Copy Data Security Unit,
the copy is grayed out, so the embedded pattern does not appear on the copy.
If misdetection occurs, contact your service representative.
If a document with embedded pattern for data security for copying is copied,
scanned, or stored in the Document Server using a copier or multi-function
printer without the Copy Data Security Unit, the embedded pattern appears
clearly on the copy.
If the scanned data security for copying document is registered as a user
stamp, the machine does not beep, the file registered as a user stamp is grayed
out, and no entry is added to the unauthorized copying log.
Printing Limitations
The following is a list of limitations on printing with unauthorized copy prevention and data security for copying.
Unauthorized copy prevention / Data security for copying
Limitation
You can print using the only RPCS printer driver.
You cannot print at 200 dpi resolution.

You cannot partially embed pattern in the printed document.
You can only embed pattern that is entered in the [Text] box of the printer
driver.
Printing with embedding takes longer than normal printing.
Data security for copying Only

Limitation
Select 7.2 10.1 inches or larger as the paper size.
Select Plain or Recycled with a brightness of 70% or more as the paper type.
If you select Duplex, the data security for copying function may not work
properly due to printing on the back of sheets.
74
Notice
1.The supplier does not guarantee that unauthorized copy prevention and data
security for copying will always work. Depending on the paper, the model of
copier or multi-function printer, and the copier or printer settings, unauthorized
copy prevention and data security for copying may not work properly.
2.The supplier is not liable for any damage caused by using or not being able to
use unauthorized copy prevention and data security for copying.
Printing with Unauthorized Copy Prevention and Data Security

for Copying
Specifying Printer Settings for Unauthorized Copy Prevention (Printer Driver Setting)
Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for unauthorized copy prevention.
For details about specifying data security for copying using the printer driver,
see the printer driver Help.
A Open the printer driver dialog box.

B On the [Edit] tab, select the [Unauthorized copy...] check box.
C Click [Control Settings...].
D In the [Text] box in the [Unauthorized copy prevention: Pattern] group, enter the
text to be embedded in the printed document.
Also, specify [Font], [Font style:], and [Size].
E Click [OK].
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
75
Specifying Printer Settings for Data security for copying (Printer Driver Setting)
If a document printed using this function is copied or stored in the Document
Server by a copier or multi-function printer, the copy is grayed out.
Using the printer driver, specify the printer settings for data security for copying.
For details about data security for copying, see p.73 Data Security for Copying.
For details about specifying data security for copying using the printer driver,
see the printer driver Help.

B On the [Edit] tab, select the [Unauthorized copy...] check box.
C Click [Control Settings...].
D In the [Unauthorized copy prevention: Pattern] group, check the [Data security for
copying].
E Click [OK].
Reference
Specifying Data Security for Copying (Machine Setting)

To use this function, the Copy Data Security Unit must be installed.
If a document printed is copied or stored in the Document Server, the copy is
grayed out.
For details about data security for copying, see p.73 Data Security for Copying.
Preparation
Limitation
If a document that is not copy-guarded is copied or stored, the copy or stored
file is not grayed out.
A Press the {User Tools}key.

76
D Press [Data security for copying].

If the setting you want to specify does not appear, press [TNext] to scroll
down to other settings.
E Press[On].
If you do not want to specify [Data security for copying], select [Off].
F Press[OK].
G Press [Exit].
77
Printing a Confidential Document

To use this function, Printer/Scanner unit must be installed.
Depending on the location of the machine, it is difficult to prevent unauthorized
persons from viewing prints lying in the machines output trays. When printing
confidential documents, use the Locked Print function.
Locked Print
Using the printers Locked Print function, store files in the machine as Locked
Print files and then print them from the control panel and retrieve them immediately, preventing others from viewing them.
Note
To store files temporarily, select [Stored Print] under the printer driver. If you
select [Share stored print files], also, you can share these files.
Choosing a Locked Print file

Using the printer driver, specify a Locked Print file.
If user authentication has been enabled, you must enter the login user name and
login password using the printer driver. For details see the printer driver Help.
You can perform Locked Print even if user authentication is not enabled. For details see Printer Reference.

B Set [Job type:] to [Locked Print].
C Click [Details...].
D Enter the user ID and password.
Note
The password entered here let you use the Locked Print function.
To print a Locked Print file, enter the same password on the control panel.
Limitation
Enter the user ID using up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
Enter the password using 4 to 8 numbers.
E Click [OK].
78
F Confirm the password by re-entering it.

G Click [OK].
H Perform Locked Print.
Reference
Printing a Locked Print File

Print Locked Print files using the control panel.
Consult your administrator if you have forgotten your password.
This can also be specified via Web Image Monitor.
Preparation
For details about logging on and logging off with user authentication, see p.66
Login (Using the Control Panel), p.67 Log Off (Using the Control Panel).
A Press the {Printer} key.

B Press [Print Jobs].
C Press [Locked Print Job List].
Only Locked Print files belonging to the user who has logged on appear.
D Select the Locked Print file to print.
79
E Press [Print].
F Enter the password for the stored file, and then press [OK].
Note
Enter the password specified in step D on p.78 Choosing a Locked Print
file.
G Press [Yes].
Deleting Locked Print Files
This can be specified by the file creator (owner).
To delete Locked Print files, you must enter the password for the files. If the
password has been forgotten, ask the file administrator to change the password.
Note
Locked Print files can also be deleted by the file administrator.
80
D Select the file.

E Press [Delete].
F Enter the password of the Locked Print file, and then press [OK].
G Press [Yes].
81
Changing Passwords of Locked Print Files

This can be specified by the file creator (owner) or file administrator.
If the password has been forgotten, the file administrator change the password.
A Press the {Printer}key.


D Select the file.
E Press [Change Password].
82
F Enter the password for the stored file, and then press [OK].
The machine administrator does not need to enter the password.
G Enter the new password for the stored file, and then press [OK].
H If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
83
Unlocking Locked Print Files

If you specify Enhance File Protection, the file will be locked and become inaccessible if an invalid password is entered ten times. This section explains how
to unlock files.
Only the file administrator can unlock files.
For details about Enhance File Protection, see p.149 Changing the Extended
Security Functions.

D Select the file.

E Press [Unlock File].
F Press [Yes].
84
Specifying Access Permission for Stored Files
Specifying Access Permission for Stored

Files
You can specify who is allowed to access stored scan files and files stored in the
Document Server.
This can prevent activities such as printing or sending of stored files by unauthorized users.
You can also specify which users can change or delete stored files.
Access Permission
To limit the use of stored files, you can specify four types of access permission.
Read-only
In addition to checking the content of and information about stored files, you can also
print and send the files.
Edit
You can change the print settings for stored

files. This includes permission to view files.
Edit / Delete
You can delete stored files.

This includes permission to view and edit
files.
Full Control
You can specify the user and access permission.This includes permission to view, edit,
and edit / delete files.
Note
Files can be stored by any user who is allowed to use the Document Server,
copy function, or scanner function.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the content of stored files. For
details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
The default access permission for the file creator (owner) is Read-only.
You can also specify the access permission.
Password for Stored Files

Passwords for stored files can be specified by the file creator (owner) or file
administrator.
You can obtain greater protection against the unauthorized use of files.
85
Assigning Users and Access Permission for Stored Files

Specify the users and their access permissions for each stored file.
By making this setting, only users granted access permission can access stored
files.
Preparation
Important
If files become inaccessible, reset their access permission as the file creator
(owner). This can also be done by the file administrator. If you want to access
a file but do not have access permission, ask the file creator (owner).
A Press the {Document Server} key.

B Select the file.
C Press [Edit File].
86
D Press [Change Access Priv.].
E Press [Program/Change/Delete].
F Press [New Program].
87
G Select the users or groups you want to assign permission to.

You can select more than one users.
By pressing [All Users], you can select all the users.
3
H Press [Exit].
I Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then
select the permission.
Select the access permission from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
J Press [Exit].
K Press [OK].
88
Specifying Access Privileges for Files Stored using the Scanner

Function
If user authentication is set for the scanner function, you can specify access privileges for made using these functions when storing them in the Document Server. You can also change the access privileges for the file.
Specifying Access Privileges When Storing Files

This section explains how to specify the access privileges and then store a file in
the Document Server under the scanner function.
A Press [Store File].
B Press [Access Privileges].
C Press [New Program].
89
D Select the users or groups you want to assign permission to. You can select
more than one users.
E Press [Exit].
Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then select the permission.
F Press [Exit].
G Press [OK].
H Store files in the Document Server.
Changing Access Privileges for Previously Stored Files

This section explains the authentication process for accessing a file stored in the
Document Server under the scanner function.
A Press [Select Stored File].
B Select the file.

C Press[Manage/Delete File].
90
D Press [Change Access Priv.].
E Press [Change Access Priv.].

F Press [Program/Change/Delete].
G Press [New Program].
H Select the users or groups you want to assign permission to.
I Press [Exit].
Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then select the permission.
J Press [Exit].
K Press [OK].
91
Assigning the User and the Access Permission for the Users
Stored Files
This can be specified by the file creator (owner) or user administrator.
Specify the users and their access permission to files stored by a particular user.
Only those users granted access permission can access stored files.
This makes the management of access permission easier than it is when permission is specified for each stored file.
Preparation
Important
If files become inaccessible, be sure to enable the user administrator, and then
reset the access permission for the files in question.

92
93
G Under Protect File(s), press [Program/Change/Delete] for Permissions for

Users/Groups.
3
other settings.
H Press [New Program].
I Select the users or groups to register.

J Press [Exit].
94
K Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then
3
L Press [Exit].
M Press [OK].
N Press [Exit].
Specifying Passwords for the Stored Files
Specify passwords for the stored files.
Provides increased protection against unauthorized use of files.
Preparation

B Select the file.
95
D Press [Change Password].
E Enter the password using the number keys.
You can use 4 to 8 numbers as the password for the stored file.
F Press [OK].
G Confirm the password by re-entering it using the number keys.
H Press [OK].
I Press [OK].
96
Unlocking Files
If you specify Enhance File Protection, the file will be locked and become inaccessible if an invalid password is entered ten times. This section explains how
to unlock files.
Only the file administrator can unlock files.
For details about Enhance File Protection, see p.149 Changing the Extended
Security Functions.
Preparation

B Select the file.
97
D Press [Unlock Files].
E Press [Yes].
F Press [OK].
98
Preventing Data Leaks Due to

Unauthorized Transmission
If user authentication is specified, the user who has logged on will be designated
as the sender to prevent data from being sent by an unauthorized person masquerading as the user.
You can also limit the direct entry of destinations to prevent files from being sent
to destinations not registered in the address book.
Restrictions on Destinations
Make the setting to disable the direct entry of e-mail addresses and phone numbers under the scanner function.
By making this setting, the destinations can be restricted to addresses registered
If you set [Restrict Use of Destinations] to [On], you can prohibit users from directly
entering telephone numbers, e-mail addresses, or Folder Path in order to send
files. If you set [Restrict Use of Destinations] to [Off], [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] appears. In [Restrict Adding of User Destinations], you can restrict users from
registering data in the address book.
If you set [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] to [Off], users can directly enter destination telephone numbers, e-mail addresses, and Folder Path in [ProgDest] on
the scanner screen. If you set [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] to [On], users can
specify destinations directly, but cannot use [ProgDest] to register data in the address book. When this setting is made, only the user administrator can change
the address book.
For details, see p.149 Changing the Extended Security Functions.
Preparation
99
D Press [Extended Security].
E Press [On] for Restrict Use of Destinations.
100
F Press [OK].
Reference
This can also be specified using Web Image Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details, see the Help for each application.
101
Protecting the Address Book

If user authentication is specified, the user who has logged on will be designated
as the sender to prevent data from being sent by an unauthorized person masquerading as the user.
To protect the data from unauthorized reading, you can also encrypt the data in
the address book.
Address Book Access Permission
This can be specified by the registered user. The access permission can also be
specified by a user granted full control or the user administrator.
You can specify who is allowed to access the data in the address book.
By making this setting, you can prevent the data in the address book being used
by unregistered users.
Preparation

102
G Under Protect Destination, press [Program/Change/Delete] for Permissions

for Users/Groups.
103
H Press [New Program].
I Select the users or groups to register.

J Press [Exit].
K Select the user who you want to assign an access permission to, and then
Select the permission, from [Read-only], [Edit], [Edit / Delete], or [Full Control].
104
L Press [Exit].
M Press [OK].
N Press [Exit].
Encrypting the Data in the Address Book

Encrypt the data in the address book.
Reference
See p.149 Changing the Extended Security Functions.
Preparation
Note
If you register additional users after encrypting the data in the address book,
those users are also encrypted.

105
E Press [On] for Encrypt Address Book.
F Press [Change] for [Encryption Key].
G Enter the encryption key, and then press [OK].

Enter the encryption key using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
H Press [Encrypt / Decrypt].
106
I Press [Yes].
Do not switch the main power off during encryption, as doing so may corrupt
the data.
Encrypting the data in the address book may take a long time.
The time it takes to encrypt the data in the address book depends on the
number of registered users.
The machine cannot be used during encryption.
Normally, once encryption is complete, [Exit] appears.
If you press [Stop] during encryption, the data is not encrypted.
If you press [Stop] during decryption, the data stays encrypted.
J Press [Exit].
K Press [OK].
107
Deleting Data on the Hard Disk

A
Hard Disk
The machines hard disk lets you store data under the copy, printer, scanner,
and document server functions, as well as the address book and counters
stored under each user code.
Data Not Overwritten in the Hard Disk
The machines memory lets you store network TWAIN scanner. Even if you
delete the data on the hard disk, this data remains intact.
Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk

To use this function, the optional DataOverwriteSecurity unit must be installed.
To prevent data on the hard disk being leaked before disposing of the machine,
you can overwrite all data stored on the hard disk. You can also automatically
overwrite temporarily-stored data.
Note
Depending on the hard disk capacity and the method of erasing the data, this
action may take a few hours. Once you start the Erase All Memory function,
no other machine operation is possible until the function completes or you
quit the function.

To erase selected data on the hard disk, specify [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
Erase All Memory
To erase all the data on the hard disk, using [Erase All Memory].
Methods of Erasing the Data
You can select the method of erasing the data from the following:
The default is NSA.
NSA *1
Overwrites the data on the hard disk twice

with random numbers and once with zeros.
DoD *2
Overwrites the data with a number, its complement, and random numbers, and then
checks the result.
Random Numbers
Overwrites the data with random numbers

the specified number of times.
You can specify between 1 and 9 as the
number of times the data is overwritten with
random numbers. The default is 3 times.
*1
*2
108
National Security Agency

Department of Defense
Reference
For details, see the manual supplied with the DataOverwriteSecurity unit.

A document scanned in Copier, or Scanner mode, or print data sent from a printer driver is temporarily stored on the machine's hard disk.
Even after the job is completed, it remains in the hard disk as temporary data.
Auto Erase Memory erases the temporary data on the hard disk by writing over
it.
Overwriting starts automatically once the job is completed.
The Copier, and Printer functions take priority over the Auto Erase Memory
function. If a copy, or print job is in progress, overwriting will only be done after
the job is completed.
Preparation

109
D Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
other settings.
E Press [On], and then select the method of erasing the data.
Select the method of erasing the data from [NSA], [DoD], or [Random Numbers].
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step F.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step H.
F Press [Change].
110
G Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number
keys, and then press [q].
3
H Press [OK].
Auto Erase Memory is set.
Important
When Auto Erase Memory is set to On, temporary data that remained on
the hard disk when Auto Erase Memory was Off might not be overwritten.
Note
Should the main power switch of the machine be turned off before overwriting is completed, the temporary data will remain on the hard disk until the main power switch is next turned on and overwriting is resumed.
If the overwriting method is changed while overwriting is in progress, the
remainder of the temporary data will be overwritten using the method set
originally.
Canceling Auto Erase Memory
A Follow steps A to D in Auto Erase Memory Setting.

B Press [Off].
C Press [OK].
Auto Erase Memory is disabled.
Note
To set Auto Erase Memory to On again, repeat the procedure in Auto
Erase Memory Setting.
111
Types of Data that Can or Cannot Be Overwritten

The following table shows the types of data that can or cannot be overwritten by
Auto Erase Memory.
Data overwritten by Auto
Erase Memory
Copier
Copy jobs
Printer
Print Jobs
Sample Print/Locked
Print/Stored Print Jobs *1
Spool Printing jobs
PDF Direct Print data

Scanner
*2
Scanned files sent by e-mail

Files sent by Scan to Folder
Documents sent using
DeskTopBinder, the ScanRouter delivery software
or a Web Image Monitor
Data not overwritten by Auto

Erase Memory
Documents stored by the user in the Document Server using

the Copier, Printer or Scanner functions *3
Information registered in the Address Book *4
Counters stored under each user code
Image overlay data *5
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
112
A Sample Print, Locked Print, or Stored Print job can only be overwritten after it has
been executed.Stored print jobs can be overwritten by Auto Erase Memory only if
they have been deleted in advance.
Data scanned with network TWAIN scanner will not be overwritten by Auto Erase
Memory.
A stored document can only be overwritten after it has been printed or deleted from
the Document Server.
Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security. For details, see p.105
Encrypting the Data in the Address Book.
Image overlay data can be overwritten by Auto Erase Memory only if it is deleted in
advance.
Erase All Memory

You can erase all the data on the hard disk by writing over it. This is useful if you
relocate or dispose of your machine.
Preparation
Important
If you select Erase All Memory, the following are also deleted: user codes,
counters under each user code, user stamps, data stored in the Address Book,
printer fonts downloaded by users, applications using Embedded Software
Architecture, SSL server certificates, and the machines network settings.
Note
Before erasing the hard disk, you can back up user codes, counters for each
user code, and Address Book data using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For
details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
A Disconnect communication cables connected to the machine.

D Press [Administrator Tools].
113
E Press [Erase All Memory].
other settings.
F Select the method of erasing the data.
Select the method of erasing the data from [NSA], [DoD], or [Random Numbers].
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step G.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step I.
G Press [Change].
114
H Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number
keys, and then press [q].
3
I Press [OK].
J Press [Yes].
K When overwriting is completed, press [Exit], and then turn off the power.
Reference
Before turning the power off, see Turning On the Power, About This Machine.
Important
Should the main power switch of the machine be turned off before Erase
All Memory is completed, overwriting is canceled.
Make sure the main power switch is not turned off during overwriting.
Note
If the main power is turned off when Erase All Memory is in progress,
overwriting will start again when you next turn on the main power.
If an error occurs before overwriting is completed, turn off the main power. Turn it on again, and then repeat from stepB.
115
Canceling Erase All Memory
A Press [Cancel] while Erase All Memory is in progress.

B Press [Yes].
Erase All Memory is canceled.
Note
If you stop this before completion, the data is not fully erased. Execute
[Erase All Memory] again to erase the data.
C Turn off the main power.

Note
To resume overwriting after power off, turn on the main power of the machine, and then repeat the procedure in Erase All Memory.
116
4. Managing Access to the

Machine
Preventing Modification of Machine
Settings
Administrator type determines which machine settings can be modified. Users
cannot change the administrator settings. In [Admin. Authentication], [Available Settings], the administrator can select which settings users cannot specify.
Register the administrators before using the machine.
Type of Administrator
Register the administrator on the machine, and then authenticate the administrator using the administrators login user name and password. The administrator can also specify [Available Settings] in [Admin. Authentication] to prevent
users from specifying certain settings. Administrator type determines which
machine settings can be modified. The following types of administrator are
available:
User Administrator
File Administrator
Reference
For details, see p.11 Administrators.
For details, see p.17 Administrator Authentication.

For details, see p.172 Machine Administrator Settings.
For details, see p.180 Network Administrator Settings.
For details, see p.184 File Administrator Settings.
For details, see p.12 User Administrator.
Menu Protect
Use this function to specify the permission level for users to change those settings accessible by non-administrators.
You can specify Menu Protect for the following settings:
Copy / Document Server Features
Printer Features
Scanner Features
Reference
For details, see p.192 User Settings.
117
Menu Protect
The administrator can also limit users access permission to the machines settings. The machines System Settings menu and the printers regular menus can
be locked so they cannot be changed. This function is also effective when management is not based on user authentication.
To change the menu protect setting, you must first enable administrator authentication.
Reference
For details about the menu protect level for each function, see p.192 User Settings.
Menu Protect
You can set menu protect to [Off], [Level 1], or [Level 2]. If you set it to [Off], no
menu protect limitation is applied. To limit access to the fullest extent, select
[Level 2]. For details about the menu protect level for each function, see p.192
User Settings.
Copying Functions
To specify [Menu Protect] in [Copier / Document Server Features], set [Machine Management] to [On] in [Administrator Authentication Management] in [Administrator Tools] in
[System Settings].

B Press [Copier / Document Server Features].

D Press [Menu Protect].
118
Menu Protect
E Select the menu protect level, and then press [OK].
Printer Functions
To specify [Menu Protect] in [Printer Features], set [Machine Management] to [On] in
[Administrator Authentication Management] in [Administrator Tools] in [System Settings].

B Press [Printer Features].
C Press [Maintenance].
119

Scanner Functions
To specify [Menu Protect] in [Scanner Features], set [Machine Management] to [On] in
[Administrator Authentication Management] in [Administrator Tools] in [System Settings].

B Press [Scanner Features].
C Press [Initial Settings].

120

To prevent unauthorized operation, you can specify who is allowed to access
each of the machines functions.
Available Functions
Specify the available functions from the copier, Document Server, scanner,
and printer functions.
Specifying Which Functions are Available

This can be specified by the user administrator. Specify the functions available
to registered users. By making this setting, you can limit the functions available
to users.
Preparation


121
E Select the user.

G In [Available Functions], select the functions you want to specify.
other settings.
H Press [OK].
I Press [Exit].
122
Managing Log Files
Managing Log Files

A
Log information
To view the log, the log collection server is required.
The following log information is stored in the machines memory and on its
hard disk:
Job log
Stores information about workflow related to user files, such as copying,
printing, and scan file delivery
Access log
Stores information about access, such as logging on and off, creating and
deleting files, scanning data security for copying documents, administrator procedures *1 , and customer engineer procedures. *2
*1
*2
Deleting all log information

Formatting the hard disk
Deleting log information

To delete the log, the log collection server is required.
By deleting the log stored in the machine, you can free up space on the hard
disk.
Transferring log information
To transfer the log, the log collection server is required.
You can transfer the log information, which indicates who tried to gain access
and at what time.
By transferring the log files, you can check the history data and identify unauthorized access.
Specifying Delete All Logs

By deleting the log stored in the machine, you can free up space on the hard disk.

123
D Press [Delete All Logs].

other settings.
E Press [Yes].
F Press [Exit].
G Press the {User Tools}key.
The machine administrator can select [On] from the log server only.
When using the machines control panel, you can change the setting to [Off] only
if it is set to [On].
You can check and change the transfer log setting. This setting lets you transfer
log files to the log server to check the history data and identify unauthorized access.
For details about log collection server, contact your local dealer.
For details about the transfer log setting, see log collection server help.

124
Managing Log Files
D Press [Transfer Log Setting].
other settings.
E Press [Off].
F Press [OK].
G Press the {User Tools}key.
125
126
5. Enhanced Network Security

You can limit IP addresses, disable ports and protocols, or use Web Image Monitor to specify the network security level to prevent unauthorized access over the
network and protect the address book, stored files, and default settings.
Enabling/Disabling Protocols
This can be specified by the network administrator.
Specify whether to enable or disable the function for each protocol.
By making this setting, you can specify which protocols are available and so prevent unauthorized access over the network.
Preparation

C Press [Interface Settings].
127
D Press [Effective Protocol].
E Press [Invalid] for the protocol you want to disable.
F Press [OK].
Reference
Advanced network settings can be specified using Web Image Monitor.
For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
128
Access Control
The machine can control TCP/IP access.
Limit the IP addresses from which access is possible by specifying the access
control range.
For example, if you specify the access control range as [192.168.15.16][192.168.15.20], the client PC addresses from which access is possible will be from
192.168.15.16 to 192.168.15.20.
Limitation
Using access control, you can limit access involving LPR, RCP/RSH, FTP, IPP,
DIPRINT, Web Image Monitor, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client or DeskTopBinder. You cannot limit the Monitoring of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
You cannot limit access involving telnet, or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
A Open a Web Image Monitor.

B Enter http://(machine's-address)/ in the address bar to access the ma-
chine.
C Log onto the machine.

The network administrator can log on using the appropriate login user name
and login password.
D Click [Configuration], under [Security], click [Access Control].

The [Access Control] page appears.
E To specify the IPv4 Address, in [Access Control Range], enter an IP address

that has access to the machine. To specify the IPv6 Address, in [Access Control Range] - [Range], enter an IP address that has access to the machine, or in
[Mask], enter an IP address that has access to the machine and specify the
[Mask Length].
F Click [OK].
Access control is set.
G Log off from the machine.

Reference
For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
129
Specifying Network Security Level

This setting lets you change the security level to limit unauthorized access.
Set the security level to [Level 0], [Level 1], or [Level 2].
Select [Level 2] for maximum security to protect confidential information.
Select [Level 1] for moderate security. Use this setting if the machine is connected
to the office local area network (LAN).
Select [Level 0] to use this setting if no information needs to be protected.
You can specify the network security level setting for the entire network using
the machines control panel. However, once you change the network security
level setting using Web Image Monitor, the setting will no longer appear on the
control panel.
Reference
For details about logging on and logging off with user authentication, see p.24
Logging on Using Administrator Authentication, p.26 Logging off Using
Administrator Authentication.

130
D Press [Network Security Level].
If the setting you want to specify does not appear, press [TNext] to scroll
down to other settings.
E Select the network security level.
Select [Level 0], [Level 1], or [Level 2].
F Press [OK].
G Press [Exit].
H Press the {User Tools}key.
131
-Status of Functions under each Network Security Level

= Available
= Unavailable
U = Port is open.
| = Port is closed.
= Automatic
= Ciphertext Only
= Ciphertext Priority
Function

Level 0
Interface
132
Level 1
Level 2
IEEE1394 SBP-2
Bluetooth
IPv4 over 1394

Function

Level 0
TCP/IP
IPP
Level 2
Port 80
Port 443
Port 631
Port 7443/7444
Port 80
Port 631
TCP/IP
HTTP
Level 1
Port 443
DIPRINT
FTP
Port 21
ssh
Port 22
LPR
sftp
RFU
Port 10021
RSH/RCP
Setting
Browse
SNMP
SNMP v1v2
SNMP v3
SNMP
Encryption
SSDP
Port 1900
NBT
Port 137/138
DNS
TELNET
SSL
SSL / TLS Encryption Mode
SMB
NetWare
NetWare
AppleTalk
AppleTalk
133

Prevent login passwords, group passwords for PDF files, and IPP authentication
passwords being revealed by encrypting them for transmission.
Also, encrypt the login password for administrator authentication and user authentication.
Driver Encryption Key

Encrypt the password transmitted when specifying user authentication.
To encrypt the login password, specify the driver encryption key on the machine and on the printer driver installed in the users computer.
Reference
Group Passwords for PDF Files

DeskTopBinder Lites PDF Direct Print function allows a PDF group password to be specified to enhance security.
Note
You cannot perform PDF Direct Print for compressed PDF files.
To use PDF direct print, the optional PostScript3 unit must be installed.
Password for IPP Authentication

To encrypt the IPP Authentication password on the Web Image Monitor, set
[Authentication] to [DIGEST], and then specify the IPPAuthentication password
set on the machine.
Note
You can use Telnet or FTP to manage passwords for IPP authentication, although it is not recommended.

Specify the driver encryption key on the machine.
By making this setting, you can encrypt login passwords for transmission to prevent them from being analyzed.
Reference
Preparation
134
E For [Driver Encryption Key], press [Change].
135
F Enter the driver encryption key, and then press [OK].

Enter the driver encryption key using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Note
The network administrator must give users the driver encryption key
specified on the machine so they can register it on their computers. Make
sure to enter the same driver encryption key as that specified on the machine.
G Press [OK].
Reference
See the TWAIN driver Help.
Group Password for PDF files

On the machine, specify the group password for PDF files.
By using a PDF group password, you can enhance security and so protect passwords from being analyzed.
Preparation
Note
The network administrator must give users the group password for PDF files
that is already registered on the machine. The users can then register it in
DeskTopBinder on their computers.For details, see the DeskTopBinder Help
Make sure to enter the same character string as that specified on the machine
for the group password for PDF files.
The group password for PDF files can also be specified using Web Image
Monitor. For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
136
B Press [Printer Features].
C Press [PDF Menu], and then press [PDF Group Password].

If the setting to be specified does not appear, press [TNext].
D For [Current Password], press [Enter].

E Enter the password, and then press [OK].
Enter the group password for PDF files using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
F Press [OK].
G For [New Password], press [Enter].
H Enter the password, and then press [OK].
I For [Confirm New Password], press [Enter].
J Enter the password and press [OK].
K Press [OK].
137
IPP Authentication Password

Specify the IPP authentication passwords for the machine using Web Image
Monitor.
By making this setting, you can encrypt IPP authentication passwords for transmission to prevent them from being analyzed.
Note
When using the IPP port under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, you
can use the operating systems standard IPP port.

B Enter http://(machine's-address)/ in the address bar to access the machine.
The network administrator can log on. Enter the login user name and login
password.
D Click [Configuration], click [Security], and then click [IPP Authentication].

The [IPP Authentication] page appears.
E Select [DIGEST] from the [Authentication] list.

F Enter the user name in the [User Name] box.
G Enter the password in the [Password] box.
H Click [Apply].
IPP authentication is specified.
I Log off from the machine.
138
Protection Using Encryption

When you access the machine using a Web Image Monitor or IPP, you can establish encrypted communication using SSL. When you access the machine using
an application such as SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can establish encrypted communication using SNMPv3 or SSL.
To protect data from interception, analysis, and tampering, you can install a
server certificate in the machine, negotiate a secure connection, and encrypt
transmitted data.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
AFN001S
A
B
C
D
E
To access the machine from a users computer, request for the SSL server
certificate and public key.
The server certificate and public key are sent from the machine to the users computer.
Using the public key, encrypt the data for transmission.
The encrypted data is sent to the machine.
The encrypted data is decrypted using the private key.
Note
To establish encrypted communication using SSL, the machine must have
the printer and scanner functions.
139
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption

To protect the communication path and establish encrypted communication,
create and install the server certificate.
There are two ways of installing a server certificate: create and install a self-certificate using the machine, or request a certificate from a certificate authority and
install it.
Configuration flow (self-signed certificate)

A Creating and installing the server certificate
Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
B Enabling SSL
Enable the [SSL/TLS] setting using Web Image Monitor.
Configuration flow (certificate issued by a certificate authority)
A Creating the server certificate
Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
The application procedure after creating the certificate depends on the certificate authority. Follow the procedure specified by the certificate authority.
B Installing the server certificate
C Enabling SSL
Enable the [SSL/TLS] setting using Web Image Monitor.
Creating and Installing the Server Certificate (Self-Signed Certificate)
Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
Note
To confirm whether SSL configuration is enabled, enter https://(machinesaddress) in your Web Image Monitors address bar to access this machine. If
the The page cannot be displayed message appears, check the configuration as the SSL configuration is invalid.
140
Creating and Installing the Self-Signed Certificate

Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
This section explains the use of a self-certificate as the server certificate.

B Enter http://(machine's-address)/ in the address bar to access the printer.
The network administrator can log on.
Enter the login user name and login password.
D Click [Configuration], under [Security], click [Device Certificate].

E Click [Create].
F Make the necessary settings.
Reference
For details about the displayed items and selectable items, see Web Image
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
The setting is changed.
H Click [OK].
A security warning dialog box appears.
I Check the details, and then click [OK].

[Installed] appears under [Certificate Status] to show that a server certificate for
the printer has been installed.
J Log off from the machine.

Note
Click [Delete] to delete the server certificate from the machine.
141
Creating the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)

Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as
the server certificate.


The [Device Certificate] page appears.
E Click [Request].
F Make the necessary settings.
Reference
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
[Requesting] appears for [Certificate Status] in the [Certificate] area.
H Log off from the machine.

I Apply to the certificate authority for the server certificate.
The application procedure depends on the certificate authority. For details,
contact the certificate authority.
For the application, click the Web Image Monitor Details icon and use the information that appears in [Certificate Details].
Note
Using Web Image Monitor, you can create the contents of the server certificate but you cannot send the application.
Click [Cancel Request] to cancel the request for the server certificate.
142
Installing the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)

This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as
the server certificate.
Enter the server certificate contents issued by the certificate authority.


The [Device Certificate] page appears.
E Click [Install].
F Enter the contents of the server certificate.
In the [Certificate Request] box, enter the contents of the server certificate received from the certificate authority.
Reference
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
[Installed] appears under [Certificate Status] to show that a server certificate for
the machine has been installed.
H Log off from the machine.

Enabling SSL
After installing the server certificate in the machine, enable the SSL setting.
This procedure is used for a self-signed certificate or a certificate issued by a certificate authority.

143
D Click [Configuration], under [Security], click [SSL/TLS].

The [SSL/TLS] page appears.
E Click [Enable] for [SSL/TLS].

F Click [OK].
The SSL setting is enabled.
G Log off from the machine.

Note
If you set [Permit SSL / TLS Communication] to [Ciphertext Only], enter https://(machine's address)/ to access the machine.
User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)

If you have installed a server certificate and enabled SSL (Secure Sockets Layer),
you need to install the certificate on the users computer.
The network administrator must explain the procedure for installing the certificate to users.
If a warning dialog box appears while accessing the machine using the Web Image Monitor or IPP, start the Certificate Import Wizard and install a certificate.
A When the [Security Alert] dialog box appears, click [View Certificate].
The [Certificate] dialog box appears.
To be able to respond to inquiries from users about such problems as expiry
of the certificate, check the contents of the certificate.
B On the [General] tab, click [Install Certificate...].

Certificate Import Wizard starts.
C Install the certificate by following the Certificate Import Wizard instructions.
Note
For details about how to install the certificate, see the Web Image Monitor
Help.
If a certificate issued by a certificate authority is installed in the printer,
confirm the certificate store location with the certificate authority.
Reference
For details about where to store the certificate when accessing the machine
using IPP, see the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
144
Setting the SSL / TLS Encryption Mode

By specifying the SSL/TLS encrypted communication mode, you can change the
security level.
Encrypted Communication Mode

Using the encrypted communication mode, you can specify encrypted communication.
Ciphertext Only
Allows encrypted communication only.

If encryption is not possible, the machine
does not communicate.
Ciphertext Priority
Performs encrypted communication if encryption is possible.

If encryption is not possible, the machine
communicates without it.
Ciphertext / Clear Text
Communicates with or without encryption,

according to the setting.
Setting the SSL / TLS Encryption Mode

After installing the server certificate, specify the SSL/TLS encrypted communication mode. By making this setting, you can change the security level.
Preparation

145
D Press [Permit SSL / TLS Communication]
other settings.
E Select the encrypted communication mode.
Select [Ciphertext Only], [Ciphertext Priority], or [Ciphertext / Clear Text] as the encrypted communication mode.
F Press [OK].
Note
The SSL/TLS encrypted communication mode can also be specified using
Web Image Monitor. For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
146
SNMPv3 Encryption
When using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or another application to make
various settings, you can encrypt the data transmitted.
By making this setting, you can protect data from being tampered with.
Preparation

147
D Press [Permit SNMP v3 Communication].
other settings.
E Press [Encryption Only].
F Press [OK].
Note
To use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin for encrypting the data for specifying settings, you need to specify the network administrators [Encryption
Password] setting and [Encryption Key] in [SNMP Authentication Information] in
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, in addition to specifying [Permit SNMP v3
Communication] on the machine.
If network administrators [Encryption Password] setting is not specified, the
data for transmission may not be encrypted or sent.
Reference
For details about specifying the network administrators [Encryption Password] setting, see p.20 Registering the Administrator.
For details about specifying [Encryption Key] in SmartDeviceMonitor for

Admin, see the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
148
6. Specifying the Extended

Security Functions
Changing the Extended Security
Functions
As well as providing basic security through user authentication and the machine
access limits specified by the administrators, you can increase security by, for instance, encrypting transmitted data and data in the address book. If you need extended security, specify the machines extended security functions before using
the machine.
This section outlines the extended security functions and how to specify them.
For details about when to use each function, see the corresponding chapters.
Changing the Extended Security Functions

To change the extended security functions, display the extended security screen
as follows:
Preparation
Procedure for Changing the Extended Security Functions

149
6
E Press the setting you want to change, and change the setting.
F Press [OK].
150
Settings
This can be specified by the network administrator. Encrypt the password
transmitted when specifying user authentication. The Driver Encryption Key
must match the encryption key set on the machine.
Reference
See the TWAIN driver Help.
Encrypt Address Book

This can be specified by the user administrator. Encrypt the data in the machines address book.
Reference
See p.105 Encrypting the Data in the Address Book.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
Restrict Use of Destinations

The available scanner destinations are limited to the destinations registered
Reference
See p.99 Restrictions on Destinations.
A user cannot directly enter the destinations for transmission.
Limitation
If you specify the setting to receive e-mails via SMTP, you cannot use [Restrict Use of Destinations].
Note
The destinations searched by Search LDAP can be used.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
151
Restrict Adding of User Destinations

When Restrict Use of Destinations is set to [Off]. After entering a scanner
destination directly, you can register it in the address book by pressing
[ProgDest]. If [On] is selected for this setting, [ProgDest] does not appear. If you
set [Restrict Adding of User Destinations] to [On], users can specify destinations
directly, but cannot use [ProgDest] to register data in the address book. When
this setting is made, only the user administrator can change the address book.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
Restrict Display of User Information

This can be specified if user authentication is specified. When the job history
is checked using a network connection for which authentication is not available, all personal information can be displayed as ********. For example,
when someone not authenticated as an administrator checks the job history
using SNMP in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, personal information can be
displayed as ******** so users cannot be identified. Because no information
identifying registered users can be viewed, unauthorized users can be prevented from obtaining information about the registered files.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
Enhance File Protection

This can be specified by the file administrator. By specifying a password, you
can limit operations such as printing, deleting, and sending files, and can prevent unauthorized people from accessing the files. However, it is still possible
for the password to be cracked.
By specifying Enhance File Protection, files are locked and so become inaccessible if an invalid password is entered ten times. This can protect the files
from unauthorized access attempts in which a password is repeatedly guessed.
The locked files can only be unlocked by the file administrator. When Enhance File Protection is specified, ( ) appears at the screen.
Note
If files are locked, you cannot select them even if the correct password is
entered.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
152
Settings by SNMP v1 and v2

This can be specified by the network administrator. When the machine is accessed using the SNMPv1, v2 protocol, authentication cannot be performed,
allowing machine administrator settings such as the paper setting to be
changed. If you select [Prohibit], the setting can be viewed but not specified
with SNMPv1, v2.
Prohibit
Do not Prohibit
Note
Default: Do not Prohibit
Restrict Use of Simple Encryption

For example, this setting is set to [On] and you want to edit the address book
in User Management Tool or Address Management Tool in SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, or you want to access the machine using DeskTopBinder
or the ScanRouter delivery software, enable SSL/TLS for encrypted communication. For details about specifying SSL/TLS, see p.145 Setting the SSL /
TLS Encryption Mode.
If you select [On], specify the encryption setting using the printer driver.
On
Off
Note
Default: Off
153
Authenticate Current Job

This setting lets you specify whether or not authentication is required for operations such as canceling jobs under the copier and printer functions.
If you select [Login Privilege], authorized users and the machine administrator
can operate the machine. When this is selected, authentication is not required
for users who logged on to the machine before [Login Privilege] was selected.
If you select [Access Privilege], users who canceled a copy or print job in
progress and the machine administrator can operate the machine.
Limitation
Even if you select [Login Privilege] and log onto the machine, you cannot
cancel a copy or print job in progress if you are not authorized to use the
copy and printer functions.
You can specify [Authenticate Current Job] only if [User Authentication Management] was specified.
Login Privilege
Access Privilege
Off
Note
Default: Off
Password Policy
The password policy setting is effective only if [Basic Auth.] is specified.
This setting lets you specify [Complexity Setting] and [Minimum Character No.] for
the password. By making this setting, you can limit the available passwords
to only those that meet the conditions specified in [Complexity Setting] and [Minimum Character No.].
If you select [Level 1], specify the password using a combination of two types
of characters selected from upper-case letters, lower-case letters, decimal
numbers, and symbols such as #.
If you select [Level 2], specify the password using a combination of three types
of characters selected from upper-case letters, lower-case letters, decimal
numbers, and symbols such as #.
154
Other Security Functions

This section explains settings for preventing information leaks, and functions
that you can restrict to further increase security.
Scanner Function
To prevent personal information in the transmission/delivery history being
printed automatically, set user authentication and the journal will not print
automatically. Instead, items in the Print&Delete Scanner Journal are overwritten one by one when the number of transmissions/deliveries exceeds
250. To prevent the transmission/delivery history from overwritten, change
the setting so that the Scanner Journal is printed automatically.
Weekly Timer Code

When weekly timer is set,if you set the service mode lock to [On], users must enter the Weekly Timer Code.
Specifying Weekly Timer Code


155
D Press [Weekly Timer Code].
6
E Press [On].
F Enter [Weekly Timer Code] using the number keys, and then press [q].
156
Canceling Weekly Timer Code


D Press [Weekly Timer Code].
157
E Press [Off].
158
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers Only
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers

Only
The machine can be set so that operation is impossible without administrator authentication.
The machine can be set to prohibit operation without administrator authentication and also prohibit remote registration in the address book by a service representative.
We maintain strict security when handling customers data. Also, by being authenticated by an administrator to use the machine, we operate the machine under the customers control.
Use the following settings.
Service Mode Lock
Settings
Service Mode Lock
This can be specified by the machine administrator. Service mode is used by
a customer engineer for inspection or repair. If you set the service mode lock
to [On], service mode cannot be used unless the machine administrator logs
onto the machine and cancels the service mode lock to allow the customer engineer to operate the machine for inspection and repair. This ensures that the
inspection and repair are done under the supervision of the machine administrator.
Specifying Service Mode Lock

Preparation

159
D Press [Service Mode Lock].
6
E Press [On] and then [OK].
F Press [Yes].
160
Limiting Machine Operation to Customers Only
Canceling Service Mode Lock

For a customer engineer to carry out inspection or repair in service mode, the
machine administrator must log onto the machine and cancel the service mode
lock.
Preparation

6
D Press [Service Mode Lock].
161
E Press [Off] and then press [OK].

The customer engineer can switch to service mode.
162
7. Troubleshooting
Authentication Does Not Work Properly
This section explains what to do if a user cannot operate the machine because of
a problem related to user authentication. Refer to this section if a user comes to
you with such a problem.
A Message Appears
This section explains how to deal with problems if a message appears on the
screen during user authentication.
The most common messages are explained. If some other message appears, deal
with the problem according to the information contained in the message.
Messages
Causes
Solutions
You do not have the

privileges to use
this function.
The authority to use the function is not specified.
If this appears when trying

to use a function:
The function is not specified in the address book
management setting as being available. The user administrator must decide
whether to authorize use
of the function and then
assign the authority.
If this appears when trying
to specify a default setting:
The administrator differs
depending on the default
settings you wish to specify. Using the list of settings, the administrator
responsible must decide
whether to authorize use
of the function.
163
Troubleshooting
Messages
Causes
Solutions
Failed to obtain
URL.
The machine cannot connect

to the server or cannot establish communication.
Make sure the server's settings, such as the IP Address

and host name, are specified
correctly on the machine.
Make sure the host name of
the UA Server is specified correctly.
Authentication has
failed.
The machine is connected to

the server, but the UA service
is not responding properly.
Make sure the UA service is

specified correctly.
SSL is not specified correctly

on the server.
Specify SSL using Authentication Manager.
Server authentication failed.
Make sure server authentication is specified correctly on

the machine.
The entered login user name

or login password is not correct
Inquire the user administrator

for the correct login user name
and login password.
Delete unnecessary user adThe number of users registered in the address book has dresses.
reached the maximum limit
allowed by Windows Authentication or , LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server
Authentication, so you cannot
register additional users.
164
Cannot access the authentication server when using Windows authentication , LDAP
Authentication, or Integration
Server Authentication.
A network or server error may

have occurred. Contact to the
network administrator.
The selected file(s) You have tried to delete files

without the authority to do so.
contained file(s)
without access privileges. Only file(s)
with access privileges will be deleted.
Files can be deleted by the file

creator (owner) or file administrator. To delete a file which
you are not authorized to delete, contact the file creator
(owner).
Authentication Does Not Work Properly
Machine Cannot Be Operated

If the following conditions arise while users are operating the machine, provide
instructions on how to deal with them.
Condition
Cause
Solution
Cannot print using the printer

driver or connect using the
TWAIN driver.
User authentication has been

rejected.
Enter the login user name and

login password in the printer
driver.
If using Windows authentication or , LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server
Authentication, inquire the
network administrator for the
user name and login name.
If using basic authentication,
inquire the user administrator.
Cannot authenticate using the

TWAIN driver.
After starting [User Management Tool] or [Address Management Tool] in

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and entering the correct
login user name and password, a message appears to
notify that an incorrect password has been entered.
Cannot log on to the machine
using [Document Server: Authentication/Encryption:] in DeskTopBinder.
The encryption key specified

in the driver does not match
the machines driver encryption key.
Specify the driver encryption

key registered in the machine.
Another user is logging on to

the machine.
Wait for the user to log off.
Authentication is taking time

because of operating conditions.
Make sure the LDAP server

setting is correct.
Authentication is not possible

while the machine is editing
the address book data.
Wait until editing of the address book data is complete.
Restrict Simple Encryption

is not set correctly. Alternatively, [SSL/TLS] has been enabled although the required
certificate is not installed in
the computer.
Set Restrict Simple Encryption to [On]. Alternatively,

enable [SSL/TLS], install the
server certificate in the machine, and then install the certificate in the computer.
See p.134 Driver Encryption

Key.
Make sure the network settings are correct.
Reference
See p.153 Restrict Use of
Simple Encryption.
See p.145 Setting the SSL
/ TLS Encryption Mode.
Cannot access the machine using ScanRouter EX Professional V3 / ScanRouter EX

Enterprise V2.
165
Troubleshooting
Condition
Cause
Solution
Cannot connect to the ScanRouter delivery software.
The ScanRouter delivery software may not be supported by

the machine.
Update to the latest version of

the ScanRouter delivery software.
Cannot access the machine us- ScanRouter EX Professional V2 does not support user authentication.
ing ScanRouter EX Professional V2.
Cannot log off when using the
copying or scanner functions.
The original has not been

scanned completely.
When the original has been

scanned completely, press
[q], remove the original, and
then log off.
[ProgDest] does not appear on [Restrict Adding of User Destinathe scanner screen for specify- tions] is set to [Off] in [Restrict
Use of Destinations] in [Extended
ing destinations.
Security], so only the user administrator can register destinations in the address book.
Registration must be done by

the user administrator.
Stored files do not appear.
User authentication may have

been disabled while [All Users]
is not specified.
Re-enable user authentication,

and then enable [All Users] for
the files that did not appear.
For details about enabling [All
Users], see p.85 Specifying
Access Permission for Stored
Files.
Destinations specified using

the machine do not appear.
User authentication may have

been disabled while [All Users]
is not specified.
Re-enable user authentication,

and then enable [All Users] for
the destinations that did not
appear.
For details about enabling [All
Users], see p.102 Protecting
the Address Book.
166
Cannot print when user authentication has been specified.
User authentication may not

be specified in the printer
driver.
Specify user authentication in

the printer driver.
If you try to interrupt a job

while copying or scanning, an
authentication screen appears.
With this machine, you can

log off while copying or scanning. If you try to interrupt
copying or scanning after logging off, an authentication
screen appears.
Only the user who executed a

copying or scanning job can
interrupt it.Wait until the job
has completed or consult an
administrator or the user who
executed the job.
After you execute [Encrypt Address Book] the [Exit] message

does not appear.
The hard disk may be faulty.
The file may be corrupt.
For details, see the printer

driver Help.
8. Appendix
Operations by the Supervisor
The supervisor can delete an administrators password and specify a new one.
If any of the administrators forget their passwords or if any of the administrators
change, the supervisor can assign a new password. If logged on using the supervisors user name and password, you cannot use normal functions or specify defaults. Log on as the supervisor only to change an administrators password.
Important
The default login user name is supervisor and the login password is blank.
We recommend changing the login user name and login password.
When registering login user names and login passwords, you can specify up
to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols. Keep in mind that user names
and passwords are case-sensitive.
Be sure not to forget the supervisor login user name and login password. If
you do forget them, a service representative will to have to return the machine to its default state. This will result in all data in the machine being lost
and the service call may not be free of charge.
Note
You cannot specify the same login user name for the supervisor and the administrators.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can log on as the supervisor and delete an administrators password.
Logging on as the Supervisor

If administrator authentication has been specified, log on using the supervisor
login user name and login password. This section describes how to log on.
APG012S
B Press [Enter] for [Login User Name].

167
Appendix
C Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].

Note
When you assign the administrator for the first time, enter supervisor.
D Press [Enter] for [Login Password].

E Enter a login password, and then press [OK].
Note
When you assign the administrator for the first time, proceed to step F
without pressing [Enter].
F Press [Login].
Logging off as the Supervisor
If administrator authentication has been specified, be sure to log off after completing settings. This section explains how to log off after completing settings.
8
APG012S
B Press [Yes].
168
Changing the Supervisor

8
E Under Supervisor, click [Change].
169
Appendix
F Press [Change] for the login user name.
G Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].

H Press [Change] for the login password.
I Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
J If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
K Press [OK] twice.

Resetting an Administrators Password
APG012S
B Log on as the supervisor.

You can log on in the same way as an administrator.

D Press [Administrator Tools].
E Press [Program / Change Administrator].
170
F Press [Change] for the administrator you wish to reset.
G Press [Change] for the login password.

H Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
I If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then
press [OK].
J Press [OK].
K Press [OK].
171
Appendix
Machine Administrator Settings

The machine administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
The following settings can be specified.
General Features
All the settings can be specified.
Timer Settings
Interface Settings
Parallel Interface
File Transfer
Delivery Option
SMTP Authentication
SMTP Authentication
User Name
E-mail Address
Password
Encryption
POP before SMTP
Wait Time after Auth.
User Name
E-mail Address
Password
Reception Protocol
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings
Server Name
Encryption
Default User Name / Password (Send)
SMB User Name / SMB Password
FTP User Name / FTP Password
NCP User Name / NCP Password
Password
Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message
172
Administrator Tools
You can specify which authentication to use.
You can also edit the settings for each function.
Machine Management
Program / Change Administrator
You can change the user name and the full-control users authority.
Extended Security
Restrict Display of user Information
Authenticate Current Job
Display / Print Counter
Print Counter List
Extended Features
AOF (Always On)
Identification Name
Server Name
Search Base
Port No.
Use Secure Connection (SSL)
Authentication
Search Conditions
Search Options
LDAP Search
Service Mode Lock
Auto Erase Memory Setting *2
Erase All Memory *2
*1
*2
File Format Converter option must be installed.

The DataOverwriteSecurity unit option must be installed.
173
Appendix
Copier / Document Server Features

General Features
Reproduction Ratio
Edit
Stamp
Input / Output
Administrator Tools
Printer Features
List / Test Print

Maintenance
Menu Protect
List / Test Print Lock
174
System
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Job Separation
Memory Usage
Duplex
Copies
Toner Saving
Spool Image
Blank Page Print
Reserve Job Waiting Time

Printer Language
Sub Paper Size
Paper Size
Letterhead Setting
Edge to Edge Print
Tray Switching
Host Interface
PCL Menu
PS Menu *1
PDF Menu *1
*1
The PostScript 3 unit option must be installed.
Scanner Features
General Settings
Scan Settings
Send Settings
Compression (Gray Scale)
Stored file E-mail Method
Initial Settings
175
Appendix
Settings via Web Image Monitor

Top Page
Reset Printer Job
Reset Device
Device Settings
System
Spool Printing
Protect Printer Operation Panel
Output Tray
Paper Tray Priority
Front Cover Sheet Tray
Back Cover Sheet Tray
Slip Cover Sheet Tray
Destination Sheet 1 Tray
Separation Sheet 1 Tray
Paper
Timer
Date/Time
E-mail
Auto E-mail Notification
On demand E-mail Notification
File Transfer
Machine Administrator Authentication
Available Settings for Machine Administrator
176
You can specify the following administrator settings as the machine administrator.
Login User Name
Login Password
Change Encryption Password
LDAP Server
Printer
Basic Settings
Tray Parameters (PCL)
PS Settings *1
PDF Settings *1
Duplex
Blank Page Print
PDF Group Password
Resolution
Tray Parameters (PCL)
Tray Parameters (PS)
PDF Group Password
PDF Fixed Password
*1
Interface Settings
Parallel Interface
USB
Pict Bridge
Network
SNMPv3
RC Gate
Webpage
177
Appendix
Settings via SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Device Information
Reset Device
Reset Current Job
Reset All Jobs
User Management Tool
User Page Count
Access Control List
Reset User Counters
Tray Paper Settings

Tray Paper Settings: Tray 1

Paper Type

Paper Type
Paper Size
Paper Type
Paper Size
Paper Type
Thick Paper Setting
178

Paper Type
Thick Paper Setting
Paper Type
Paper Type
Paper Size
Thick Paper Setting
Tray Paper Setting: Interposer Upper Tray
Paper Type
Tray Paper Setting: Interposer Lower Tray
Paper Type
179
Appendix
Network Administrator Settings

The network administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
Interface Settings
Network
IEEE 1394 *1
IEEE 802.11b *2
Note
If [DHCP] is set to [On], the settings that are automatically obtained via
DHCP cannot be specified.
*1
*2
The IEEE1394 interface board option must be installed.

The IEEE802.11b interface unit option must be installed.
File Transfer
SMTP Server
Server Name
Port No.
Max. Reception E-mail size
180
Administrator Tools
Network Management
You can specify the user name and change the full-control users authority.
Extended Security
Settings by SNMP V1 and V2
Restrict Use of Simple Encryption
Scanner Features
Send Settings
Max. E-mail Size
Divide & Send E-mail

Device Settings
System
Device Name
Comment
Location
E-mail
Reception
SMTP
You can specify the following administrator settings for the machine administrator.
Login User Name
Login Password
Network Administrator Authentication
Available Settings for Network Administrator
181
Appendix
Interface
Change Interface
IEEE 802.11b *1
Communication Mode
SSID
Channel
WEP Setting
Authentication Type
WEP Key Status
Key
Confirm Key
IEEE 1394 *2
IP over 1394
SCSI print (SBP-2)
Bluetooth *3
Operation Mode
*1
*2
*3

The Bluetooth interface unit option must be installed.
Network
IPv4
IPv6
NetWare
AppleTalk
SMB
SNMP
SNMPv3
SSDP
Bonjour
Webpage
182
Security
Network Security
Access Control
IPP Authentication
SSL/TLS
ssh
Site Certificates
Device Certificates

NIB Setup Tool

183
Appendix
File Administrator Settings

The file administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
Administrator Tools
File Management
File Administrator
Extended Security
Enhance File Protection
Printer Features
Maintenance
Delete All Temporary Print Jobs
Delete All Stored Print Jobs
System
184
File Administrator Settings

Top Page
Reset Printer Job
Document Server
Job
Printer
Print Jobs *1
*1
The file administrator can select [Delete], [Delete Password], and [Unlock Job]. The
file administrator cannot print files.
Device Settings
File Administrator Authentication
Available Settings for File Administrator
You can specify the following administrator settings for the file administrator.
Login User Name
Login Password
Printer
Webpage
Download Help File
185
Appendix
User Administrator Settings

The user administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
System Settings
Administrator Tools
User Management
User Administrator
Extended Security
Restrict Use of Destinations
Restrict Adding of User Destinations
Encrypt Address Book
Password Policy
Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Group
Address Book: Program / Change / Delete Transfer Request
Address Book: Switch Title
186
User Administrator Settings

Address Book
Device Settings
The user administrator settings that can be specified are as follows:
Login User Name
Login Password
Webpage
Download Help File

Address Management Tool

User Management Tool
Restrict Access To Device
Add New User
Delete User
User Properties
187
Appendix
Document Server File Permissions

The authorities for using the files stored in Document Server are as follows:
The authority designations in the list indicate users with the following authorities.
Read-only
This is a user assigned Read-only authority.
Edit
This is a user assigned Edit authority.
Edit / Delete
This is a user assigned Edit / Delete authority.
Full Control
This is a user granted full control.
Owner
This is a user who can store files in the machine and authorize other users to
view, edit, or delete those files.
File Administrator
This is the file administrator.
=Granted authority to operate.
- =Not granted authority to operate.
User
Viewing
Details
about
Stored
Files
Readonly
Specify- Specify- Unlocking File

ing Per- ing Files
Password mission
s for Users/Gro
ups
Changing Informati
on
about
Stored
Files
Deleting
Files
Edit
Edit /
Delete
Full
Control
Owner
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
File Administrator
*1
188
Viewing Print/Tr
Thumb- ansmisnails
sion
This setting can be specified by the owner.
The Privilege for User Account Settings in the Address Book
The Privilege for User Account Settings in

the Address Book
The authorities for using the address book are as follows:
The authority designations in the list indicate users with the following authorities.
Read-only
This is a user assigned Read-only authority.
Edit
This is a user assigned Edit authority.
Edit / Delete
This is a user assigned Edit / Delete authority.
Full Control
This is a user granted full control.
Registered User
This is a user whose personal information is registered in the address book.
The registered user is the user who knows the login user name and password.
User Administrator
This is the user administrator.
=You can view and change the setting.
U =You can view the setting.
- =You cannot view or specify the setting.
Settings
User
Read-only Edit
User AdministraEdit / Detor

lete
Registered
User
Full
Control
Registration No.
Key Display
Name
Select Title
189
Appendix
Settings
User

lete
Read-only Edit
Full
Control
Auth. Info User Code
Login User
Name
Login
Password
*1
*1
SMTP
Authentication
*1
*1
Folder
Authentication
LDAP
Authentication
*1
*1
Available
Functions
Protection
Code
*1
*1
Protection
Object
Protect
Dest.: Permissions
for Users/Groups
Protect
File(s): Permissions
for Users/Groups
E-mail
Address
Protection Use
Name as
E-mail
Address
190
Registered
User
The Privilege for User Account Settings in the Address Book

Settings
User
Read-only Edit
Folder
SMB/FT
Destination P/NCP
*1

lete
Registered
User
Full
Control
SMB: Path
FTP: Port
No.
FTP:
Server
Name
FTP: Path
NCP: Path
NCP:
Connection type
You can only enter the password.
191
Appendix
User Settings
If you have specified administrator authentication, the available functions and
settings depend on the menu protect setting.
The following settings can be specified by someone who is not an administrator.
=You can view and change the setting.
U =You can view the setting.
- =You cannot view or specify the setting.
Note
Settings that are not in the list can only be viewed, regardless of the menu protect level setting.
Copier / Document Server Features

The default for [Menu Protect] is [Level 2].
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
192
Level 1 Level 2
Copy Orientation Duplex Mode
Reservation Screen
Auto-off Timer
Max. Copy Quantity
Original Counter Reset Key
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Pale
Generation Copy
Dark Background
Panel features Default
Original Tray Display
Special Original Display Defaults
Tone: Original Counter Display
Customize function:Copier
Customize function:Document Server Storage
General Features Auto Image Density Priority
User Settings
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Reproduction
Ratio
Edit
Level 1 Level 2
Shortcut R/E
R/E Ratio
R/E Ratio Priority
Font Margin: Left/Right
Back Margin: Top/Bottom
1 Side2 Side Auto Margin: T to T
1 Side2 Side Auto Margin: T to B
Keep Setting for Magazine
Erase Border Width
Erase Center Width
Font Cover Copy in Combine
Copy in Designating Page in Combine
193
Appendix
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Stamp
Size
Background
Density
Numbering
Preset
Stamp
Stamp Position: COPY *1
Stamp Position: URGENT *1
Stamp Position: DRAFT *1
Stamp Position: PRIORITY *1

Stamp Position: For Your Info.
*1
Stamp Position: PRELIMINARY
*1
Stamp Position: For Internal Use Only

Stamp Position: CONFIDENTIAL
User
Stamp
Date
Stamp
194
Level 1 Level 2
*1
*1
Stamp Language
Program / Delete Stamp
Stamp Format: 1
Stamp Format: 2
Stamp Format: 3
Stamp Format: 4
Stamp Format: 5
Font
Size
Superimpose
Stamp Setting
User Settings
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Stamp
Page
Numbering
Stamp Format
Font
Size
Stamp Position: P1, P2 *1
Stamp Position: 1/5, 2/5
*1
Stamp Position: -1-, -2-
*1
Stamp Position: P.1,P.2...
*1
Stamp Position: 1-1, 1-2 *1
Superimpose
SADF Auto Reset
Sort/Stack Shift Tray Setting
Retate Sort: Auto Paper Continue
Stamp Position: 1, 2
Stamp Text
Level 1 Level 2
*1
Font
Size
Superimpose
Stamp Setting
Input / Output
*1
You can adjust the print position but not specify it.
195
Appendix
Printer Functions
Normal Printer Screen

Functions
Menu Protect
Off
Print Jobs
Level 1 Level 2
Printer Features
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
List/Test Print
196
Level 1 Level 2
Multiple List
Configuration Page
Error Log
Menu List
PCL Configuration/Font Page
PS Configuration/Font Page
PDF Configuration/Font Page
Hex Dump
User Settings
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
System
Host Interface
Level 1 Level 2
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Job Separation
Memory Usage
Duplex
Copies
Blank Page Print
Toner Saving
Spool Image
Resend Job Waiting Time
Printer Language
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Letterhead Setting
Edge to Edge Print
Default Printer Language
Tray Switching
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
197
Appendix
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
PCL Menu
PS Menu
*1
PDF Menu
*1
198
*1
Level 1 Level 2
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Courier Font
Extend A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Resolution
Data Format
Resolution
Change PDF Password
PDF Group Password
Resolution
User Settings
Scanner Features
Tab Names
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
Scan Settings
Send Settings
Level 1 Level 2
Switch Title
Twain Standby Time
Delete Scanner Journal
A.C.S Sensitivity Level
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass
Wait Time for Next Originals SADF
Compression (Gray Scale)
Note of Digit for Single Page Files
Stored File E-mail Method
199
Appendix
System Settings
The settings available to the user depend on whether or not administrator authentication has been specified.
If administrator authentication has been specified, the settings available to the
user depend on whether or not Available Settings has been specified.
Tab Names
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.
Administrator authentication has

been specified.
Availa- Available Set- ble Settings
tings
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
General Features Program/Change/Delete User Text
200
Panel Key Sound
Warm-up Beeper
Copy Count Display
Function Priority
Print Priority
Interleave Print
Status Indicator
Screen Color Setting
Output: Copier
Output Tray Priority: Copier
Paper Tray Priority: Printer
System Status/ Job List Display Time
Time Interval between Printing Jobs
ADF Feed Speed
Optimum for Thick Paper
<F/F4> Size Setting
Key Repeat
Z-fold Position
User Settings
Tab Names
Timer Settings
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Auto Off Timer
Energy Saver Timer
Panel Off Timer
Copier/ Document Server Auto Reset Timer
Set Date
Set Time
Auto Logout Timer
Weekly Timer Code
Weekly Timer
201
Appendix
Tab Names
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.
Settings

tings
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
InterNetwork Machine IPv4 Address *1

face
Settings
*1
IPv6 Stateless Address Configuration
*1
DDNS Configuration
Effective Protocol
NW Frame Type
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Ethernet Speed
Ping Command
Permit SNMP v3 Communication
Permit SSL / TLS Communication
Host Name
Machine Name
Parallel Timing
Input Prime
Signal Control
DNS Configuration
Domain Name *1
WINS Configuration
Parallel
Interface *8
202

been specified.
*1
User Settings
Tab Names
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.

been specified.
tings
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
IP Address *1
DDNS Configuration
Host Name
WINS Configuration *1
IP over 1394
SCSI print (SBP-2)
Communication Mode
IEEE
802.11b
Transmission Speed
*6
SSID Setting
Channel
InterIEEE
face
1394 *5
Settings
Domain Name
*1
WEP
WEP (Encryption) Setting
(EncrypTransmission Speed
tion)
Setting
Return to Defaults
Print
List
*2
203
Appendix
Tab Names
File Transfer
204

been specified.
tings
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Delivery Option *3
SMTP Server
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
POP3 / IMAP4 Settings
Default User Name / Password (Send) *4
Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner Recalls
SMTP Authentication
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.
Settings
*4
User Settings
Tab Names
Administrator
Tools
Settings
Administrator
authentication
has not
been
specified.
Address Book: Program / Change / Delete

Group
Address Book: Program / Change / Delete

Transfer Request
Address Book: Select Title
Extended Security
External Charge Unit Management
Capture Priority *7
Capture: Delete All Unsent Files *7
LDAP Search
Firmware Version

Erase All Memory
*2
*3

tings
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
AOF (Always On)
*1

been specified.
*9
*9
*4
If you select [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)], you can only view the setting.
You can only view the encryption setting.
You can only view Main Delivery Server IP Address and Sub Delivery Server IP Address.
205
Appendix
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
You can only specify the password.

File Format Converter option must be installed.
The IEEE 1284 interface board option must be installed.
The data overwrite security unit option must be installed.
Web Image Monitor Setting

Device Settings
If administrator authentication has been specified, the settings available to
the user depend on whether or not Available Settings has been specified.
206
Admin- Administrator auistrator thentication has

authen- been specified.
ticaAvail Avail
tion has
able
able
not
SetSetbeen
tings tings
specihas not
has
fied.
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Category
Settings
System
Device Name
Comment
Location
Spool Printing
Output Tray
Paper Tray Priority
Front Cover Sheet Tray
Back Cover Sheet Tray
Slip Sheet Tray
Destination Sheet 1-9 Tray
Separation Sheet Tray
Tray1-7
Interposer Upper Tray
Interposer Lower Tray
User Settings
Category
Date/Time
Timer
Logs
Settings

ticaAvail Avail
tion has
able
able
not
SetSetbeen
tings tings
specihas not
has
fied.
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Set Date
Set Time
SNTP Server Address
SNTP Polling Interval
Time Zone
Auto Off Timer
Energy Saver Timer
Panel Off Timer
Copier/ Document Server Auto Reset Timer
Auto Logout Timer
Weekly Timer Code
Weekly Timer
Collect Job Logs
Collect Access Logs
Encrypt Logs
207
Appendix
208

ticaAvail Avail
tion has
able
able
not
SetSetbeen
tings tings
specihas not
has
fied.
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Category
Settings
E-mail
Administrator E-mail Address
Reception Protocol
SMTP Server Name
SMTP Port No.
SMTP Authentication
SMTP Auth. E-mail Address
SMTP Auth. User Name
SMTP Auth. Password *1
SMTP Auth. Encryption
POP before SMTP
POP E-mail Address
POP User Name
POP Password *1
Timeout setting after POP Auth.
POP3/IMAP4 Server Name
POP3/IMAP4 Encryption
POP3 Reception Port No.
IMAP4 Reception Port No.
SMTP Reception Port No.
E-mail Notification E-mail Address
Receive E-mail Notification
E-mail Notification User Name
E-mail Notification Password
User Settings
ticaAvail Avail
tion has
able
able
not
SetSetbeen
tings tings
specihas not
has
fied.
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Category
Settings
Auto E-mail
Notification
Notification Message
Address List
Call Service
Out of Toner
Toner Almost Empty
Used Toner Bottle is Full
Used Toner Bottle is Almost Full
Add Staple
Paper Misfeed
Cover Open
Out of Paper
Almost Out of Paper
Hole Punch Receptacle is Full
Paper Tray Error
Output Tray Full
Unit Connection Error
Duplex Unit Error
Document Server Memory Full
Detailed Settings of Each Item
Sucked Toner Collection bottle is Full
Sucked Toner Collection bottle is Almost Full
Replace Cleaning Web
Waste Staple Receptacle is Full
209
Appendix
Category

ticaAvail Avail
tion has
able
able
not
SetSetbeen
tings tings
specihas not
has
fied.
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Settings
Restriction to System Config. Info.
Restriction to Network Config. Info.
Restriction to Printer Config. Info.
Restriction to Supply Info.
Restriction to Device Status Info.
Receivable E-mail Address/Domain Name
E-mail Language
On-demand E-mail Notification Subject

Notification
Notification Message
File Transfer
SMB User Name
SMB Password *1
FTP User Name
*1
NCP User Name
*1
FTP Password
NCP Password
210
User Settings
ticaAvail Avail
tion has
able
able
not
SetSetbeen
tings tings
specihas not
has
fied.
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Category
Settings
User Code Authentication - Printer Job Authentication
User Code - Available Function
*1
Basic Authentication - Printer Job Authentication
Windows Authentication - Printer Job Authentication
Windows Authentication - Domain Name
Windows Authentication - Group Settings

for Windows Authentication
LDAP Authentication - Printer Job Authentication
LDAP Authentication - LDAP Authentication
LDAP Authentication - Login Name Attribute
LDAP Authentication - Unique Attribute
Integration Server Authentication - Printer

Job Authentication
Integration Server Authentication - Integration Server Name
Integration Server Authentication - Authentication Type
Integration Server Authentication - Obtain URL
Integration Server Authentication - Domain Name
Integration Server Authentication - Group

Settings for Integration Server Authentication
You can only specify the password.
211
Appendix
Printer
Category
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
System
Host Interface
PCL Settings
212
Level 1 Level 2
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Memory Usage
Duplex
Copies
Blank Page Print
Reserved Job Waiting Time
Toner Saving
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Letterhead Setting
Edge to Edge Print
Tray Switching
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Courier Font
Extend A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Resolution
User Settings
Category
Settings
Menu Protect
Off
PS Settings
*1
PDF Settings *1
*1
Level 1 Level 2
Duplex
Blank Page Print
Data Format
Resolution
Resolution
PDF Temporary Password
PDF Fixed Password
PDF Group Password
213
Appendix
Interface
Category
Settings
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 1394
*2
Bluetooth *3
*1
Change Interface
Communication Mode
Channel
WEP Setting
WEP Key Status
Authentication Type
Key
Confirm Key
IP over 1394
SCSI print (SBP-2)
Operation Mode
Parallel Interface Parallel Timing

*4
USB
*1
*2
*3
*4
214

ticaAvail Avail
tion has
able
able
not
SetSetbeen
tings tings
specihas not
has
fied.
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Input Prime
USB

The Bluetooth interface unit option must be installed.
The IEEE 1284 interface board option must be installed.
User Settings
Network
Category
Protocol
Settings
Administrator
authentication has
not
been
specified.

been specified.
Avail- Available
able
SetSettings
tings
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
LPR
RSH/RCP
DIPRINT
FTP
IPP
Bonjour
NetWare
AppleTalk
SMB
SNMP
215
Appendix
Category
IPv4
216
Settings
Administrator
authentication has
not
been
specified.

been specified.
Avail- Available
able
SetSettings
tings
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
Host Name
DHCP
Domain Name
IPv4 Address
Subnet Mask
DDNS
WINS
Primary WINS Server
Secondary WINS Server
Scope ID
Default Gateway Address
DNS Server
LPR
RSH/RCP
DIPRINT
FTP
IPP
IPP Timeout
User Settings
Category
IPv6
NetWare
Settings
Administrator
authentication has
not
been
specified.

been specified.
Avail- Available
able
SetSettings
tings
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
IPv6 Address
Host Name
Domain Name
Stateless Address
Stateless Address Autoconfiguration
Default Gateway Address
DNS Server
LPR
RSH/RCP
DIPRINT
FTP
sftp
IPP
IPP Timeout
NetWare
Print Server Name
Logon Mode
File Server Name
NDS Tree
NDS Context Name
Operation Mode
Remote Printer No.
Job Timeout
Frame Type
Print Server Protocol
217
Appendix
Category
AppleTalk
SMB
Bonjour
218
Settings
Administrator
authentication has
not
been
specified.

been specified.
Avail- Available
able
SetSettings
tings
has not
has
been
been
specispecified.
fied.
AppleTalk
Printer Name
Zone Name
SMB
Workgroup Name
Computer Name
Comment
Notify Print Completion
Bonjour
Computer Name
Location
DIPRINT
LPR
IPP
Functions That Require Options
Functions That Require Options

The following functions require certain options and additional functions.
Hard Disk overwrite erases function
DataOverwriteSecurity unit
Data security for copying function
Copy Data Security Unit
PDF Direct Print function
PostScript unit
219
INDEX
A
Access Control, 129
Access Permission, 85
Address Book, 187
Address Management Tool, 187
Administrator, 4
Administrator Authentication, 4
Administrator Tools, 173, 174, 180, 184, 186
AppleTalk, 182
Authenticate Current Job, 154
Authentication and Access Limits, 3
Auto Erase Memory Setting, 108
Available Functions, 121
B
Bonjour, 182
C
Configuration flow (certificate issued by a
certificate authority), 140
Configuration flow (self-signed certificate), 140
D
Device Information, 178
Device Settings, 176, 181, 185, 187, 206
Driver Encryption Key, 134, 151
E
Edit, 174, 188, 189
Edit / Delete, 188, 189
Encrypt Address Book, 151
Encrypted Communication Mode, 145
Encryption Technology, 3
Enhance File Protection, 152
Erase All Memory, 108
F
File Administrator, 12, 117, 188
File Creator (Owner), 4
File Transfer, 172, 180
Full Control, 188, 189
220
G
General Features, 172, 174
General Settings, 175
Group Passwords for PDF Files, 134
H
Host Interface, 175
I
Initial Settings, 175
Input / Output, 174
Interface, 182, 214
Interface Settings, 172, 177, 180
IPv4, 182
IPv6, 182
J
Job, 185
L
List / Test Print, 174
Locked Print, 78
Login, 4
Logout, 4
M
Machine Administrator, 12, 117
Maintenance, 174, 184
Menu Protect, 117, 118
Methods of Erasing the Data, 108
N
NetWare, 182
Network, 177, 182, 215
Network Administrator, 12, 117
NIB Setup Tool, 183
O
Operational Requirements
for Windows Authentication, 42
Owner, 188
P
Parallel Interface, 172
Password for IPP Authentication, 134
Password for Stored Files, 85
Password Policy, 154
PCL Menu, 175
PDF Menu, 175
Print & Delete Scanner Journal, 155
Printer, 177, 185, 212
Printer Job Authentication, 63
PS Menu, 175
U
User, 4
User Administrator, 12, 117, 189
User Authentication, 4
User Management Tool, 178
W
Webpage, 177, 182, 185, 187
R
RC Gate, 177
Read-only, 188, 189
Registered User, 4, 189
Reset Device, 176
Reset Printer Job, 176
Restrict Adding of User Destinations, 152
Restrict Display of User Information, 152
Restrict Use of Destinations, 151
Restrict Use of Simple Encryption, 153
S
Scan Settings, 175
Security, 183
Send Settings, 175, 181
Service Mode Lock, 159
Settings by SNMP v1 and v2, 153
SMB, 182
SNMP, 182
SNMPv3, 182
SSDP, 182
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), 139
Stamp, 174
Supervisor, 12
System, 174, 184
System Settings, 180
T
Timer Settings, 172
Top Page, 176, 185
Type of Administrator, 117
221
MEMO
222
EN
USA
B235-7907
Copy/Document Server
Reference
Placing Originals
Copying
Connect Copy
Document Server
Appendix
Introduction
Important
Notes:
Caution:
Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine before reading this manual. (For details, see Machine Types, About This Machine.)
Type 1: 8090/DSm790/LD190/Aficio MP 9000
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Power Source
208 - 240V, 50/60Hz, 20A
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
see Power Connection, Troubleshooting.
Power Supply
The socket-outlet shall be installed near the product and shall be easily accessible.

About This Machine

Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as registering, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect the machine.
Troubleshooting
Security Reference
prevent the machine from unauthorized use. Also refer to this manual for the
procedures for registering administrators, as well as setting user and administrator authentication.
Printer Reference
Scanner Reference
Network Guide
Other manuals
UNIX Supplement
Note

dealer.
ii
What You Can Do with This Machine

Functions differ depending on machine type and options.
Reference
p.3 Functions Requiring Optional Configurations
Types of Duplex Copies

1-sided 2 Pages 2-sided 1 Page
See p.76 Duplex.
2-sided 1 Page 2-sided 1 Page

See p.76 Duplex.

See p.83 Two-Sided Combine.
GCBOOK0E
iii

ANP020S
A
B
Front
Back

GCSHVY5E
A
B
Front
Back

GCSHVY1E
iv

GCSHVY2E
A
B
Front
Back

GCSHVY6E
A
B
Front
Back
Bound Originals 2-sided Pages

See p.88 Booklet/Magazine.
Front/Back Bound Originals 2-sided Pages

Mix 1 & 2 Sided

See p.94 Mix 1 & 2 Sided.
GCKONZ0J
Copying Book Originals

1-sided 4 Pages Booklet
Open to left
GCBOOK0E
vi
Open to right
GCBOOK1E
2-sided 2 Pages Booklet

Open to left
GCAH010E
Open to right
GCAH020E
1-sided Magazine
Open to left
GCBOOK3E
vii
Open to right
GCBOOK4E
2-sided Magazine
Open to left
GCAH030E
Open to right
GCAH040E
viii
Combining Multiple Pages onto a Single Page

See p.80 One-Sided Combine.
GCSHVY7E
GCSHVY8J
GCSHVY3J
ix
2-sided 1 Page 1-sided 1 Page
GCSHVYOJ
GCSHVYBJ
GCSHVY4J
Copying Originals Such as Books

See p.86 Series Copies.
CP2B0100

Front/Back Bound Originals 2-sided Pages

xi
Copying 2-Sided Pages onto 1-Sided Pages

See p.86 Series Copies.
2-sided 1 Page 1-sided 2 Pages
CP2B0200
xii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
What You Can Do with This Machine..................................................................iii
Types of Duplex Copies ............................................................................................ iii
Copying Book Originals............................................................................................. vi
Combining Multiple Pages onto a Single Page ......................................................... ix
Copying Originals Such as Books............................................................................. xi
Copying 2-Sided Pages onto 1-Sided Pages........................................................... xii
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................2
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations....................................................3
Display Panel..........................................................................................................4
Simplified Display.......................................................................................................5
User Tools Menu (Copier / Document Server Features) ....................................6
1. Placing Originals
Originals ...............................................................................................................11
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals.......................................................11
Originals not recommended for the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) ......................12
Sizes Detectable by the Auto Paper Select .............................................................13
Sizes difficult to detect...........................................................................................14
Missing Image Area .................................................................................................15
Placing Originals..................................................................................................16
Original Orientation ..................................................................................................16
Reverse Orientation .................................................................................................18
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass.................................................................19
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder ......................................................20
Batch mode ..............................................................................................................21
SADF mode..............................................................................................................22
Mixed size mode ......................................................................................................23
Thin Mode ................................................................................................................24
Original size .............................................................................................................25
Regular sizes.........................................................................................................25
Custom sizes .........................................................................................................26
2. Copying
Basic Procedure...................................................................................................29
Interrupt Copy ..........................................................................................................30
Left Original Beeper .................................................................................................31
Copying onto Tab Stock...........................................................................................31
Surplus tab stock auto eject ..................................................................................33
When copying onto OHP Transparencies................................................................34
Auto Start .................................................................................................................34
xiii
xiv
Job Preset ................................................................................................................35

Job Preset display .................................................................................................35
To check job contents............................................................................................36
To change job contents after checking..................................................................36
To delete a job after checking its contents ............................................................37
Deleting a job.........................................................................................................37
Job List .................................................................................................................38
Job List screen .........................................................................................................38
Checking jobs in the print queue..............................................................................39
Changing the order of jobs.......................................................................................40
Holding print jobs .....................................................................................................41
Deleting jobs ............................................................................................................41
Checking Job History ...............................................................................................42
Copying from the Multi Bypass Tray .................................................................43
Setting the tab stock in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7) .............................................45
When copying onto Regular Size Paper ..................................................................46
When copying onto Custom Size Paper ..................................................................47
When copying onto Special Paper ...........................................................................48
Copier Functions .................................................................................................49
Adjusting Copy Image Density .................................................................................49
Auto image density ................................................................................................49
Manual image density............................................................................................50
Combined auto and manual image density ...........................................................50
Selecting the Original Type Setting..........................................................................51
Selecting Copy Paper ..............................................................................................52
Auto Paper Select..................................................................................................53
Manual Paper Select .............................................................................................53
Preset Reduce/Enlarge ............................................................................................54
Create Margin function ..........................................................................................56
Zoom ........................................................................................................................56
To select the ratio with [o] and [n].....................................................................57
To enter the ratio with the number keys ................................................................57
Auto Reduce/Enlarge ...............................................................................................58
Size Magnification ....................................................................................................59
Directional Magnification (%) ...................................................................................60
To enter the ratio with the number keys ................................................................61
To specify a ratio with [o] and [n] ......................................................................61
Directional Size Magnification (inch) ........................................................................62
Sort........................................................................................................................... 64
Sample copy..........................................................................................................65
Changing the Number of Sets ...............................................................................66
When memory is full ..............................................................................................66
Shift tray off in sort/stack .......................................................................................67
Separation .............................................................................................................67
Stack ........................................................................................................................68
Staple .......................................................................................................................69
Punch .......................................................................................................................72
3 Edges Full Bleed ...................................................................................................74
Z-fold ........................................................................................................................75
Using the Z-fold Support Tray ...............................................................................75
Z-fold positions and Z-folding Copies ....................................................................76
Duplex ......................................................................................................................76
Originals and copy orientation ...............................................................................79
One-Sided Combine.................................................................................................80
Two-Sided Combine.................................................................................................83
Series Copies...........................................................................................................86
Booklet/Magazine.....................................................................................................88
Creep Adjustment ....................................................................................................93
Mix 1 & 2 Sided ........................................................................................................94
Scanning Position ....................................................................................................95
Margin Adjustment ...................................................................................................97
Erase........................................................................................................................98
Border Erase (same width)..................................................................................100
Border Erase (different width)..............................................................................101
Center/Border Erase (same width) ......................................................................102
Center/Border Erase (different width)..................................................................103
Inside Erase.........................................................................................................104
Outside Erase......................................................................................................105
Background Numbering .........................................................................................106
Preset Stamp .........................................................................................................107
Changing the stamp position, size and density ...................................................109
User Stamp ............................................................................................................110
Changing the user stamp position .......................................................................112
To program the user stamp .................................................................................113
To delete the user stamp.....................................................................................115
Date Stamp ............................................................................................................116
To change the format of date ..............................................................................118
To change the date stamp position .....................................................................119
Page Numbering ....................................................................................................119
Changing the stamp position ...............................................................................122
Specifying the first printing page and start number
(P1,P2..., -1-,-2-..., P.1,P.2..., 1,2...) ........................................................122
Specifying the first printing page and start number (1/5,2/5).........................123
Specifying the first printing page and start number (1-1,1-2) ........................124
Stamp Text.............................................................................................................125
Changing the stamp position ...............................................................................126
Image Repeat.........................................................................................................127
Double Copies........................................................................................................128
Centering................................................................................................................130
Positive/Negative ...................................................................................................131
Covers....................................................................................................................132
Designate ...............................................................................................................134
Chapters.................................................................................................................135
Designation Sheet Copy ........................................................................................136
Blank Slip Sheets ...................................................................................................138
Slip Sheets .............................................................................................................139
Copy Face Up ........................................................................................................141
Storing Originals in the Document Server ......................................................142
Programs ............................................................................................................144
Storing a Program ..................................................................................................144
Changing a Stored Program ..................................................................................145
Deleting a Program ................................................................................................146
Recalling a Program...............................................................................................146
Programming Defaults in Initial Display .................................................................147
xv
3. Connect Copy
What is Connect Copy?.....................................................................................149
How It Works..........................................................................................................150
Machine Types and Options................................................................................150
Interrupt Copy......................................................................................................150
Before You Start ..................................................................................................151
Connect Copy Display Panel ............................................................................152
Display panel of the sub-machine ..........................................................................154
Using Connect Copy.......................................................................................... 155
Order of Copy Output.............................................................................................158
Auto Reset when using Connect Copy................................................................159
Auto Off ...............................................................................................................159
Exiting Connect Copy.............................................................................................159
Copying Stored Documents Using Connect Print ..................................................160
Using Job Preset in Connect Copy ..................................................................162
Connect Copy Job Flow .................................................................................... 164
When One of the Two Machines is Idle .................................................................164
Using the idle machine as the main machine (Connect Copy)............................165
Using the machine currently copying as the main machine (Connect Copy: Job Preset)....166
When Both Machines are in Use............................................................................166
When both machines are copying the same number of originals
(Connect Copy: Job Preset) ..............................................................................167
When one machines is copying a larger number of originals (Connect Copy: Job Preset) ...168
4. Document Server
xvi
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions ..................... 169

Document Server Display ......................................................................................170
Simplified Display...................................................................................................171
Preview Display......................................................................................................172
Using the Document Server.............................................................................. 174
Storing Data ...........................................................................................................174
To register or change a user name
(When using a user name registered to the Address Book)..............................176
(When using a user name not registered to the Address Book)........................177
(When no name is registered to the Address Book)..........................................178
To change a file name .........................................................................................178
To set or change a Password..............................................................................179
Changing User Name, File Name or Password of a Stored Document .................180
Checking the Details of a Stored Document ..........................................................181
Searching for a Stored Document..........................................................................182
To search by file name ........................................................................................182
To search by user name......................................................................................183
Printing a Stored Document ...................................................................................184
When Interrupting Printing...................................................................................185
Changing Number of Print Copies while Printing is in Progress..........................186
Sample Print ........................................................................................................186
Printing the First Page .........................................................................................187
Printing a Specified Page ....................................................................................188
Printing a Specified Range ..................................................................................188
Edit File ..................................................................................................................189

Combining Files...................................................................................................189
Inserting Documents............................................................................................190
Deleting Pages ....................................................................................................190
Copying Documents ............................................................................................191
Print Backup ........................................................................................................192
Deleting a Document..............................................................................................192
Displaying a Document in Document Server with Web Image Monitor..................193
Downloading Stored Documents............................................................................194
5. Appendix
Function Compatibility ......................................................................................195
Supplementary Information .............................................................................. 197
INDEX....................................................................................................... 208
xvii
xviii
Notice
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no
responsibility for its completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal
advisor.

Note
For proper use of this product, be sure to read About This Machine first.
Supplementary information about the copier mode is described in Supplementary Information.

Reference
p.197 Supplementary Information
Symbols
Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these notes.
They can be found in the Safety Information section of About This Machine.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.
Functions Requiring Optional

Configurations
Certain functions require special machine configuration and extra options as follows.
Shift Sort: Finisher SR5000 and Booklet Finisher BK5000
Stack: Finisher SR5000 and Booklet Finisher BK5000
Staple: Finisher SR5000 and Booklet Finisher BK5000
Staple (Center): Finisher SR5000 and Booklet Finisher BK5000
Punch: Finisher SR5000 with punch unit
Z-fold: Finisher SR5000 and Z-folding Unit
Connect Copy: Copy Connector
Multi bypass tray: Multi bypass tray (Tray 7)
Note
Display Panel
. Keys appearing as
cannot be used.
Initial copy display
APG060S
1. Original function, Image Density

and Special Original function.
2. Operational status and messages.
3. You can register up to two frequently
used reduce/enlarge ratios other than
the fixed reduce/enlarge ratios. See
Reproduction Ratio, General Settings Guide.
4. Numbers of originals scanned into

memory, copies set, and copies made.
5. Sort, Stack, Staple functions.

6. Displays available functions. Press
a function name to display its menu.
For example, press [Reduce/ Enlarge]
to switch the Reduce/Enlarge menu.
7. A clip mark indicates the currently selected function.
Simplified Display
APG044S
Example of a simplified display
APG061S
1. [Key Color]
Press to change the key color and increase
the brightness of the display panel.
Note
User Tools Menu (Copier / Document

Server Features)
This section describes items that can be specified on the copier initial screen.
Copier initial screen can be displayed by pressing the {User Tools} key. For more
information about how to set up these items, see General Settings Guide.
General Features
Item
Description
Auto Image Density Prior- You can set whether Auto Image Density is On or Off when
ity
the machine is turned on, reset, or modes are cleared.
Original Orientation in
Duplex Mode
You can set the original orientation when making two-sided copies.
You can set the copy orientation when making two-sided copies.
Reserve Job Mode
You can set whether to reset the mode to the initial state or return
to the mode in use before the reserved operation was started when
you return to the initial screen after reserved copying finishes.
Reservation Screen Autooff Timer
You can set the time required until the display is switched to the
reserved first job display after reservation is set. If you select
Switch, use the numbers key to enter the time (10-99 seconds).
The default setting is 15 seconds.
Max. Copy Quantity
The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 9999. The
default setting is 9999 sheets.
Manual Original Counter

Reset
You can set whether to enable the document counter reset key.
Auto Tray Switching
When the paper runs out during copying, it can be automatically

fed from a substitute paper feed tray, irrespective of the orientation of paper in that tray provided it is the same size as that set
in the other paper feed tray during automatic paper selection. This
function is called Auto Tray Switching. You can set whether to
perform the Auto Tray Switching.
Text
You can adjust the edge level of the finished image. The outline of
a character becomes soft when you select Soft. The outline of a
character can be sharply copied when you select Sharp.
Text / Photo
You can select which has priority, photographs or characters,

when an original contains both. If you select Normal, character
and photo quality is balanced in the copy.
Photo
You can adjust the quality of finished images according to the type
of photo original. Printed photo is set for magazine and catalog
photo originals. You can smooth photos by selecting Printed
photo. Glossy Photo is set for the silver-salt photos printed
from photo film. If you select Normal, you can finish characters
that exist together in a photo block.
Pale
You can adjust the image quality of a pale original so the copy is
at normal density.
Generation Copy
You can adjust the image quality to prevent characters in the copy
becoming too thick.
Item
Description
Dark Background
You can set whether Deep document can be selected as an original type.
You can set which items will appear as the function buttons on the
basic display.
Image Adjustment Priority You can set the items, to be preferentially displayed, to the function buttons on the basic display.
Paper Display
You can choose to have the available paper trays and sizes shown
on the initial display.
You can have the original types shown on the initial display.
You can set whether to show the original types on the initial display.

Defaults
You can set up to three items for displaying on the initial display
from five items.
You can set whether to use a buzzer to alert you when you forget
to remove an original.
Job End Call
You can set whether to generate a buzzer sound (pi) when a

copy is completed. If Panel key sound when performing system
settings is set to On, the buzzer sounds four times if copying is
interrupted because the paper has run out or become jammed.
This notifies you that the copy job could not be completed.
Connect Copy Key Display You can set whether to display [Connect Copy]. If you select Off,
the key does not appear and a master unit cannot be obtained.
Switch Original Counter
Display
You can set whether to count the two-sided documents by number

of sheets or pages.
Customize Function: Copi- A maximum of four often-used functions can be registered to the
er
function keys.
A maximum of four often-used functions can be registered to the

function keys. Registered functions can also be changed.
Reproduction Ratio
Item
Description
Shortcut R / E
You can register up to two frequently used Reduce/Enlarge ratios

other than the fixed Reduce/Enlarge ratio and have them shown
on the initial display. You can also change registered Reduce/ Enlarge ratios.
R / E Ratio
You can specify the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear
if [Reduce/ Enlarge] is pressed on the copier screen.
R / E Ratio Priority
You can set the ratio with priority when [Reduce/ Enlarge] is
pressed.
You can set a Reduce/Enlarge ratio when registering Create Margin in a shortcut key. Enter a ratio using number keys (in the range
of 90 to 99%). The ratio is set to 93% by default.
Edit
Item
Description
Front Margin: Left / Right
You can specify left and right margins on the front side of copies
in Margin Adjustment mode.
Back Margin: Left / Right
You can specify left and right margins on the back side of copies
Front Margin: Top / Bottom
You can specify top and bottom margins on the front side of copies in Margin Adjustment mode.
Back Margin: Top / Bottom
You can specify top and bottom margins on the back side of copies
1 Sided2 Sided Auto

Margin: TtoT
In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on

the back side. The margin is set to the same value of Back Margin:
Left / Right.
1 Sided2 Sided Auto

Margin: TtoB
In 1 sided to 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify the margins on

the back side. The value set for Back Margin: Top / Bottom is
used.
You can specify the creep binding margin width.
Erase Border Width
You can specify the width for erasing border in the range of 2 to
99 mm (in units of 1 mm).
Erase Original Shadow in

Combine
In Combine mode, you can specify whether to erase a 3 mm, 0.1"

boundary margin around all four edges of each original.
Erase Center Width
You can specify the width of the erased center margins with this
function.
Front Cover Copy in Com- You can make a combined copy on the front cover sheet when you
bine
select Front Cover mode.
Orientation: Booklet, Mag- You can select the orientation of copies to open when using Bookazine
let or Magazine mode.
Copy on Designating Page

in Combine
You can specify whether to make a combined copy on the inserted

slip sheets in Desig./Chapter mode.
Image Repeat Separation

Line
You can select a separation line from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
Double Copies Separation

Line
You can select a separation line using the Double Copies function
from: None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
You can select a separation line using the Combine function from:
None, Solid, Broken A, Broken B, or Crop Marks.
Copy Back Cover
When copying the back cover, you can specify whether to have the
back cover outside (outside page) or inside (inside page).
You can select the copy position of bottom or left page according
to top or right page as the original image position.
Stamp
Item
Description
Size
You can set the size of the numbers.
Density
You can set the density of the numbers.
Preset Stamp
Stamp Language
You can select the language of the message printed in Stamp

mode.
Stamp Priority
You can select the stamp type given priority when [Preset Stamp]
is pressed.
Stamp Format
User Stamp
Program / Delete Stamp
You can register, change, or delete these designs as user stamps. You
can register up to five custom stamps with your favorite designs.
Stamp Format: 1-5
You can specify how each of registered User Stamps 1 to 5 is printed.
Date Stamp
Format
You can select the date format for Date Stamp mode.
Font
You can select the Date Stamp font.
Size
You can set the Date Stamp size.
Superimpose
You can have the Date Stamp printed in white when it overlaps
black parts of the image.
Stamp Setting
You can specify how Date Stamp is printed.
Page Numbering
Stamp Format
You can select the page number format given priority when [Page
Numbering] is pressed.
Font
You can select the font in Page Numbering mode.
Size
You can set the size of the stamp printed in Page Numbering
mode.
You can set the position of the duplex back page number printed
in Duplex mode.
You can set page numbering when using the Combine function
and the Page Numbering function together.
Stamp Position on Designating Page
You can select to print the page number onto slip sheets when using the Designate function set to [Copy] and the Page Numbering
function together.
Stamp Position
Superimpose
You can have page numbers printed in white when they overlap
Page Numbering Initial

Letter
Switch the page print language.
Stamp Text
Font
You can select the font in Stamp Text mode.
Item
Description
Size
You can set the size of the stamp printed in Stamp Text mode.
Superimpose
You can have the Stamp Text printed in white when it overlaps
Stamp Setting
You can specify how Stamp Text is printed.
Input / Output
Item
Description
SADF Auto Reset
In SADF mode, an original must be set within a specified time after the previous original has been fed. You can adjust this time
from 3 to 99 seconds in increments of 1 second. The timing is set
to 5 second(s) by default.
Copy Eject Face Method in

Glass Mode
You can specify the way in which copies are delivered when copying an original placed on the exposure glass.
Memory Full Auto Scan

Restart
When memory becomes full while scanning originals, the machine can make copies of scanned originals first, and then automatically proceed scanning remaining originals.
Sort / Stack Shift Tray Set- You can specify whether to shift the Shift Tray in sort mode or
ting
stack mode.
You can specify the number of copy pages for inserting the Separation Sheet from 1 to 999 pages in increments of 1 page.
Staple Position
Specify which Top 2 staples or Bottom shown on the initial display

with priority. The optional Finisher SR5000 is required to use this
function.
Punch Type
Specify which punch type (2 holes or 3 holes) has priority to be

shown on the initial display. The optional Finisher SR5000 and
Multi-hole Punch Unit are required to use this function.
Specify the stapling position. The optional Finisher SR5000 is required to use this function.
Specify the punch type. The optional Finisher SR5000 and Multihole Punch Unit are required to use this function.
You can select which key is displayed with higher priority for
Finishing Types on the Simplified Screen.
Administrator Tools
10
Item
Description
Menu Protect
Using Menu Protect, you can limit the settings available to users
other than the administrator.
1. Placing Originals
This chapter describes the types of originals you can set and how to place originals.
Originals
This section describes the types of originals that can be placed, paper sizes that
are automatically detected, and missing image area.
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals

The following describes recommended paper sizes and non-recommended originals for the ADF.
Metric version
Original location
Original size
Original weight
Exposure glass
Up to A3
ADF
One-sided originals:A3L - A5KL
52-128 g/m2
(45-110 kg)
Two-sided originals: A3L-A5KL
52-105 g/m2
(45-90 kg)
Thin Paper mode: A3L-A5KL
40-128 g/m2
(35-110 kg)
Original location
Original size
Original weight
Exposure glass
Up to 11" 17"
ADF
One-sided originals:
11" 17"L-51/2" 81/2"KL
14-34 lb.
Two-sided originals:
11" 17"L-51/2" 81/2"KL
14-28 lb.
Thin Paper mode:

11" 17"L-51/2" 81/2"KL
11-34 lb.
Inch version
Note
The maximum number of originals that can be placed in the ADF is about 100
(paper weight is 80 g/m2, 20 lb.).
The weight range for originals when using Mixed Size mode is 52-81 g/m2
(13.8-21.5 lb.).
11
Placing Originals
Originals not recommended for the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

Placing the following types of originals in the ADF can cause paper misfeeds or
light & black lines or result in damage to the originals. Place these originals on
the exposure glass instead.
Originals other than those specified on Sizes and Weights of Recommended
Originals.
Stapled or clipped originals
Perforated or torn originals
Curled, folded, or creased originals
Pasted originals
Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper
Originals with perforated lines
Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
Sticky originals such as translucent paper
Thin, highly flexible originals
Thick originals such as postcards
Bound originals such as books
Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
Originals that are still wet with ink or white-out.
Note
The original might become dirty if it is written with a pencil or a similar tool.
12
Originals
Sizes Detectable by the Auto Paper Select

Sizes detectable by the exposure glass and ADF are:
Metric version
Size
A3
L
B4
JIS
L
A4
K
L
Original
location
Exposure
glass
B5
JIS
K
L
A5
K
A5
L
B6
JIS
K
L
11"
17"
L
81/2" 81/2" 8K
L *2
13"
11"
K
L *1
L
16K
K
L *2
ADF
*1
*2
You can select from 81/2" 13", 81/4" 13", and 8" 13" with the User Tools (System Settings). See System Settings, General Settings Guide.
8K: 390 mm - 267 mm, 16K: 267 mm - 195 mm
Inch version
Size
A3
L
A4
K
L
Exposure
glass
ADF
Original
location
*1
11"
17"
L
81/2" 81/2" 51/2" 51/2" 81/2"
14"
11" 81/2" 81/2" 13"
L
K
K
L L *1
L
11"
15"
L
10"
14"
L
8"
10"
L
8"
13"
L
81/4"
13"
L
You can select from 81/2" 13", 81/4" 13", and 8" 13" with the User Tools (System Settings). See System Settings, General Settings Guide.
13
Placing Originals
Exposure glass
CP01AEE
ADF
AAE044E
Note
If you want to use the ADF to copy custom size originals that are between 432 mm
and 1260 mm in length, contact your service representative.
When you copy custom size originals, make sure you specify the size of the
originals. If not, the image may not be copied properly.
Reference
p.26 Custom sizes
System Settings, General Settings Guide
Sizes difficult to detect

It is difficult for the machine to automatically detect the sizes of the following
types of originals, so select the paper size manually.
Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
Dark originals with a lot of text and drawings
Originals which partially contain a solid image
Originals which have solid images at their edges
14
Originals
Missing Image Area

Even if you place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass correctly, 3 mm
(0.1") margins on all four sides might not be copied.
GCGENK2E
A
B
C
D
2 1.5mm, 0.08" 0.06"

2 n 2 mm/2 o 1.7mm, 0.08" n 0.08"/0.08" o 0.07"
2 1.5 mm, 0.08" 0.06"
4 2 mm, 0.16" 0.08"
15
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
This section describes the procedure for placing originals on the exposure glass
and in the ADF.
Take care to place originals after any correction fluid and ink has completely
dried. Not taking this precaution could cause marks on the exposure glass that
will be copied onto paper.
Note
For original sizes you can set, see Originals.
Reference
p.11 Originals
Original Orientation
When using the ADF, place the original face up.
When using the exposure glass, place the original face down.
ZGVX010E
A
B
16
ADF
Exposure glass
Placing Originals
When copying A3K, 11" 17"K, or B4 JISK size originals, select

as the
Original Orientation. The machine then rotates copy image by 90. This is useful
for copying large originals using the Staple, Duplex, Combine, or Stamp functions.
For example, to copy A3K or 11" 17"K originals with the Staple function selected:
AMG017S
A Select the original orientation ([
] or [
]).
Note
It is recommended that you use the Original Orientation function with the
Auto Paper Select or Auto Reduce / Enlarge function.
17
Placing Originals
Reverse Orientation
This function rotates the copy image by 180 (
or
).
This is useful for copying torn originals. For example, if the left side of the original is damaged and is difficult to set, position it as shown below.
APG004S
A Press [Reverse Orientation].

Note
It is recommended you use this function together with the Auto Paper Select or Auto Reduce/Enlarge function.
Copy results may differ depending on the combination of selected functions.
18
Placing Originals
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass

Place originals on the exposure glass.
Important
Do not lift the ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover of the ADF might open or
be damaged.
A Lift the ADF.

Be sure to lift the ADF by more than 30 degrees. Otherwise, the size of the
original might not be detected correctly.
B Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be
aligned to the rear left corner.
Start with the first page to be copied.
APF022S
A
B
Positioning mark
Left scale
C Lower the ADF.

Note
When you place originals on the exposure glass, you can specify the way
copies are delivered.
Reference
Input/Output, General Settings Guide.
19
Placing Originals
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder

Place originals in ADF.
There are four types of special originals. Setting should be made in the following situations:
When placing originals consisting of more than 100 pages:

See Batch mode.
When placing originals one by one:
See SADF mode.
When placing originals of various sizes:
See Mixed size mode.
When placing custom size originals:
See Custom sizes.
When copying originals onto thin paper:
See Thin mode.
A Adjust the guide to the original size.

B Set the aligned originals face up into the ADF.
Do not stack originals beyond the limit mark.
The last page should be on the bottom.
Be sure not to block the sensor or load the original untidily. Doing so may
cause the machine to detect the size of the scanned image incorrectly or display a paper misfeed message. Also, be sure not to place originals or other objects on the top cover. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
APF023S
A
B
Limit mark
Document guide
Note
Straighten curls in the originals before placing them on the ADF.
To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the original before placing it on the ADF.
Set the original squarely.
20
Placing Originals
Reference
p.21 Batch mode
p.22 SADF mode

p.23 Mixed size mode
p.24 Thin Mode
p.26 Custom sizes
Batch mode
In Batch mode, the machine copies an original of more than 100 pages as one
document, even if it is placed on the ADF in parts.
Important
Place special originals, such as translucent paper, one by one.
A Press [Batch].
B Place the first part of the original, and then press the {Start} key.
C After the first part of the original has been fed, place the next part, then
press the {Start} key.
Note
If [Batch] is not displayed on the screen, set [Batch] with [Special Original Display Defaults]. See Copier/Document Server Features, General Settings
Guide.
When [SADF] is displayed in step A, set [SADF] with [Special Original Display
Defaults]. See Copier/Document Server Features, General Settings
Guide.
To copy subsequent originals in this mode, repeat step C.
When the Sort, Combine or 1 Sided2 Sided mode has been set, press the
{q} key after all originals have been scanned.
Reference
Copier/Document Server Features, General Settings Guide
21
Placing Originals
SADF mode
In SADF mode, even when an original is placed page by page in the ADF, each
page is automatically fed when placed.
Important
You should make a setting so that [SADF] is displayed. See Copier/Document Server Features, General Settings Guide.
Press [SADF].
B Place one page of an original, and then press the {Start} key.
C When the machine instructs you to place another original, place the next page.
The second and subsequent pages will be fed automatically without pressing
the {Start} key.
APF027S
Note
If [SADF] is not displayed on the screen, set [SADF] with [Special Original Display Defaults]. See Copier/Document Server Features, General Settings
Guide.
When the Sort, Combine or 1 Sided2 Sided mode has been set, press the
{q} key after all originals have been scanned.
Reference
Input/Output, General Settings Guide
22
Placing Originals
Mixed size mode

In Mixed size mode, you can place originals of various sizes in the ADF at the
same time if their widths are the same.
Important
When placing originals of different sizes in the ADF and making copies without using the Mixed size mode, paper might become jammed or parts of the
original image might not be copied.
You can place originals that weigh 52-81 g/m2 (45-70 kg).
The sizes of the originals that can be placed in this mode are follows:
Metric version
A3L and A4K, B4 JISL and B5 JISK, A4L and A5K
Inch version
11" 17"L and 81/2" 11"K, 81/2" 11"L and 51/2" 81/2"K
You can place two different sizes of originals in the ADF at the same time.
A Press [Mixed Sizes].
B Align the rear and left edges of the originals as shown in the illustration.
ANP073S
A
B
Place the originals into the ADF

Vertical size
C Adjust the guide to the original size.

D Place the originals in ADF.
E Press the {Start} key.
23
Placing Originals
Note
If [Mixed Sizes] is not displayed on the screen, set [Mixed Sizes] with [Special
Original Display Defaults]. See Copier/Document Server Features, General
Settings Guide.
Reference
Thin Mode
A Press [Thin Paper].
B Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.

Note
If [Thin Paper] is not displayed on the screen, set [Thin Paper] with [Special
Settings Guide.
Reference
24
Placing Originals
Original size
Specify the size of the originals.
Regular sizes
Select the size of the originals from the regular sizes.
A Press [Original Size].
B Press [Regular Size].
C Select the size of original, and then press [OK] .

D Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
25
Placing Originals
Custom sizes
When placing custom size originals in the ADF, specify the size of the originals.
Important
Paper that has a vertical length of 128297 mm (5.1"-11.6") and a horizontal
length of 128432 mm (5.1"-17") can be placed with this function.
A Press [Original Size].
B Press [Custom Size].

C Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
D Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
E Press [OK].
F Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
26
Placing Originals
Note
If [Original Size] is not displayed on the screen, set [Original Size] with [Special
Settings Guide.
If you make a mistake in step C or D, press [Clear] or the {Clear} key, and
then enter the value again.
To register the custom size you have entered, press [Program]. A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes]. Press [Recall] to specify a registered custom size.
Reference
27
Placing Originals
28
2. Copying
This chapter describes the procedure for making copies in various modes.
Basic Procedure
This section describes the basic procedure for making copies.
Important
When User Code Authentication is set, enter your user code (up to eight digits) with the number keys so that the machine accepts copy jobs. See Administrator Tools, General Settings Guide.
When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set, enter your login user name
and user password so that the machine accepts copy jobs. Ask the user administrator for the login user name and login password. For details, see
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed, About This Machine.
A Make sure Ready appears on the screen.

If any other function is displayed, press the {Copy} key on the left side of the
control panel.
Initial copy screen
B Make sure no previous settings remain.

When there are previous settings remaining, press the {Clear Modes} key and
enter the setting again.
C Place your originals.

D Make desired settings.
E Enter the number of copies using the number keys.
The maximum copy quantity that can be set is 9999.
29
Copying

The machine starts copying.
When placing originals on the exposure glass, press the {q} key after all
originals are scanned.
Copies are delivered face down.
Note
Always log off when you have finished using the machine to prevent unauthorized users from using the machine.
You can specify whether copies are output face up or face down.
To stop the machine during a multi-copy run, press the {Stop} key.
To cancel all copy jobs and return the machine to the default condition,
press the {Clear Modes} key.
To clear entered values, press the {Clear} key or [Cancel] on the screen.
To confirm settings, press [Check Modes].
Reference
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed, About This Machine
Administrator Tools, General Settings Guide

Interrupt Copy
Use this function to interrupt a long copy job to make urgently needed copies.
A Press the {Interrupt} key.
APG050S
B The machine stops scanning. Remove the originals that were being copied.
C Place the originals you want to copy.
The machine starts making copies.
E When copying is complete, remove the originals and copies.

30
Basic Procedure
F Press the {Interrupt} key again.

The interrupt key indicator goes off.
G Replace the originals that you were copying, and then press the {Start} key.
Following message Reset x original(s)., replace the originals that you
were copying.
Note
The previous copy job settings are restored. Simply press the {Start} key to
continue copying from where it left off.
Left Original Beeper

The beeper sounds and an error message is displayed when you leave your originals on the exposure glass after copying.
Note
For details, see Copier/Document Server Features, General Settings Guide.
Reference
Copying onto Tab Stock

You can copy onto tab stock.
GCINDX0E
31
Copying
Important
Before using this function, set the tray for tab stock and set the position of the
index tab. See Items of Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide.
2
GCINDX1E
You can set the tab stock in the Large Capacity Tray (trays 4-5), Wide Large
Capacity Tray (trays 4-6) and multi bypass tray (tray 7).
Set the tab stock in the tray placing the tab side outwards.
When setting tab stock, always use the tab sheet fence.
Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
APF081S
Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT)
APF054S
A Select the paper tray where the tab stock is set.

B Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
32
Basic Procedure
Note
Check the position of the index tab to avoid cropping the image.
Set the tab stock with the side to be copied facing down.
Tab stock is always fed starting from the top tab.
GCINDX2E
Originals
B Tab stock
C Copies
When a paper jam has occurred, check the order of originals and tab stock,
and then restart copying.
Reference
Items of Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide
Surplus tab stock auto eject

When copying onto tab stock but not using all the tab stock for each copy, remaining sheets of tab stock are automatically ejected.
Before using this function, specify the number of sheets of tab stock (Number of
Tabs) in one set. For details, see Items of Tray Paper Settings, General Settings
Guide.
For example, if you use three of five tabs that form a set in a tray and insert slip
sheets using the Designate function, the unused 4th and 5th tab sheets are automatically ejected when the first copy is completed.
APG048S
33
Copying
Note
If you set [Number of Tabs] to [Off], surplus tab stock sheets for each copy are
not ejected.
Reference
When copying onto OHP Transparencies

When copying onto OHP transparencies, select the type and size of paper.
Important
We recommend that you use specified OHP transparencies.
OHP transparencies must be loaded face up in the tray with the notched corner of the sheet in the appropriate corner of the tray.
To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan paper before placing it
on the tray.
When copying onto OHP transparencies, remove copied sheets one by one.
A Select the paper tray where OHP transparencies are set.

C When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Auto Start
Copying starts immediately when the machine is ready.
A Make your settings while Select
copy mode, then press the Start

key. and Scanning originals can be started. are displayed alternately.
B Place the originals.

The machine scans the original.
Copying starts automatically once the machine is ready.
34
Basic Procedure
Job Preset
You can set up the next copy job in the document server while the current one is
processing.
When the current copy job is finished, the next copy job will start automatically.
A Press [New Job] when Copying... appears.
B Be sure message Ready appears, and then set up the next copy job.
C Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
All originals are scanned.
After the current copy job, the next copy job starts automatically.
Job Preset display

The preset jobs appear as shown below.
APG070S
1. Job being printed

2. Job number
3. Waiting Job
Note
When more than ten jobs are set up including jobs for other functions, scroll
keys appear.
35
Copying
To check job contents

You can check and change the contents of preset jobs. You also can delete preset
jobs.
A Select the job number you want to check.

B Press [Change Job].
C Check contents.
D Press [OK].
To change job contents after checking
You can change the contents of preset jobs.
A Select the job number you want to change.

C Check job contents.

D Change contents, and then press [OK].
E Press [Change] in the confirmation dialog box.
36
Basic Procedure
To delete a job after checking its contents

You can delete the contents of preset jobs.
A Select the job number you want to change.

C Check job contents.

D Press [Delete Job].
E Press [Yes].
Deleting a job
A Select the job number you want to delete.

To interrupt copying, press [Stop Printing] at the right bottom of the display,
and then proceed to step C.
B Press [Delete Job].
C Press [Delete] in the confirmation dialog box.

37
Copying
Job List
Jobs printed using Copy, Document Server, or Printer mode are temporarily
stored in the machine, and then executed in order. The Job List function allows
you to manage these jobs. For example, you can cancel incorrect job settings or
print an urgent document.
Note
You cannot use the Job List function when Interrupt Copy is active.
Job List screen

This section explains displays and icons that appear in the Job List screen.
The Job List screen varies depending on whether [Job Order] is selected with
Print Priority for the System Settings. For details about the setting procedure, see
System Settings, General Settings Guide.
When [Job Order] is not selected:

The job list is displayed for each of the functions.
APG017S
When [Job Order] is selected:

The job list is displayed for all functions in the order of print jobs.
APG018S
38
Job List
A
B
C
D
Switches between job lists for each function.

Switches between [Current / Waiting Job List] and [Job History].
Displays reserved job numbers.
Displays the function used to print jobs.
: Job printed using copy function.
: Job printed using printer function.
: Job printed using Document Server function.
: Job printed using DeskTopBinder.
: Job printed using Web Image Monitor.
Reference
System Settings, General Settings Guide
Checking jobs in the print queue

You can check the contents of jobs in the print queue.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job you want to check.
C Press [Details], and then check the contents.

D Press [Exit].
39
Copying
Changing the order of jobs

You can change the order in which print jobs in the job list are served:
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job whose order you want to change.
C Press [Change Order].

D Change the order using [Top], [Previous], or [Next].
E Press [OK].
40
Job List
Holding print jobs

The machine holds jobs that are queued and currently printing.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job(s) to hold.
C Press [Suspend Printing].

Deleting jobs
You can delete job that is queued or currently printing.
A Press [Job List].

B Select the job you want to delete.
C Press [Delete Reservation].

D Press [OK].
Note
To delete multiple print jobs, select them in step B.
41
Copying
Checking Job History

You can view the history contents of printed jobs.
A Press [Job List].

B Press [Job History].
A list of completed print jobs appears.
C Press [Details] to check the contents of the displayed jobs.

D Press [Exit].
42
Copying from the Multi Bypass Tray

The multi bypass tray allows you to copy non-standard paper.
Important
Following paper sizes can be copied from the multi bypass tray:
When using the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
Vertical: 100-305.0 mm (3.9"-12"), Horizontal: 140-458 mm (5.5"-18")
When using the Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT)
Vertical: 100-330.2 mm (3.9"-13"), Horizontal: 140-458 mm (5.5"-18")
The machine can detect the following sizes as regular size copy paper:
A3L, B4 JISL, A4K, B5 JISK, A5L, A6L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"KL,
8" 13"L, 51/2" 81/2"KL,12" 18"L. If you want to use the size of paper
other than the above, be sure to specify the size.
The maximum number of sheets you can load into the multi bypass tray depends on paper type. The number should not exceed the upper limit.
A Set the side fences to the paper size.

B Place paper in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7).
APF028S
C Adjust the side fences again to ensure they properly fit the paper size.
D Set the end fence.
To remove the end fence, slide it to the right by pressing the stopper down.
APF029S
43
Copying
E Press the elevator switch on the multi bypass tray (Tray 7).
2
APF030S
The green lamp of the elevator switch is blinking while the original table is
going up and down, and keeps lit when it stops.
Press the elevator switch to move down the original table if you want to either
add paper or remove jammed ones.
F Select the multi bypass tray (Tray 7) on the control panel.

G Press the {q} key.
H Select paper size and type.
I Press [OK].
J Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.
K When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
When the Sort function is selected, press the {q} key after all originals
have been scanned.
Reference
Copy Paper, About This Machine
44
Setting the tab stock in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7)
A Set the tab stock in the multi bypass tray (Tray 7), and fit the side fences to
the tab stock.
APF031S
B Attach the back fence to the end fence, and then set the end fence.
APF032S
C Select [Tab Stock] in special paper settings.

Reference
p.31 Copying onto Tab Stock
45
Copying
When copying onto Regular Size Paper

Makes copies onto regular size paper from the multi bypass tray.
A Fit the side fence to the paper size, and then place paper in the multi bypass
tray (Tray 7).
B Fit the end fence to the paper, and then press the elevator switch on the
multi bypass tray (Tray 7).
C Select the multi bypass tray (Tray 7) on the control panel.

D Press the {q} key.
E Press [Select Regular Size].
F Select the paper size.

G Press [OK] twice.
46
When copying onto Custom Size Paper

Makes copies onto custom size paper from the multi bypass tray.
tray (Tray 7).

E Press [Program Custom Size].
F Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then
press [q].
G Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press
[q].
H Press [OK] twice.

Note
If you make a mistake in step F or G, press [Clear] or the {Clear} key, and
then enter the value again.
To register the custom size entered in G, press [Program] and then press [Exit] in the confirmation screen.
47
Copying
When copying onto Special Paper

To copy onto OHP transparencies, tracing paper, thick paper, or tab stock, you
must first specify their type and size.
To prevent paper jams when placing multiple sheets at once, fan the sheets before placing them on the tray.
tray (Tray 7).

E Select the paper type: [OHP (Transparency)], [Translucent Paper], [Thick Paper], or
[Tab Stock].
If you select [Tab Stock], specify the shift value using [] or []. If you select
[On], use the number keys to specify the tab stock value, and then press the
{q} key.
F Select the paper size.

G Press [OK] twice.
H Place the original, and then press the {Start} key.
I When the copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes} key to clear the settings.
Note
If you have selected thick paper in Special Paper, you cannot have copies
delivered face down.
48
Copier Functions
Copier Functions
This section describes the copy functions.
Adjusting Copy Image Density
There are three types of adjustment available.
Auto Image Density

The machine automatically adjusts the image density by scanning the densities of originals. Dark texture originals (such as newspaper or recycled paper)
will be copied so that background will not be reproduced.
Manual image density
You can adjust the general density of the original in nine increments.
Combined auto and manual image density
Adjusts the density of an image only for dark texture originals.
Auto image density
The machine automatically adjusts the image density by scanning the densities
of originals. Dark texture originals (such as newspaper or recycled paper) will
be copied so that background will not be reproduced.
A Make sure that [Auto Density] is selected.
49
Copying
Manual image density

You can adjust the general density of the original in nine increments.
A [Auto Density] is selected, press [Auto Density] to cancel it.

B Press [W] or [V] to adjust the image density. The density indicator {
moves.
Combined auto and manual image density

Adjusts the density of an image only for dark texture originals.
A Make sure [Auto Density] is selected.

B Press [W] or [V] to adjust the image density. The density indicator {
moves.
50
Copier Functions
Selecting the Original Type Setting

Select one of the following 6 types to match your originals:
Text
When originals contain only text (no pictures).
Text/Photo
When originals contain photographs or pictures alongside the text.
Photo
When you want to reproduce the delicate tones of photographs and pictures.
When copying developed photographs:
When copying photographs or pictures that are printed on paper (e.g. magazines):
When copying copies or originals generated by printers:
Pale
When you want to reproduce originals that have lighter lines in pencil, or
faintly copied slips. Faint lines are copied with greater clarity.
Generation Copy
When originals are copies (generation copies), the copy image can be reproduced sharply and clearly.
Dark Background
When you copy originals with dark background such as color tab stock (orange, green, or blue), you can remove the background color in three levels.
A Select the original type, and then press [OK].
Note
To select the original type when [Original Type Display] is set to [Display] under Copier and Document Server Features, press [Original Type].
To display [Dark Background], you must set [Dark Background] to [On] and
[Original Type Display] to [Hide] under Copier/Document Server Features,
and then press [Original Type].
If you select [Dark Background], the auto image density function is disabled,
but the manual image density function is enabled.
51
Copying
Reference
Selecting Copy Paper

There are two ways to select copy paper:
Auto Paper Select

The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on the
original size and the reproduction ratio.
Manual Paper Select
Choose the tray containing the paper you wish to copy onto: a paper tray,
multi bypass tray, Large Capacity Tray (LCT) or Wide Large Capacity Tray
(Wide LCT).
The following table shows copy paper sizes and directions that can be used with
Auto Paper Select (when copying at a ratio of 100%).
Metric version
Original location
Paper size and orientation
Exposure glass
A3L, A4KL, A5K, 8" 13"L
ADF
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, B6 JISKL,

11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 8" 13"L, 8KL, 16KKL
Inch version
Original location
Exposure glass
11" 17"L, 8" 13"L
ADF
A3L, A4KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 11"KL, A5KL, 8" 13"L
Note
Only the paper trays set to [Do not Display] or [Recycled Paper] for Paper Type
and also set to [Yes] for Apply Auto Paper Select in Tray Paper Settings can
be selected in Auto Paper Select mode.
Reference
p.12 Originals not recommended for the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
52
Copier Functions
Auto Paper Select

The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on the
original size and the reproduction ratio.
A Make sure that Auto Paper Select is selected.

Trays with a key mark ( ) will not be automatically selected. See Items of
Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide.
Reference
Manual Paper Select

Choose the tray containing the paper you wish to copy onto: a paper tray, multi
bypass tray (Tray 7), Large Capacity Tray (LCT) or Wide Large Capacity Tray
(Wide LCT).
A Select the tray containing the paper you wish to copy onto: a paper tray,
multi bypass tray (Tray 7), Large Capacity Tray (LCT) or Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT).
The indicator corresponding to the selected paper tray is highlighted. See
Copying from the Multi Bypass Tray.
53
Copying
Note
If the direction in which your original is placed (K or L) is different from
that of the paper you are copying onto, this function rotates the original
image by 90 and fits it on the copy paper (rotated copy).
2
GCROTA0E
The rotated copy function works when [Auto Paper Select] or [Auto Reduce /
Enlarge] is selected. See Auto Paper Select and Auto Reduce/Enlarge.
The default setting for Auto Tray Switching is [With Image Rotation]. You
cannot use the Rotated Copy function if this setting is changed to [Without
Image Rotation] or [Off]. See Auto Tray Switching, General Settings Guide.
When using Finisher SR5000, you cannot use the Rotated Copy function if
Slant, Top 2, Left 2 or Center for stapling, Punch, or Z-fold is selected.
Reference
p.43 Copying from the Multi Bypass Tray
p.58 Auto Reduce/Enlarge

p.69 Staple
p.72 Punch
Preset Reduce/Enlarge
Reduces or enlarges images. You can select a preset ratio for copying.
54
Copier Functions
Base Point
The base point of Reduce/Enlarge differs depending on how the original is
scanned. When the original is set on the exposure glass, the upper left corner
will be the base point. When it is set to ADF, the bottom left corner of the original will be the base point.
Shown below are the resulting copy images that differ depending on how the
original is scanned.
GCKA031e
A
B
Base point when placed on the exposure glass.

Base point when placed in the ADF.
A Press [Reduce/ Enlarge].
B Select a ratio, and then press [OK].

Note
To select a preset ratio on the initial display in step A, press the shortcut
reduce/enlarge key and go to step C.
Reference
Reproduction Ratio, General Settings Guide
55
Copying
Create Margin function

Use Create Margin to reduce the image to 93% of original size using the center
as reference. By combining it with the Reduce/Enlarge function, you can also
provide the Reduce/Enlarge copy with a margin.
A Press [Create Margin] displayed on the initial display.
B If you do not wish to combine it with the Reduce/Enlarge function, place

your originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
Zoom
You can change the reproduction ratio in increments of 1%.
56
Copier Functions
To select the ratio with [o] and [n]

Select a ratio using [o] or [n].
B Select a preset ratio which is close to the desired ratio.

C Specify the ratio using [o] or [n].
Pressing [o] or [n] changes the ratio in increments of 10%. Pressing and
holding down the relevant key changes the ratio in increments of 10%.
D Press [OK].
E Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
If you have incorrectly entered the ratio in C, readjust it with [o] or [n].
To enter the ratio with the number keys

Select a ratio using the number keys.
B Press [Number keys].

C Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
D Press [OK] twice.
57
Copying

Auto Reduce/Enlarge
The machine automatically chooses an appropriate reproduction ratio based on
the paper and original sizes you select.
Important
You cannot use the multi bypass tray with this function.
When using Auto Reduce/Enlarge, see the following table for original sizes
and orientations you can use:
Metric version
Original location
Original size and orientation
Exposure glass
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5K
ADF
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, 11 17L,

81/2" 11"KL
Inch version
58
Original location
Exposure glass
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
ADF
A3L, A4KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL,

51/2" 81/2"KL, 10" 14"L, 71/4" 101/2"L
Copier Functions
A Press [Auto Reduce / Enlarge].
2
B Select the paper type.
Reference
p.12 Originals not recommended for the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
Size Magnification
You can calculate an enlargement or reduction ratio based on the lengths of the
original and copy.
ANP059S
Measure and specify the lengths of the original and copy by comparing A with
a.
59
Copying
2
B Press [Size Magnification].
C Enter the length of the original with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
You can enter sizes within the following ranges:
Metric version: 1 - 999 mm (increments of 1 mm)
Inch version: 0.1" - 99.9" (increments of 0.1")
D Enter the length of the copy with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
E Press [OK] twice.
Note
To change the length after pressing the {q} key in D, select [Original] or
[Copy], and then enter the desired length.
Directional Magnification (%)

Specify the horizontal and vertical lengths of the original and copy image at different reproduction ratio. Copies can be reduced or enlarged at different reproduction ratios horizontally and vertically.
CP2P01EE
a: Horizontal ratio
b: Vertical ratio
60
Copier Functions
To enter the ratio with the number keys

Select a ratio using the number keys.
B Press [Direct. Mag. %].

C Press [Horizontal].
D Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
E Press [Vertical].
F Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
G Press [OK] twice.
H Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
To specify a ratio with [o] and [n]
Select a ratio using [o] or [n].
B Press [Direct. Mag. %].

C Press [[n][o] keys].
D Press [Horizontal].
61
Copying
E Specify the desired ratio using [n] or [o].

Pressing [n] or [o] changes the ratio in increments of 1%. Pressing and holding down the relevant key changes the ratio in increments of 10%.
F Press [Vertical].
G Specify the desired ratio using [n] or [o].
H Press [OK] twice.
I Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
If you have incorrectly entered the ratio in steps E or G, readjust it with [n]
or [o].
Directional Size Magnification (inch)

A suitable reproduction ratio is automatically selected when you enter the horizontal and vertical lengths of the original and copy image you require.
CP2M01EE
Horizontal original size: A mm (inch)

B Vertical original size: B mm (inch)
C Horizontal copy size: a mm (inch)
D Vertical copy size: b mm (inch)
Measure and specify the lengths of the original and copy by comparing A with
a and B with b.
62
Copier Functions
2
B Press [Dir. Size Mag. Inch].
C Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
You can enter sizes between 1 to 999 mm (0.1" to 99.9") in 1 mm (0.1") steps.
D Enter the horizontal size of the copy with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
E Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
You can enter sizes between 1 to 999 mm (0.1" to 99.9") in 1 mm (0.1") steps.
F Enter the vertical size of the copy with the number keys, and then press the
{q} key.
G Press [OK] twice.

Note
To change a length in steps C to F, press the key you wish to change and
enter the new value.
63
Copying
Sort
The machine assembles copies as sets in sequential order.
Sort
Copies are assembled as sets in sequential order.
A Select [Sort / Stack].
B Enter the number of copy sets using the number keys.

C Set the originals.
When placing an original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be
copied. When placing an original in the ADF, set so that the last page is on the
bottom.
When placing an original on the exposure glass or in the ADF using Batch,
press the {q} key after all the originals have been scanned.

Note
You can select whether to shift or not. See Input/Output, General Settings Guide.
To confirm the type of finishing, press the {Sample Copy} key in step C.
Reference
Input/Output, Copier/Document Server Features, General Settings
Guide
64
Copier Functions
Sample copy
You can use this function to check the copy settings before making a long copy
run.
Important
This function can be used only when the Sort function is turned on.
A Select Sort and any other necessary functions, and the place the originals.
B Press the {Sample Copy} key.
One copy set is delivered as a sample.
APG052S
C If the sample is acceptable, press [Continue].

The number of copies made is the number specified, minus one for the proof
copy.
Note
If you press [Suspend] after checking the results, you can return to step A.
You can change the settings for Staple, Punch, Duplex (1 Sided 1 Sided,
1 Sided 2 Sided), Orientation, Margin Adjust., Cover Sheet, and Designate. However, depending on the combination of functions, you may not
be able to change some settings.
65
Copying
Changing the Number of Sets

You can change the number of copy sets during copying.
Important
This function can be used only when the Sort function is turned on.
A While Copying... is displayed, press the {Stop} key.

B Press [Change Quantity].
C Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys, and then press the
{q} key.
D Press [Continue].
Copying starts again.
Note
The range of print copies enterable in step C depends on when the {Stop}
key is pressed.
When memory is full

If the amount of data of the scanned originals exceeds the capacity of memory,
scanning is interrupted.
A Press the {Start} key.

All scanned pages are copied, and data stored in memory are cleared.
B Remove the copies, and then continue copying following the instructions
on the display.
Note
The number of pages that can be stored in memory is about 2000 pages of
A4 size originals. It depends on the type of originals or memory settings.
In Sort mode, you can complete scanning and copying by copying the
scanned pages stored in memory until it becomes full, and then scanning
and copying the remained originals.
66
Copier Functions
Reference
Shift tray off in sort/stack
A Press [Output/ Customize Function/ Finisher].

B Make sure [Output/ Cstmz.] is selected, and then press [Sort/ Stack Shift Tray Off].
C Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.

Reference
Separation
Use this function to have separation sheets inserted between sets.
Important
Before selecting this function, set the tray for separation sheets. See Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide.

B Press [Output/ Cstmz.].
C Press [Insert Separation Sheet Per 1 set(s)] or [Insert Separation Sheet Per Job].
D Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.
67
Copying
Note
You can select to have separation sheets inserted between every set, or every so many sets.
Reference
Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide
Stack
This function groups together copies of each page in a multi-page original.
If a finisher is installed, each time the copies of one page are delivered, the next
copy is shifted when delivered so you can separate each job by page.
A Press [Sort / Stack].
B Enter the number of copies with the number keys.

Note
When placing an original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to
be copied. When placing an original in the ADF, set so that the last page is
on the bottom.
When placing originals on the exposure glass or in the ADF using batch
mode, press the {q} key after all have been scanned.
You can disable the Shift Tray setting.
Reference
p.67 Shift tray off in sort/stack
68
Copier Functions
Staple
Individual copy sets can be stapled.
Important
If you try to select [Staple: Center] when there is no Booklet processor or stapler
cartridge installed in Booklet Finisher BK5000, a message telling you there are
no staples or a staple jam has occurred appears.
69
Copying
Original orientation and stapling position

Place originals in the ADF in the orientation in which they can be read normally. When placing the original on the exposure glass, keep the same orientation, but set the original facing downwards.
When there is copy paper that is identical in size and orientation to your original, the original orientations and staple positions are as follows.
Finisher SR5000
APG059S
APG064S
This table shows the stapling positions, not the orientation of delivery.
Not available for vertical Left 2 and horizontal Top 2 for A3, 11" 17", B4 JIS, or
81/2" 14"size paper.
70
Copier Functions
A Select one of the stapling positions.
2
When you select a stapling position, Sort mode is automatically selected.
B Enter the number of copy sets using the number keys.

Note
on the bottom.
Reference
71
Copying
Punch
You can make punch holes in copies.
2 holes
GCPNCH1E
3 holes
GCPNCH3E
Important
72
Copier Functions
Original orientation and punch hole positions

The relationship between the orientation in which you place the original and
the punch hole positions is as follows:
Orientation in which original is set
Exposure glass
ADF
Punch hole
positions
L
2 holes
K
Standard
L
3 holes
K
L
2 holes
K
90 Turn
L
3 holes
K
73
Copying
This table shows the punch hole positions, not the orientation of delivery.
Not available for vertical 2 hole left and horizontal 2 hole top for A3, 11" 17",
or B4 JIS size paper.
A Select one of the punch hole positions.

Note
3 Edges Full Bleed

You can make full image copy by cutting down the margin of top, bottom, and
right sides. This function is useful for originals full of image.
GCBLEE1E
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Edit Image].
C Press [3 Edges Full Bleed].
D Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
74
Copier Functions
Z-fold
Makes two parallel folds, one of which faces in and the other facing out.
ACC010S
Note
Reference
Using the Z-fold Support Tray

When using the Z-fold function together with the Staple function, attach the Zfold support tray to the upper tray or the shift tray of Finisher SR5000.
Note
Remove the Z-fold support tray when outputting prints to the finisher's shift
tray without using the Z-fold function. If you leave the Z-fold support tray in
place, prints are not stacked properly.
Reference
Removing Jammed Paper, Troubleshooting
75
Copying
Z-fold positions and Z-folding Copies
2
APG023S
The above table shows Z-folding positions. The orientation of the paper does not
indicate direction of delivery.
A Select the folding direction.

Duplex
There are two types of duplex copies:
1 Sided 2 Sides
Copies 2 one-sided pages onto 1 two-sided page.
76
Copier Functions
2 Sided 2 Sided
Copies 1 two-sided page onto 1 two sided page.
2
Original orientation and completed copies
Copy images differ according to the orientation in which you place the originals (K or L).
The table shows the orientation of images on the front and back of copies, not
the orientation of delivery.
APG049S
77
Copying
A Press [Dup./ Combine/ Series].
2
B Select [1 Sided2 Sided] or [2 Sided2 Sided].
C Press [OK].
Note
The maximum paper weight that can be used with duplex copying is 52216 g/m2 (14-57.4 lb.).
on the bottom.
To change originals and copy orientation in step B, press [Orientation].
Reference
p.97 Margin Adjustment
Edit, General Settings Guide.
78
Copier Functions
Originals and copy orientation

The orientation can be selected when copying Duplex job.
Top to Top
2
Duplex1
Top to Bottom
Duplex2
A Press [Orientation].
B Select orientation [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom], and then press [OK].
Note
The default setting is [Top to Top]. You can change the default orientation
with Copier/Document Server Features.
Reference
79
Copying
One-Sided Combine
Combine several pages onto one side of a sheet.
There are six types of One-Sided Combine.
1 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side

Copies 2 one-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
GCSHVY7E

GCSHVY8J

GCSHVY3J
80
Copier Functions
2 Sided 1 Page Combine 1 Side

Copies 1 two-sided original to one side of a sheet.
2
GCSHVYOJ

Copies 2 two-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
GCSHVYBJ

Copies 4 two-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
GCSHVY4J
Orientation of the original and combine image position

Open to left (K) originals
GCSHUY1E
81
Copying
Open to top (L) originals
GCSHUY2E
Placing originals and copying

Originals read from left to right
Combine5
Originals read from top to bottom
Combine6
B Press [Combine].
C Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for original, and then press [Combine 1 Side] for Copy.
82
D Select the number of originals to combine.
Copier Functions
E Select the paper.

F Press [OK].
G Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
You can erase a 3 mm (0.1 inch) boundary magazine around all four edges
of originals in Combine mode.
Reference
p.79 Originals and copy orientation
Edit, General Settings Guide
Two-Sided Combine
Combine various pages of originals into one sheet with two sides.
There are six types of Two-Sided Combine.
1 Sided 4 Pages Combine 2 Sides

Copies 4 one-sided originals to one sheet with two pages per side.
GCBOOK1E

Copies 8 one-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.
GCSHVYAE
A
B
Front
Back
83
Copying

Copies 16 one-sided originals to one sheet with eight pages per side.
2
GCSHVY5E
A
B
Front
Back

Copies 2 two-sided originals to one sheet with two pages per side.
GCSHVY1E

Copies 4 two-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.
GCSHVY2E
A
B
84
Front
Back
Copier Functions

Copies 8 two-sided originals to one sheet with eight pages per side.
2
GCSHVY6E
A
B
Front
Back
B Press [Combine].
C Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for Original, and then press [Combine 2 Sides] for
Copy.
D Select the number of originals to combine.

E Press [OK].
85
Copying
Note
You can erase a 3 mm (0.1 inch) boundary magazine around all four edges
of originals in Combine mode.

Reference
p.79 Originals and copy orientation
Series Copies
This function copies the front and back of a two-sided original separately, or the
two facing pages of a bound original onto two sheets.
There are two types of Series Copies.
Important
You cannot use the Series Copies function with the ADF.
The following table shows the paper sizes of two facing pages of a bound
original (book) and one-sided copy (when copying at a ratio of 100%).
Metric version
AMA020S
Inch version
AMA027S
86
Copier Functions
Book 1 Sided
You can make one-sided copies from two facing pages of a bound original (book).
2
CP2B0100
2 Sided 1 Sided
You can make one-sided copies from two-sided originals.
B Press [Series].
C Select [2 Sided1 Sided] or [Book1 Sided], and then press [OK].
If you selected [2 Sided1 Sided], you can change the orientation.
D Press [OK].
E Place the original on the exposure glass, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
If you selected [Book1 Sided], press the {q} key after all originals have
been scanned.
87
Copying
Booklet/Magazine
Copies two or more originals in page order.
There are six types of Booklet/Magazine.
The following table shows the paper sizes of two-sided original and two-sided
copy (when copying at a ratio of 100%).
Metric version
APG046S
Inch version
APG047S
1 Sided Booklet
Make copies in page order for a folded booklet as shown.
Open to left
GCBOOK0E
Open to right
GCBOOK1E
88
Copier Functions
2 Sided Booklet
Make two-sided originals to copies in page order for a folded booklet as
shown.
Open to left
GCAH010E
Open to right
GCAH020E
1 Sided Magazine
Copies two or more originals to make copies in page order when they are
folded and stacked.
Open to left
GCBOOK3E
89
Copying
Open to right
2
GCBOOK4E
2 Sided Magazine
Copies two or more originals of two-sided to make copies in page order when
they are folded and stacked.
Open to left
GCAH030E
Open to right
GCAH040E
90
Copier Functions
Book 2 Sided
Copies a two-page spread original onto one sheet with one page per side.
2
You cannot use the multi bypass tray with Book2 Sided or Front&Back2
Sided.
Front & Back 2 Sided

Copies each two-page spread original as it is onto both sides of a sheet.
How to fold and unfold copies to make a booklet

As shown below, fold a copy along the centerline, and open.
GCBOOK2E
A
B
Open to left
Open to right
91
Copying
How to fold and unfold copies to make a magazine

As shown below, fold and stack copies to make a magazine, and open.
Open to left
2
GCBOOK5E
Open to right
GCBOOK6E
Important
Select [Open to Left] or [Open to Right] with [Orientation: Booklet, Magazine] in advance. See Edit, General Settings Guide.
B Press [Book].
C Select a book type separately for the original ([1 Sided] or [2 Sided]) and copy
([Booklet] or [Magazine]), or select a book type from [Book2 Sided] and
[Front&Back2 Sided].
92
D Press [OK].
Copier Functions
Note
The machine automatically selects the reproduction ratio automatically to

the paper size.
Reference
Creep Adjustment
To adjust the creep between the center and the edge of the page, select [Magazine]
for copying.
B Press [Book].
C Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for the original.
D Press [Magazine].
E Press [Creep Adjust.].
F Specify the creep value using [o] or [n].
G Press [OK] twice.
Note
You can adjust the creep value between 0 to 99 mm (0" to 3.9") in 1 mm
(0.1") steps.
If you select [Staple: Center] for a magazine, set the creep value between the
center and the edge of page. For example, specify 2 mm for 15 sheets.
If you make a mistake in step F, press [o] or [n] to set a new value.
93
Copying
Mix 1 & 2 Sided

You can copy two types of original, one-sided and two-sided, onto one or both
sides of a sheet.
GCKONZ0J

B Press [Mix 1&2 Sid.].
C Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for the original.
If you select [2 Sided], you can select the orientation.
D Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for the copy.

F If you have selected [1 Sided] for the original and [2 Sided] for the copy, press
[Change Setting] to you specify an odd number of originals or if you want to

change the copy page manually.
Place the next originals, and then repeat steps C to E.
Note
94
Copier Functions
Scanning Position
You can move the scanning position of originals.
Point from which the machine begins scanning
Note
You can move the scanning position upward, downward, to left and to right
up to 30 mm (1.2") in 1 mm (0.1") steps.
A
B
C
D
Top: 0 30 mm, 0" 1.2"

Right: 0 30 mm, 0" 1.2"
Bottom: 0 30 mm, 0" 1.2"
Left: 0 30 mm, 0" 1.2"
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Scan Position].
C Set the scanning position for the front of the original. Press [] or [] to set
the top or bottom position. Press [] or [] to set the left or right position.
95
Copying
D Set the scanning position for the back of the original. Press [] or [] to set
the top or bottom position. Press [] or [] to set the left or right position.
Then press [OK].

Note
If you have incorrectly set the position, readjust with [], [], [] or [] .
If you don't need to set the scanned position of the back of the original in
step D, press [OK] and go to step E.
The scanning position for the back is valid only when you are copying 2sided originals.
96
Copier Functions
Margin Adjustment
You can make a binding margin.
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Margin Adj.].

C Set a binding margin for a front page. Press [] and [] when setting the
left and right margins, and [] and [] when setting the top and bottom margins.
D Set a binding margin for the back side pages. Press [] and [] when setting the left and right margins, and [] and [] when setting the top and bottom margins, and then press [OK].
Margin on the back side of the page is valid when [1 Sided2 Sided] or [Combine 2 Sides] is selected.

Note
You can set the binding margin up to 30 mm (1.2") in 1 mm (0.1") steps.
If you make a mistake, press [], [], [], [], or press [Clear] to set a new
value.
If you do not need to specify the margins for the back side pages in step D,
press [OK] and proceed to step E.
Reference
97
Copying
Erase
You can erase the center and/or all four sides of the original image.
This function comes in the following modes:
Border
Erases the original's edge margin from the copy.
Center
Erases the original's center margin from the copy.
Center/Border
Erases both the original's center and edge margins from the copy.
Inside
Erases a designated area of the copy image.
Outside
Erases all areas of the copy image other than the area you have selected.
98
Copier Functions
Note
The relationship between the original orientation and the erased part is as follows:
L original
K original
2
A
Erased part
B 2-99 mm (0.1"-3.9")
The erase width is set to 10 mm (0.4 inch) as a default. You can change this
setting using the Edit menu in Copier/Document Server Features.
Reference
99
Copying
Border Erase (same width)

This mode erases the edge margin of the original image.
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Erase Border].

C Press [Same Width].
D Set an erase border width with [n] or [o].
Pressing [n] or [o] changes the width in increments of 1 mm (0.1 inch).
Pressing and holding down the relevant key changes the width in increments
of 10 mm (0.4 inch).
If you select to erase the image on the back of the original, press [2 Sided Setting] and [Back].
Erasing the image on the back is valid when you copy 2-Sided originals.
E Press [OK].
Note
To change the value entered in step D, press [n] and [o] to set a new value.
100
Copier Functions
Border Erase (different width)

This mode erases the edge margin of the original image.
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Erase Border].

C Press [Different Width].
D Press the key for the border you want to change and set an erase width with
[n] and [o].
E Press [OK].
101
Copying
Center/Border Erase (same width)

This mode erases both the center and edge margins of the original image.
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Erase Cntr/Brdr].

C Press [Same Width].
D Press [Center], and then set the erase center width with [n] and [o].
E Press [Border], and then set the erase border width with [n] and [o].
F Press [OK].
G Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
102
Copier Functions
Center/Border Erase (different width)

This mode erases both the center and edge margins of the original image.
A Press [Edit].
B Press [Erase Cntr/Brdr].

C Press [Different Width].
D Press the key for the order you want to change and set an erase width with
[n] and [o].
E Press [OK].
103
Copying
Inside Erase
A Specify the point where the machine starts scanning (X1, Y1) and where it
stops scanning (X2, Y2).
You can input lengths of 0 432 mm, 0 17".
B Press [Edit].
C Press [Erase Area].
D Press [Erase Inside 1] [Erase Inside 5].
E Enter the value of [X1] with the number keys, and then press [q].
F Enter the value of [Y1] with the number keys, and then press [q].
G Enter the value of [X2] with the number keys, and then press [q].
H Enter the value of [Y2] with the number keys, and then press [q].
I Press [OK].
If you want to go on to erase another area, repeat from steps D to I.
J Press [OK].
K Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
104
Copier Functions
Outside Erase
A Specify the point where the machine starts scanning (X1, Y1) and where it
stops scanning (X2, Y2).
You can input lengths of 0 432 mm, 0 17".
B Press [Edit].
C Press [Erase Area].

D Press [Erase Outside].
E Enter the value of [X1] with the number keys, and then press [q].
F Enter the value of [Y1] with the number keys, and then press [q].
G Enter the value of [X2] with the number keys, and then press [q].
H Enter the value of [Y2] with the number keys, and then press [q].
I Press [OK] twice.

J Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
105
Copying
Use this function to have numbers printed on the background of copies. If this
function is used in conjunction with Sort, same numbers are printed on a department basis, helping you to keep track of confidential documents.
GCSTMP2E
A Press [Stamp].
B Press [Backgrnd No.].

C Enter the number to start counting from with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.

Note
To change the value entered in step C, press the [Clear] or the {Clear} key
to set a new value.
Reference
Stamp, General Settings Guide
106
Copier Functions
Preset Stamp
Frequently used massages can be stored in memory and stamped on copies.
Important
Only one message can be stamped at a time.
GCSTMP1E
The following eight messages are available for stamping.

COPY, URGENT, PRIORITY, For Your Info., PRELIMINARY,
For Internal Use Only, CONFIDENTIAL, DRAFT
107
Copying
Stamp position and original orientation

The stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you place
your originals.
A Press [Stamp].
B Press [Preset Stamp].

C Select the desired message.
You can change the position, size, and density of the stamp.
108
Copier Functions
D Press [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] to select the print page.
2
E After you specify all desired settings, press [OK].
Reference
Changing the stamp position, size and density

Changes the stamp position, size and density.
A Press [Change] under Position/Size/Density.

B Select the position for print, size, and density, and then press [OK].
109
Copying
User Stamp
Prints a registered stamp onto copies. Letters or images you use frequently can
be registered.
Important
You have to program a user stamp before using this function.
Only one message can be stamped at a time.
GCSTMP0E
110
Copier Functions

The user stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you
place your originals.
A Press [Stamp].
B Press [User Stamp].

C Select the desired stamp type.
You can change the stamp position.
111
Copying
2
Reference
Changing the user stamp position

Changes the stamp position.
A Press [Change] under Stamp Position.

B Select the desired position, and then press [OK].
112
Copier Functions
To program the user stamp

This function scans an image that is used as a user stamp.
The range of stamp images for readability is 10297 mm (0.4"-11.7") high and 10
432 mm (0.4"-17.0") wide. However, if the value exceeds the maximum value of
the area (5,000 mm2, 7.75 inch2), it is corrected within the range of the area automatically.
ZGVX040E
Important
Up to four frequently used images can be stored in memory.
A Make sure that the machine is in copier mode.

APG053S
C Press [Copier / Document Server Features].
D Press [Stamp].
E Press [User Stamp].
F Press [Program / Delete Stamp].
113
Copying
G Press [mProgram], and then press the stamp number you want to program.
H Enter the user stamp name (up to ten characters) with the letter keys, and
then press [OK].
I Enter the horizontal size of the stamp with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
J Enter the vertical size of the stamp with the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
K Place the original for user stamp on the exposure glass, and then press [Start
Scanning].
The original will be scanned, and the stamp will be registered.
L Press [Exit].
M Press [Exit].
The display returns to the User Tools menu screen.
N Press [Exit].
Exits settings and gets ready to copy.
Note
Stamp numbers with m already have settings in them. Stamp numbers
that are not registered yet are marked with Not Programmed.
If the user stamp number is already being used, the machine will ask you
if you want to overwrite it. To overwrite it, press [Yes]; otherwise, press
[Stop].
Originals cannot be scanned from the ADF when programming the user
stamp.
114
Copier Functions
To delete the user stamp

Deletes an image registered as a user stamp.
You cannot restore a deleted stamp.
A Make sure that the machine is in Copy mode.

APG053S
C Press [Copier / Document Server Features].
D Press [Stamp].
E Press [User Stamp].
F Press [Program / Delete Stamp].
G Press [Delete], and then press the stamp number you want to delete.
H Select [Yes], and then press [Exit].
I Press [Exit].
The display returns to the User Tools menu screen.
J Press [Exit].
Exits settings and gets ready to copy.
115
Copying
Date Stamp
You can use this function to print dates onto copies.
ANP055S
The following five date print styles are available.

MM/DD/YYYY
MM.DD.YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
DD.MM.YYYY
YYYY.MM.DD
116
Copier Functions

The date stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you
Important
A Press [Stamp].
B Press [Date Stamp].

C Select the stamp format.
You can change the Stamp, style and position of the date to be stamped.
117
Copying
2
Reference
To change the format of date

Changes the style of date to be stamped.
A Press [Change Format] under Current Date.
B Select the date format, and then press [OK].
118
Copier Functions
To change the date stamp position

Page Numbering
You can use this function to print page numbers onto copies.
CP2G0100
119
Copying
There are six types of page numbering.

P1,P2,
1/5,2/5,
-1-,-2-,
P.1,P.2,
1, 2,
1-1,1-2,
Original orientation and stamp position

The page stamp positions differ according to the orientation in which you
Important
120
Copier Functions
A Press [Stamp].
2
B Press [Page Nmbr.].
C Select the format.
You can specify the stamp, position, pages to be stamped, and numbering.
D After you specify all desired settings, press [OK].

Reference
121
Copying
Changing the stamp position


Specifying the first printing page and start number (P1,P2..., -1-,-2-..., P.1,P.2...,
1,2...)
Below explains the example when P1,P2... is selected. The steps are the same
for other cases.
A Press [Change] under Change Numbering.
B Press [First Printing Page], enter the original sheet number from which to start
printing from, and then press the {q} key.
122
Copier Functions
C Press [First Printing Number], enter the number of page from which to start
numbering from with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
The example below shows when the first printing page is 2 and the start
number is 3.
2
GCANPE2J
D Press [Last Number], enter the number of the page at which to stop numbering with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
If you want to number all pages to the end, press [to the End].
E When page designation is complete, press [OK].

Specifying the first printing page and start number (1/5,2/5)

B Press [First Printing Page]. Enter the original sheet number from which to start
printing, and then press the {q} key.
You can enter between 1 and 9999 for the original sheet number from which
to start printing.
123
Copying
C Press [First Printing Number], enter the number of page from which to start
numbering from with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
D To change the number to end numbering, press [Last Number], enter that
number with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
Proceed to step E when not changing.
If you want to number all pages to the end, press [to the End].
The last number is the last page number to print. For example, if Total Pages
is ten, if you want to print up to seven pages and do not want to print from
page 8 on, enter 7 for Last Number. Normally, you do not need to enter the
number.
E Press [Total Pages], enter the total number of original pages with the number
keys, and then press the {q} key.
F When page designation is complete, press [OK].

Note
To change the number entered in step B, press the [Clear] or the {Clear} key,
and then enter a new number.
To change the settings (the first printing page, the number of page from
which to start numbering, or total number of pages) after pressing [OK] in
step F, press [Change] and then enter the numbers again.
To change a page number, press [StartPage], and then enter the number
with number keys.
Specifying the first printing page and start number (1-1,1-2)

B Press [First Printing Page], enter the original sheet number from which to start
printing, and then press the {q} key.
C Press [First Chapter No.], enter the chapter number from which to start num-
bering with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
You can enter between 1 and 9999 for the chapter number from which to start
numbering.
124
Copier Functions
D Press [First Printing Number], enter the page number from which to start printing with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
E When page designation is complete, press [OK].

Note
To change the number entered in step B, press [Clear] or the {Clear} key,
and then enter a new number.
To change the settings (the first printing page, the chapter from which to
start numbering, or the page from which to start numbering) after pressing
[OK] in step E, press [Change] and then enter the numbers again.
Stamp Text
You can stamp important text on copies up to 64 letters.
GCSTMT0E
AFU109S
125
Copying
A Press [Stamp].
2
B Press [Stamp Text].
C Press [Change Text].
D Enter stamp text, and then press [OK].
E Press [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] to select the print page.
F Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
If the Main Power is turned off, the text is cleared. To save the typed text,
you can program them.
Reference
Changing the stamp position

126
Copier Functions
Image Repeat
The original image is copied repeatedly.
The number of repeated images depends on the original size, copy paper size,
and reproduction ratio. For example, see the following table.
Original: 51/2" 81/2"K/Copy paper: 81/2" 11"K or Original: 51/2" 81/2"L/Copy

paper 81/2" 11"L
4 repeats (65%)
16 repeats (32%)
Repeat2
Repeat1
Original: 51/2" 81/2"K/Copy paper: 81/2" 11"L or Original: 51/2" 81/2"L/Copy

paper 81/2" 11"K
2 repeats (100%)
Repeat3
8 repeats (50%)
Repeat4
32 repeats (25%)
Repeat5
127
Copying
A Select the size of copy paper and the reproduction ratio.

B Press [Edit].
C Press [Edit Image].

D Press [Image Repeat].
E Press [OK].
Reference
Double Copies
One original image is copied twice onto one sheet, as shown.
Important
Originals with a size of A5L, B6 JISKL, 51/2" 81/2"L cannot be detected
properly on the exposure glass. Be sure to select the copy paper manually or
place the originals in the ADF.
The following table shows original and copy paper sizes (when copying at a
ratio of 100%).
128
Copier Functions
Metric version
AMG015S
Inch version
AMG016S
A Press [Edit].

C Press [Double Copies].
D Press [OK].
E Select the paper.
Reference
Edit, General Settings Guide.
129
Copying
Centering
You can make copies with the image moved to the center of the copy paper.
GCCNTR0E
Important
The paper sizes and directions for centering are listed below.
Metric version
Original location
Exposure glass
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, 8" 13"L
ADF
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, 11" 17"L,

81/2" 11"KL, 8" 13"L, 8KL, 16KKL
Inch version
Original location
Exposure glass
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
ADF
A3L, A4KL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL,

51/2" 81/2"KL, 10" 14"L, 71/4" 101/2"L
A Select the paper.

B Press [Edit].
130
Copier Functions
C Press [Edit Image].

D Press [Centering].
E Press [OK].
Positive/Negative
If your original is black and white, copy images are inverted.
GCHATN1E
A Press [Edit].

C Press [Positive / Negative].
D Press [OK].
E Select the paper.
131
Copying
Covers
You can use this function to create cover sheets by adding additional pages of
different paper, or copying existing pages onto different paper.
Important
You cannot select the interposer as the copy paper.
Covers function includes Front Cover and Front/Back Covers.
Front cover
The first page of your originals is copied on specific paper sheet for covers, or
a cover sheet is inserted before the first copy.
Copy
Blank
Back Cover
The last page of originals is copied onto a specified cover sheet paper, or a
cover sheet is inserted after the last page.
Copy
ADB001S
132
Copier Functions
Blank
ADB002S
Front/Back Covers
The first and last pages of your original are copied on separate paper for use
as covers, or a cover sheet is inserted before the first copy and after the last
copy.
Copy
GCCOVE0J
Blank
A Set the tray for the front cover or back cover sheet.
You can select the tray for the front or back cover sheet using the Tray Paper
Settings.
The cover sheet should be the same size and direction as the copy paper.
B Press [Cover/ Slip Sheet].
C Select [Copy] or [Blank] for the front or back cover sheet, and then press [OK].
133
Copying
D Select the paper tray that contains the sheet paper to copy the originals.
Reference
Designate
Use this function to have certain pages of your original copied onto slip sheets
or to insert a slip sheet for each page specified.
Important
You can select any tray for slip sheets, except the copy paper trays.
You cannot select the interposer as the copy paper.
A Set the tray you want to use for slip sheets.

The paper for slip sheets should be of the same size as the copy paper and also
be set in the same direction.
C Press [Designate / Chapter].

D Select [Designate: Copy] or [Designate: Blank].
E Press the key to select the chapter number.
134
To select pages 21 to 40 (chapter), press [21-40].
Copier Functions
F Enter the page number of the original's location you want to copy onto a
slip sheet with the number keys, and then press the {q} key.
G To specify another page location, repeat steps E to F.

Up to 100 pages can be specified.
H Select the paper tray that contains the sheet paper to copy the originals.
I When you finish specifying pages, press [OK] twice.
J Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Reference
Chapters
The pages you specify with this function will appear on the front of copy sheets.
GCSHOWOJ
Important
Before selecting this function, press [Dup./ Combine/ Series] and select 1 Sided2
Sided or Combine.
This function can be used only when you use the Duplex (1 Sided2 Sided)
or Combine function.
A Press [Cover/ Slip Sheet].
B Press [Designate / Chapter].
135
Copying
C Press [Chapter].
D Press the key to select the chapter number.
To select pages 21 to 40 (chapter), press [21-40].
E Enter the page location of the first page of the first chapter with the number
keys, and then press the {q} key.
Up to 100 chapter locations can be specified.
F To specify another page location, repeat steps D to E.

G Select the paper tray that contains the sheet paper to copy the originals.
H When you finish specifying page location, press [OK] twice.
I Place the originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Designation Sheet Copy
You can copy designated pages onto slip sheets.
A Set the tray for the slip sheets.


136
Copier Functions
D Press [Designation Sheet Copy].
2
E Enter the sheet number of the first original using the number keys, and
then press the {q} key.
F Press [Page to Page].

G Enter the sheet number of the last original using the number keys.
H Select the tray for designate sheet are set, and then press the {q} key.
I To specify another page location, repeat step E to H.
J Select the tray for main sheets.
K After all settings, press [OK] twice.
L Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.
Note
When this function is combined with the 2 Sided function, the first page of
the designated pages is copied on the front side of a slip sheet.
You can specify up to 100 locations.
Reference
137
Copying
Blank Slip Sheets

You can insert a blank slip sheet before or after a specified page.
A Set the tray for the blank slip sheet.


D Press [Insert Sheet].
E Press the key to select the chapter number.
F Select the paper tray for slip sheets.
G Select [Before] to insert slip sheets before the desired page. Select [After] to
insert slip sheets after the desired page. Enter the page number with the
number keys.
H Press [Number of Sheets], and use the number keys to enter the number of
sheets you wish to insert.
138
I To specify another location where to insert sheets, repeat steps E to H.

J Select the paper tray containing the paper to copy the originals onto.
K When you have finished specifying all settings, press [OK] twice.
Copier Functions
L Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.

Reference
Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide.
Slip Sheets
Every time an original page changes, a slip sheet is inserted. This function can
be used to automatically insert a slip sheet between OHP transparencies, or as a
stacking function.
You can also copy onto slip sheets.
Important
If [1 Sided2 Sided] is set, change it to [1 Sided1 Sided].
When placing OHP transparencies in the multi bypass tray

Copy
Blank
139
Copying
A Set the tray for the slip sheet.

C Select [Copy] or [Blank], and then press [OK].

D Select the paper tray that contains the sheet paper to copy the originals.
When using OHP transparencies, open the multi bypass tray.

Note
When loading OHP transparencies, press the {q} key and then select
[OHP (Transparency)] in the special paper settings.
Reference
p.34 When copying onto OHP Transparencies
140
Copier Functions
Copy Face Up
When using this function, copies are delivered in the reverse order from the
originals.
1 Sided 1 Sided
ANO060S
2 Sided 2 Sided
ANO061S

B Press [Output/ Cstmz.].
C Press [Reverse Ejection].
D Place originals, and then press the {Start} key.

141
Copying
Storing Originals in the Document Server

Using the Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the
copy feature on the hard disk of this machine. Thus you can print them later applying necessary conditions.
Important
Machine failure can result in data loss. Important data stored on the hard disk
should be backed up. The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage that might result from loss of data.
A Press [Store File].
B Enter a user name, file name, or password if necessary.
C Press [OK].
D Place your originals.
142
Storing Originals in the Document Server
E Make scanning settings for the original.
2
Copies are delivered and scanned data is stored in the hard disk.
Note
When interrupting the scan, press the {Stop} key. Pressing [Continue] from
the confirmation screen resumes the scan. Pressing [Stop] deletes the
scanned images and the original on the automatic document feeder (ADF)
will be ejected.
When placing originals on the exposure glass, press the {q} key after all
originals are scanned.
According to the factory default, the documents stored on the Document
Server are deleted three days (72 hours) after the storing date. You can cancel the automatic document deletion or select other period than three days
for the automatic deletion. For more information about changing settings,
see Administrator Tools, General Settings Guide.
To check if a document has been stored, press the {Document Server} key to
display the document selection screen.
If you want to store another document, do so after copying is complete.
For further information about the Document Server, see Document Server.
For details about printing stored documents, see Printing a Stored Document.
For details about setting user name, file name, and password, see Storing
Data.
Depending on the security settings, [Access Privileges] is displayed instead
of [User Name].
For details about procedure for setting [Access Privileges], ask the administrator.
Reference
p.174 Using the Document Server
p.184 Printing a Stored Document

p.174 Storing Data
Administrator Tools, General Settings Guide.
143
Copying
Programs
You can store the frequently used copy job settings in the machine memory and
recall them for future use.
You can store up to 25 programs.
Note
Paper settings are stored based on paper size. So if you place more than one
paper tray of the same size, the paper tray prioritized with the Copier/Document Server Features will be selected first. See System Settings, General
Settings Guide.
Programs are not cleared by turning the power off or by pressing the {Clear
Modes} key.
Reference
p.147 Programming Defaults in Initial Display
Storing a Program
Stores a program.
A Edit the copy settings.

B Press the {Program} key.
APG051S
C Press [Program].
144
Programs
D Press the program number you want to store.

E Enter the program name.
You can enter up to 40 characters.
F Press [OK].
The screen returns to the program screen, showing the program number followed by
the program name. The screen returns to the initial copy display after a short time.
Note
Program numbers with m against them already have settings made for them.
Changing a Stored Program

Changes program settings.
A Check the program settings.

B Set the contents of a program.
C Press the {Program} key.
D Press [Program].
E Press the program number you want to store.
F Press [Yes].
G Enter the program name.
You can enter up to 40 characters.
H Press [OK].
The screen returns to the program screen, showing the program number followed by
the program name. The screen returns to the initial copy display after a short time.
Note
When you want to check the contents of a program, recall the program.
When it is overwritten, the previous program is deleted.
145
Copying
Deleting a Program
Erases the contents of program.
A Press the {Program} key.

B Press [Delete].
C Press the program number you want to delete.

D Press [Yes].
The program is deleted, and the screen returns to the copy screen.
Recalling a Program
Recalls a stored program and copies its contents.
A Press the {Program} key.

B Press [Recall].
C Press the program number you want to recall.

The stored settings are displayed.

Note
Only programs with m against them contain a program in step C.
146
Programs
Programming Defaults in Initial Display

This section describes how to program defaults for the initial display when
modes are cleared or reset, or immediately after the operation switch is turned.
The default settings you can program are Paper Tray, Original Type, Density,
Special Original, Original Orientation, Cover/Slip Sheet, Dup./Combine/Series, Reduce / Enlarge, Finishing.
A Specify scan settings and any other settings you require in the initial display.
B Press the {Program} key.
C Press [Program as Defaults].
D Press [Program].
E Press [Yes].
The current settings are programmed as defaults. The screen returns to the
initial display.
Note
To restore the factory default settings on the initial display, press [Restore
Factory Defaults].
The default settings can be programmed separately for the normal screen
and simplified screens.
147
Copying
148
3. Connect Copy
This section explains how to make copies using two machines connected via the
Copy Connector (optional).
What is Connect Copy?

Connect Copy allows you to connect two machines together via a cable. When
you set up a copy job on one machine (the main machine), data is transferred to
the other (the sub-machine) so copies can be made on both simultaneously.
High-speed copying for greater productivity

Large volume copy runs can be completed in shorter time. For instance, when
two 135 copies/minute machines are connected together, a speed of 270 copies/ minute can be achieved (paper size of A4K, 81/2" 11"K).
Reducing time loss
Even if one machine stops due to a paper jam, or runs out of toner or paper,
the other machine can automatically take over and finish the job.
APF033S
149
Connect Copy
How It Works
After the original is scanned, the data is stored on the hard disk of the main machine. As soon as the main machine starts copying, the data is transferred to the
hard disk of the sub-machine, and the sub-machine then starts copying.
In this manual, the two machines connected are referred to as main machine and
sub-machine.
APG024S
Main machine
B Sub-machine
The main machine is the one on which you press [Connect Copy] to make Connect
Copy settings. The other machine becomes the sub-machine.
Machine Types and Options

Both machines need not be of the same type.
You can still use Connect Copy without an optional finisher or Large Capacity Tray (LCT). However, to use the Staple and Punch functions, the optional
Finisher SR5000 and punch unit must be installed on both machines. To select
[Staple: Center], the optional Booklet Finisher BK5000 must be installed on
both machines. To use the Z-fold function, the optional Z-folding unit and
Booklet Finisher BK5000 must be installed on both machines.
Interrupt Copy
You can use the Interrupt function on the sub-machine, but not on the main
machine.
You cannot use Connect Copy when a job has been paused using the Interrupt function.
150
What is Connect Copy?
Before You Start

Both machines must have paper trays loaded with paper of the same size, type
and orientation.
To ensure the same copy results from both machines,
Copy Quality settings in the User Tools should be the same on each machine.
Both main and sub machines should be installed with the same type of finisher.
Reference
151
Connect Copy
Connect Copy Display Panel

The display panel shows machine status, error messages and function menus.
Initial copy display
APG065S
1. [Connect Copy]
4. Number of sets
Press to switch from the initial copy display to the Connect Copy display.
Displays the number of sets of copies.
2. Paper Select
Display the number of copies for the main

machine.
Press this part of the display to display the
total number of copies for two machines.
Displays the size, type and orientation of

the paper set on both machines.
3. Numbers of originals
5. Number of copies
Displays the number of originals scanned

into memory of the main machine.
Note
The connect copy function is not available from the simplified display.
152
Connect Copy Display Panel
Display during Connect Copy
APG066S
1. Sub-machine status appears on the

second line of main machine's display.
153
Connect Copy
Display panel of the sub-machine

Even if Connect Copy has been selected on the main machine, the sub-machine
will still continue to show the initial copy display. To switch to the Connect
Copy initial display, follow the procedure below.
A Press the {Other Function} key.
APG054S
B The Connect Copy initial display is shown on the sub-machine.
154
Using Connect Copy
Using Connect Copy

You can select Connect Copy from either machine by pressing [Connect Copy].
The machine on which you pressed [Connect Copy] and made Connect Copy settings becomes the main machine, and the other the sub-machine.
Important
When user authentication is set, use the number keys to enter a user code (up
to 8 digits) that is registered on the main machine, and then press the {q}
key. For details, see Administrator Tools, General Settings Guide.
When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, LDAP Authentication, or Integration Server Authentication is set, enter a login user name and
the login password. For the login user name and the login password, contact
your Administrator. For details, see When the Authentication Screen is Displayed, About this Machine.
In Connect Copy mode, use the main machine to perform this function. See
Copier/Document Server Features, General Settings Guide.
A Make sure [Connect Copy] is shown on the display.
155
Connect Copy
B Press [Connect Copy] on the machine that you want to use as the main.
[Connect Copy] becomes highlighted, and the two machines are connected.
Main machine
3
Sub-machine
C Set the originals on the main machine.

D Make the necessary settings using the main machine.
If you have made any copy settings before using Connect Copy, the settings
remain effective. However, if optional finishers are not installed on both main
and sub machines, the Stack, Staple, Punch and Z-fold functions are automatically disabled.
E Enter the required number of copies using the number keys.

When the number of originals or copies is small, copying will be done on only
the main machine.
F Press the {Start} key on the main machine.

When placing originals page by page on the exposure glass, press the {q}
key after you have finished scanning all the originals.
When placing multiple originals in the ADF, wait till an original has been fed
before placing the next.
Copying starts if the main machine is not in use. The sub-machine starts copying after data transfer from the main machine is completed.
156
Using Connect Copy
G Collect your copies from both the main and sub machines.
Note
If you cancel Connect Copy mode, press [Connect Copy], which is highlighted on the main machine.
The number of copies might differ on the main and sub machines.
Both machines may not finish copying at the same time.
When using the Sort/Staple function, copying is divided between the two
machines by the number of sets. If a paper misfeed occurs when processing
a set of copes, it is not possible for the other machine to take over the remainder of that particular set.
To interrupt ADF scanning, press the {Stop} key on the main machine, and
then select [Stop] in response to the message that appears.
To stop copying, press the {Stop} key on the main machine, and then select
[Stop] in response to the message that appears.
If the memory required to store originals exceeds the memory limit, an error message appears. For details, see When You Cannot Make Copies As
Wanted, Troubleshooting.
Reference
p.21 Batch mode
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed, About this Machine

When You Cannot Make Copies As Wanted, Troubleshooting
157
Connect Copy
Order of Copy Output

When copying with the Sort/Staple function
(Example) Copying 6 sets of a three-page original
3
APG028S
Main machine
B Sub-machine
Copies are delivered face-down on both the main and sub machines.
When using the Sort/Staple function, the processing of one copy set cannot
be divided between the two machines.
When copying with the Stack function

(Example) Making 2 copies of each page of a six-page original
APG029S
Main machine
B Sub-machine
Copies are delivered face-down on both the main and sub machines.
Copies are delivered as shown in the above illustration.
158
Using Connect Copy
Auto Reset when using Connect Copy

The machine exits Connect Copy mode automatically and returns to the initial
condition after a certain period of time has lapsed after job completion. This is
called Auto Reset.
Note
When the Auto Reset time of the sub-machine lapses when it is processing an
Interrupt Copy job, the sub-machine will return to its original position and
the Interrupt Copy job will be cancelled.
Reference
Auto Off
The machine automatically turns itself after a certain period of time has lapsed
after job completion. This is called Auto Off. In Connect Copy mode, the submachine will not turn off automatically.
Reference
Exiting Connect Copy

This section explains how to cancel Connect Copy mode and return to standard
copying mode.
A Press [Connect Copy] on the main machine.

The machine returns to standard copying mode.
Note
Settings made on the main machine during Connect Copy mode remain effective.
If you press the {Clear Modes} key on the main machine, Connect Copy
mode is cancelled and the main machine returns to its initial condition.
159
Connect Copy
Copying Stored Documents Using Connect Print

You can print a document stored in the Document Server using the Connect
Print function.
Note
The main machine is the one on which the document is stored.

B Select the document to be printed.
The selected document is highlighted.
C Repeat step if you want to select more documents.

The documents will be printed in the order that they have been selected.
D If you need to change the print settings, press [To Printing Screen].
If you do not need to change any settings, proceed to step E.
E Press [Connect Print].

The key is highlighted and the two machines are connected.
F Enter the required number of copies using the number keys.

G Press the {Start} key.

160
Using Connect Copy
Note
Some documents may not be displayed, depending on the security function settings.
To change the printing order, press the highlighted documents to cancel

your selection. Select again in the desired order.
You can also cancel all your selections by pressing the {Clear Modes} key.
To register new print conditions or numbers of copies in step D, press [Save
Print Settings].
If you are selecting multiple files, you can check the file names and printing order by pressing [T] and [U] to scroll through the list.
Press [Select File] to return to the Select Files to Print display.
If you have entered a wrong value, press the {Stop} key and enter again.
When using the Sort function, you can check the print results by making a
sample copy on the main machine. See Sample copy.
Sample copies can be made on the main machine only.
The main machine begins printing from the document stored in the Document Server. Printing on the sub-machine starts when the document is
transferred from the main machine.
To stop the printing, press the {Stop} key on the main machine, and then
follow the instructions on the display.
The number of copies might differ on the main and sub machines.
Both machines may not finish printing at the same time.
Reference
p.65 Sample copy
161
Connect Copy
Using Job Preset in Connect Copy

You can make settings for the next Connect Copy job when the current job is still
in progress on the main machine. When the current job finishes, the next job begins automatically.
A On the main machine, confirm that Press
[New Job] to make reserva-
tion. is displayed, and then press [New Job].
B Confirm that Ready is displayed, and then press [Connect Copy].
C Place the originals in the main machine.

D Confirm that Ready is displayed, and then make settings for the job.
162
Using Job Preset in Connect Copy
E Press the {Start} key on the main machine.

Press the {q} key when you have finished scanning all the originals.
When placing multiple originals in the ADF, wait till the first original has
been fed before placing the next.
Scanning begins. As soon as the current job is finished, the next job starts automatically.
Note
You can preset a maximum of 10 jobs.
Preset jobs in Connect Copy mode can only be changed when the main machine has finished scanning the originals.
Preset jobs in Connect Copy mode can only be changed when copying has
yet to begin on either machine.
Reference
p.35 Job Preset
163
Connect Copy
Connect Copy Job Flow

The job flow depends on the status of the two machines.
When One of the Two Machines is Idle

One of the machines is copying Original A.
APF037S
164
Using the idle machine as the main machine (Connect Copy)
A Make Connect Copy settings for Original B on machine <2> (the idle machine).
3
APG030S
B Machine <2> begins copying Original B. Machine <1> also starts copying
Original B when it has finished with Original A.
APG031S
A
B
Sub-machine
Main machine
165
Connect Copy
Using the machine currently copying as the main machine (Connect Copy: Job Preset)
A Make Connect Copy settings for Original B on machine <1> (the machine
currently in use).
3
APG032S
B When machine <1> has finished with Original A, Connect Copy is activated and both machines begin copying Original B.
APG033S
A
B
Sub-machine
Main machine
When Both Machines are in Use

One machine is copying Original A and the other Original B.
APF042S
166
When both machines are copying the same number of originals (Connect Copy: Job
Preset)
A Make Connect Copy settings for Original C on machine <1> .
3
APG034S
B When machine <1> has finished with Original A, it begins copying Original C.
APG035S
C When machine <2> has finished with Original B, it also begins copying
Original C.
APG036S
A
B
Sub-machine
Main machine
167
Connect Copy
When one machines is copying a larger number of originals (Connect Copy: Job
Preset)
A Make Connect Copy settings for Original C on machine <1> .
3
APG037S
B When machine <1> has finished with Original A, it begins copying Original C. If machine <1> finishes copying it allotment of Original C before
machine <2> finishes with Original B, machine <1> will take over to copy
the remainder of Original C.
APG038S
A
B
168
Sub-machine
Main machine
4. Document Server
Using the Document Server enables you to store documents being read with the
copy feature on the hard disk of this machine. Thus you can print them later applying necessary conditions.
Relationship between Document Server

and Other Functions
State of the Document Server varies depending on the function used.
Copier Functions
Storing method: Copy/Document Server
List display: Available
Printing: Available
Transmission: Unavailable
Printer Functions
Storing method: Personal computer
List display: Available
Printing: Available
Transmission: Unavailable
Scanner Functions
Storing method: Scanner
List display: Unavailable
When documents are stored with the scanner feature, you can confirm
them from the scanner feature screen. See Displaying the List of Stored
Files, Scanner Reference.
Printing: Unavailable
Transmission: Available
Transmission is done by use of the stored document transmission of the
scanner feature. See Sending Stored Files, Scanner Reference.
Reference
Displaying the List of Stored Files, Sending Stored Files, Scanner Reference
169
Document Server
Document Server Display

Following explains the screens and icons displayed in the Document Server
function.
Document Server initial display
APG062S
1. The operational status or message

is displayed.
2. The currently selected screen's title
is displayed.
4. Keys for the operation are displayed.

5. An icon that corresponds to a
stored function is displayed.
3. The number of the originals being

read with the memory as well as the
number of paper set and copied are
displayed.
The list display of the Document Server shows the following icons depending on
the stored function selected.
Function
Copying
Printer
Icons
Note
All the stored documents may not be displayed depending on the security
function specified.
170
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions
Simplified Display
APG044S
Example of a simplified display
APG063S
1. [Key Color]
Press to change the key color and increase the brightness of the display panel.
Note
171
Document Server
Preview Display
Following explains the preview display displaying procedure and the items displayed on this screen.
The Preview Display appears after scanning completes. You can also display
stored documents on the preview display. For details, see Displaying the List
of Stored Files, Scanner Reference.
The preview display denotes the screen that allows confirming contents of the
scanned documents.
Preview Display
APG041S
1. [][][][]
5. Display Page
Used to move the portion to be displayed.
Used to display the currently opened

page number, total number of pages, and
page size.
2. [Zoom Out], [Zoom In]

Used to scale up or down the document
to be displayed.
3. [Exit]
Used to turn the page of the selected document.
Used to exit the preview display.
7. Display Position
4. Display File
When the image is enlarged, the position

on the document is displayed.
Used to display the document name.

[Switch] is displayed on the preview
screen for the stored documents. It is
used to switch the document to be displayed in the preview.
172
6. [Switch]
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions
Note
When the preview is already selected from another function, the preview
screen function may become unusable.
The preview display is also not available when the paper size is larger than
A3.
If the image file is corrupt, store it again.
Reference
Displaying the List of Stored Files, Scanner Reference
173
Document Server
Using the Document Server

Following describes how to use the Document Server.
Storing Data
Following describes the procedure for storing documents on the Document
Server.
Important
Data stored in the machine might be lost if some kind of failure occurs. The
manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage resulting from loss of
data.
Be careful not to let anyone know your password, especially when entering a
password or recording it. Keep any record of your password in a secure place.
Avoid using a single number or consecutive numbers for a password such as
0000 or 1234, since the numbers like this are easy to guess, so using them
will not provide a worthwhile level of security.
A document accessed with a correct password remains selected even after operations are complete, and it can be accessed by other users. To stop this, be
sure to press the {Clear Modes} key to cancel the document selection.
The user name used when adding a document to the Document Server is to
identify the document creator and type. It is not to protect confidential documents from others.
File Name
Stored documents are automatically named COPY0001, COPY0002. You
can change assigned file names.
User Name
You can register a user name to identify the user or user group that stored the
documents. To assign it, you can register the user name using the name assigned to the user code, or by entering the name directly.
Password
To prevent unauthorized printing, you can set a password for any stored file.
A protected file can only be accessed if its password is entered. When a password is set for the documents, the lock icon appears next to the documents.
174
APG055S
B Press [Scan Original].
C Above operation sets up the user name, document name and password.
When not changing a document name, the name will be automatically set.
D Set the original.

E Specify the original scanning conditions.

The original is scanned. The document is saved in the Document Server.
175
Document Server
Note
Enter a four- to eight-digit password.
By default, data stored in the Document Server is deleted after three days
(72 hours). You can specify the time taken for the stored data to be deleted
automatically. See Administrator Tools, General Settings Guide.
If you do not want stored data to be automatically deleted, select [Off] in
Auto Delete File before storing a document. If you select [On] later, data
stored after will be automatically deleted.
When the machine is printing a document stored using the copier function,
wait until printing has finished before you store a document in the Document Server.
To stop scanning, press the {Clear/Stop} key. To restart a paused scanning
job, press [Continue] in the confirmation display. To delete saved images
and cancel the job, press [Stop].
When a password is set, the lock icon appears on the left side of the file
name.
After scanning, stored documents appear on the Select Files to Print display. If this display does not appear, press [Scanning Complete].
When placing an original on the exposure glass, press [Scanning Complete]
after all the originals have been scanned.
Reference
To register or change a user name (When using a user name registered to the Address
Book)
Following describes the procedure for registering or changing a user name to be
attached to a stored document.
A Display the original scan screen.

B Press [User Name].
The user name input screen will appear
C Select the user name and then press [OK].

176
To register or change a user name (When using a user name not registered to the
Address Book)

C Select the user name and then press [Manual Entry].
The user name change screen will appear.
D Enter the user name and then press [OK].
177
Document Server
To register or change a user name (When no name is registered to the Address Book)

4
The user name input screen will appear.
C Enter the user name and then press [OK].

To change a file name
Following describes the procedure for changing a name to be attached to a
stored document.

B Press [File Name].
The document name change screen will appear.
C Press [Delete All] to delete the document name to be automatically set.

D Enter the document name and then press [OK].
178
Note
In step C, pressing [Backspace] allows you to delete up to any desired location.
You can enter up to 20 characters for a document name. In the list, however,
up to 16 characters are displayed as the document name. If above limits are
exceeded, the list will display up to 15 characters for the document name.
To set or change a Password

Following describes the procedure for setting or changing a password to be attached to a stored document.

B Press [Password].
C Enter the password from the number keys and then press [OK].
You can use four to eight digits for specifying the password.
D For double-check, enter the password again and then press [OK].
179
Document Server
Changing User Name, File Name or Password of a Stored

Document
Following describes the procedure for changing a user name, document name or
password.

B Select the document whose user name, document name or password is to
be changed.
When a password is set, enter it and then press [OK].

D Press [Change User Name], [Change File Name] or [Change Password].
E From the respective change screens, enter the new user name, document
name or password and then press [OK].
F Press [OK].
Note
Depending on the security settings, [Change Access Priv.] is displayed instead of [Change User Name].
For details about procedure for setting [Change Access Priv.], ask the administrator.
180
Checking the Details of a Stored Document

Following describes the procedure for displaying details of a stored document.

B Select the document whose details are to be displayed.
4
C Press [Details].
Details of the document will be displayed.
Note
When you have selected two or more documents, you can view the information of the documents in the order of [U][T].
Pressing [Exit] restores the document selection screen.
181
Document Server
Searching for a Stored Document

Following describes the procedure for searching a stored document from user
name or document name.
You can rearrange the currently chronologically ordered documents in any desired order.
To search by file name

Following describes the procedure for searching a stored document from the
document name.
To search by user name
user name.
Note
Installing Ridoc Desk Navigator enables search and reordering of stored documents from PC.
For more information about Ridoc Desk Navigator, see Instruction Manual
and Help of Ridoc Desk Navigator.
To search by file name

document name.

B Press [File Name].
C Enter the document name to be searched and then press [OK].

A document name that matches completely from the starting character will
be searched and displayed on the document selection screen.
Note
Pressing [Display All] displays ever stored document.
182
To search by user name

user name.

4
C When specifying a registered user name, select the user name and then
press [OK].
When using a not-registered user name, proceed to the next step.
D When the user name is not registered, press [Manual Entry] and then enter the
user name to be displayed from the input screen. Then press [OK].
E Press [OK].
A document name that matches completely from the starting character will
be searched and displayed on the document selection screen.
Note
Pressing [Display All] displays ever stored document.
183
Document Server
Printing a Stored Document

Following describes the procedure for printing a stored document.
Using Web Image Monitor allows you to print a document stored in the Document Server from your PC.

B Select the document to be printed.
C When printing two or more documents at a time, repeat the operation in B.

Up to 30 documents can be printed.
D When specifying printing conditions, press [To Printing Screen].

The printing condition screen will appear. User name of the document, document name and the order of printing of this document will be displayed.
E Enter the number of print copies from the number keys.
Up to 9999 copies are specifiable.

Printing will be started.
184
Note
You can search the target document using, in step B, [User Name] or [File
Name] situated in the left side of the screen.
Some of the selected document may not be printed due to the difference in
the size or resolution.
When changing the printing order, cancel the highlight and then specify
the order correctly.
Pressing [Order] displays the selected documents in the printing order.
The copy and printer features holds the specified printing conditions after
the operation is over and applies them at the next printing.
When two or more documents are specified, the printing conditions are
stored on the first document but not on the succeeding documents.
Following settings are available for the printing conditions. For respective
printing results, see Copier Functions.
Book binding style (2 Sided Top to Top, 2 Sided Top to Bottom, Magazine, Booklet)
Treatment of front cover (Cover/Slip Sheet, Edit / Stamp)
Finish (Sort, Rotate Sort, Stack, Staple, Punch)
When printing two or more copies while selecting the sort function, you
can confirm the finish by printing only one copy.
When printing two or more documents at a time, you can print them as a
single continuous document by specifying the order of their printing.
When printing two or more documents at a time, the printing conditions
set for the first document are applied to all the remaining documents.
When two or more documents are selected, pressing [U][T] allows you to
confirm the user name, document name and printing order of the document selected in step B.
Pressing [File List] restores the document selection screen.
Reference
p.49 Copier Functions
When Interrupting Printing

Following describes the procedure for interrupting printing work.
A Press the {Stop} key

B Press [Suspend].
185
Document Server
Changing Number of Print Copies while Printing is in Progress

Following describes the procedure for changing the number of print copies after
printing is stared.
Important
This feature is enabled when the sort function is selected in the printing conditions.
A Press the {Stop} key.

B Press [Change Quantity].
C Enter the number of print copies anew from the number keys.
E Press [Continue].
Printing will be resumed.

Note
The range of print copies enterable in step C depends on the timing of your
pressing the {Stop} key.
Sample Print
When print copies are massive, you can print a single copy in advance to check
appropriateness of the printing order of the selected documents and the printing
conditions.
Important
This feature is enabled when the sort function is selected in the printing conditions.
A Select the document to be printed.
B Press [To Printing Screen].

C Press the {Sample Copy} key.
186
Only one copy will be printed.
D Press [Continue].
Printing will be resumed.
Note
You can search the target document using, in step A, [User Name] or [File
In the display order field of step A, you can sort the documents by [User
Name], [File Name], [Date]. Press the item to be used for the sorting.
To cancel the selection in step A, press the highlighted document again.
To cancel the printing, press [Suspend]. The print screen will appear, enabling to set another item.
Printing the First Page
In order to confirm the print results, you can print the first page alone of the document selected from the document selection screen.
When two or more documents are selected, the first page of the respective documents is printed.
A Select the document to be printed (confirmed).

B Press [Print Specified Page].

C Press [1st Page].

Note
Name] situated in the upper left side of the screen.
187
Document Server
Printing a Specified Page

You can print the specified page alone of the document selected from the document selection screen.
When two or more documents are selected, the specified page of the respective
documents is printed.


C Press [Specified Page].
D Specify the page to be printed from the number keys and then press the
{q} key.
E Press the {Start} key.

Note
Printing a Specified Range

You can print the pages in the specified range alone of the document selected
from the document selection screen.
When two or more documents are selected, pages in the specified range of the
respective documents is printed.


188
C Press [Specify Range].
D Specify the printing start page from the number keys and then press the
{q} key.
E Specify the printing end page from the number keys and then press the
{q} key.

Note
Name] situated in the upper left side of the screen.
Edit File
You can edit documents stored in the Document Server.
Combining Files
You can combine two or more files stored in the Document Server.
Important
You cannot recover the original files from the new file.
You cannot combine files if they are currently being used by another function.

B Select documents you want to combine.
If a password has been set for the document, enter it, and then press [OK].
The files are combined in the order of being selected.

D Press [Combine Files].
189
Document Server
E Enter the new file name.

F Press [OK].
Note
You can combine up to 30 files.
The print settings for the file selected first are stored.
If you do not set the file name in step E, the name of the file selected first
will be the name of the combined file.
Inserting Documents
You can insert a file into files already stored in the Document Server.
Important
You cannot recover the original file from the new file.
You cannot insert files into a file that is currently being used by another function.

B Select the document to be inserted in.

D Press [Insert File].
E Select the document you want to insert into.
F Enter the page number to insert the file using the number keys.
G Press [Before Specify Page] or [After Specify Page].
H Press [OK].
Deleting Pages
Follow the procedure below to delete pages from a file stored in the Document
Server.
Important
To check the page numbers, print the file.

B Select the document containing the pages you want to delete.

190
D Press [Delete Pages].

E Enter the number of the page you want to delete using the number keys.
F If you want to delete a series of pages, press [Page to Page], and then enter
the number of the last page you want to delete.
G Press [OK].
H Press [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box.
Note
If you want to delete only one page in step F, proceed to step G.
If you enter every page in step F, the whole file is deleted.
Copying Documents
You can copy documents that are stored in the Document Server.
Important
You cannot copy a selected document that is currently being used by another
function.

B Select the document you want to copy.

D Press [Duplicate File].
E Press [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box.
Note
If you select [No] in step E, the selected document is not copied.
If you press [Stop Duplicating] while copying, the selected document is not
copied. However, if you select multiple documents, some of them might be
copied.
The ~ mark is added to the beginning of the copied document's name.
191
Document Server
Print Backup
You can store registered documents to an external device.
Important
You must prepare the extended data conversion board.
You cannot copy a selected document that is currently being used by another
function.

B Select the document you want to copy.

D Press [Print Backup].
E Press [Yes].
You can select the file format, resolution, and the recipient's name.
F Press [OK].
Note
You can specify the default setting under [Print Backup: Default User Name],
[Print Backup: Default Format], and [Print Backup: Default Resolution] using Administrator Tools for System Settings.
If you select [PDF (Single Page)] or [PDF (Multi-page)], you can make encoding
and privilege settings under [Security Settings].
You can specify the recipient's name under [Print Backup: Default User Name]
using Administrator Tools for the System Settings.
Deleting a Document
Following describes the procedure for deleting a stored document.
Important
The Document Server can store up to 3000 documents. As the number of
stored documents reaches 3000, storing of a new document becomes unavailable. Thus, you should delete unnecessary documents as much as practicable.

B Select the document to be deleted.
192
C Press [Delete File].
D Press [Yes].
Note
You can delete the stored documents at a time. See Administrator Tools,
Using Web Image Monitor allows you to delete a document stored in the
Document Server from your PC.
It is also possible to select two or more documents and delete them.
You can search the target document using [File Name] or [User Name] situated in the left side of the screen.
In the display order field, you can sort the documents by [User Name], [File
Name], [Date]. Press the item to be used for the sorting.
When you could not identify the target document from the document
name, print the first page alone of the document in order to confirm the
print results.
To cancel your selection, press the highlighted document again.
For the Web Image Monitor starting procedure, see Displaying a Document in Document Server with Web Image Monitor.
Reference
p.193 Displaying a Document in Document Server with Web Image Monitor
Displaying a Document in Document Server with Web Image

Monitor
Following describes the procedure for confirming contents of a stored document
on the PC screen by use of Web Image Monitor.
A Start Web browser.

B Enter http:// (IPv4 address of this machine) / to the address.
Top page of Web Image Monitor will be displayed.
193
Document Server
C Click [Document Server].

The list of documents in the Document Server will be displayed.
D Click
of the document you want to confirm.

Information of the document will be displayed.
E Confirm contents of the document.

Note
You can change the document list display format in step C. Click
(Thumbnails),
(Icons), or
(Details) for the display format.
When you want to enlarge the preview display in step E, click [Enlarge Image].
Downloading Stored Documents

Following describes the procedure for downloading a stored document to the
PC by use of Web Image Monitor.
Important
When downloading a document stored with the copy feature, you must prepare the extended data conversion board.
A Start Web browser.

B Enter http://(IPv4 address of this machine)/ to the address.
Top page of Web Image Monitor will be displayed.
C Click [Document Server].

List of the documents will be displayed.
D Click of the document you want to download.

E Select [PDF], [JPEG], or [Multi-page TIFF] for the file format.
F Click [OK].
G Click [OK] in the confirmation window.
Note
You can change the document list display format in step D. Click
(Thumbnails),
(Icons), or
(Details) for the display format.
In step E, you cannot select [JPEG] for a document being stored with the
scanner.
In step E, you cannot select [Multi-page TIFF] for a document being stored
with the copy or printer.
When downloading a document with [Multi-page TIFF] in step E, you must
prepare a Printer/Scanner Unit and File Format Convertor.
194
5. Appendix
Following describes the copy machine's specifications and the function compatibility.
Function Compatibility
A given combination of the copy features may or may not be available depending on the order of its setup.
Blank space: Combination available
: Combination unavailable (Precedence is given to the function selected earlier)
: Combination unavailable (Precedence is given to the function selected later)
Following lists the combinations of functions.
APG069S
195
Appendix
The following combinations are not possible:

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
196
Front/Back Cover with 2 Sided 1 Sided

Back Cover with Auto Paper Select, except in the printing condition screen in Document Server.
Designate/Chapter with 2 Sided 1 Sided
Combine with Designate/Chapter with Document Server
Slip Sheets with Book 2 Sided
Document Server with Front&Back 2 Sided
Left of Punch with Right/Top/Center of Staple
Top of Punch with Bottom/Slant/Center/Top 2/ Left 2 of Staple
Right of Punch with Left/Top/Center of Staple
Right Z-fold with Right/Top/Center of Staple
Bottom Z-fold with Bottom/Left 2/Top 2/Center/Slant of Staple
Supplementary Information
Following describes the detailed specifications of the respective functions.
Mixed Size Mode

Since small originals may not be correctly aligned with the original guide,
the copy image may be slanted.
You can place originals of two different sizes at a time.
Copying speed and scanning speed will be reduced.
Multi Bypass Tray Copy
Following paper sizes can be selected as the standard sizes:
A3L, A4KL, A5KL, A6L, B4 JISL, B5 JISKL, B6 JISL, 12" 18"L,
11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/4" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"KL,
71/4" 101/2"KL, 8" 13"L, 81/2" 13"L, 81/4" 13"L, 11" 15"L,
10" 14"L, 8" 10"L
Preset Enlarge/Reduce
You can select one of 12 preset ratios (5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduction ratios).
Following shows the relation between the original's size and copied-to paper size at respective scaling factors.
Metric version
400% (Area ratio 16 times):200% (Area ratio 4 times): A5 A3, A6 A4, B6 JIS B4 JIS
141% (Area ratio 2 times): A4 A3, A5 A4, A6 A5, B5 JIS B4 JIS,
B6 JIS B5 JIS
122%: F A3, A4 B4 JIS
115%: B4 JIS A3
93%:82%: F A4, B4 JIS A4
75%: B4 JISF4, B4 JISF
71% (Area ratio 1/2times): A3 A4, A4 A5
65%: A3F
50% (Area ratio 1/4times): A3 A5, F A5
25%:-
197
Appendix
Inch version
400% (Area ratio 16 times): 200% (Area ratio 4 times): 51/2" 81/2"11" 17"
155% (Area ratio 2 times): 51/2" 81/2"81/2" 14"
129%: 81/2" 11"11" 17"
121%: 81/2" 14"11" 17"
93%: 85%: F81/2" 11"
78%: 81/2" 14"81/2" 11"
73%: 11" 15"81/2" 11"
65%: 11" 17"81/2" 11"
50% (Area ratio 1/4times): 11" 17"51/2" 81/2"
25%: -
Zoom
The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25 - 400%.
You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or copy paper.
With some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will
appear on copies.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Size Magnification
Directional Size Magnification
When entering a percentage ratio, you can specify any value in the permitted range, regardless of original or copy paper size. However, depending
on settings and other conditions, part of the image may not be copied, or
margins will appear on copies.
When entering a size in mm, if the calculated ratio is over maximum or under minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted to within available range.
However, with some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will appear on copies.
198
Sort, Stack
Following shows the stackable paper sizes and the orientation.
Finisher SR5000:
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"KL, 12" 18", 13" 19"
Paper sizes and orientations that can be used in the Rotate Sort function are
A4KL, B5 JISKL and 81/2" 11"KL.
Following numbers of copied paper are stackable on the output tray. If the
number of copied paper exceeded the limits listed in the following table,
be sure to remove the copied paper once.
Sort
The following table shows you the numbers of copies that the tray can hold.
Remove copies from the tray when the maximum is exceeded.
Finisher SR5000 (upper tray)
Paper size
Number of copies
A4, 81/2" 11" or smaller
500 sheets
B4, 81/2" 14" or larger
250 sheets
Finisher SR5000 (shift tray)

Number of copies
A4K, B5 JISK, 81/2" 11"K
3000 sheets
A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, B5 JISL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,

81/2" 11"L
1500 sheets
12" 18", 13" 19"
1000 sheets
A5K, 51/2" 81/2"K
500 sheets
A5L, 51/2" 81/2"L
100 sheets
Paper weight is 80 g/m2 (20 lb.).

When using the Rotate Sort or Staple functions, the capacity may be reduced.
Staple
The following types of paper cannot be stapled:
Postcard
Translucent paper
OHP transparencies
Label paper (adhesive labels)
Curled paper
Paper of low stiffness
Paper of mixed sizes
In the following cases, copies will be delivered to the shift tray without stapling:
When the number of sheets for one set is over stapler capacity.
When memory reaches 0% during copying.
When using Double Copies, or [1 Sided1 Sided], [1 Sided2 Sided], [2
Sided1 Sided] or [2 Sided2 Sided]in Combine mode, select K original for
L and L original for K copy.
When using the Staple function [Staple: Left 2] or [Staple: Top 2] with the
Combine function [1 Sided1 Sided], [1 Sided2 Sided], [2 Sided1 Sided], [2
Sided2 Sided], or [Double Copies], select K paper for L original and L paper for K original.
199
Appendix
If you use the Auto Paper Select function in Mixed Size mode, the machine
selects the proper size of paper and staples it even if you place different sizes of originals. Set the size of paper you want to use in the paper tray beforehand. The sizes of the paper you can staple in Mixed Size mode are as
follows:
A3L and A4K
B4 JISL and B5 JISK
A4L and A5K
11" 17"L and 81/2" 11"K
81/2" 11"L and 51/2" 81/2"K
Paper sizes and orientations that can be used in the Staple function and the
stapler capacity are as follows:
Finisher SR5000
Paper sizes and orientation
Stapler capacity (sheets)
A3L, B4 JISL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L
50 sheets
A4KL, B5 JISKL, 81/2" 11"KL
100 sheets

Stapler capacity (sheets)
A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, B5 JISL, 12" 18", 11" 17"L,

81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"L
15 sheets
When stapling B4 JISL, A3L, Legal 81/2" 14"L, 11" 17"L, be sure to
extend the paper support plate of the finisher tray.
When the number of copies exceeds tray capacity, copying stops. If this
happens, remove copies from the tray, and then resume copying. The tray
capacity for the stapled sheets is as follows (paper weight: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.):
Finisher shift tray without Z-folding
Number of sheets
A3L, B4 JISL, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L
2- to 9-leaf binding: 150

10- to 50-leaf binding:
150 to 30
A4KL, B5 JISKL, 81/2" 11"KL
2- to 9-leaf binding: 150

10- to 100-leaf binding:
200 to 30
200
You cannot change stapling positions during copying.

When the original image is rotated, the staple orientation changes by 90.
When using [Staple: Slant], [Staple: Left 2], [Staple: Top 2] with Combine, Double copies or Auto Reduce / Enlarge function, the message Blank part
will appear. Check orientation. may appear depending on the orientation of originals and paper you placed. In this case, change the paper
orientation.
With certain stapling settings, you cannot use the Rotate function.
When [Staple: Center] is selected, copies are stapled using the saddle stitch
stapler, folded in half and then delivered.
When [Staple: Center] is selected with the Booklet or Magazine function,
copies are stapled using the saddle stitch stapler, folded like a magazine
and then delivered.
Punch
With certain Punch function settings, the Rotate function cannot be used.
Since punch holes are made in each copy, positions vary slightly.
Punchable paper sizes are as follows:
Punch unit type
2 holes type
3 holes type
Direction
Paper size
A3-A6, 11" 17"-51/2" 81/2"
A4-A5, 81/2" 11", 51/2" 81/2"
A3, B4 JIS, 11" 17"
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2" 11"
Z-fold
You cannot use the following copy paper with this function:
Special paper
Translucent paper
Letterhead
Thick paper
Tab stock
OHP transparencies
Postcards
Paper sizes that can be Z-folded are as follows:
Finisher upper tray/ shift tray
A3L, B4 JISL, A4L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"L
The number of Z-folded copies that can be stacked on the finisher trays are
as follows. When the number of copies exceeds capacity, remove them
from the trays.
Finisher upper tray/Finisher shift tray: 30 sheets
The paper sizes that can be stapled after being Z-folded are A3L, B4 JISL
and 11" 17"L.
201
Appendix
Even if you place different size originals in the ADF, appropriate size of
copy paper can be automatically selected and stapled using the Mixed Size
mode and Auto Paper Select function. Load the paper you want to use in
the paper trays beforehand. Paper sizes that can be stapled when using the
Mixed Size mode are as follows:
A3L and A4K
B4 JISL and B5 JISK
11" 17"L and 81/2" 11"K
ACC013S
Depending on the Z-fold settings, you may not be able to use Rotate Sort.
Even if you have selected [Face Up] for Eject Copy Face up/Down in Glass
Mode, the copies will be delivered face down.
Duplex
Following types of paper sizes and directions allow the double-side copy.
A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5L, 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L,
81/2" 11"KL
You cannot use the following copy paper with this function:
Paper of a size smaller than A5, 51/2" 81/2"
Translucent paper
OHP transparencies
Paper thicker than 105 g/m2, 28 lb.
Paper thinner than 64 g/m2, 17 lb.
Postcards
Tab stock
When an odd number of originals is placed in the ADF, the back of the last
page of copied paper is blank.
During copying, the image is shifted to allow for the binding margin.
Front and back image quality of copies may differ.
202
Combine
In this mode, the machine selects the reproduction ratio automatically.
This reproduction ratio depends on copy paper sizes and the number of
originals.
If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted to within available range. However, with some ratios, parts of the
image might not be copied.
You cannot use custom size paper.
If the orientation of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the
machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 to make copies properly.
If the number of originals placed is less than the number specified for combining, the last page segment is left blank as shown.
5
Booklet/Magazine
The machine sets the reproduction ratio automatically to meet the paper
size and copies the originals together onto the paper.
If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is automatically adjusted to within available range. However, with some ratios, parts of the
image might not be copied.
If the orientation of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the
machine will automatically rotate the image by 90 to make copies properly.
You cannot copy with originals different in size and orientation.
If the number of originals scanned is less than a multiple of 4, the last page
is copied blank.
In Magazine mode, the copying may take some time after scanning originals.
When the optional booklet finisher is installed, if you select [Staple: Center]
in Magazine mode, the machine staples and folds the paper in the center,
then delivers the paper folded.
Image Repeat
Depending on the paper size, ratio, and orientation, parts of repeated images may not be copied.
Centering
Though the original is set to a different orientation from the paper loaded,
the machine will not rotate the image by 90 (Rotate copy).
203
Appendix
Erase
The width of the erased margin varies depending on the reproduction ratio.
If the size of the original is different from sizes listed in the following chart,
the erased margin might be shifted:
Metric version
Exposure glass: A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5L
ADF: A3L, B4 JISL, A4KL, B5 JISKL, A5KL, A5KL
Inch version
Exposure glass: 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL
ADF: 11" 17"L, 81/2" 14"L, 81/2" 11"KL, 51/2" 81/2"L
By combining Erase Inside 1 - Erase Inside 5, you can erase up to 5 areas at the same time.
The numbers appear to overlap the copied image in some cases.
Margin Adjustment
If you set a binding margin that is too wide, part of the image may not be
copied.
When making copies in the Combine mode, the binding margin is added
to the copies after the combination is finished.
Preset Stamp
You can change the size and density of the stamp with User Tools. Depending on the setting, density may change.
Depending on paper size, if you change the stamp size, parts of the stamp
might not be printed.
When you use this function with the Magazine or Booklet function, you
can print the stamp only on the first page.
Date Stamp
When using Combine mode, the date stamp is printed as follows:
With the Combine function
AMG026S
With the Magazine or Booklet function
AMG027S
204
Page Numbering
When page numbering is used with Combine mode, page numbers are
printed as follows:
Page Numbering per original:
With 1 Sided/2 Sided using the Combine function
GCANPE0E
With the Magazine or Booklet function
5
GCANPE1E
Page Numbering per copy:

With 1 Sided/2 Sided using the Combine function
GCANPE2E
If you combine this function with the Duplex (Top to Top) function and select [P1,P2...] or [1/5,2/5...], page numbers on the back are printed as follows:
GCSTMPBE
A
B
Front
Back
Stamp Text
Certain stamp positions can cause text to disappear.
205
Appendix
Front Cover, Front/Back Cover

If Blank mode is selected, the cover is not be counted as a copy.
Front and back covers are two-sided copied depending on the settings
made in Display Time in Cover Sheet Tray of User Tools (System Settings).
At Mode Selected Depends on the setting done from Cover Sheet
Tray.
Full Time Depends on the setting done from Paper Type.
See Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide.
Designate
When [Combine (1 Sided2 Sided)] has been selected, specified pages will always be copied on the front of copies, as in Chapters mode.
In Tray Paper Settings, if you selected [At Mode Selected] for [Display Time],
the machine refers to the settings in Tray Paper Settings to ascertain
whether the front and back covers are copied one-sided or two-sided. If
you selected [Full Time] for [Display Time], the machine refers to the settings
in Paper Type to ascertain whether the front and back covers are copied
one-sided or two-sided. See Tray Paper Settings, General Settings
Guide.
If Blank mode is selected, the designate sheet is not counted as a copy.
Slip sheet
Tab stock are possible to use as slip sheets.
If you do not copy onto slip sheets, they are excluded from the number of
copies counted.
206
Connect Copy
Important
Do not use the connecting cable with other equipment.
Always turn off the main power of the main and sub-machines when before disconnecting the cable. Otherwise it might lead to malfunctioning of
the two machines.
You can store on a program whether or not to use Connect Copy.
Select the copy paper using the main machine.
When [Connect Copy] is pressed, only the paper trays common to both
machines will be displayed. The other paper trays appear faded out and
cannot be selected.
When two or more trays hold the desired paper size, the paper tray will
be selected according to the Paper Tray Priority settings made on the respective machine. See Tray Paper Settings, General Settings Guide.
If the {Clear Modes} key is pressed on the main machine while you are making settings, Connect Copy will be cancelled.
Even if the sub-machine is in Energy Saver mode, the main machine can
still connect to make copies.
When an Interrupt job on the sub-machine has finished, press the {Interrupt} key.
Connect Copy jobs are displayed on the Job List of the sub-machine. However, they cannot be deleted from the sub-machine.
In Connect Copy, both machines follow the user authentication settings of
the main machine.
You cannot manage the number of copies according to machine. The
number of copies is shown as a total of the two machines, and is monitored on the main machine
Even if user codes are set and you enter a user code before using the
sub-machine, you cannot manage the number of copies made on the
sub-machine.
If user codes are set on only the sub-machine, you need not enter a user
code in order to use the sub-machine for Connect Copy. In this case, you
cannot manage the number of copies according to user.
207
INDEX
C
1 Sided 16 Pages Combine 2 Side, 83
1 Sided 2 Sides, 76
1 Sided Booklet, 88
1 Sided Magazine, 88
2 Sided 1 Page Combine 1 Side, 80
2 Sided 1 Sided, 86
2 Sided 2 Sided, 76
2 Sided Booklet, 88
3 Edges Full Bleed, 74
A
Adjusting Copy Image Density, 49
Administrator Tools, 6
Auto image density, 49
Auto Off, 159
Auto Paper Select, 52, 53
Auto Reduce/Enlarge, 58, 197
Auto Reset when using Connect Copy, 159
Auto Start, 34
B
Background Numbering, 106, 197
Basic Procedure, 29
Batch mode, 21
Before You Start, 151
Binding margin, 97
Blank Slip Sheets, 138
Book 1 Sided, 86
Book 2 Sided, 88
Booklet, 88
Booklet/Magazine, vi, xi, 88, 197
Border Erase, 98, 100, 101, 102, 103
208
Center, 102, 103, 130

Center/Border Erase, 98, 102, 103
Center Erase, 98
Centering, 130, 197
Changing a Stored Program, 145
Changing Number of Print Copies
while Printing is in Progress, 186
Changing the Number of Sets, 66
Changing the order of jobs, 40
Changing the stamp position, 126
Changing User Name, File Name or
Password of a Stored Document, 180
Chapters, 135
Checking Job History, 42
Checking jobs in the print queue, 39
Checking the Details of a Stored Document, 181
Check the copy, 65
Combine, 197
Combined auto and
manual image density, 49, 50
Combining Files, 189
Connect Copy, 149, 150, 154, 158, 164,
165, 166, 197
Connect Copy: Job Preset, 166, 167, 168
Connect Copy Display Panel, 152
Connect Copy Job Flow, 164
Copier Functions, 49, 169
Copy Face Up, 141
Copying, 29
Copying 2-Sided Pages, xii
Copying from the multi bypass tray, 43
Copying onto OHP Transparencies, 34
Copying onto Special Paper, 48
Copying onto Tab Stock, 31
Copying onto Thin Paper, 34
Copying Originals Such as Books, xi
Copying Stored Documents Using
Connect Copy, 160
Covers, 132
Create Margin function, 56
Creep Adjustment, 93
Custom size, 47
Custom sizes, 26
D
Date, 118, 119
Date Stamp, 116, 197
Default, 147
Deleting a Document, 192
Deleting a job, 37
Deleting a Program, 146
Deleting jobs, 41
Deleting Pages, 190
Density, 109
Designate, 134, 197
Designation Sheet Copy, 136
Detect, 14
Different sizes, 23
Directional Magnification, 60, 61
Directional Size Magnification (mm), 62
Display, 4
Displaying a Document in Document
Server with Web Image Monitor, 193
Display panel of the sub-machine, 154
Document Server Display, 170
Double Copies, 128
Downloading Stored Documents, 194
Duplex, iii, 76, 197
E
Edit, 6
Edit File, 189
Erase, 98, 197
Exiting Connect Copy, 159
F
First printing number, 122, 123, 124
First printing page, 122, 123, 124
Format of date, 118
Front & Back 2 Sided, 88
Front/Back Covers, 132
Front cover, 132
Front Cover, Front/Back Cover, 197
Function Compatibility, 195
G
General Features, 6
Generation Copy, 51
H
Holding print jobs, 41
How to fold, 88
How to fold and unfold copies to
make a booklet, 88
How to fold and unfold copies to
make a magazine, 88
How to unfold, 88
I
Image density, 49
Image Repeat, 127, 197
Initial Display, 147
Input / Output, 6
Inserting Documents, 190
Inside Erase, 104
Interrupt Copy, 30, 150
Interrupting Printing, 185
Invert, 131
J
Job List, 38
Job List screen, 38
Job Preset, 35
Job Preset display, 35
K
Key Color, 5
L
Last Number, 122, 123
Left Original Beeper, 31
M
Machine Types and Options, 150
Magazine, 88
Manual image density, 50
Manual Paper Select, 53
Map, 51
Margin Adjustment, 97, 197
Missing image area, 15
Mix 1 & 2 Sided, 94
Mixed size mode, 23, 197
Multi bypass tray, 46, 47
Multi Bypass Tray Copy, 197
209
N
Notice, 1
Number keys, 57, 61
O
One-Sided Combine, ix, 80
onto 1-Sided Pages, xii
Option, 3
Order of Copy Output, 158
Orientation, 110
Original, 11
Original Orientation, 16
Original orientation, 69, 107, 110, 116, 119
Original orientation and completed copies, 76
Original orientation position, 73
Originals, 11, 15
Originals and copy orientation, 79
Original size, 25
Outside Erase, 105
P
Page Numbering, 119, 122, 123, 124, 197
Pale, 51
Photo, 51
Placing, 11
Placing Originals, 16
Placing Originals in the
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass, 19
Position, 69, 110
Positive/Negative, 131
Preset Enlarge/Reduce, 197
Preset Reduce/Enlarge, 54
Preset Stamp, 107, 109, 197
Preview Display, 172
Printer Functions, 169
Printing a Specified Page, 188
Printing a Specified Range, 188
Printing a Stored Document, 184
Printing the First Page, 187
Program, 113, 147
Programs, 144
Punch, 72
Punch holes, 72
210
R
Ratio, 57
Recalling a Program, 146
Regular sizes, 25
Repeat, 127
Revers, 131
Reverse orientation, 18
Rotate Sort, 64
S
SADF, 22
SADF mode, 22
Sample copy, 65
Sample Print, 186
Scanner Functions, 169
Scanning Position, 95
Searching for a Stored Document, 182
Selecting Copy Paper, 52
Separation, 67
Series Copies, 86
Setting the tab stock in the multi bypass tray, 45
Shift tray off in sort/stack, 67
Simplified Display, 171
Simplified display, 5
Simplified Display key, 5
Size, 109
Size Magnification, 59, 197
Sizes, 14
Sizes and Weights of
Recommended Originals, 11
Sizes Detectable, 13
Slip Sheet, 197
Slip Sheets, 139
Sort, 64, 197
Specified Area Repeat, 127
Stack, 68, 197
Stamp, 6
Stamp position, 107, 109, 110, 112, 116,
119, 122
Stamp Text, 125, 197
Staple, 69, 197
Stapler, 69
Storing a Program, 144
Storing Data, 174
Storing Originals in the Document Server, 142
Symbols, 2
T
Tab stock, 31
Text, 51
Text/Photo, 51
Thin mode, 24
Thin Paper, 24
To change a file name, 178
To change job contents after checking, 36
To check job contents, 36
To delete a job after checking its contents, 37
To delete the user stamp, 115
To register or change a
user name, 176, 177, 178
To search by file name, 182
To search by user name, 183
To set or change a Password, 179
Two-Sided Combine, 83
U
User Stamp, 110, 112, 113, 115
Using Connect Copy, 155
Using Job Preset in Connect Copy, 162
Using the Document Server, 174
Using the idle machine
as the main machine, 165
Using the machine currently copying
as the main machine, 166
Using the Z-fold Support Tray, 75
V
Various sizes, 23
W
What You Can Do with This Machine, iii
When both machines are copying the
same number of originals, 167
When Both Machines are in Use, 166
When copying onto Regular Size Paper, 46
When memory is full, 66
When no name is registered to the
Address Book, 178
When one machines is copying a
larger number of originals, 168
When One of the Two Machines is Idle, 164
When using a user name
not registered to the Address Book, 177
When using a user name
registered to the Address Book, 176
Whole Area Repeat, 127
Z
Z-fold, 75, 197
Z-folding Copies, 76
Z-fold positions, 76
Zoom, 56, 197
211
212
EN
USA
B235-7657
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
PostScript, Acrobat are registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Copyright 2005
Operating Instructions Copy/Document Server Reference
EN USA B235-7657

Mo MP9000

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Mo MP9000

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Operating Instructions

About This Machine

Type 1: 90 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" 11"K)

Type 2: 110 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" 11"K)

Type 3: 135 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" 11"K)

Manuals for This Machine

About This Machine

Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the

DeskTopBinder Lite *1 and DeskTopBinder Professional

ScanRouter EX Professional *1 and ScanRouter EX En- the ScanRouter delivery software

What You Can Do with This Machine

Copier, Printer, and Scanner Functions

Utilizing Stored Documents

Connecting Two Machines for Copying

Using the Scanner in a Network Environment

Administrating the Machine/Protecting Documents (Security

Monitoring the Machine Via Computer

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, or a

Preventing an Unauthorized Copy

Notice to Users in EEA Countries

How to Read This Manual

Safety During Operation

Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION

ENERGY STAR Program

(A4K, 81/2" 11"K)

(A4K, 81/2" 11"K)

(A4K, 81/2" 11"K)

Place originals face down here.

Open to access the inside of the machine.

2. Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

7. Paper tray (tray 1-3)

Load a stack of originals here. They will

Load paper here.

If the machine does not operate after

See Control Panel.

8. Main power switch

This indicator lights when you press the

10. Suspend/Resume switch

Press this switch to turn the power on

Open to change the toner container.

5. A3/11" 17" tray unit

Sorts, stacks, staples and punches copies.

You can load A3L or 11" 17"L paper

6. Multi bypass tray (Tray 7)

2. Booklet Finisher BK5000

Use when copying or printing onto a

The saddle stitch function can staple the

7. Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide

8. Large Capacity Tray (LCT)

Machine status is described by this indicator. By default, this indicator is turned

Press this switch to turn the power on

Off: The main power switch is turned

4. {Simplified Display} key

5. {Language Selection} key

17. Data In indicator (printer mode)

Press to make interrupt copies during a

Lights up when data is coming from the

7. {Energy Saver} key

Press to shift to and from Low Power mode.

Calls up registered functions.

8. {Clear Modes} key

These show the status of the functions.